20631681-Lighting-Handbook-A-Lot-of-Good-Examples-for-Interior-Lighting.pdf
Short Description
Download 20631681-Lighting-Handbook-A-Lot-of-Good-Examples-for-Interior-Lighting.pdf...
Description
Lighting Design · Light and interiors
Catalogues The current TRILUX product portfolio includes interior luminaires, exterior luminaires and installation systems for the hospital sector. Corresponding product information can be ordered by fax and telephone or online at www.trilux.de.
Interior lighting The TRILUX catalogue “Lighting Design · Light and interiors” at hand contains the complete range of innovative and tried-and-tested luminaires for interior lighting.
Exterior lighting In order to consider and document the complex technical and mechanical parameters of various exterior lighting systems, individual brochures give detailed information on these luminaire series.
Medical technology Light and installation systems for light and normal care, for intensive care areas and clean rooms are featured in several catalogues and brochures.
Lighting planning The TRILUX lighting design software TX-WIN is an easyto-operate tool which enables the correct and rapid planning on site of interior lighting installations, street lighting and the lighting of squares.
Light.
Positive light influences Good lighting is the prerequisite for harmonious and motivating surroundings, improving people’s wellbeing and promoting the individual, to greater things.
See. Perceive. Experience.
1
Contents
Downlights and circular luminaires Programme review Downlights 290···, 293··· Downlights 1280···, 1281··· Recessed circular luminaires 129···, 367··· Circular luminaires PSH, PSG High-performance suspended luminaires ROT, ROS, ROD, ROB
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA Programme review Spotlights for low-voltage halogen lamps Spotlights for mains-voltage halogen lamps Spotlights for high-pressure discharge lamps 3-phase voltage tracks
Tubular track system T·200 Programme review Spotlight modules 595··· Positionable modules 596··· Translucent modules 597··· Louvre luminaires 593···, 594··· Diffuser luminaires 333···
Bidirectional office lighting system DiVisio Programme review General lighting Task area lighting DIALOG for workstation and ambient lighting Programme review Individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP Free-standing workstation luminaires TASK Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL Wall-mounted ambient luminaires
16 19 33 39 43 49
58 62 62 64 68
72 80 92 96 98 262
106 112 114 118 124 126 128 132
Wall-mounted luminaires Programme review 130 DIALOG WALL-I 132 DIALOG WALL-II 134 ES 50··· 136 4022··· 138 Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires Programme review 140 CENERA, 3604··· 142 362··· 144 Surface-mounted and suspended louvre luminaires Programme review 152 526··· 154 504···, 505··· 170 598···, 599··· 184 500··· 196 152··· 210 1510··· 222
Recessed louvre luminaires Programme review 368···, 369··· 390···, 391··· 136···, 236··· 362···
2
230 234 244 248 144
Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires Programme review 333··· 330···, 331···, 332··· 1330 F··· 740··· 654···, 664···, 665···, 717··· CENTA-S
260 262 266 270 276 278 302
Recessed diffuser luminaires Programme review 4401··· 3331··· 136··· PA/OA, 236··· PA/OA
282 284 262 256
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires Programme review ARAGON 713···, 717··· 1715N··· 719··· Trunking 190··· CENTA-S WINLIGHT-Q
286 288 294 296 298 300 302 422
Weather-proof recessed luminaires Programme review 739··· 720···P, 721···P 720···T, 721···T 722···, 723··· 2911··· 4401···
304 306 308 310 312 316 284
Sports hall luminaires Programme review 506··· 366···, 376··· Trunking 110N WINLIGHT-Q
320 322 326 328 422
Continuous-line luminaires, batten luminaires, WINLIGHT-Q Programme review Rapid-mounting, continuous-line system DELTA ... Combinations of base units and optical accessories Rapid-mounting, continuous-line system E-LINE ... Combinations of reflectors and optical accessories 796··· 1615···, 6141··· WINLIGHT-Q
334 336 342 368 372 414 418 422
Accessories, technical information Emergency lighting Intelligent lighting management LIGHTGATE Lighting controller LR 803 Technical information Multi-Lamp electronic control gear, ballasts Starters Photometric planning Lamp characteristics Reference index
428 431 434 435 436 439 440 444 448
3
The World-Wide Web The TRILUX virtual portal is located at www.trilux.de or www.trilux.co.uk where the latest information on TRILUX and its products can be obtained around the clock,
See. Perceive. Experience.
CD-ROM The TRILUX CD turns your computer into a self-supporting tool for the extensive planning of lighting installations. The CD contains everything lighting specialists require, e.g. electronic product data, photometric luminaire data as well as several lighting planning and ROI calculation programs.
The relevance of this medium is guaranteed by means of CD updates featuring the latest product and software developments.
E-Mails TRILUX
world-wide. Downloading new software and current data for photometric calculations is just one of the many possibilities this website has to offer. Designer light
Light can also be experienced in our virtual light studio, allowing the visitor to interactively explore light effects, light control, light situations and light spaces.
Service
Products
News
Contact
Sitemap
Communication and information New ideas for future-fair lighting solutions can only arise by exchanging views with light users, designers and architects. Bearing this in mind, national and international lighting trade fairs are a logical communication platform for TRILUX. Even long before possible projects are discussed we attach great importance to an intensive and constant dialogue with all participants, e.g. in our light information centre at our headquarters in Germany or during seminars and presentation shows world-wide.
Beyond that, TRILUX defines active partnership as comprehensive consultation and customer-specific service at all project levels, from planning and commencement of operation up to after-salessupport. This includes design and development consultancy, to ensure that your project is solved as such, and not from a range of compromises! As a competent partner, the TRILUX field service team will gladly answer all your lighting questions.
www.trilux.de 5
TRILUX headquarters Arnsberg/Germany At the headquarters, administration, client information centre, luminaire production and a fully automatic highbay warehouse are brought together on a 100 000 m2 site. Here, our development engineers research lighting solutions of tomorrow by using progressive means.
The World of TRILUX
6
New developments are simulated, prototypes are tested and the high quality of the production is routinely check-tested in photometrical, electromechanical and acoustic laboratories. The light information centre – with integrated showrooms allowing to experience various lighting effects – is an ideal platform for the intensive exchange of views.
TRILUX Area 2 Arnsberg/Germany Area 2 houses the development and production of medical supply units for normal or intensive care. In addition to the actual product portfolio this TRILUX branch also offers extensive planning services ranging from design engineering up to CAD realisation drawings.
CETEK S.A.S. Clermont-Ferrand/France The production site CETEK S.A.S. in Clermont-Ferrand in France stands for the Pan-European commitment of the TRILUX group. Line optimisation for key product ranges offers us the chance to improve efficiency with “segment-oriented” production.
ZALUX S.A. Zaragoza/Spain The production range of ZALUX S.A. in Zaragoza/ Spain – the TRILUX group plant which is specially adjusted to the production of plastic – is mainly characterised by weather-proof luminaires and the corresponding components.
TEL TRILUX ELECTRONICS & LUMINAIRES INC. Manila/Philippines With TEL – TRILUX ELECTRONICS & LUMINAIRES – TRILUX is also present in the East-Asian market. At this site, production is mainly concentrated on luminaires for the Far-East and electronic lighting components.
The international identity of TRILUX is characterised by consultation competence thanks to local support centres and short-term availability of market-specific products. Sales branches and production sites all around the world underline the global vision of TRILUX.
7
“I can’t understand why people are frightened by new ideas. I’m frightened of old ones.” John Cage
The targetted deployment of light activates, motivates, offers visual comfort and puts the built environment into the right light. When planning an environment, the conception of artificial lighting – compatible with the architectural objectives – is of crucial importance.
Prestigious lighting planning featuring architecture-compatible light effects requires planning competence. CALIS – (Computer Aided Light Simulation) is a stateof-the-art planning tool paving the way from a creative light idea to a suitable technical lighting solution.
CALIS represents the TRILUX concept developed to visualise these requirements. Realised by highly-specialised designers, the program delivers, as stills or animations, the first, 3D-based impressions about the interplay of architecture and light, even during the design stages.
Photometric laboratory TRILUX optics are developed for the production stage in interactive processes by means of computer simulations and measurements on the goniophotometer or on the rotating mirror goniophotometer. Tests on the precision photometer bench supply decisive elements for the material selection. Close co-operation with all major lamp manufacturers, and a multi-source philosophy underline the objectivity of our research.
10
Product developments for better light
The solution of lighting tasks is the result of many exactly harmonised individual steps. Based on a differentiated requirement profile, photometric, electromechanical, ergonomical and architectural aspects have to be considered during development and construction.
An application-conform product with maximum effect is the major goal that should always be reached.
An exemplary solution is CLASSICA – the TRILUX system for well-aimed and accentuated lighting.
The elliptical form in classical retro design gives CLASSICA an unmistakable originality.
CLASSICA offers a wide range of technical characteristics which turn the product into a problem solver for accentuated lighting.
11
A star-spangled sky for the European Parliament in Strasbourg/France
The power of emotion, illuminated TRILUX – Competent partner for project solutions Apart from an extensive standard portfolio of interior luminaires, exterior luminaires and products for the hospital sector, TRILUX offers competent and expert advise in project planning. In close co-operation with building owners and architects, special solutions for the project-specific requirements as to design and photometrics are developed. Put us to the test! European Parliament Strasbourg/France* TRILUX lights up the European Parliament in Strasbourg: The plenary assembly hall of this impressive architectural complex has been equipped with thousands of illuminated reflectors which conjure a fascinating starspangled sky. Taking into account both the architectural and the photometric concept of this prestigious building, a bright and lightflooded environment had to be realised. Since the plenary assembly hall was not equipped with any windows, TRILUX designed a state-ofthe-art customised solution: 3 000 fluorescent lamps, working behind motoradjustable opal glass lamellas, create a perfect illusion of daylight incidence. An ideal synchronisation with the star-spangled sky simulates an impressive day and night atmosphere. In the total complex, a 220 000 m2 working plane has been equipped with approx. 48 000 luminous points, following the concept of the renowned lighting designer Georges Berne.
*Conception: A.S.E. Building owner: SERS
12
Atatürk International Airport Istanbul/Turkey The 400 000 m2 large terminal with an annual passenger volume of over 20 million was planned in intensive cooperation with the architectural groups Kanta˛si (Turkey) and GMV (Great Britain), resulting in a lighting design oriented around key principles such as customer specialisation, energy efficiency and environmental compatibility. The 11 m high sloped pyramidal ceilings were illuminated by approx. 1000 uplighters, equipped with 400 W metal halide lamps, 200 W auxiliary mains lamps and state-of-the-art electronic control systems, achieving more than 300 lx on the working plane. This project represents the crème de la crème in customising – over 70 % of the 60 000 luminaires were adapted and designed for our clients’ requirements.
Atatürk International Airport in Istanbul/Turkey: Dynamic lighting for an architectural star-performance
13
For reflection ...
Security lock The spring-tensioned contact clips of TRILUX louvres minimise mounting and maintenance costs. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. The louvre can be lowered and hung from either side for maintenance purposes.
Louvre production The basic material for TRILUX louvres is processed in modern production sites by means of procedures which are tested in conformance with ISO 9001. All aluminium reflectors for downlights and suspended circular luminaires are surface-coated (postanodised). Louvres RWV, RWX, RSV Louvres with highly-reflective, white surface RWV, hybrid louvres as a combination of white cross blades and highly-reflective lateral reflectors RWX as well as specular louvres with concave-profiled cross blades RSV have versatile applications, e.g. in offices, schools, sales areas and showrooms.
Parabolic louvres RPV, RPR, RSX, RPX Louvres with parabolic longitudinal and transverse reflectors shine out thanks to practice-oriented light distribution, high rentability as well as luminance limitation required for areas with normal DSE usage. The monitors can be arranged towards the luminaires at will when using RPR, RSX and RPX louvres which are characterised by their all-round luminance limitation.
14
The value of specular louvres is determined by their durability and photometric characteristics. TRILUX louvres and reflectors in aluminium are manufactured according to three different manufacturing procedures, each with specific characteristics: Anodised louvres RSV, RMV, RPV, RPR Louvres made of anodised aluminium basic material are ageing-resistant and can be easily cleaned and maintained.
Reflection-intensified aluminium RSX, RPX Reflection-intensified louvre surfaces are characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an exactly defined thickness. By this means, an outstanding total reflection is created which contributes decisively to high working efficiencies of luminaires. RSX and RPX louvres are specially conceived for T5 lamps.
Post-anodised reflectors Post-anodised aluminium reflectors are polished, anodised and hot-sealed in the totally automatic TRILUX galvanic station as one unit after all mechanical operations on it have been completed. Important features are: long-time stable reflection characteristics, insensitivity to soiling and no disturbing iridescence phenomena.
Plastic reflectors Purity aluminium – aluminised in high-vacuum on PC reflectors – creates the maximum in directed reflection. The photometrically efficient layer is protected by a UV stabilised coating against oxidation.
... and transmission
Diffuser luminaires enable extended maintenance intervals thanks to constant dust protection of the photometrically effective system components. Beyond that they also offer mechanical protection of the lamps. TRILUX luminaire diffusers are made of non-yellowing polymethylmethacrylate PMMA (PLEXIGLAS) in clear, opal or translucent version.
Diffusers in unbreakable polycarbonate PC are used for weather-proof luminaires which have to meet increased mechanical requirements.
Opal diffusers Opal diffusers in PMMA or PC enable the adaptation of the lighting installation to the architectural design, e.g. in case of surrounding white ceiling panels. Translucent diffusers Contrary to pigmented material, PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclusions made of other polymerised methacrylates with a differing refractive index ensures virtually loss-free light diffusion.
Prismatic diffusers Diffusers in PMMA or PC with photometrically effective prisms direct the light primarily onto the working plane. In combination with specular reflectors which are adjusted to the lamp geometry, they realise high working efficiencies and standard-conform glare limitation.
Diffuser production Decades of experience in the processing of plastics and regular laboratory tests for quality assurance in the current production guarantee the long service life of TRILUX luminaire diffusers.
PMMA and PC TRILUX diffusers made of PC or PMMA are mechanically stable and torsionally rigid. However, in the unlikely case of damages, replacement diffusers are available at least 10 years after a luminaire model is discontinued.
With additional specular reflectors Increased working efficiencies and improved glare limitation are realised by computer-optimised specular reflectors within the diffuser luminaires. The reflectors of the high-quality series 333··· are made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a particularly high total reflection.
15
Circular luminaires
Luminaires in circular shape offer a wide planning scope thanks to their non-directional form. The TRILUX range of circular luminaires includes downlights, double-reflection systems and suspended luminaires with PEXIGLAS or aluminium reflectors.
290···, 293··· 290··· or 293··· series downlights for recess openings offer an excellent all-round package. The basic versions can be equipped with a wide range of modular design accessories. All items are retro-fit, meaning that later adaptations are possible with no additional hassle! Page 20
16
1280···, 1281··· 128··· downlights convince with their rapid installation by means of the tool-free spring mechanism. Different reflector versions with colouradapted or contrast-forming bezel rings offer a wide planning scope.
129···, 367··· The 367··· series represents a non-directional recessed luminaire system with radial specular louvres. A radial louvre with the same construction principle also characterises the design of the smaller 129··· versions.
PSH, PSG PSH or PSG circular luminaires with double-reflection system are striking light ornaments for surface, recess and suspended mounting. All luminaires of this series share the same convincing optical principle.
ROT, ROS These high-performance suspended luminaires are predestined for use in representative areas. The optical systems consist of transparent refraction reflectors with a well-balanced indirect component or of purely direct parabolic reflectors.
ROD, ROB Rooms with different ceiling heights can be illuminated by these rotationally symmetrical suspended luminaires. The reflectors are facetted in the lower section. Concentric profiled prisms of the ROB version wash the ceiling area in a favourable light.
Page 34
Page 40
Page 44
Page 50
Page 54
17
18
290···, 293···
The 29··· series represents downlights in two sizes for recess openings of ¶ 224 mm or ¶ 138 mm. Both sizes are optionally available with smooth or facetted reflectors. All versions are equipped with economic compact fluorescent lamps TCD or TCT. HIT options are available on request.
290··· Accessories are fixed to the functional slot of the 290··· basic downlights. The wide range of decorative accessories consists of spherical bezel rings, protective covers, Fresnel lenses as well as decor disks or conical lenses.
293··· Analogous to the construction principle of the 290··· series, 293··· compact downlights can also be equipped with complementary accessories. Decor disks or conical lenses are available.
291··· 291··· downlights in IP 54 allround are perfectly suitable for the lighting of damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. This series is described in section “Weather-proof luminaires”.
Page 20
Page 24
Page 316
19
Downlights with smooth reflector or specular facetted reflector
Application Sales areas, reception halls, corridors, conference rooms, hotels, restaurants and residential areas. Optical system Highly-specular reflector, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Safe retention by means of screwed plug providing earth continuity. With smooth reflector. ···B··· With facetted specular reflector. Luminaire body Sheet steel, galvanised, with bezel ring made of die-cast zinc. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim. Ceiling recess mounting by means of rapid-mounting springs. ···C··· Chrome bezel ring. ···W··· White bezel ring.
Reference 2901 W/TCD13 2901 W/TCD18 2901 W/TCT26 2902 W/TCD13 2902 W/TCD18 2902 W/TCT26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg
Reference
1.7 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.9
2901 C/TCD13 2901 C/TCD18 2901 C/TCT26 2902 C/TCD13 2902 C/TCD18 2902 C/TCT26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg 1.7 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.9
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief systems for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 2901 W/TCD13 E.
Indications Page Equipment accessories 26 Recess mounting accessories 31 Downlights IP 54 316 Lamp characteristics 444
20
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2001
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2001
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ3
A wide range of accessories for the 29··· series downlights, including decor disks and conical lenses, allows adaptation to many different architectural requirements. All decorative accessories can also be attached after installation.
Reference 2901 W-B/TCD13 2901 W-B/TCD18 2901 W-B/TCT26 2902 W-B/TCD13 2902 W-B/TCD18 2902 W-B/TCT26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg
Reference
1.7 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.9
2901 C-B/TCD13 2901 C-B/TCD18 2901 C-B/TCT26 2902 C-B/TCD13 2902 C-B/TCD18 2902 C-B/TCT26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-T26/GX24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg 1.7 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.9
652d Degree of protection IP 20 Degree of protection in closed ceiling systems underside IP 23 Degree of protection combined with ···CA, ···WA, ···FS, ···FT underside IP 44
Data table no. 2001 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.8 5.3 6.7 8.1 9.4 12 15 22 29
4.4 5.8 7.2 8.8 10 13 16 23 30
7.5 11 13 16 19 25 30 44 58
8.8 12 15 18 20 26 31 46 60
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2001
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2001
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 2.0 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
Exterior applications 29··· series downlights are a predestined design element for representative entrance areas. 29··· downlights in IP 54 share the same architectural design as the IP 20 versions and are suitable for use in covered exterior areas, protected against moisture and the intrusion of insects (see page 316).
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2901···/TCD13 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT) 2901···/TCD18 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT) 2901···/TCT26 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT) 2902···/TCD13 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT) 2902···/TCD18 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT) 2902···/TCT26 + 02900 DS(CS. WS) + 02900 KS(KT)
1.19 1.30 1.33 1.00 1.11 1.09 0.62 0.69 0.66 0.69 0.83 0.81 0.57 0.74 0.74 0.35 0.40 0.38
0.79 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.63 0.64 0.75 0.68 0.70 0.67 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.49 0.49 0.67 0.58 0.61
0.79 0.67 0.65 0.70 0.59 0.60 0.75 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.56 0.57 0.62 0.46 0.46 0.67 0.55 0.57
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.05 0.05 0.00 0.04 0.04 0.00 0.04 0.04 0.00 0.04 0.04 0.00 0.03 0.03 0.00 0.03 0.03
Technical information see page 440.
21
∑
Downlights with smooth reflector or specular facetted reflector, suitable for DSE applications
Application Sales areas, reception halls, corridors, conference rooms, hotels, restaurants and residential areas. Suitable for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Highly-specular reflector, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65°, thus corresponding fully to LG 3, Cat. II. Safe retention by means of screwed plug providing earth continuity. With smooth reflector. ···B··· With facetted specular reflector. Luminaire body Sheet steel, galvanised, with bezel ring made of die-cast zinc. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim. Ceiling recess mounting by means of rapid-mounting springs. ···C··· Chrome bezel ring. ···W··· White bezel ring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief systems for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
Reference 2901 W/TCD18 CAT2 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 2902 W/TCD18 CAT2 2902 W/TCD26 CAT2
TC-D(EL)
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
C 0 - C 180
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 2901 W/TCD26 CAT2 E.
Indications Page Equipment accessories 26 Recess mounting accessories 31 Downlights IP 54 316 Lamp characteristics 444
22
Cover accessories prevent mechanically damaged lamps from falling down. The transparent float glass covers – safely retained in the spherical bezel ring – are fixed without using tools.
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
Data table No. 0307
≈kg
Reference
1.7 2.1 2.1 2.8
2901 C/TCD18 CAT2 2901 C/TCD26 CAT2 2902 C/TCD18 CAT2 2902 C/TCD26 CAT2
TC-D(EL)
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
C 0 - C 180
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
Data table No. 0307
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Luminance limitation Special downlight reflectors with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° all-round were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
≈kg 1.7 2.1 2.1 2.8
Reference 2901 W-B/TCD18 CAT2 2901 W-B/TCD26 CAT2 2902 W-B/TCD18 CAT2 2902 W-B/TCD26 CAT2
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg
Reference
1.7 2.1 2.1 2.8
2901 C-B/TCD18 CAT2 2901 C-B/TCD26 CAT2 2902 C-B/TCD18 CAT2 2902 C-B/TCD26 CAT2
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224 ¶ 224
≈kg 1.7 2.1 2.1 2.8
652d Degree of protection IP 20 Degree of protection in closed ceiling systems underside IP 23 Degree of protection combined with ···CA, ···WA, underside IP 44
Data table no. 0307 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
5.0 6.9 8.8 11 12 17 20 29 38
5.8 7.8 9.6 12 13 18 21 30 39
10 14 18 21 25 35 40 58 76
12 16 19 23 26 36 42 60 78
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL)
Data table No. 0307
C 0 - C 180
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0307
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
fi
¥ Mechanical glare limitation The luminance limitation necessary for DSE workplaces assures specific light guiding thanks to highly-specular, post-anodised reflector surfaces and efficient lamp shielding.
High-power performance For ceilings and special lighting effects in interior areas, a metal halide version of 2901··· series downlights is available. Lamps with up to 150 W and 14 000 lumens can be utilised, guaranteeing the right light for every situation.
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2901···/TCD18 CAT2 2901···/TCD26 CAT2 2902···/TCD18 CAT2 2902···/TCD26 CAT2
1.00 0.68 0.52 0.38
0.53 0.52 0.51 0.47
0.53 0.52 0.51 0.47
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
23
Compact downlights with smooth reflector or specular facetted reflector
Application Reception halls, corridors, conference rooms, canteens, lounges, hotels, restaurants and residential areas. Optical system Highly-specular reflector, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Safe retention by means of screwed plug providing earth continuity. With smooth reflector. ···B··· With facetted specular reflector. Luminaire body Sheet steel, galvanised, with bezel ring made of polycarbonate. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim. Easy ceiling recess mounting by means of rapid-mounting springs. ···C··· Chrome bezel ring. ···W··· White bezel ring.
Reference 2931 W/TCD10
Lamps/socket Recess W opening mm 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 ¶ 138
≈kg
Reference
0.7
2931 C/TCD10
Lamps/socket Recess W opening mm 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 ¶ 138
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief systems for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 2931 W/TCD10 E.
Indications Page Equipment accessories 30 Recess mounting accessories 31 Lamp characteristics 444
24
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Decor disk 02930 DS 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, transparent, with frosted centred concentric detail. See page 30 for further details.
Data table No. 2002
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2002
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Conical lens 02930 KS 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, transparent, with frosted cone. See page 30 for further details.
≈kg 0.7
Reference 2931 W-B/TCD10
Lamps/socket Recess W opening mm 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 ¶ 138
≈kg
Reference
0.7
2931 C-B/TCD10
Lamps/socket Recess W opening mm 1xTC-D10/G24d-1 ¶ 138
≈kg 0.7
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2002 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
9.4 13 17 20 24 30 37 54 71
11 14 18 22 25 32 39 56 73
19 26 33 40 47 61 74 108 142
22 29 36 44 51 65 79 113 147
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2002
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2002
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.6 h Ymax = 2.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2931 C/TCD10 + 02930 DS + 02930 KS + 02930 KT 2931 C-B/TCD10 + 02930 DS + 02930 KS + 02930 KT 2931 W/TCD10 + 02930 DS + 02930 KS + 02930 KT 2931 W-B/TCD10 + 02930 DS + 02930 KS + 02930 KT
1.00 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.00 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.00 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.00 1.04 1.04 1.04
0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55
0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Conical lens 02930 KT 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, frosted, with transparent cone. See page 30 for further details.
25
290··· Decorative accessories
The design of 290··· series downlights can be effectively varied by means of bezel rings and glass attachments. All items are retro-fit, meaning that later adaptations are possible without using tools and without additional hassle! The cross-blade louvre with highly-specular aluminium surface, also for retro-fitting, adds a decorative touch to the downlight and provides glare limitation.
Decorative bezel rings 1 piece, spherical, made of die-cast zinc, to be fixed without tools, safe retention by means of spring catches. 02900 C chrome 02900 W white
Decorative glass attachment with bezel ring 1 piece, consisting of spherical bezel ring and circular float glass attachment, transparent, with frosted centred concentric detail, interior opening ¶ 100 mm, fixed to the bezel ring without tools by means of chromed retention rods. Safe retention by means of spring catches. 02900 CS with chrome decorative bezel ring 02900 WS with white decorative bezel ring
26
Decor disk 02900 DS 1 piece, consisting of circular float glass attachment, transparent, with frosted centred concentric detail, interior opening ¶ 100 mm, to be mounted into downlight without tools, safe retention by means of chromed spring catches.
Data table No. 2003
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2, BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
Data table no. 2003 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.8 6.8 8.6 11 12 16 20 29 38
5.5 7.4 9.3 11 13 17 21 30 39
9.6 14 17 21 25 32 40 58 76
11 15 19 23 26 34 41 60 79
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Conical lenses 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment with cone, to be mounted into downlight without tools, safe retention by means of chromed spring catches. 02900 KS frosted cone, transparent glass attachment. 02900 KT transparent cone, frosted glass attachment.
For rapid mounting The cross-blade louvre support can be retro-fitted by means of a simple screw. The louvre itself is easily snapped onto the support without using tools.
Cross-blade louvre 02900 X for 290··· downlights. 1 piece, consisting of parabolic lamella unit made of highly-specular reflectionintensified aluminium and support. Can also be used in combination with further decorative accessories.
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.8 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2901···/TCD13 + 02900 X 2901···/TCD18 + 02900 X 2901···/TCT26 + 02900 X 2902···/TCD13 + 02900 X 2902···/TCD18 + 02900 X 2902···/TCT26 + 02900 X
1.18 1.00 0.59 0.69 0.63 0.33
0.59 0.52 0.59 0.53 0.43 0.53
0.59 0.52 0.59 0.53 0.43 0.53
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
27
290··· Accessories for higher degrees of protection
Transparent glass covers and Fresnel lenses – for tool-free installation in 290··· series downlights – achieve the increased degree of protection IP 44 (underside). In addition, Fresnel lenses also create optical effects. The transparent versions intensify the narrow-angle distribution effect of the reflector, the frosted versions on the other hand accentuate the 29··· downlights with additional light scattering effect.
28
Glass covers To achieve IP 44 (underside). 1 piece, consisting of cover and bezel ring. Cover in transparent float glass, integrated into spherical decorative bezel ring, to be fixed without tools, safe retention by means of spring catches. Not suitable for 2902···/TCT26 with inductive ballasts.
Transparent Fresnel lenses To achieve IP 44 (underside). 1 piece, consisting of Fresnel lens and bezel ring. Fresnel lens in transparent float glass, integrated into spherical decorative bezel ring, to be fixed without tools, safe retention by means of spring catches. Not suitable for 2902···/TCT26 with inductive ballasts.
Frosted Fresnel lenses To achieve IP 44 (underside). 1 piece, consisting of Fresnel lens and bezel ring. Fresnel lens in frosted float glass, integrated into spherical decorative bezel ring, to be fixed without tools, safe retention by means of spring catches. Not suitable for 2902···/TCT26 with inductive ballasts.
02901 CA with chrome decorative bezel ring. 02901 WA with white decorative bezel ring.
02901 C-FT with chrome decorative bezel ring. 02901 W-FT with white decorative bezel ring.
02901 C-FS with chrome decorative bezel ring. 02901 W-FS with white decorative bezel ring.
Cover accessories also prevent mechanically damaged lamps from falling down – highly recommended e.g. in the food industry, grocery shops or restaurants.
2911··· series 29··· downlights in IP 54 all-round are recommended for ceilings which are not fully closed, e.g. strip ceilings. The fully closed luminaire body made of die-cast aluminium offers protection against the ingression of dust and humidity in the ceiling void. Transparent glass covers or Fresnel lenses, described opposite, close the downlight from the underside. Downlight series 2911··· in IP 54 all-round is described from page 316 on.
29
293··· Decorative accessories
293··· series compact downlights can be further visually enhanced by means of decorative accessories. Decor disks and conical lenses are available. All accessories can be retrofitted to the functional slot of the basic downlight without using tools by means of chromed spring catches.
Decor disk 02930 DS 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, transparent, with frosted centred concentric detail, interior opening ¶ 65 mm, to be mounted into downlight without tools, safe retention by means of chromed spring catches.
30
Conical lens 02930 KS 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, transparent, with frosted cone, to be mounted into downlight without tools, safe retention by means of chromed spring catches.
Conical lens 02930 KT 1 piece, consisting of circular glass attachment, frosted, with transparent cone, to be mounted into downlight without tools, safe retention by means of chromed spring catches.
290···, 293··· Mounting accessories
Mounting accessories 290··· or 293··· series downlights can be installed in almost all suspended ceiling systems due to their low heights of only 120 mm or 90 mm. Perfectly adapted installation accessories are available for mounting in strip or concrete ceilings. Mounting plate accessories made of sheet steel are recommended in case the ceiling tiles have low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance.
Mounting plate 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised, to mount downlights in suspended ceilings or in closed ceiling systems (wood, gypsum plaster or similar) with low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance. 02900/625 for 290···, 291···, for mounting in ceilings in module 625 mm, 02900/600 for 290···, 291···, for mounting in ceilings in module 600 mm, 02930/625 for 293···, for mounting in ceilings in module 625 mm, 02930/600 for 293···, for mounting in ceilings in module 600 mm.
Mounting case 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, white, with press-folded sides and integrated angle brackets. For strip ceilings in 100 mm module with 16 mm shadow gap. 02900/284 for 290···, 291···, ceiling recess opening 284 x 284 mm, 02930/184 for 293···, ceiling recess opening 184 x 184 mm (not illustrated), 02900 LS Light emission shield for 290···CAT2, (not illustrated). 02930 LS Light emission shield for 293···, (not illustrated).
Sealed housing For mounting of downlights in concrete ceilings. 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised, with two connection openings ¶ 37 mm and four fixing brackets to be fixed on the panel. 02900/150 for 290···/291···, total height 150 mm (not for CAT2 versions) 02930/100 for 2931···, total height 100 mm.
02930/100
02900/150 172
59
188 228
200 (0293···) 450 (0290···)
595 (···/600) 620 (···/625)
∅138
90
23
100
22
286
60 324 344
31
32
1280···, 1281···
128··· series TRILUX downlights stand for efficiency and technical know-how. A careful selection of quality materials ensures long service life and high technical performance. Options for facetted reflectors are available for the 128··· series.
1280··· Downlights for ceiling recess opening ¶ 185 mm. Predestined for low to medium illuminances up to 300 lx. With white or highlyspecular reflectors made of UV-stabilised polycarbonate and perfectly integrated colour-adapted or contrastforming bezel rings.
1281··· Downlights for ceiling recess opening ¶ 240 mm. For application areas with increased light requirements. With white or highly-specular reflectors made of UV-stabilised polycarbonate and perfectly integrated colouradapted or contrast-forming bezel rings.
Page 34
Page 36
33
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector, recess opening ¶ 185 mm
Application Reception halls, corridors, conference rooms, canteens, lounges, hotels, restaurants and residential areas. Optical system Reflector made of UV-stabilised polycarbonate. ···W··· white, for a uniform light distribution. With perfectly integrated white bezel ring. ···HW··· aluminised, highlyspecular, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. With perfectly integrated white bezel ring. ···H··· aluminised, highlyspecular, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. With perfectly integrated highlyspecular bezel ring.
Reference
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1280 W/1TCD13 E.
130
20
∅185-190 315
Golden attraction Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. The 128··· series downlights are optionally available with gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, combining appealing design and excellent photometrics.
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
...with VVG
CIBSE BZ: BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ4
...with EVG
Low-loss ballast Electronic control gear
System rating per luminaire / W Total system rating / W Annual operation / h Annual energy consumption / kWh Energy cost kWh / ¢ Annual energy cost / ¢
34
Page 35 444
48 4 608 3 120 14 377 0.11 1 582.00
36 3 456 3 120 10 783 0.11 1 187.00
Annual energy savings / kWh Annual cost savings / ¢
— —
3 594 395.00
Pay-back period
—
3 – 4 years
Electronic control gear Electronic control gear represents future-fair operating electronics for fluorescent lamps. With practice-oriented advantages electronic control gear creates decisive conditions for energy saving, environmental compatibility, comfort and safety.
Data table No. 0300 DIN 5040: A40
Lighting installation with 96 downlights 1280/2 TCD 18
Indications Prismatic covers Lamp characteristics
Recess opening mm ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185
7
1-25
Luminaire body Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceiling recess mounting, thanks to integrated spring brackets, does not require tools.
100
1280 W/1TCD13 1280 W/1TCD18 1280 W/2TCD13 1280 W/2TCD18
Options for facetted reflectors are available for the 128··· series. Please add the reference -F to the main code, e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief systems for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2
Prismatic covers Mechanical lamp protection and an increased underside degree of protection IP 44 are realised thanks to optionally available covers, made of non-yellowing plastic, to be fixed without using tools.
≈kg 0.9 0.9 1.3 1.3
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2
Reference
0.9 0.9 1.3 1.3
1280 H/1TCD13 1280 H/1TCD18 1280 H/2TCD13 1280 H/2TCD18
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D13/G24d-1 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2
Recess opening mm ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185
100
652d Degree of protection IP 20 Degree of protection in closed ceiling systems underside IP 23 Degree of protection combined with 01280 O, 01280 P underside IP 44
En Room height H
Area A in m2
20
20
0.9 0.9 1.3 1.3
1 Number of luminaires
∅185-190 315
∅185-190 315
≈kg
Data table no. 0300
130 7
7
1-25
≈kg
130
100
1280 HW/1TCD13 1280 HW/1TCD18 1280 HW/2TCD13 1280 HW/2TCD18
Recess opening mm ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185 ¶ 185
1-25
Reference
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.1 5.6 7.1 8.6 10 13 16 24 31
4.8 6.3 7.8 9.3 11 14 17 25 32
8.1 11 14 17 20 26 32 48 61
9.6 13 16 19 22 28 34 50 63
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0300
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0300
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1280 W/1TCD13 1280 W/1TCD18 1280 W/2TCD13 1280 W/2TCD18 1280 HW/1TCD13 1280 HW/1TCD18 1280 HW/2TCD13 1280 HW/2TCD18 1280 H/1TCD13 1280 H/1TCD18 1280 H/2TCD13 1280 H/2TCD18
1.36 1.12 0.72 0.60 1.23 1.00 0.65 0.53 1.23 1.00 0.65 0.53
0.65 0.59 0.61 0.56 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62
0.65 0.59 0.61 0.56 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Prismatic covers Plastic, with concentric detail. To be mounted into the downlight without tools, safe retention with bayonet system. IP 44 from underside. 01280 O opal, 1 piece 01280 P transparent, 1 piece
35
Downlights with white or highly-specular reflector, recess opening ¶ 240 mm
Application Reception halls, corridors, conference rooms, canteens, lounges, hotels, restaurants and residential areas. Optical system Reflector made of UV-stabilised polycarbonate. ···W··· white, for a uniform light distribution. With perfectly integrated white bezel ring. ···HW··· aluminised, highlyspecular, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. With perfectly integrated white bezel ring. ···H··· aluminised, highlyspecular, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. With perfectly integrated highlyspecular bezel ring.
Reference 1281 W/1TCD18 1281 W/1TCD26 1281 W/2TCD18 1281 W/2TCD26
Options for facetted reflectors are available for the 128··· series. Please add the reference -F to the main code, e.g. 1280 H-F/2TCD18.
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240
125
140
10
∅240 394
28
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief systems for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
1-25
Luminaire body Sheet steel, galvanised. Ceiling recess mounting, thanks to integrated spring brackets, does not require tools.
Golden attraction Prestigious applications call for corresponding luminaires. The 128··· series downlights are optionally available with gold-coloured reflectors and matched bezel rings, combining appealing design and excellent photometrics.
TC-D(EL)
Ecological electronics! Electronic control gear embodies three characteristics dear to the heart: Economy – Efficiency – Ecology. A sensible use of natural resources helps to realise long-term environmental benefits on the one hand, with material and fiscal advantages on the other hand.
Prismatic covers Plastic, with concentric detail. To be mounted into the downlight without tools, safe retention with bayonet system. IP 44 from underside. 01281 O opal, 1 piece 01281 P transparent, 1 piece
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1281 W/1TCD18 E.
Indications Prismatic covers Lamp characteristics
36
Page 36 444
Data table No. 0302
≈kg 1.2 1.6 1.6 2.4
Reference 1281 HW/1TCD18 1281 HW/1TCD26 1281 HW/2TCD18 1281 HW/2TCD26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
Recess opening mm ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240
≈kg
Reference
1.2 1.6 1.6 2.4
1281 H/1TCD18 1281 H/1TCD26 1281 H/2TCD18 1281 H/2TCD26
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-D18/G24d-2 1xTC-D26/G24d-3 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
140
∅240 394
≈kg 1.2 1.6 1.6 2.4
652d Degree of protection IP 20 Degree of protection in closed ceiling systems underside IP 23 Degree of protection combined with 01281 O, 01281 P underside IP 44
Data table no. 0302 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
10
1-25
10
1-25
125
125
140
∅240 394
Recess opening mm ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240 ¶ 240
28
28
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.7 4.7 5.8 6.7 8.7 11 16 21
3.2 4.2 5.2 6.2 7.4 9.4 12 17 22
5.4 7.3 9.3 12 14 18 22 32 41
6.4 8.7 11 13 15 19 23 33 42
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0302
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0302
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1281 W/1TCD18 1281 W/1TCD26 1281 W/2TCD18 1281 W/2TCD26 1281 HW/1TCD18 1281 HW/1TCD26 1281 HW/2TCD18 1281 HW/2TCD26 1281 H/1TCD18 1281 H/1TCD26 1281 H/2TCD18 1281 H/2TCD26
1.53 1.12 0.81 0.60 1.38 1.00 0.73 0.53 1.38 1.00 0.73 0.53
0.65 0.59 0.61 0.56 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62
0.65 0.59 0.61 0.56 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62 0.72 0.66 0.68 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Prismatic covers Mechanical lamp protection and an increased underside degree of protection IP 44 are realised thanks to optionally available covers, made of non-yellowing plastic, to be fixed without using tools.
37
38
129···, 367···
129··· and 367··· series recessed luminaires with radial specular louvres are suitable for versatile use due to their characteristic look and their brilliant surface in combination with higher light output and limited ceiling space required. All louvres consist of concentric ring reflectors and V-wedges radially arranged between the two reflectors.
129··· 129··· series circular recessed luminaires with radial specular louvre are an architectural alternative to conventional downlights. Predestined for low up to medium illuminances because of the consequent twin-lamp equipment with compact fluorescent lamps.
367··· 367··· luminaires are conceived for architecturally interesting installations with illuminances of 300 lx up to 500 lx. They can be equipped with two or three lumen-rich compact fluorescent lamps TCD 26 W.
Page 40
Page 41
39
Circular recessed luminaires with radial specular louvre
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, corridors and financial institutions. Optical system Highly-specular radial louvre made of aluminium, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution, aluminised. Radial louvre consisting of interior and exterior ring reflector with V-wedges radially arranged between the two reflectors. Safe louvre retention by means of spring catches, to be used without tools. With highly-specular overhead reflector made of aluminium, upper section of 129··· series reflector with additional structural effect.
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. 129··· with 3-pole, 367··· with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
Reference 1295/2TCD13 1295/2TCD18
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-D13/G24d-1 2xTC-D18/G24d-2
Recess opening mm ¶ 200 ¶ 200
≈kg
Reference
1.2 1.2
1296/2TCD18 1296/2TCD26
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-D18/G24d-2 2xTC-D26/G24d-3
155 151
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2007
TC-D(EL)
5
10-30
∅200 362
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 3672N C-RPH/TCD26 E.
∅236 425
Data table No. 2007
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
fi = 30°
Indications Lamp characteristics
40
Page 444
Recess opening mm ¶ 236 ¶ 236
155
151
TC-D(EL)
5
10-30
Luminaire body Consisting of ceiling ring made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, and gear tray made of sheet steel, joined together by three fixing brackets. Ceiling mounting by means of integrated brake latch system.
Brake-latch fixing The 129···/367··· series are equipped with rapid-mounting fixing accessories. During installation the downlight is positioned in the ceiling and locked by means of catch springs, without using tools.
Mechanical glare limitation The lamps in the 129···/367··· series are out of sight under flat viewing angles exceeding 60°. This characteristic also meets increased requirements as to direct glare limitation in offices.
≈kg 1.2 1.2
Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-D26/G24d-3 3xTC-D26/G24d-3
3672N C-RPH/TCD26 3673N C-RPH/TCD26
Recess opening mm ¶ 304 ¶ 304
≈kg 3.6 4.4
652d Degree of protection
10-30
152
160
IP 20
Data table no. 2007 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
∅304 535
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 12 14 21 28
3.7 5.1 6.5 8.0 9.3 12 15 22 29
6.7 9.6 12 15 18 23 29 42 56
7.4 10 13 16 19 24 29 44 57
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2007 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.4 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1295/2TCD13 1295/2TCD18 1296/2TCD18 1296/2TCD26 3672N C-RPH/TCD26 3673N C-RPH/TCD26
1.04 1.00 0.95 0.70 0.49 0.35
0.47 0.36 0.38 0.34 0.49 0.45
0.47 0.36 0.38 0.34 0.49 0.45
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Mounting plate 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised. Recommended for mounting of 367··· luminaires in ceilings made of wood, gypsum plaster or similar with low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance. 02062/600 for ceiling plates in module 600 mm. 02062/625 for ceiling plates in module 625 mm.
41
42
PSH, PSG
Circular luminaires PSH and PSG place distinctive architectural accents. Functional elements of the luminaire system are turned into decorative design components. All luminaires of this series are characterised by the efficient primary optics for economic compact fluorescent lamps while the secondary systems differ depending on the respective version.
Combined surfacemounted and recessed luminaires PSH The design is determined by the striking secondary facetted reflector. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II in combination with the primary system.
Combined surfacemounted and suspended luminaires PSG PSG luminaires with partially frosted glass ring shine out thanks to the decorative secondary system. The luminaires can be used as surface-mounted luminaires or in combination with wire suspension accessories.
Combined surfacemounted and suspended luminaires PSH With a secondary system differing from the PSG system. Variable mounting of the facetted ring between the primary optics and ceiling reflector. Recommended for normal DSE usage.
Page 44
Page 46
Page 47
43
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, foyers, stairwells and financial institutions. Suitable for areas with normal DSE usage. Primary optics Consisting of circular reflector, lamp support and decorative glass ring. Highlyspecular reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Decorative ring made of transparent float glass which envelops the reflector. To be fixed to the secondary reflector by means of four chromed profile rods. Secondary facetted reflector Highly-specular, made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. The edge of the secondary facetted reflector covers the grid in case of recess mounting of the luminaire body. Luminaire body Circular, made of solventfree powder-coated sheet steel, white. Secondary facetted reflector and primary optics are fixed to the luminaire body by means of spring catches and wire brackets to be used without tools. Tool-free electrical connection by means of plug-in coupling. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 5383 PSH/TCD26 E.
Indications Lamp characteristics
44
Page 444
Surface-mounted and recessed luminaires with double-reflection PSH system
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2008 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.5 6.1 7.7 9.4 11 14 17 25 32
5.7 7.6 9.3 11 13 16 19 27 35
7.5 10 13 16 18 24 29 42 54
9.6 13 16 18 21 26 32 45 58
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-F24/2G10 3xTC-D26/G24d-3
5383 PSH/2xTCF24 5383 PSH/TCD26
≈kg 7.7 9.5
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 2.0 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
∅593 ∅570
ρ v e lp
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
272 300
5383PSH/2xTCF24 1.00 5383PSH/TCD26 0.82
0.70 0.57
0.62 0.51
indirect ULOR
0.08 0.06
Technical information see page 440.
160
∅260
E
∅400
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2008 DIN 5040: B50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Fixing accessories 05380 1 set (2 pieces) of mounting rails for 5383··· luminaires for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Ceiling systems with low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance have to be reinforced additionally.
Recess accessories 05380/600 For 5383··· luminaires, consisting of fixing accessories 05380 and mounting case, sheet steel, white. 05380/600 for module 600. 05380/625 for module 625.
45
Surface-mounted and suspended luminaires with double-reflection PSG or PSH system
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, foyers, stairwells and financial institutions. ···PSH··· also suitable for areas with normal DSE usage. Primary optics Consisting of circular reflector, lamp support and decorative glass ring. Highlyspecular reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Decorative ring made of transparent float glass which envelops the reflector. To be fixed to the luminaire body by means of four chromed profile rods. Secondary optics ···PSG··· with decorative element made of satin-finish float glass. ···PSH··· with concave, highly-specular facetted secondary reflector ring, made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Variable mounting between the primary optics and ceiling reflector. Ceiling reflector To cover the luminaire body, highly-specular, made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. Luminaire body Circular, made of solventfree powder-coated sheet steel, white. The primary and secondary optics are fixed to the luminaire body by means of flat head bolt and wire brackets. Tool-free electrical connection by means of plug-in connection.
Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-F24/2G10 3xTC-D26/G24d-3
5393N PSG/2xTCF24 5393N PSG/TCD26
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 5393N PSG/TCD26 E. Further lamp options upon request. TC-D TC-F
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2009 DIN 5040: C42 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ4
Indications Lamp characteristics
46
Page 444
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
≈kg 7.9 8.6
Wire suspension 05390 SN For luminaires 5393N PSG···, 5393 PSH···. Height continually adjustable, consisting of: 2 steel wires, galvanised, ¶ 1 mm, 4150 mm long, for suspension lengths of up to 2 m, 1 circular ceiling fixing plate ¶ 220 mm including ceiling trim cap, sheet steel, steel-grey, 4 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 connection terminal 5 x 2.5 mm2, 2 strain relief systems, 1 connection wire set 4 x 0.75 mm2, 2300 mm long.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2009 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
5.7 7.7 9.6 12 13 17 21 30 39
9.2 12 14 16 18 22 26 36 46
9.5 13 16 19 22 29 35 50 64
15 20 23 27 31 37 44 60 76
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-F24/2G10 3xTC-D26/G24d-3
5393 PSH/2xTCF24 5393 PSH/TCD26
≈kg 6.8 7.6
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.4 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
Wire suspension 05390 SC For fixing 5393··· luminaires to inclined ceilings. Height continually adjustable up to 2.5 m. With 4 pivotable ceiling fixing elements.
ρ v e lp
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5393N PSG/2xTCF24 5393N PSG/TCD26 5393PSH/2xTCF24 5393PSH/TCD26
1.13 0.87 1.00 0.79
0.64 0.51 0.72 0.58
0.43 0.34 0.48 0.39
indirect ULOR
0.21 0.17 0.24 0.19
Technical information see page 440.
Cover 05390 K (not illustrated) 1 piece, sheet steel, steel-grey. For the ceiling-oriented covering of the suspended luminaire body 5393 PSH···. TC-D TC-F
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2009 DIN 5040: B52 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
47
ROT, ROS ROD, ROB
48
Public halls or representative interiors are just a few examples of room architectures which can be put into the right light by means of appealing rotationally symmetrical suspended luminaires. Direct or direct/indirect reflectors as well as optical systems with decorative indirect light component are winning lightguiding components.
ROT ROT features attractive suspended luminaires with refraction reflectors offering a direct light component of 85 % compared to 15 % indirect light. The striking design with chromed construction components fits perfectly in technical architectures.
ROS The direct light distribution of the ROS luminaires creates a pleasant atmosphere thanks to glare-free light. The similarity with the ROT series is clearly accentuated by the corresponding design of the luminaire body and suspensions.
ROD Suspended luminaires ROD with direct double parabolic reflector offer additional planning scope with three different construction sizes and lumen packages ranging from 1200 lm up to 19000 lm. All reflectors can also be equipped with decor disks.
ROB As compared to the ROD versions, ROB luminaires have profiled prisms in the upper section of the reflector which provide additional decorative indirect light. The working plane is illuminated by the partially facetted aluminium reflector just like with ROD.
Page 50
Page 52
Page 54
Page 56
49
High-performance suspended luminaires with refraction reflector ROT
Application Public rooms and halls, financial institutions, station and airport foyers, trade fair and exhibition halls and representative entrance areas. Production halls with a low degree of pollution. Optical system Parabolic transparent refraction reflector made of acrylic glass, with photometrically effective prismatic system for well-balanced ceiling illumination by means of 15 % indirect light component. Luminaire body Consisting of circular base housing and anti-glare ring, joined by functional chromed steel rods, shaped around the reflector form. Base housing made of aluminium, finished in graphite-grey structuralised paint, to house the electrical components. Anti-glare ring made of specular anodised aluminium, adding a decorative touch to the refraction reflector. With continually adjustable wire suspension, for suspension length of up to 3.40 m. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with freely suspended connection cable. ···TCT··· with electronic control gear. ···HIE··· with inductive ballast. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal, located on the ceiling fixing plate of the wire suspensions.
Indications Lamp characteristics
50
Page 444
Parabolic prismatic optics Suspended luminaires with transparent refraction reflector made of PMMA shine out thanks to light output ratios in excess of 90 %. A multitude of lumen packages is available.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2010 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 4.0 m 6.0 m 4.0 m 6.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.0 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.3 5.5 6.6 9.3 12
3.3 4.0 4.6 5.1 5.8 7.0 8.3 11 14
3.3 4.3 5.3 6.3 7.2 9.2 11 16 20
5.6 6.6 7.6 8.5 9.6 12 14 19 23
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Reference
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE100/E27*
5361 ROT/TCT42 E 5361 ROT/HIE100
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
≈kg
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference 4.4 6.7
ρ v e lp
Lamps/socket W 1xHIE250/E40*
5363 ROT/1xHIE250
≈kg
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
8.5
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.8 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5361ROT/TCT42 E 2.41 5361ROT/HIE100 1.00 5363ROT/1xHIE250 0.42
0.94 0.93 0.91
0.77 0.77 0.71
indirect ULOR
0.17 0.16 0.20
Technical information see page 440.
TC-TEL HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2010
HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2010
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ4/2/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/2/BZ5
51
High-performance suspended luminaires with specular reflector ROS
Application Public rooms and halls, financial institutions, station and airport foyers, trade fair and exhibition halls and representative entrance areas. Production halls with a low degree of pollution. Optical system Parabolic reflector made of post-anodised aluminium. Highly-specular outer surface, semi-specular inner surface. The cut-off angle is at least 30°. Luminaire body Consisting of circular base housing made of aluminium, finished in graphite-grey structuralised paint, to house the electrical components. With four chromed steel rods, for the connection to the steel wires. With continually adjustable wire suspension, for suspension length of up to 3.40 m. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with freely suspended connection cable. ···TCT··· with electronic control gear. ···HIE··· with inductive ballast. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal, located on the ceiling fixing plate of the wire suspensions.
Indications Lamp characteristics
52
Page 444
Design and technology Suspended luminaires ROS represent design and technology: on the one hand the supporting construction made of steel and chrome harmonises perfectly with the aluminium reflector with highly-specular outer surface and a semi-specular inner surface which is examplary for a modern material design. On the other hand the narrow or narrow/wideangle light distribution – depending on the luminaire size – creates a pleasing atmosphere thanks to glare-free light. Superb working efficiencies guarantee the rentability of this lighting concept.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2011 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 4.0 m 6.0 m 4.0 m 6.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.0 5.2 6.3 8.9 12
2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 5.0 6.3 7.6 10 13
2.9 3.9 4.8 5.8 6.7 8.7 10 15 20
4.6 5.6 6.4 7.2 8.3 10 13 17 22
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Reference
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE100/E27*
5361 ROS/TCT42 E 5361 ROS/HIE100
≈kg 4.4 6.7
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
ρ v e lp
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5361ROS/TCT42 E + 05361ROS-DS 5361ROS/HIE100 + 05361ROS-DS
2.57 2.78 1.00 1.06
0.77 0.72 0.82 0.77
0.77 0.72 0.82 0.77
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
TC-T HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2011 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Accessory 05361 ROS-DS Circular float glass panel ¶ 450 mm, with interior opening ¶ 230 mm, to be fixed to the aluminium reflector by means of chromed retention rods.
53
Suspended luminaires – direct – with double parabolic reflector ROD
Application Public rooms and halls, financial institutions, station and airport foyers, trade fair and exhibition halls and representative entrance areas. Production halls with a low degree of pollution. Optical system Double parabolic aluminium reflector for rotationally symmetrical direct light distribution. Reflector made of post-anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %, highly-specular inner surface, semi-specular outer surface, facetting in lower reflector section. The cut-off angle is at least 30°. Luminaire body Consisting of circular base housing, extruded aluminium profile, silver-coated, to house the electrical components. With vertical cooling ribs and adapted longitudinal rods, for connection of the wire suspension. Integrated wire suspension with ceiling fixing plate and cover plate made of sheet steel, graphite-grey. Continually adjustable wire suspension, for suspension length of up to 3.40 m. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with freely suspended connection cable. ···TCT··· with electronic control gear. ···HIE··· with inductive ballast. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal, located on the ceiling fixing plate of the wire suspension.
Indications Lamp characteristics
54
Page 444
Reference
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3
5361 ROD/TCT18 E 5361 ROD/TCT26 E
Decor disks Float glass, ¶ 282 mm, 395 mm or 505 mm for ROD and ROB. Fixing by means of chromed retention rods. 05361 ROB/D-DS for 5361··· 05363 ROB/D-DS for 5363··· 05365 ROB/D-DS for 5365···
TC-T
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2012 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
≈kg 1.4 1.4
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2012 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 4.0 m 6.0 m 4.0 m 6.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.3 1.9 2.4 3.0 3.5 4.7 5.8 8.5 11
1.6 2.1 2.6 3.2 3.6 5.0 6.3 9.0 12
2.2 3.2 4.1 5.0 5.9 7.9 9.7 14 19
2.7 3.5 4.4 5.3 5.9 8.3 10 15 20
Calculation parameters
Reference 5363 ROD/1xTCT42 E 5363 ROD/1xHIE70 5363 ROD/1xHIE100
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE70/E27* 1xHIE100/E27*
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
≈kg
Reference
2.2 3.5 3.9
5365 ROD/2xTCT42 E 5365 ROD/1xHIE150 5365 ROD/1xHIE250
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE150/E27* 1xHIE250/E40*
≈kg
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
5.0 6.9 8.6
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 0.8 h Ymax = 0.8 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
ρ v e lp
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5361ROD/TCT18 E + 05361ROB/D-DS 5361ROD/TCT26 E + 05361ROB/D-DS 5363ROD/1xTCT42 E + 05363ROB/D-DS 5363ROD/1xHIE70 + 05363ROB/D-DS 5363ROD/1xHIE100 + 05363ROB/D-DS 5365ROD/2xTCT42 E + 05365ROB/D-DS 5365ROD/1xHIE150 + 05365ROB/D-DS 5365ROD/1xHIE250 + 05365ROB/D-DS
6.49 7.21 4.38 4.71 2.35 2.62 1.42 1.59 1.00 1.12 1.27 1.42 0.69 0.74 0.36 0.39
0.78 0.70 0.77 0.72 0.81 0.73 0.78 0.70 0.78 0.70 0.75 0.67 0.78 0.72 0.89 0.83
0.78 0.70 0.77 0.72 0.81 0.73 0.78 0.70 0.78 0.70 0.75 0.67 0.78 0.72 0.89 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
TC-TEL HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2012
TC-TEL HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2012
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A70
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ1
55
Suspended luminaires – direct/indirect – with bifunctional reflector ROB
Application Public rooms and halls, financial institutions, station and airport foyers, trade fair and exhibition halls and representative entrance areas. Production halls with a low degree of pollution. Optical system Bifunctional reflector, direct/indirect, consisting of upper part in PLEXIGLAS with concentric channel prisms for ceiling-oriented indirect component and parabolic lower reflector part in aluminium. Reflector made of post-anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %, highly-specular inner surface, semi-specular outer surface, facetting in lower reflector section, increasing to the lower part. The cut-off angle is at least 30°. Luminaire body Consisting of circular base housing, extruded aluminium profile, silver-coated, to house the electrical components. With vertical cooling ribs and adapted longitudinal rods, for connection of the wire suspension. Integrated wire suspension with ceiling fixing plate and cover plate made of sheet steel, graphite-grey. Continually adjustable wire suspension, for suspension length of up to 3.40 m. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with freely suspended connection cable. ···TCT··· with electronic control gear. ···HIE··· with inductive ballast. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal, located on the ceiling fixing plate of the wire suspension.
Indications Decor disks Lamp characteristics
56
Page 54 444
Reference
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL18/GX24q-2 1xTC-TEL26/GX24q-3
5361 ROB/TCT18 E 5361 ROB/TCT26 E
Decor disk The partially frosted decor disk offers an appealing design alternative. See page 54. Adjustable wire suspension The stable mounting plate with flat canopy assures secure fixing to the ceiling. Tool-free adjustable wire holders guarantee high mounting comfort.
TC-T
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2013 DIN 5040: B52 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
≈kg 1.6 1.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2013 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 4.0 m 6.0 m 4.0 m 6.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.7 2.4 3.0 3.7 4.3 5.6 6.8 9.7 13
2.5 3.0 3.6 4.2 5.1 6.4 7.8 11 14
2.9 4.0 5.0 6.1 7.1 9.3 11 16 22
4.1 5.1 6.0 6.9 8.5 11 13 18 23
Calculation parameters
Reference 5363 ROB/1xTCT42 E 5363 ROB/1xHIE70 5363 ROB/1xHIE100
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE70/E27* 1xHIE100/E27*
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
≈kg
Reference
2.4 3.7 4.1
5365 ROB/2xTCT42 E 5365 ROB/1xHIE150 5365 ROB/1xHIE250
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 1xHIE150/E27* 1xHIE250/E40*
≈kg
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
5.4 7.3 9.0
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.1 h Ymax = 1.1 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
* Only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires.
ρ v e lp
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5361ROB/TCT18 E + 05361ROB/D-DS 5361ROB/TCT26 E + 05361ROB/D-DS 5363ROB/1xTCT42 E + 05363ROB/D-DS 5363ROB/1xHIE70 + 05363ROB/D-DS 5363ROB/1xHIE100 + 05363ROB/D-DS 5365ROB/2xTCT42 E + 05365ROB/D-DS 5365ROB/1xHIE150 + 05365ROB/D-DS 5365ROB/1xHIE250 + 05365ROB/D-DS
6.19 6.53 4.07 4.28 2.45 2.59 1.42 1.53 1.00 1.08 1.26 1.34 0.71 0.76 0.37 0.38
0.82 0.78 0.83 0.79 0.78 0.74 0.78 0.73 0.78 0.73 0.76 0.71 0.75 0.71 0.87 0.85
0.69 0.61 0.75 0.65 0.67 0.59 0.65 0.55 0.65 0.55 0.63 0.54 0.62 0.54 0.72 0.65
indirect ULOR
0.13 0.17 0.09 0.14 0.11 0.15 0.13 0.18 0.13 0.18 0.13 0.16 0.13 0.17 0.15 0.20
Technical information see page 440.
TC-TEL HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2013
TC-TEL HIE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2013
DIN 5040: B52
DIN 5040: B62
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ1/3/BZ2
57
58
CLASSICA, 3-phase voltage tracks
Spotlights for low-voltage halogen lamps Brilliant light is a characteristic feature of the CLASSICA spotlights for low-voltage halogen lamps in wattages QT 35-90 W. Modern reflector technology for optimised uniform circular surface lighting.
Spotlights for mainsvoltage halogen lamps The lamps for direct mains connection are available in QT 60-150 W and QPAR 75 W. The QT-150 reflector has a 30° flood characteristic, the PAR versions are available for 10° or 30°.
Spotlights for high-pressure discharge lamps Lumen-rich metal halide lamps and high-pressure sodium vapour lamps are predestined for striking illumination. The HIT version includes an integrated safety glass with UV protection.
3-phase voltage tracks 3-phase voltage tracks for surface, recess and suspended mounting allow to realise versatile arrangements of CLASSICA spotlights. Cross, L- and T-connectors as well as flexible couplings extend the planning scope.
Page 62
Page 62
Page 64
Page 68
59
CLASSICA Unmistakable retro design
Each era is characterised by a certain style and fashion, which is also expressed by the design of industrial products. However, those creations that go beyond the actual mainstream and also affect eras to come are called classics. The new TRILUX spotlight range CLASSICA truly lives up to its name. The elliptical form in classical retro design turns CLASSICA into an unmistakable lighting system allowing to accentuate objects in a modern yet timeless way. CLASSICA is available in silver-grey and white versions.
60
61
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA for halogen lamps
Version Spotlights for 3-phase voltage tracks, can be pivoted by 120° and oriented by 355°. Equipment • Low-voltage halogen lamp QT12 35-90 W, • Mains-voltage halogen lamp QT32 60-150 W, • Halogen reflector lamp QPAR30 75 W. Reflector Aluminium, semi-specular (QT32) or highly-specular in MRU-technology for optimised uniform circular surface lighting (QT12).
Electrical connection With easy-to-handle voltagetrack adapter for commercial 3-phase voltage-track systems. Spotlights can be adjusted to the desired circuit without using tools. ···QT12··· with electronic transformer in ballast housing, colour-adapted to reflector housing.
···F··· Distribution characteristic “flood” ···S··· Distribution characteristic “spot” ···R··· for reflector lamps The reflector is integrated in the lamp for ···PAR··· versions. Luminaire body Ellipsoid reflector housing with ergonomic handle.
Indications Page Data tables 66 Surface-mounted voltage tracks 68 Recessed voltage tracks 70 Lamp characteristics 444
Silver-grey ···W··· White
652d
Reference CLASSICA···
Data table
Lamps
Socket
···F/1x90 QT12 ET* ···S/1x90 QT12 ET* ···W-F/1x90 QT12 ET* ···W-S/1x90 QT12 ET*
2162 2159 2162 2159
40° 12° 40° 12°
1xQT12 1xQT12 1xQT12 1xQT12
···F/1x150 QT32* ···W-F/1x150 QT32*
2161 2161
35° 35°
1xQT32 60-150 1xQT32 60-150
E27 E27
···R/1x75 QPAR30 ···W-R/1x75 QPAR30
2163 2163
– –
1xQPAR 30 75 1xQPAR 30 75
E27 E27
35-90 35-90 35-90 35-90
*Use only lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
62
GY6.35 GY6.35 GY6.35 GY6.35
3-phase adapter The voltage-track adapters for 3-phase voltage tracks convince thanks to their increased mechanical stability and functional advantages such as earthed conductor connection and phase selection after installation.
···m
≈kg
white
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
0.8 0.8
1.2 1.2
•
0.8 0.8
1.2 1.2
•
silver-grey
white
• •
silver-grey
• •
•
•
63
Voltage-track spotlights CLASSICA for high-pressure lamps
Version Spotlights for 3-phase voltage tracks, can be pivoted by 120° and oriented by 355°.
···F··· Distribution characteristic “flood” ···S··· Distribution characteristic “spot”
Equipment • Metal halide lamp HIT-CRI 35 W, 70 W or 150 W • High-pressure sodium vapour lamp HST-CRI 50 W or 100 W.
Luminaire body Ellipsoid reflector housing with ergonomic handle. Silver-grey ···W··· White
Reflector Aluminium, semi-specular (HST) or highly-specular in MRU-technology for optimised uniform circular surface lighting (HIT). ···HIT··· version includes an integrated safety glass with UV protection.
Electrical connection With easy-to-handle voltagetrack adapter for commercial 3-phase voltage-track systems. Spotlights can be adjusted to the desired circuit without using tools. ···HIT··· optionally available with inductive ballast or electronic control gear, ···HST··· with inductive ballast in housing which is colouradapted to reflector housing. Indications Page Data tables 66 Surface-mounted voltage tracks 68 Recessed voltage tracks 70 Lamp characteristics 444
652d
64
Reference CLASSICA···
Data table
Lamps
Socket
···F/1x35 HIT ···F/1x35 HIT E ···F/1x70 HIT ···F/1x70 HIT E ···F/1x150 HIT ···F/1x150 HIT E ···S/1x35 HIT ···S/1x35 HIT E ···S/1x70 HIT ···S/1x70 HIT E ···S/1x150 HIT ···S/1x150 HIT E ···W-F/1x35 HIT ···W-F/1x35 HIT E ···W-F/1x70 HIT ···W-F/1x70 HIT E ···W-F/1x150 HIT ···W-F/1x150 HIT E ···W-S/1x35 HIT ···W-S/1x35 HIT E ···W-S/1x70 HIT ···W-S/1x70 HIT E ···W-S/1x150 HIT ···W-S/1x150 HIT E
2162 2162 2162 2162 2162 2162 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2162 2162 2162 2162 2162 2162 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160 2160
40° 40° 40° 40° 40° 40° 17° 17° 17° 17° 17° 17° 40° 40° 40° 40° 40° 40° 17° 17° 17° 17° 17° 17°
1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI 1xHIT-CRI
···F/1x50 HST ···F/1x100 HST ···W-F/1x50 HST ···W-F/1x100 HST
2161 2161 2161 2161
35° 35° 35° 35°
1xHST-CRI 1xHST-CRI 1xHST-CRI 1xHST-CRI
35 35 70 70 150 150 35 35 70 70 150 150 35 35 70 70 150 150 35 35 70 70 150 150 50 100 50 100
G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 PG12-1 PG12-1 PG12-1 PG12-1
···m
≈kg
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
3.0 1.4 3.0 1.4 3.2 1.6 3.0 1.4 3.0 1.4 3.2 1.6 3.0 1.4 3.0 1.4 3.2 1.6 3.0 1.4 3.0 1.4 3.2 1.6
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
3.5 3.8 3.5 3.8
white
silver-grey
white
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
silver-grey
•
•
•
white
•
•
•
silver-grey
•
•
•
• • •
•
• •
•
• •
• •
65
Planning indications
Data table no. 2161
1 Luminous intensity distribution
1 Luminous intensity distribution
80 000 60 000
2 500
30 000
2 000
25 000
40 000 1 000
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
Ø/m 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80
19 000 4 800 2 100 2 250 1 200 530 Illuminance Em / lx
Ø/m 0.21 0.42 0.63 0.84 1.05 1.26
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
3
Spacing h/m
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram 35°
2 Cone diagram 17°
2 Cone diagram 12°
-45° -30° -15°
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Spacing h/m
Spacing h/m
→
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
3 Lamp data
3 Lamp data
Lamp type
Lamp type
Lamp type
Lamp type
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Metal halide lamp
Socket
High-pressure sodium vapour lamp with improved colour rendering
Metal halide lamp
Socket
Socket
G 12
PG12-1
Lamp designation
G 12
Lamp designation
LBS ILCOS
LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V 1800 1.00 HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35
HIT 150W G12 MT-150/30/1B-H-G12 HIT 70W G12 MT-70/30/1B-H-G12 HIT 35W G12 MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor 14000
1.30
6600
0.87
3300
0.48
e.g. Philips SDW-T
Lamp designation
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor
LBS HST-C 100W PG12-1 ILCOS STH-100-H/E-PD12 LBS HST-C 50W PG12-1 ILCOS STH-50-H/E-PD12 Lamp type
4800 2300
1.60 0.92
Socket
Socket
Lamp designation
66
2400
15°
1 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
¶/m 0.17 0.35 0.50 0.70 0.85 1.05
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
LBS ILCOS
5 000 1 250 550 300 200 150
Spacing h/m
Cone diagram 30° ¶/m 0.25 0.55 0.80 1.05 1.35 1.60
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor 14000
1.30
6600
0.75
3300
0.39
GY 6.35
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor
LBS QT32 150W/m E27 ILCOS HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27
0°
36 000 9 000 4 000 2 250 1 450 1 000
Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
E 27
3-phase voltage tracks for recess, surface and suspended mounting offer a wide planning scope for the arrangement of CLASSICA spotlights, thus forming the basis of flexible and variable accentuation and architectural lighting.
LBS HIT 150W G12 ILCOS MT-150/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HIT 70W G12 ILCOS MT-70/30/1B-H-G12 LBS HIT 35W G12 ILCOS MT-35/30/1B-H-G12 Lamp type
Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with semi-specular bulb
Lamp designation
-45° -30° -15°
Socket
Lamp type
2 000
2 Cone diagram 10° Ø/m 0.37 0.73 1.10 1.47 1.83 2.20
3 Lamp data
Lamp designation
15°
9 000 2 250 1 000 560 360 250
Lamp data
GY 6.35
0°
2 Cone diagram 40° Ø/m 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.27 1.58 1.90
36 000 9 000 4 000 2 250 1 450 1 000
-45° -30° -15°
Illuminance Em / lx
I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
Illuminance Em / lx
15°
I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
Illuminance Em / lx
0°
5 000
→
→
→
-45° -30° -15°
3 000 30°
10 000
500
→
20 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
4 000
15 000
8 000 4 000
5 000
20 000
1 500
12 000
7 000 6 000 10°
Illuminance Em / lx
20 000 16 000
Data table no. 2163
Data table no. 2162
1 Luminous intensity distribution
1 Luminous intensity distribution
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V 1800 0.25 HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35
5 750 1 450 650 360 230 160
Illuminance Em / lx
Data table no. 2160
Data table no. 2159 1 Luminous intensity distribution
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
Socket E 27
Lamp designation
1.00
LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
QPAR30 75W/10° E27 HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/10 QPAR30 75W/30° E27 HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/30
Beam angle 10° 30°
3-phase adapter CLASSICA spotlights are equipped with an electrical universal adapter for 3-phase voltage tracks. Installation as well as phase selection and earthed conductor connection can be effected without using tools.
E
3-phase adapter with integrated ballast Spotlights for high-pressure lamps are equipped with a ballast housing within the area of the voltage-track adapter. An additional locking device assures safe retention of the spotlights within the voltage track, also in case of increased loads.
E EU 27 WS
EU 37
E EU 30 WS
EU 24 WS
Connection elements Cross, L- and T-connectors as well as flexible couplings enable versatile arrangements for voltage tracks, thus assuring maximum flexibility and variability as to the architectural design and installation of lighting installations with spotlights.
400 V/16 A N L1 L2 L3
Mains supply with 3-phase A.C. 400 V/16 A
230 V/16 A N LX
EU 27 WS
EU 37
E
Feeding and connection elements (planning indications for earthed conductor) In 3-phase voltage tracks, the earthed conductor is guided on one side in the lower profile edge. During the planning, the feeding and connection elements have to be selected in such a way that the continuous guidance of the earthed conductor is assured. The location of the earthed conductor is shown in the product illustrations on the following accessories pages, defined for a viewing direction looking down at the voltage-track system from above.
EU 29 WS
Mains supply with 1-phase A.C. 230 V/16 A
EU 35 WS
E
The planning example above shows the guidance of the earthed conductor including the arrangement of the corresponding feeding and connection elements.
Connection possibilities for 3-phase voltage tracks with the 3-phase mains 400 V Max. load 3 x 3600 W = 10800 W. Single fuse protection of all three phases with 3 x 16 A. Cable crosssection 5 x 1.5 mm2 up to 5 x 2.5 mm2. Connection possibilities for 3-phase voltage tracks with A.C. network 230 V Max. load 3600 W, optional distribution to 3 circuits. Protection 1 x 16 A. Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 up to 3 x 2.5 mm2.
67
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories for surface and suspended mounting
Easy direct ceiling mounting of the surface-mounted voltage track thanks to preperforated longitudinal fixing holes as well as fixing clamps. In addition, wire and pendant suspensions enable suspended mounting of the surface-mounted voltage tracks. The surface-mounted voltage tracks and the accessories are available in three versions:
32
···WS white ···SW black ···AL silver-grey
36
3-phase voltage tracks for surface and suspended mounting white EU 10 WS ...........1000 mm EU 20 WS ...........2000 mm EU 21 WS ...........3000 mm EU 22 WS ...........4000 mm black EU 10 SW ...........1000 mm EU 20 SW ...........2000 mm EU 21 SW ...........3000 mm EU 22 SW ...........4000 mm silver-grey EU 10 AL ............1000 mm EU 20 AL ............2000 mm EU 21 AL ............3000 mm EU 22 AL ............4000 mm Consisting of an extruded aluminium profile, white, black or silver-grey which serves as earthed conductor at the same time, and an inserted, folded plastic profile with 4 embedded copper conductors, each with a crosssection of 3 mm2 for three separately switchable circuits. Can be shortened on site. Connection elements for voltage tracks When selecting the feedings and the different connector versions, attention must be paid to the continuous guidance of the earthed conductor. The earthed conductor is always guided in the lower profile edge and results from the voltage tracks course. The dimensional illustrations show the voltage-track components from above.
68
Feeding EU 24··· Earthed conductor, left* Front- and upper-plane feeding possibilities.
Feeding EU 25··· Earthed conductor, right* Front- and upper-plane feeding possibilities.
L-connector EU 27··· Earthed conductor, interior* Lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
L-connector EU 79··· Earthed conductor, exterior* Lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
T-connector EU 30··· Earthed conductor, left* Lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
T-connector EU 29··· Earthed conductor, right* Lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
Cross connector EU 31··· Upper-plane feeding possibilities.
*Earthed conductor, viewed from above
Flexible coupling EU 33 WS, EU 33 SW Upper-plane feeding possibility.
Wire suspension L 23··· Steel wire for suspension lengths of up to 1.40 m, length to be regulated, including fixing clamp.
Longitudinal connector EU 78··· with lateral or upper-plane central feeding.
Pendant suspension L 19··· Pendant rod with canopy for suspension length 1.2 m, can be shortened, including fixing clamp.
Longitudinal connector EU 26··· interior, for gap-free electrical connection of two voltage tracks. End cap EU 35··· Front-plane conclusion.
Fixing clamp EU 80··· Fixing clamp for alignment of two voltage tracks. Fixing clamp EU 23··· Fixing clamp for surface ceiling mounting.
Carrying capacity of voltage tracks Suspension distance Max. number of of fixing points load points per 1000 mm* 1000 mm 500 mm 333 mm
4 4 3 *assuming uniform distribution
Suspended mounting Easy-to-handle fixing clamps for wire and pendant suspensions and wire suspensions with continually and toolfree adjustable wire lengths guarantee easy and rapid mounting of suspended voltage-track systems.
Max. weight per load point
3 kg 5 kg 10 kg
Point outlet AP 75 for surface ceiling mounting For individual mounting of spotlights. (Not for CLASSICA ···35 HIT, ···70 HIT, ···150 HIT···, ···HST due to additional gear box).
69
3-phase voltage tracks and accessories for recess mounting
44
The recessed voltage tracks are equipped with lateral support profiles serving as ceiling support in case of suspended ceilings. Profile suspensions guarantee easy suspension of the recessed voltage tracks from the ceiling fundament.
36
2 11,5
3-phase voltage tracks for recess mounting EUE 20 WS .........2000 mm EUE 21 WS .........3000 mm EUE 22 WS .........4000 mm Consisting of an extruded aluminium profile, white, which serves as earthed conductor at the same time and an inserted, folded plastic profile with 4 embedded copper conductors. with a cross-section of 3 mm2 for three separately switchable circuits. Can be easily shortened on site. Connection elements for voltage tracks When selecting the feedings and the different connector versions, attention must be paid to the continuous guidance of the earthed conductor. The earthed conductor is always guided in the lower profile edge and results from the voltage tracks course.
Feeding EUE 24 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor left*. Front- or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
Feeding EUE 25 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor right*. Front- or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
L-connector EUE 27 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor interior*, lateral or upperplane feeding possibilities.
L-connector EUE 79 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor exterior*, lateral or upperplane feeding possibilities.
T-connector EUE 30 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor left*, lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
T-connector EUE 29 WS with surrounding ceiling support, earthed conductor right*, lateral or upper-plane feeding possibilities.
The opposite dimensional illustrations show the voltage-track components from above. Cross connector EUE 31 WS with surrounding ceiling support, upper-plane feeding possibility.
*Earthed conductor, viewed from above
70
Longitudinal connector EUE 26 WS interior, for gap-free electrical connection of two voltage tracks.
Feeding EUE 41 WS “Wall-to-wall” feeding for recess and “wall-to-wall” mounting including end cap EUE 42 WS.
Longitudinal connector EUE 78 WS with surrounding ceiling support, lateral or upperplane central feeding.
End cap EUE 42 WS Front-plane conclusion for 3-phase voltage track EUE···, interior, for “wall-to-wall” mounting.
End bracket EUE 35 WS Front-plane conclusion with ceiling support.
Point outlet EP 81 for recess mounting For individual mounting of spotlights.
Recess mounting of point outlet in system ceilings Additional mounting plates MP 31 are recommended in suspended system ceilings or closed ceilings (wood, gypsum plaster or similar) with low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance.
(Not for CLASSICA ···35 HIT, ···70 HIT, ···150 HIT···, ···HST due to additional gear box).
Profile suspension EUE 40 WS 2 pieces, for suspended mounting of recessed voltage tracks for recess mounting with quick-acting tension spring.
Mounting plate MP 31 For recess mounting of point outlets EP 81 in ceilings with low load-bearing capability.
71
T·200
72
Katalog 2001
Spotlight modules Spotlight modules with cardanic suspension for halogen, metal halide and highpressure sodium vapour lamps are striking components for accentuation lighting. They meet the architectural and functional demands for a successful integration into the T·200 system.
Positionable modules The positionable louvre modules prove themselves as a superb feature of the T·200 tubular track system: The manœuvrability through a range of ± 50° offers ample scope of movement for enabling excellent illumination in both confined and expansive areas.
Translucent modules Due to a convincing double-reflection technology, translucent modules create a comfortable and completely uniform brightness. These modules are thus specially recommended for lighting of workstations equipped with TFT screen systems.
Louvre luminaires The combination of louvre luminaires and flexible tubular track arrangements offers a maximum planning scope. The parabolic louvres – in either semi-specular or highly-specular finish – are fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II.
Diffuser luminaires 333··· series diffuser luminaires can also be integrated in the T·200 system. This series with opal and translucent PLEXIGLAS diffusers is documented from page 262 on, including the necessary fixing accessories for integration in the tubular track system T·200.
Page 80
Page 92
Page 96
Page 98
Page 262
Katalog 2001
73
T·200 The essence of lighting
Light attracts – this motto acknowledges the fact that good lighting attracts prospective clients, and charges the feel of the facility. In other words: Accentuated light, focused on sales objects, creates the basic conditions for an effective presentation of goods. However, the necessary basic lighting component must meet modern design criteria. This results in diverging lighting tasks which have been solved so far with different lighting systems. The innovative tubular track system T·200 divorces this concept from tradition! Luminaires for accentuation lighting and general lighting are now combined in a single lighting system. An impressive example is shown here: ultra-low-profile translucent modules for a uniform basic lighting are combined with flexible spotlights in cardanic suspension.
74
Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001
75
T·200 Dynamic design & architecture
Creative lighting solutions Bored with office lighting? Enter the new, versatile tubular track system T·200. Tubular track arrangements promote creative lighting solutions. This planning scope is further extended by use of nodes and jointed connectors – adaptation to a multitude of architectural scenarios guaranteed. Photometric components provide the right light, e.g. louvre luminaires for general lighting or for task area lighting – fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, no matter if traditional DSE equipment or innovative TFT screens are used.
76
Katalog 2001
Positionable spotlight or louvre modules challenge you to play with light. Depending on the lamp type used, they allow accentuation in both confined and expansive areas.
Katalog 2001
77
T·200 Programme review
Active lighting components T·200 tubular track arrangements offer a multitude of combinations with five different photometric systems: Spotlight modules in single, double or triple arrangement for halogen lamps. Spotlight modules for high-pressure lamps. Positionable modules for halogen lamps, compact fluorescent lamps and T5 fluorescent lamps. Translucent modules for T5 fluorescent lamps. Louvre luminaires for T5 fluorescent lamps. The electrical connection of these luminaires is effected by mains cables which are connected with the throughwiring sets within the rods. In addition, 333··· series surface-mounted diffuser luminaires can also be used, see page 262.
Pages 80-87
Spotlight modules in single, double and triple arrangement, with semi-specular, highly-specular or facetted specular reflectors for • low-voltage halogen lamps up to 50 W, beam angle 10°, • low-voltage halogen lamps up to 100 W, beam angle 8°, • mains-voltage halogen lamps 150 W, beam angle 33°, • halogen PAR lamps 75 W, beam angle 10° or 30°. 78
Katalog 2001
Pages 88-91
Spotlight modules with semi-specular or specular facetted reflectors for • metal halide lamps 35 W, beam angle 13°, • metal halide lamps 70 W, beam angle 13°, • high-pressure sodium vapour lamps 50 W, beam angle 33°, • high-pressure sodium vapour lamps 100 W, beam angle 33°.
Design scope Geometrical arrangements realised with T·200 nodes or jointed connectors offer increased design scope, allowing to enhance the architectural aspects of the built environment.
Pages 92-95
Positionable modules direct or direct/indirect, with crossblade louvres or parabolic louvres for • mains-voltage halogen lamps 150 W, • compact fluorescent lamps 26 W, • T5 fluorescent lamps, ¶ 16 mm.
Pages 96-97
Translucent modules direct/indirect, with primary diffuser and interior, slotperforated reflector for • T5 fluorescent lamps, ¶ 16 mm.
Pages 98-101
Louvre luminaires direct/indirect, with parabolic louvres for task area and general lighting with • T5 fluorescent lamps, ¶ 16 mm.
Katalog 2001
79
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps with highly-specular reflector, beam angle 10°
Application Spotlight modules for brilliant accentuation lighting in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants.
Reference
Lamps/Socket max. W 1xQT12 50/GY6.35
5951/QT50
Length mm 320
≈kg
Reference
1.2
5952/QT50
Lamps/Socket max. W 2xQT12 50/GY6.35
Length mm 498
≈kg 1.7
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. With electronic transformers, dimming is possible when combined with phase-chop dimmers to be provided by the client.
239
Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements with integrated electronic transformer for incorporation into the tubular track system. 5951··· Single module 5952··· Double module 5953··· Triple module
239
Reflectors For low-voltage halogen lamps 12 V, 50 W, socket GY6.35, preferably with axial filament. In case of reduced lighting requirements 35 W or 20 W lamps can also be used. Highly-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Beam angle 10°.
102
166 320
102
166 498
∅90
∅90
QT/12 V
166
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2020
QT/12 V
∅90
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2020
Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
80
Page 102 103 103 444
Low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps with great colour rendering are predestined for accentuation lighting. Use of lamps with axial filament guarantees exact focussing.
Light in motion Systems destined for accentuation lighting must allow flexible adaptation to new lighting tasks. An exemplary solution are T·200 spotlights which offer optimal room for movement due to their cardanic suspension.
Reference
Lamps/Socket max. W 3xQT12 50/GY6.35
5953/QT50
Length mm 676
≈kg 2.2
652dj Degree of protection
239
max. 157°
14°
14°
14°
IP 20
Data table no. 2020 1 Luminous intensity distribution 14 000
102
166
166 676
12 000
166
10 000 8 000 6 000 4 000
∅90
∅90
2 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
→
∅90
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 10° C 0 - C 180
Ø/m 0.17 0.35 0.50 0.70 0.85 1.05
Data table No. 2020
9 900 2 400 1 100 625 400 275 Illuminance Em / lx
QT/12 V
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket GY 6.35
Lamp designation LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor QT-ax 12 50W GY6.35 12V 930 1.00 HSG/AX/UB-50-12-GY 6.35 QT-ax 12 35W GY6.35 12V 600 0.65 HSG/AX/UB-35-12-GY 6.35 QT-ax 12 20W GY6.35 12V 320 0.34 HSG/AX/UB-20-12-GY 6.35
Technical information see page 440.
Electronic transformers The adapter units of low-voltage spotlight modules are equipped as standard with electronic transformers. Essential characteristics of these devices are a soft lamp start and easy dimming by means of phase-chop dimmers.
81
Spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 8°
Application Spotlight modules for brilliant accentuation lighting in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants.
Reference
Lamps/Socket Length max. W mm 1xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 394
5951 HO/QT90
≈kg
Reference
1.4
5952 HO/QT90
Lamps/Socket Length max. W mm 2xQT12 35-100/GY6.35 572
≈kg 2.2
239
Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements with integrated electronic transformer for incorporation into the tubular track system. 5951··· Single module 5952··· Double module 5953··· Triple module
239
Reflectors For low-voltage halogen lamps 12 V, 90 W or 100 W, socket GY6.35, preferably with axial filament. In case of reduced lighting requirements 75 W, 50 W or 35 W lamps can also be used. With specular facetted surface. Highly-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Beam angle 8°.
102
102
166 394
572
∅130
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. With electronic transformers, dimming is possible when combined with phase-chop dimmers to be provided by the client.
QT/12 V
166
166
∅130
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2021
QT/12 V
∅130
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2021
Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
82
Page 102 103 103 444
Low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps with great colour rendering are predestined for accentuation lighting. Use of lamps with axial filament guarantees exact focussing.
Multiple modules Spotlight modules in single, double or triple arrangement can also be combined to form longer units. In this case only one adapter unit is necessary at the junction between the modules. T·200 modules can be modified accordingly before leaving our premises, on request.
Reference
Lamps/Socket max. W 3xQT12 35-100/GY6.35
5953 HO/QT90
Length mm 750
≈kg 3.0
652dZ Degree of protection
239
max. 157°
43°
43°
43°
IP 20
Data table no. 2021 1 Luminous intensity distribution
166
166 750
166
∅130
∅130
∅130
40 000 35 000 30 000 25 000 20 000 15 000 10 000 5 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
→
102
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 8° C 0 - C 180
Ø/m 0.15 0.30 0.40 0.55 0.70 0.85
Data table No. 2021
26 000 6 600 2 900 1 600 1 000 750 Illuminance Em / lx
QT/12 V
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Low-voltage halogen lamp 12 V with axial filament
Socket GY 6.35
Lamp designation LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor QT-ax 12 100W GY6.35 12V 2200 1.22 HSG/AX/UB-100-12-GY6.35 QT-ax 12 90W GY6.35 12V 1800 1.00 HSG/AX/UB-90-12-GY6.35 QT-ax 12 75W GY6.35 12V 1450 0.81 HSG/AX/UB-75-12-GY6.35 QT-ax 12 50W GY6.35 12V 930 0.52 HSG/AX/UB-50-12-GY6.35 QT-ax 12 35W GY6.35 12V 600 0.33 HSG/AX/UB-35-12-GY6.35
Technical information see page 440.
Brilliant facets The reflector of the high-lumen spotlight modules has a surface structure consisting of multiple precise facets which lend the reflector a truly “brilliant” appearance.
83
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33°
Application Spotlight modules for brilliant accentuation lighting of larger surfaces in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants.
Reference 5951 HO/QT150
Lamps/Socket max. W 1xQT32 60-150/E27
Length mm 320
≈kg
Reference
1.4
5952 HO/QT150
Lamps/Socket max. W 2xQT32 60-150/E27
Length mm 498
≈kg 2.3
Reflectors For mains-voltage halogen lamps 230 V, 150 W, socket E27, preferably with semispecular encapsulated bulb. In case of reduced lighting requirements 60 W, 75 W or 100 W lamps can also be used. Semi-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Beam angle 33°. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements for integration into the tubular track system. 5951··· Single module 5952··· Double module 5953··· Triple module Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit.
QT
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2022
QT
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2022
Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
84
Page 102 103 103 444
Mains-voltage halogen lamps Mains-voltage lamps offer halogen light for direct mains connection, without additional transformer units. Mains-voltage lamps with semi-specular encapsulated bulb are recommended for T·200 spotlight modules.
Design quality to the last detail The technical demands placed on the spotlight modules are reflected in a distinctive function-oriented appearance, with system components perfectly integrated into the productspecific techno-design.
Reference
Lamps/Socket max. W 3xQT32 60-150/E27
5953 HO/QT150
Length mm 676
≈kg 3.0
652dN Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2022 1 Luminous intensity distribution
→
4 000 3 500 3 000 2 500 2 000 1 500 1 000 500 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33° C 0 - C 180
Ø/m 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80
Data table No. 2022
9 200 2 300 1 000 575 375 250
Illuminance Em / lx
QT
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with semi-specular bulb
Socket E 27
Lamp designation LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor
QT32 150W/m E27 HEGT/F/UB-150-320-E27 QT32 100W/m E27 HEGT/F/UB-100-320-E27 QT32 75W/m E27 HEGT/F/UB-75-320-E27 QT32 60W/m E27 HEGT/F/UB-60-320-E27
2400
1.00
1430
0.60
1050
0.44
780
0.33
Technical information see page 440.
Semi-specular reflector Semi-specular reflector surfaces create a very uniform lighting of accentuated areas. This impression is further promoted by use of mains-voltage halogen lamps with semi-specular encapsulated bulb.
85
Spotlight modules for mains-voltage halogen lamps with PAR reflector, beam angle 10° or 30°
Application Spotlight modules for accentuation lighting with halogen reflector lamps PAR – with either spot or flood characteristic depending on the lamp type – in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants.
Reference
Lamps/Socket W 1xQPAR75/E27
5951 HO/QPAR75
Length mm 320
≈kg
Reference
1.4
5952 HO/QPAR75
Lamps/Socket W 2xQPAR75/E27
Length mm 498
≈kg 2.2
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
239
Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements for integration into the tubular track system. 5951··· Single module 5952··· Double module 5953··· Triple module
239
Lamps For mains-voltage halogen lamps 75 W with PAR reflector, socket E27. Beam angle 10° or 30°.
118
118
166 320
498
∅130
Q PAR
∅130
Data table No. 2023
C 0 - C 180
10°
10°
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
86
Page 102 103 103 444
166
166
30°
Q PAR
∅130
Data table No. 2023
C 0 - C 180
10°
30°
30°
Halogen PAR lamps The tried-and-tested PAR lamps are now also available as halogen versions, in spot and flood characteristic with beam angles of 10° or 30° respectively. Within the tubular track system T·200 these brilliant light sources can be used for both confined and expansive accentuation surfaces.
Wiring passage within the rods The rods of the T·200 system are open towards the ceiling and can easily be equipped with through-wiring sets. Separate switching of luminaire and spot modules can simply be realised by use of separate mains cables within the rods.
Reference
Lamps/Socket W 3xQPAR75/E27
5953 HO/QPAR75
Length mm 676
≈kg
10°
3.0
30°
652d WU Degree of protection
239
max. 157°
43°
43°
43°
IP 20
Data table no. 2023 1 Luminous intensity distribution 7 000 6 000
118
166
166 676
10°
166
5 000 4 000 3 000
30° ∅130
∅130
2 000
1 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
→
∅130
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 10° Ø/m 0.17 0.35 0.50 0.70 0.85 1.05
Data table No. 2023
C 0 - C 180
10°
30°
5 000 1 250 550 300 200 150 Illuminance Em / lx
Q PAR
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
Cone diagram, beam angle 30° 5 750 1 450 650 360 230 160
Illuminance Em / lx
Ø/m 0.25 0.55 0.80 1.05 1.35 1.60
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Mains-voltage halogen lamp 230 V with PAR reflector
Socket E 27
Lamp designation
Node = Design freedom Additional design scope for lighting installations with the T·200 system is realised by the corresponding nodes with continuously adjustable angles. A maximum of four connections is possible.
LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
QPAR30 75W/10° E27 HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/10 QPAR30 75W/30° E27 HMG-PARD-75-230-E27-97/30
Beam angle 10° 30°
Technical information see page 440.
87
Spotlight modules for metal halide lamps HIT with specular facetted reflector, beam angle 13°
Application Spotlight modules for economic accentuation lighting in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants. Reflector For 1 metal halide lamp 35 W or 70 W, preferably in ceramic version, socket G12. With facetted brilliant surface and integrated safety glass with UV protection. Highly-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Beam angle 13°. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame with ballast, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements for integration into the tubular track system. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with inductive ballast, parallel compensated. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
88
Page 102 103 103 444
Metal halide lamps HIT For accentuation lighting metal halide lamps convince thanks to numerous advantages: great colour rendering, increased luminous efficiency, reduced heat dissipation and increased service life.
Light in motion Systems destined for accentuation lighting must allow flexible adaptation to new lighting tasks. An exemplary solution are T·200 spotlights which offer optimal room for movement due to their cardanic suspension.
Reference
Lamps/Socket W 1xHIT-CRI 35/G12 1xHIT-CRI 70/G12
5951 HO/HIT35 5951 HO/HIT70
Length mm 520 520
≈kg 3.3 3.5
652d SX Degree of protection 34°
239
max. 157°
IP 20
Data table no. 2024 1 Luminous intensity distribution 50 000
366 520
145
40 000 30 000 20 000
→
10 000 ∅130
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 13° C 0 - C 180
Ø/m 0.25 0.45 0.70 0.90 1.15 1.35
Data table No. 2024
34 000 8 500 3 800 2 100 1 350 950 Illuminance Em / lx
HIT
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type Metal halide lamp
Socket G 12
Lamp designation LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
HIT 70W G12 MT-70/30/1B-H-G12 HIT 35W G12 MT-35/30/1B-H-G12
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor 6600
1.00
3400
0.52
Technical information see page 440.
Glass ceramic cover (UV filter) The reflectors of the HIT modules are equipped as standard with heat-resistant glass ceramic covers which offer safe protection in case of mechanical defects of metal halide lamps.
Wall adaptation Wall adapters increase the arrangement scope of the T·200 tubular track system. They allow the creation of architecturally appealing wall-to-wall installations. In addition, wall adapters can be used to introduce the mains cable in case of wall outlets.
89
Spotlight modules for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps HST with semi-specular reflector, beam angle 33°
Application Spotlight modules for economic accentuation lighting of larger surfaces in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants. Reflector For 1 high-pressure sodium vapour lamp 50 W or 100 W, socket PG12-1, in version with improved colour rendering. Semi-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Beam angle 33°. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium swivel frame with ballast, integrated aluminium reflector housing and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material. Frame and reflector housing can be pivoted in two planes by means of the cardanic suspension. End adapter elements for integration into the tubular track system. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with inductive ballast, parallel compensated. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
90
Page 102 103 103 444
High-pressure sodium vapour lamps The semi-specular reflectors of T·200 spotlight modules for colour-improved high-pressure sodium vapour lamps guarantee a uniform accentuated illumination of expansive areas.
Improved colour rendering High-pressure sodium vapour lamps are especially economic light sources. The development of versions with improved colour rendering has allowed successful utilisation in interior applications.
Reference
Lamps/Socket W 1xHST-CRI 50/PG12-1 1xHST-CRI 100/PG12-1
5951 HO/HST50 5951 HO/HST100
Length mm 520 520
≈kg 3.4 4.3
652d TY Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2025 1 Luminous intensity distribution 7 000 6 000 5 000 4 000 3 000 2 000
→
1 000 I/cd 30° 45° → ¥
-45° -30° -15°
0°
15°
2 Cone diagram, beam angle 33° C 0 - C 180
Ø/m 0.60 1.20 1.80 2.40 3.00 3.60
Data table No. 2025
4 500 1 100 500 275 180 125
Illuminance Em / lx
HST-C
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Spacing h/m
3 Lamp data Lamp type High-pressure sodium vapour lamp with improved colour rendering
Socket PG12-1
Lamp version e.g. Philips SDW-T
Lamp designation LBS ILCOS LBS ILCOS
HST-C 100W PG12-1 STH-100-H/E-PG12 HST-C 50W PG12-1 STH-50-H/E-PG12
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor 2300
1.00
4800
2.09
Technical information see page 440.
Versatile lighting systems Thanks to a multitude of photometric components the T·200 tubular track system is truly versatile: classical louvre luminaires, translucent modules, positionable modules and cardanic spotlights provide good light and brilliant accentuation.
Rapid mounting, rapid new positioning Easy-to-handle locking elements of the adapter units allow a simple and safe integration of T·200 spotlights into the tubular track system. In case the lighting conditions change, they assure that the position of the spotlight modules can be adapted in no time.
91
Compact positionable modules with cross-blade louvre RSV for mains-voltage halogen lamps or with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX for compact fluorescent lamps Application For accentuated lighting effects in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants. Optical system Direct. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. RSV Semi-specular louvre with graduated concave-profiled cross blades made of anodised aluminium, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. RPX Micro-segmented, highly-specular louvre made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of positionable louvre module in compact version, manœuvrability ± 50° for accentuated lighting effects. End adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material assure safe integration of positionable louvre modules into the T·200 tubular track system. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. 5961 RPX/TC-D26 E with electronic control gear (E). Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
92
Page 102 103 103 444
Greater accentuation range Compact positionable modules are optionally available in versions for double-ended halogen lamps with great colour rendering or for energy-saving compact fluorescent lamps.
Manœuvrability Thanks to their manœuvrability of ± 50° the positionable modules of the T·200 tubular track system create the perfect conditions for expansive and yet accentuated lighting effects.
Reference 5961 RSV/QTDE150
Lamps/Socket W 1xQT-DE150/R7s
Length mm 376
≈kg
Reference
1.0
5961 RPX/TCD26 E
Lamps/Socket W 1xTC-DEL26/G24q-3
Length mm 450
≈kg 1.3
652d R Degree of protection 50° 95
239
95
239
50°
IP 20
Data table no. 2026 1 Arrangement 2.75
64
224 376
64
2.25
224 450
30°
-1.0
0
Wall surface 1.0
→
0.85
Horizontal working plane
z/m 1.0 → y / m
0
Calculation parameters
QT-DE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2026
TC-DEL
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2026
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.25/BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2
ρ v lp
Reflectance values Light loss factor Suspension length
2 Illuminances
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.5 m
Horizontal working plane 2.0
150 100
50
1.0
25
0
→
1.0
-2.0
-1.0
0
1.0
3 Illuminances
y/m 2.0 → x / m Wall surface
50
→
300
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 200 0.5 100 z/m 1.0 2.0 → y / m
-2.0
-1.0
0
4 Photometric characteristics Reference
Lamps
5961 RSV/QTDE 150 5961 RPX/TCD 26 E
1 x 150 W 1 x 26 W
Luminous Multipl. flux / lm factor 2600 0.85 1800 0.49
Technical information see page 440.
Lamp-specific louvres The photometric alternatives of the T·200 positionable louvre modules include uniformly illuminated RSV louvres for high-lumen, mains-voltage halogen lamps and RPX parabolic louvres for compact fluorescent lamps offering exact light distribution.
T·200 – functional and flexible Compact positionable modules and cardanic spotlights for accentuation lighting in combination with conventional, workzone-oriented or ambience-enhancing lighting components are design tools which allow architectural perfection of the lighting situation.
93
∑
Positionable modules with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application For accentuated lighting of expansive surfaces in sales areas, showrooms, reception halls, conference rooms, corridors, hotels and restaurants. Optical system Direct/indirect louvre for increased lighting efficiency. Micro-segmented, highlyspecular RPX louvre made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. When positioned horizontally fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of positionable louvre module, manœuvrability ± 50° for expansive and yet accentuated lighting effects. End adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material assure safe integration of positionable louvre modules into the T·200 tubular track system. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with electronic control gear (E). Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Overhead reflectors Lamp characteristics
94
Page 102 103 103 103 444
Colours – identify and design As tried-and-tested architectural design elements, colours are an effective means to create and promote a companyspecific corporate design and individual identity. T·200 components are available in special coatings on request, allowing the adaptation of the lighting installation to an architectural colour concept.
Reference
Lamps W 1x24 1x39 2x24 2x39
5961 RPX/24 E 5961 RPX/39 E 5961 RPX/2x24 E 5961 RPX/2x39 E
Length mm 890 1190 890 1190
≈kg 1.7 2.1 1.8 2.3
652d Degree of protection
95
239
50°
Data table no. 2027 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
59
IP 20
594/24W, 894/39W 890/24W, 1190/39W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.9 5.4 7.0 8.5 10 13 16 23 30
4.3 6.0 7.5 9.0 11 14 16 24 31
6.4 9.0 12 14 17 21 26 38 50
7.2 10 13 15 18 23 27 40 52
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2027
T5
DIN 5040: D62
Data table No. 2028 (page 105) ···with overhead reflector 05960 DR/···
C 0 - C 180
T5
CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
1.0 m
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
5961 RPX/39 E + DR
ρ v e lp
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5961 RPX/24 E 5961 RPX/39 E 5961 RPX/2x24 E 5961 RPX/2x39 E
1.75 1.00 0.91 0.52
0.95 0.95 0.93 0.93
0.36 0.36 0.38 0.38
indirect ULOR
0.59 0.59 0.55 0.55
Technical information see page 440.
2.75 m
30° 500 300 200 100 50 1.5
Overhead reflector 05960 DR/··· In order to intensify the accentuated lighting effects the positionable louvre modules for T5 fluorescent lamps can easily and rapidly be equipped with additional overhead reflectors and are thus converted into purely direct versions.
1.0
0.5
0
0.5
1.0 1.5 m
Planning example: wall illumination with positionable louvre module and overhead reflector – illuminance distribution (indications in lux) Room height: 2.75 m Positionable louvre module: 5961 RPX/39 E Overhead reflector: 05960 DR/39 Pivoting angle: 30°
95
Translucent modules with double-reflection system PST, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application For increased lighting comfort in sales areas, showrooms, conference rooms as well as in offices and financial institutions. Also suitable for areas with normal DSE usage where high-intensity TFT screens are used. Optical system Translucent module in double-reflection technology PST, consisting of primary diffuser enveloping a primary reflector. Primary reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium, with slot perforation allowing a light transmission of approximately 10 %. Primary diffuser made of translucent PLEXIGLAS for low-loss forward diffusion of the transmitted light component. The ceiling surface acts as a secondary reflector and thus creates a comfortable luminance contrast to the translucent module. Luminaire body Consisting of chromed brass fixings for translucent modules and end adapter elements in aluminium/plastic material for safe integration into the T·200 tubular track system. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with electronic control gear (E). Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit. Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lamp characteristics
96
Page 102 103 103 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Translucent modules A slot-perforated interior reflector and an enveloping diffuser in highly-transmissive PLEXIGLAS are central components of the T·200 translucent modules.
Reference
Lamps W 1x24 1x39
5971 PST/24 E 5971 PST/39 E
Length mm 930 1230
≈kg 1.4 1.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
53
239
Data table no. 2029 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H 35
632/24W, 932/39W 930/24W, 1230/39W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
5.7 7.7 9.8 12 14 17 21 30 39
6.6 8.8 11 13 15 19 23 32 42
9.5 13 16 20 23 29 35 51 65
11 15 18 22 25 32 38 54 69
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2029
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
DIN 5040: D22
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ8
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
NBN L 14-002: BZ7/1.5/BZ8
Xmax = 2.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
>> 200 cd/m2
5971 PST/24 E 5971 PST/39 E
1.75 1.00
0.86 0.85
0.65 0.64
indirect ULOR
0.21 0.21
Technical information see page 440.
TFT screens Innovative optical systems which convince thanks to sensibly reduced luminances even under steep angles are specially recommended for lighting of workstations equipped with TFT screens.
Aesthetics and functionality The slender translucent modules offer attractive photometrics: optical system, adapter units and T·200 rods form an integrated whole. The progressive design is effectively enhanced by the colours of the system components.
97
∑
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application For decorative lighting of offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Reference
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 2x28 2x35
5931 RSX/28 E 5931 RSX/35 E 5931 RSX/2x28 E 5931 RSX/2x35 E
Optical system Direct/indirect. Micro-segmented louvre made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. RSX semi-specular, RPX highly-specular.
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with electronic control gear (E). Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit.
176
Luminaire body Sheet steel, silver-grey, in slender profile design. With stable and frictionally integrated end caps in die-cast aluminium which also form a connecting design element between the subtly rounded side profiles. Integrated fixing brackets for mounting to rods.
232
Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
68
T5
1185/28W, 1485/35W 1230/28W, 1530/35W
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2030 DIN 5040: D62 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 5931 RPX/35 ED. Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Overhead reflectors Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
98
Page 102 103 103 103 431 444
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
Length mm 1230 1530 1230 1530
≈kg 3.2 3.7 3.5 4.0
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 2x28 2x35
5931 RPX/28 E 5931 RPX/35 E 5931 RPX/2x28 E 5931 RPX/2x35 E
Length mm 1230 1530 1230 1530
≈kg 3.2 3.7 3.5 4.0
652d
68
IP 20
Data table no. 2030
176
232
Degree of protection
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
1185/28W, 1485/35W 1230/28W, 1530/35W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.8 5.2 6.8 8.2 9.6 12 15 22 29
4.2 5.8 7.2 8.7 10 13 16 23 30
6.3 8.7 11 14 16 21 26 37 48
6.9 9.7 12 15 17 22 27 38 50
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2030
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
DIN 5040: D62
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5931 RPX/28 E 5931 RPX/35 E 5931 RPX/2x28 E 5931 RPX/2x35 E 5931 RSX/28 E 5931 RSX/35 E 5931 RSX/2x28 E 5931 RSX/2x35 E
1.27 1.00 0.65 0.51 1.27 1.00 0.65 0.51
0.95 0.95 0.93 0.93 0.95 0.95 0.93 0.93
0.36 0.36 0.38 0.38 0.36 0.36 0.38 0.38
indirect ULOR
0.59 0.59 0.55 0.55 0.59 0.59 0.55 0.55
Technical information see page 440.
Individual luminaires In combination with wire suspensions 05000 SN and wiring connection units 05000 ESBN the T·200 suspended luminaires 5931··· and 5941··· can also be used as individual luminaires – without rods.
Wire suspensions for individual luminaire mounting without rods 05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m, 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN (not illustrated) for mains feeding for 05000 SN.
99
∑
Suspended luminaires for task area lighting, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Task area lighting of singleor twin-desk workstations in offices and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Special task zone louvre for increased contrast rendering, made of reflection-intensified, highly-specular aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Sheet steel, silver-grey, in slender profile design. With stable and frictionally integrated end caps in die-cast aluminium which also form a connecting design element between the subtly rounded side profiles. Integrated fixing brackets for mounting to rods. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with electronic control gear (E). Mains connection is made within the rods via box terminals up to 1.5 mm2, which are also suitable for through-wiring to the next unit.
Indications Rods Nodes Suspensions Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
100
Page 102 103 103 431 444
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 80 E Isolux curve diagram
Isolux curve diagram
Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.4 Illuminance (lx)
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
600
0
2-workstation-office Room width m 3.40 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaire 5941 AD/ 2 x 80 E Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 364 (desk) lx 638 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.91 CRFmin 0.79
500 400 300
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Please contact your local TRILUX support centre for information regarding lighting management systems.
Data table no. 2031
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 5941 AD/2x24 ED.
200
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
200 300 400 500 600
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
600 500 400 300 200
0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Reference
Data table No./Page 2033/105 2032/104 2031/100
5941 AD/2x24 E 5941 AD/2x54 E 5941 AD/2x80 E
Lamps W 2x24 2x54 2x80
Length mm 630 1230 1530
≈kg 4.9 5.4 6.3
652d IP 20
176
232
Degree of protection
68
T5
585/24W, 1185/54W, 1485/80W 630/24W, 1230/54W, 1530/80W
C 0 - C 180
T5
Task area lighting T·200 luminaires in AD version offer creative and photometric flexibility. Special task zone louvres guarantee contrast-promoting light even in case luminaires are arranged directly above the working plane.
Data tables No. 2033 (2x24W) No. 2032 (2x54W) No. 2031 (2x80W) DIN 5040: D23 CIBSE BZ: BZ4/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/0.8/BZ3
Task area louvres Special task area louvres realise effective light direction in the longitudinal luminaire plane. The diagonal light distribution achieves a pleasantly decentralised illumination on the working surface, thus eliminating glare, however reflective the subject in question is, and improving contrast rendering at the same time.
101
T·200 Accessories and dimensions
100
5
50
12
40
Rods Aluminium, naturally anodised, ¶ 28 mm 05930/I/35 1 pair of rods, 1800 mm. 05930/II/35 1 pair of rods, 3200 mm. 05930/III/35 1 pair of rods, 4800 mm.
Rods closure 05930 AP 1 piece, to close off the upper side of rods 05930/···/35. Light-grey plastic material, 1600 mm long, to be snapped into the rod opening without tools. To be shortened on site.
Connector 05930 K 1 pair, in-line extruded aluminium connector to be inserted without using tools. Fits snugly into the rods 05930/···/35 to form an invisible joint.
Rod end caps 05930 E 1 pair, to close the rod ends of 05930/···/35. Chromeplated plastic end caps, to be fixed to the rods without tools.
Wall adapter 05930 WA 1 pair, to fix rods 05930/···/35 to the wall. Plastic wall adapter, chromeplated, to be fixed to rods without tools, with entry possibility for mains cable.
Distance module 05930 AM (not illustrated) 1 piece, for rods > 2000 mm not equipped with luminaire. Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable. Ceiling rose 05900 AN* as described in 05900 A, but suitable to receive a ceiling fixing unit of the wire suspensions 05930 S···.
Jointed connectors allow realisation of continuously adjustable angles between 90° and 270°. The resulting different rod lengths depending on the respective adjusted angle are indicated in the table below.
fi
c
*Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
102
Katalog 2001
Angles fi 90° 100° 110° 120° 130° 140° 150° 160° 170° 180°
Distances b/mm c/mm 200 283 168 261 140 244 115 231 93 221 73 213 54 207 35 203 17 201 0 200
b
Fixing aid 05930 MH 1 pair, to allow precise premounting of rod pairs.
Feeding tube 05302 ZR* (not illustrated) 1 piece, 1700 mm long, to be shortened on site.
The T·200 rods form a wiring channel for throughwiring on site. The wiring is made using commercial light plastic-sheathed cables, e.g. NYM.
b
Illustrations of ceiling roses can be found on page 116.
The luminaire modules are connected within the rods by means of the through-wiring set. For this purpose, each luminaire has a connection possibility laid outside the end cap.
55
200
90°- 270°
35
Jointed connector 05930 GK 1 pair, exterior, chrome finish, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. With 5-conductor wiring 1.5 mm2. Jointed connector with wire suspension 05930 GKS 1 pair, as 05930 GK, but with continuously adjustable wire suspension, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m.
Wire suspensions 1 pair, 2-point suspension, suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m. 05930 S
for continuous length adjustment by means of screw driver. 05930 SV for tool-free continuous length compensation.
Overhead reflectors Sheet steel, photometrically effective surface in white finish, exterior surface silver-grey. Easy attachment to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means of screw connection. ···DR··· closed version ···DG··· perforated version 05931 05931 05931 05931
DR/28 DR/35 DG/28 DG/35
for luminaires ···/28 W for luminaires ···/35 W for luminaires ···/28 W for luminaires ···/35 W
05960 DR/24 for 596···RPX/24 E. 05960 DR/39 for 596···RPX/39 E.
Suspension distances max. 1500 mm (2000 mm*) Charge max. 6.5 kg
Overhead reflectors Polycarbonate, white. Designed to convert positionable modules to luminaires with a purely downward light output. To be attached without tools.
*The suspension distance 2000 mm is only admissible in case the length of each luminaire between the wire suspensions is at least 800 mm.
110
117
≤ 270°
≥ 90°
Node adapter 05930 KA 1 piece, die-cast aluminium, structuralised finish, steel-grey. For the connection of rods 05930/···/35 to nodes 05900 SV or 05900 PV.
Node with pendant suspension 05900 PV 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°, coated in aluminium paint, 1 steel pendant rod, silvergrey, ¶ 13 mm, 800 mm long, with vernier clip, to be shortened on site to the required suspension lengths, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, chrome-plated.
Node with wire suspension 05900 SV 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°, coated in aluminium paint, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit, with threaded cap.
Katalog 2001
103
T·200 Practice-oriented ordering examples
3300 mm
3200 mm
Geometrical arrangements are versatile design means in modern interior architecture. The innovative tubular track system T·200 allows to combine luminaires for accentuation lighting and general lighting in a single lighting system. Exemplary solutions are shown below.
5000 mm
104
Katalog 2001
Planning example: seminar room T-shaped geometrical arrangement, with translucent modules and positionable modules for T5 fluorescent lamps
Planning example: office Multi-bended geometrical arrangement, with suspended luminaire for task area lighting and spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
Ordering example: Rods .............................................................. Reference 1 pair of rods, 3200 mm ................................ 05930/II/35 1 pair of rods, 4800 mm ............................... 05930/III/35 Luminaires 3 translucent modules................................ 5971 PST/39 E 2 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x24 E Accessories and fixings 6 pairs of wire suspensions ...................................05930 S 1 pair of jointed connectors with wire suspension......................................05930 GKS 3 pairs of rod end caps........................................ 05930 E 1 ceiling rose .................................................... 05900 AN
Ordering example: Rods ...............................................................Reference 2 pairs of rods, 4800 mm.............................. 05930/III/35 Luminaires 1 suspended luminaire ............................ 5941 AD/2 x 80 E 4 spotlight modules........................................ 5953/QT 50 Accessories and fixings 2 pairs of wire suspensions ................................ 05930 SV 3 pairs of jointed connectors with wire suspension .....................................05930 GKS 2 pairs of wall adapters ..................................... 05930 WA
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
Isolux curve diagram
200 300 400
0
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Isolux curve diagram 2-workstation-office Room width m 5.15 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 374 (desk) lx 611 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.92 CRFmin 0.80
500
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Data table no. 2032
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Data table for luminaire 5941 AD/2 x 54 E shown on page 101.
5000 mm
Illuminance (lx)
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
400 300 200
Illuminance (lx) m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
400 300 200
0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Data table no. 2028 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.7 6.2 7.6 9.1 12 15 22 29
3.5 5.1 6.5 8.0 9.3 13 15 22 30
5.4 7.8 10 13 15 20 25 36 48
5.9 8.5 11 14 16 21 26 37 49
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5961 RPX/24...+...DR 5961 RPX/39...+...DR 5961 RPX/2x24...+...DR 5961 RPX/2x39...+...DR
1.75 1.00 1.06 0.61
0.79 0.78 0.64 0.63
0.79 0.78 0.64 0.63
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
4500 mm
239 mm
Technical information see page 440.
6000 mm
3500 mm
Planning example: shop-window Straight geometrical arrangement, with spotlight modules for low-voltage halogen lamps
Planning example: optician shop Rectalinear geometrical arrangement, with two transverse continuous lines, with positionable modules for T5 fluorescent lamps and spotlight modules for halogen reflector lamps
Ordering example: Rods...........................................................Reference 1 pair of rods, 4800 mm ............................... 05930/III/35 Luminaires 3 spotlight modules........................................ 5953/QT 50 Accessories and fixings 1 pair of wire suspensions.................................. 05930 SV 2 pairs of wall adapters ..................................... 05930 WA
Ordering example: Rods...........................................................Reference 4 pairs of rods, 3200 mm .............................. 05930/II/35 4 pairs of rods, 4800 mm.............................. 05930/III/35 Luminaires 8 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x24 E 4 positionable modules ........................... 5961 RPX/2x39 E 6 spotlight modules............................... 5953 HO/QPAR 75 Accessories and fixings 10 pairs of wire suspensions .............................. 05930 SV 8 pairs of jointed connectors with wire suspension......................................05930 GKS 2 pairs of connectors........................................... 05930 K 1 ceiling rose .................................................... 05900 AN
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Isolux curve diagram
200 300 400
0
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Isolux curve diagram 2-workstation-office Room width m 5.15 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 2 x 5941 AD/ 2 x 54 E Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 374 (desk) lx 611 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.92 CRFmin 0.80
Data table for luminaire 5941 AD/2 x 24 E shown on page 101.
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5941 AD/2 x 54 E
500
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Data table no. 2032
Illuminance (lx)
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
400 300 200
Illuminance (lx) m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
400 300 200
0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Katalog 2001
105
106
Katalog 2001
DiVisio
DiVisio stands out as an architectural highlight in its own right. The luminaire, with its dominating refraction arrays of only 35 mm in height, appears to float. High-quality materials and surfaces underline the modern technical design.
Task area lighting DiVisio for task area lighting has been designed to be positioned directly above the desks. The system guarantees freedom from reflective glare and promotes a contrast-rich environment thanks to the combination of direct/ indirect refraction elements with special parabolic louvres.
General lighting DiVisio luminaires for general lighting are predominantly destined for arrangement next to the workstations. With a striking ultra-slender design they differ greatly from traditional general lighting systems.
Page 114
Page 112
Katalog 2001
107
DiVisio – excellent light for modern office environments
Task area lighting These DiVisio luminaires – destined for arrangement directly above the task area – shape modern office environments and convince thanks to their trifunctional photometric concept: an indirect component provides uniform ceiling illumination, a special task zone louvre guides the direct component in diagonal directions and lateral refraction elements create an additional direct/ indirect component. The result: an efficient, contrastpromoting task area lighting combined with a balanced ambient lighting.
General lighting Parabolic louvres with an increased direct component distinguish the DiVisio versions for general lighting from the task area luminaires. The general lighting louvres are destined for a “classical” arrangement of the luminaires beside the workstations.
108
Katalog 2001
Katalog 2001
109
DiVisio – increased lighting comfort and photometric efficiency
Lighting of modern DSE workstations Traditional screens in CRT technology (Cathode Ray Tube) are more and more replaced by modern TFT screens (Thin Film Transistor). Higher background illuminances and improved surface anti-reflection coating lead to character representation with excellent contrasts. The considerably increased regulating range for the screen inclination – corresponding to individual user requirements – is a further advantage of the TFT technology. DiVisio has been developed for workstations in general, and in particular for workstations equipped with these TFT screens. The balanced direct/indirect distribution of DiVisio is adapted to the highly inclinable TFT screens and leads – completely independent of the screen hardware – to a consistently comfortable lighting atmosphere.
High contrast rendering Reflections on reflective or highly-specular objects can impair the lighting quality considerably. The degree of disturbances is described by the “contrast rendering factor”. As to visual tasks in offices, values of at least 0.85 are mostly required. The indirect component of DiVisio luminaires contributes substantially to high contrast rendering factors and thus to reduced reflective glare. The special parabolic louvres of the task area versions further underline this effect by efficacious light control in the longitudinal luminaire plane. The resulting lateral light incidence provides – despite the fact that the luminaires are transversally arranged above the desks – high contrast rendering factors exceeding 0.95 in the standardised evaluation zone on the working plane.
110
Katalog 2001
Balanced shadowing Insufficient shadowing impedes plastic sight, whereas lateral light incidence promotes recognition capabilities of objects and surface structures. All the DiVisio louvres provide the direct light component required for balanced shadowing. In case of the RSX and RPX parabolic louvre versions for general lighting, this component amounts to approximately 40 % of the luminaire luminous flux. In case of the task area versions, the lamps are further shielded by the light guiding plates integrated into the louvre; however, the direct component still amounts to around 15 %, which, due to the usually short distance to the task area, contributes considerably to a well-lit working area – even in this case.
Colour accents Colours are an effective interior design means which – in case of DiVisio luminaires – can also enhance a lighting installation. Decor elements in blue, green, red and yellow are available as accessories, to be mounted without tools in front of the refraction arrays. The resulting, decorative colour accents only affect the refraction fields, the light colour in the task area and on the room limiting surfaces remains practically the same.
Katalog 2001
111
DiVisio for general lighting, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices and financial institutions. Especially recommended for workstations equipped with high-brightness TFT screens.
Reference
Lamps W 2x28 2x35
5302 RSX/28 E 5302 RSX/35 E
LxWxH mm 1326x420x52 1626x420x52
≈kg 4.6 5.7
Optical system Direct/indirect optical system for general lighting; consisting of parabolic louvre and linear refraction elements. Highly-transmissive refraction elements made of polycarbonate, for a uniform brightness distribution in the room. Louvre made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. RSX Semi-specular parabolic louvre. RPX Highly-specular parabolic louvre. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium frame to house the optical system, linear aluminium rods and front-plane ballast housing in aluminium/ plastic material. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with light-grey mains cable 3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, including earthed conductor, for luminaire connection at the ceiling. With electronic control gear (E). T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Indications Suspensions Colour decor elements Lamp characteristics
112
Page 116 117 444
Data table No. 2034 DIN 5040: D53 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Wire suspensions Wire suspensions, optionally available as 4-point or 2-point version, guarantee flexible adaptation to different built environments and architectural styles.
Electronic control gear DiVisio luminaires are equipped as standard with electronic control gear, with the result that these luminaires shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energy-saving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flicker-free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises.
Reference
Lamps W 2x28 2x35
5302 RPX/28 E 5302 RPX/35 E
LxWxH mm 1326x420x52 1626x420x52
≈kg 4.6 5.7
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2034 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.0 2.6 3.6 4.3 5.1 6.5 8.0 12 15
2.2 3.1 3.8 4.6 5.4 6.9 8.4 12 16
3.3 4.6 5.9 7.2 8.5 11 13 19 25
3.7 5.1 6.4 7.7 8.9 12 14 20 26
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2034 DIN 5040: D53 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
>> 200 cd/m2
5302 RPX/28 E 5302 RPX/35 E 5302 RSX/28 E 5302 RSX/35 E
1.27 1.00 1.27 1.00
0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
indirect ULOR
0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57
Technical information see page 440.
TFT screens Innovative optical systems which convince thanks to sensibly reduced luminances even under steep angles are specially recommended for lighting of workstations equipped with TFT screens.
113
DiVisio for task area lighting, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices and financial institutions. Especially recommended for workstations equipped with high-brightness TFT screens. Optical system Direct/indirect optical system for contrast-promoting lighting of task zones; consisting of a special task zone louvre and linear refraction elements. Task-zone louvre made of reflection-intensified, highly-specular aluminium, for glare-free lighting of the working surface, with balanced shadowing. Highly-transmissive refraction elements made of polycarbonate, for a uniform brightness distribution in the room. Luminaire body Silver-grey, consisting of aluminium frame to house the optical system, linear aluminium rods and front-plane ballast housing in aluminium/ plastic material. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with light-grey mains cable 3 x 1.0 mm2, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, including earthed conductor, for luminaire connection at the ceiling. With electronic control gear (E).
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/80 E
Indications Suspensions Colour decor elements Lamp characteristics
114
Page 116 117 444
Isolux curve diagram
Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
200 300 400 500
0
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Isolux curve diagram 2-workstation-office Room width m 3.40 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaire 5302 ADH/ 80 E Lamps W 2 x 80 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 345 (desk) lx 576 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.95 CRFmin 0.91
500
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Data table no. 2035
Illuminance (lx)
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
400 300 200
500 400 300 200 0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Reference
Data table no./Page 2037/117 2036/116 2035/114
5302 ADH/49 E 5302 ADH/54 E 5302 ADH/80 E
Lamps W 2x49 2x54 2x80
LxWxH mm 1626x420x52 1326x420x52 1626x420x52
≈kg 5.8 4.7 5.8
652d Degree of protection
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
IP 20
Data table No. 2037 (49 W) No. 2036 (54 W) No. 2035 (80 W) DIN 5040: D23 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ5/1/BZ4
TFT screens Innovative optical systems which convince thanks to sensibly reduced luminances even under steep angles are specially recommended for lighting of workstations equipped with TFT screens.
Tri-functional photometrics In addition to the indirect component, the guiding shield of the louvre system provides a glare-free direct component directly above the working zone, further complemented by the light diffusion created by the lateral refraction elements.
115
DiVisio Accessories
Suspension and connection accessories Depending on the projectspecific requirements as to design and mounting comfort, DiVisio luminaires can be delivered with special wire suspensions and feeding accessories. The connection cable is delivered with the luminaires as standard.
4-point wire suspension 1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302···, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, consisting of: 4 steel wires ¶ 1.0 mm, 4 ceiling fixing units. 05302 SV additionally with 4 wire adjusting elements for continuous, tool-free height compensation. 05302 S for continuous height compensation by means of screwdriver.
116
Katalog 2001
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/54 E
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
Isolux curve diagram
100 200 300 400
0
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Isolux curve diagram 2-workstation-office Room width m 5.15 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 54 E Lamps W 2 x 54 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 366 (desk) lx 573 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.94 CRFmin 0.90
Ceiling rose 05900 A (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.
500
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
Data table no. 2036
Ceiling rose 05900 AN 1 piece, for the connection of the the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of wire suspensions 05302 S···.
Feeding tube 05302 ZR 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, 1700 mm long, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable.
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Data table for luminaire 5302 ADH/54 E described on page 115.
2-point wire suspension 05302 ST 1 set, to fix one luminaire 5302···, for suspension lengths of up to 1.70 m, consisting of: Y 2 steel wire suspensions in -shape ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 ceiling fixing units, with integrated, tool-free continuous height compensation.
Illuminance (lx)
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
400 300 200
Illuminance (lx) m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
400 300 200 100 0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Colour decor elements For colour accentuation of the refraction elements. 1 set (2 pieces), PLEXIGLAS, to be fixed without tools.
Combination with T·200 T·200 stands for a flexible tubular track system comprising louvre modules, spotlight modules, positionable modules and translucent modules as active photometric components, see page 72. DiVisio luminaires for task area and general lighting can also be integrated into this system, please contact your local TRILUX support centre for further details.
Reference For luminaires 5302···/28 E, 5302···/54 E FB/1200 FG/1200 FR/1200 FY/1200
blue green red yellow
For luminaires 5302···/35 E, 5302···/49 E, 5302···/80 E 05302 05302 05302 05302
FB/1500 FG/1500 FR/1500 FY/1500
blue green red yellow
Data table no. 2037
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Isolux curve diagram
100 200 300 400
0
Evaluation zone for contrast rendering
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Isolux curve diagram 2-workstation-office Room width m 5.15 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/walls/floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 2 x 5302 ADH/ 49 E Lamps W 2 x 49 (T5) Mounting height m 1.90 Light loss factor v=0.8 (whole room) lx 365 (desk) lx 568 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.95 CRFmin 0.91
Data table for luminaire 5302 ADH/49 E described on page 115.
Suspended luminaire for workstation lighting 5302 ADH/49 E
500
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
05302 05302 05302 05302
Illuminance (lx)
m 2.0 1.5 1.0
400 300 200
Illuminance (lx) m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
400 300 200 100 0.5 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Katalog 2001
117
118
Katalog 2001
DIALOG
Lighting systems in office buildings basically have to meet the criteria described in standards and laws with regard to typical visual tasks. In addition, DIALOG luminaires for workstation and ambient lighting also allow to create user-oriented working zones. Their effect can be supported by wallmounted luminaires which are also suitable for individual use. TRILUX will always be happy to give you the latest “insider info” on the benefits of task-area lighting.
DIALOG DIALOG represents the TRILUX workstation-related lighting system in striking design. It is based on the principle that luminaires with special lighting characteristics “interact” with each other in order to fulfil the ultimate lighting requirements.
Wall-mounted luminaires Wall-mounted luminaires ideally complement DIALOG lighting concepts, e.g. for meeting areas or circulation zones in offices. Highly recommended for effective lighting outside offices in conference rooms, corridors and foyers.
Page 120
Page 132
Katalog 2001
119
DIALOG
DIALOG individual and freestanding workstation luminaires represent a modern lighting system for versatile light scenarios. Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL thus function independently without further additional light components whereas free-standing luminaires TASK provide standard-conform workstation and ambient lighting in perfect “dialogue” with the individual luminaire DESKTOP. In addition, DESKTOP is also recommended for combination with conventional surfacemounted, recessed and suspended luminaires.
120
Katalog 2001
DIALOG
DESKTOP Individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP form the basis of varied lighting concepts, e.g. in combination with free-standing workstation luminaires TASK of the DIALOG range or with general lighting systems.
TASK Thanks to their distinct orientation towards the workstation, indirect free-standing workstation luminaires TASK are the ideal complement to individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP.
DUAL Direct/indirect free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL shine out thanks to a combination of general and workstation-oriented lighting components. The equipment is conceived for the lighting of both individual and twin-desk workstations.
Page 124
Page 126
Page 128
Katalog 2001
121
DIALOG standard-conform, flexible and future-oriented
How much light do people require in the office? Minimum values are given in respective standards. The pan-European harmonisation tends to favour office lighting providing between 500 lx in working zones and 300 lx in ambient surroundings.
DUAL The free-standing DUAL luminaire achieves individual illumination of single and twin-desk workstations. Both the indirect general component – usually switched from the door – and the additional direct workstation-oriented component are jointly integrated into the luminaire. Integral intelligence is another option for presence detection and daylight control.
This can suggest a lighting system consisting of one component providing 300 lx for general lighting and another component increasing the workstation lighting to at least 500 lx, offering a perfect replication of the natural human environment.
DESKTOP + TASK The purely indirect free-standing TASK luminaire provides the general lighting. This luminaire is preferably installed at single or twindesk workstations and is usually operated by switchable sockets. Following the DIALOG concept, the individual DESKTOP luminaire allows for a workstation-related increase of the illuminance to more than 500 lx.
122
Katalog 2001
DESKTOP + direct general lighting The lighting installation designed to achieve 300 lx creates a uniform basic illumination. The workstation-related DESKTOP luminaire provides mean illuminances of more than 500 lx at the desk. When used in combination with luminaires equipped with T5 fluorescent lamps this allows the creation of energysaving lighting installations with specific power requirements of less than 10 W/m 2.
DESKTOP + direct/indirect general lighting Direct/indirect suspended luminaires in T5 technology suitable for use in rooms with only 2.5 m height create a very pleasant lighting atmosphere. DESKTOP luminaires allow the increase of basic illumination from 300 lx to 500 lx at the workstation, thus improving acceptance and well-being.
Katalog 2001
123
Individual workstation luminaires DESKTOP
Application For decorative lighting of individual workstations in combination with different general lighting systems. Especially recommended in combination with the TASK luminaires of the DIALOG range. Optical system Specular reflector made of anodised aluminium integrated into the luminaire head. Distinctive asymmetrical light distribution for excellent contrast rendering is achieved thanks to the lateral angle of incidence. The constant horizontal alignment of the light emitting surface provides glare-free illumination. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of impact-resistant plastic material, with integrated deco-element. Aluminium stand profiles. Circle-segmented stand foot in laser-cut steel, 10 mm thickness. Orientable stand profiles and ballast housing fixed to stand foot. Luminaire head, stand profiles and luminaire foot silvergrey, with chromed joints. The luminaire head can be swung open, thus allowing rapid lamp replacement and easy status test. Electrical connection With flexible cable, 3 m long, including earthed plug, for mains supply. With electronic control gear (E) and switch.
3
0
0
1 0
0
5
0
Illuminances (lx) realised exclusively by individual luminaire DESKTOP 6001 DT/ TCD13 E
124
0 0 5 3
Data table No. 2038 CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5
Page 444
5 0 00 0
0 0 6
Dimensions in mm
DIN 5040: A30
Indications Lamp characteristics
1
0 5 4 0
5
3
0
C 0 - C 180
Main working surface 60x60cm (DIN 5035 part 8) with evaluation zone for contrast rendering
0
TC-DEL
Isolux curve diagram DESKTOP
8
Desk Desk length m 1.60 Desk width m 0.80 Luminaire 6001 DT/ TCD 13 E Lamps W 1 x TC-DEL 13 Luminous flux lm 900 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (desk) lx 243 g1 (desk) = Emin : 1: 5.9 (main working surface) lx 345 g2 (main working surface) = Emin : Emax 1: 8.3 Contrast rendering factor CRFm 1.00 0.75 CRFmin
Luminaire arrangement DESKTOP
450
Data table no. 2038
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Illuminance (lx)
652d Degree of protection
Reference
Lamps/socket W 1xTC-DEL13/G24q-1
6001 DT/TCD E 13
Flexibility Different tasks call for varying attitudes – not only in the workforce! DESKTOP units allow full 3D positioning of the luminaire head to the required plane under all circumstances.
IP 20
≈kg 6.1
Electrical connection All DIALOG free-standing luminaires for workstation lighting are equipped with an integrated earthed socket for the electrical connection of desk luminaires.
125
Free-standing workstation luminaires TASK – indirect –
Application For decorative office lighting in combination with DESKTOP individual workstation luminaires of the DIALOG range. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Specular reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium, for asymmetrical light distribution providing generous ceiling illumination above the working zone. 6021··· with cover made of highlyresistant toughened UVabsorbing safety glass. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of sheet steel with circular-arcprofiled contour, end caps made of die-cast aluminium, white, solvent-free powdercoated. With integrated deco-element. Parallel stand profiles with integrated ballast housing, silver-grey. Stand profiles inclined towards the working zone above approx. 1 m height. Stand foot made of cast aluminium, dark-grey-coated, with integrated regulation system for compensating uneven flooring. ···HIT··· Primary metal halide lamp HIT-DE with mains halogen lamp QT-DE (length 115 mm) as secondary source for adequate illumination during the ignition period.
126
Page 127 444
C 0 - C 180
Main working surface 60x60cm (DIN 5035 part 8) with evaluation zone for contrast rendering
Contrast rendering factor 1.00 CRFm CRFmin 0.75 Working plane above floor 0.75 m Illuminance (lx) Data table No. 2039
500 400 300 200
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
2-workstation-office Room width m 3.50 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values % 80/ 50/ 30 Ceiling/ walls/ floor Luminaire TASK 6024 AS/ TC 36 E Lamps W 4 x TC - L 36 Luminaire DESKTOP 6001 DT/ TCD 13 E Lamps W 1 x TC - DEL 13 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 304 (desk) lx 530 (main working surface) lx 681 TC-L
Indications Glass cover Lamp characteristics
Isolux curve diagram TASK
2-workstation-office
Illuminance (lx)
Multiplication factor for m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 6021 AS/HIT 150 E: 0.92 HIT-DE QT-DE
C 0 - C 180
→y
Sockets are of Central European standard. Further details, including different socket options or blank cover plates, are available on request.
Isolux curve diagram TASK + DESKTOP
Data table no. 2039
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Electrical connection With flexible cable, 2.5 m long, including earthed plug, for mains supply. With electronic control gear (E). With integrated earthed socket and switch. 6024··· with three-stage switch: off, 50 % and 100 %. 6021··· with inclination switch to switch off at inclination angles > 45° and switch on again at inclination angles < 15°.
100 150 200 300
300 200 150
m →x 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Data table No. 2039
DIN 5040: E03
DIN 5040: E03
CIBSE BZ: BZ10
CIBSE BZ: BZ10
NBN L 14-002: BZ10
NBN L 14-002: BZ10
652d Degree of protection
Reference Reference 6024 AS/TC36 E
Lamps/socket W 4xTC-L36/2G11
≈kg 6021 AS/HIT150 E 13.1
Glass cover Made of toughened safety glass. 06000 GA/TC36 for 6014···, 6024··· 06000 GA/TC55 for 6013···.
Lamps/socket W 1xHIT-DE150/RX7s + 1xQT-DE150/R7s
IP 20
≈kg 13.7
Fire prevention An integrated inclination sensor which cuts off the power supply at an angle of more than 45° to the vertical axis avoids inadmissible heating of surrounding materials for ···HIT··· luminaires in non-common position.
127
∑
Free-standing workstation luminaires DUAL – direct/indirect –
Application For decorative office lighting. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Consisting of specular reflector for asymmetrical indirect light distribution and parabolic louvre for distinctive asymmetrical direct light distribution. Specular reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium. Parabolic louvre made of highly-specular, post-anodised high-purity aluminium. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of sheet steel with circular-arcprofiled contour, end caps made of die-cast aluminium, white, solvent-free powdercoated. With integrated deco-element. Parallel stand profiles inclined towards the working zone above approx. 1 m height, silver-grey. ···AS··· With stand foot made of cast aluminium, dark-grey-coated, with integrated regulation system for compensating uneven flooring. ···AT··· With clamp fixing for attachment to desks with plate thicknesses between 10 and 50 mm.
Indications Glass cover Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
128
Page 127 431 444
TC-L TC-TEL
C 0 - C 180
Isolux curve diagram DUAL
2-workstation-office
4-workstation-office
Working plane above floor 0.75 m Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Main working surface 60x60cm (DIN 5035 part 8) with evaluation zone for contrast rendering
Contrast rendering factor CRFm 0.92 CRFmin 0.80
Data table No. 2040 DIN 5040: D43 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
400 600 300 200
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
2-workstation-office Room width m 3.50 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55··· Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 378 (desk) lx 704 (main working surface) lx 784 Multiplication factor 0.70 6014 A···/TCT 42···
Isolux curve diagram DUAL
Illuminance (lx)
···LG With lighting management system with integrated presence detection. Adjustable to control with programmable illuminance set value or to manual mode for continual dimming. Integrated switch-off device.
Data table no. 2040
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Electrical connection With flexible cable, 2.5 m long, including earthed plug, for mains supply. With electronic control gear (E) offering increased lamp service life also for applications with increased switching frequency. With integrated earthed socket and three-stage switch (indirect, off, direct + indirect). Sockets are of Central European standard. Further details, including different socket options, telephonic or LAN systems or blank cover plates, are available on request.
400
600
600 400
200
300
200
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
652d Degree of protection
Reference 6013 AS/TC55 E 6013 AS/TC55 LG 6014 AS/TCT42 E 6014 AS/TCT42 LG 6014 AT/TCT42 E
Lamps/socket W 3xTC-L55/2G11 3xTC-L55/2G11 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4 4xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4
IP 20
≈kg 13.7 13.7 13.4 13.4 8.1
Version “LG” Thanks to integrated presence detection, switches are not necessary: the luminaire is switched on immediately after movements have been registrated and switched off 15 minutes after people have left the registration area.
129
130
Katalog 2001
Wall-mounted luminaires
DIALOG WALL-I Due to their design, wallmounted luminaires WALL-I are predestined for combination with DIALOG freestanding luminaires, e.g. in meeting areas. The integrated, asymmetrical reflector directs the indirect light effectively towards the room centre.
DIALOG WALL-II Indirect wall-mounted luminaires WALL-II in the DIALOG design are optionally available with decorative direct lighting component. Thanks to their compact design these luminaires are an ideal lighting solution for entrance areas or corridors.
ES 50··· A successful interplay of technology and aesthetics, that is the striking feature of the wall-mounted luminaires ES 50···. For decorative, predominantly indirect additional lighting or general lighting in corridors and bed zones.
4022··· Glare-free light is guaranteed thanks to a balanced proportion of direct and indirect light. Sufficient luminous flux is assured due to twinlamp equipment options with compact fluorescent lamps.
Page 132
Page 134
Page 136
Page 138
Katalog 2001
131
Wall-mounted ambient luminaires WALL-I – indirect –
Application For decorative general and additional lighting in offices, financial institutions, conference rooms, sales areas, corridors and hotels. Especially recommended in combination with free-standing luminaires of the DIALOG range. Optical system Specular reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium, for generous ceiling illumination thanks to the distinctive asymmetrical light control. 6041··· with highly-resistant toughened UV-absorbing safety glass. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of sheet steel with circular-arcprofiled contour, end caps made of die-cast aluminium. 6041··· with ballast housing made of die-cast aluminium. Luminaire body white, solvent-free powder-coated. With integrated deco-element. ···HIT··· Primary metal halide lamp HIT-DE with mains halogen lamp QT-DE (length 115 mm) as secondary source for adequate illumination during the ignition period. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With electronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2042
Isolux curve diagram WALL- I + DUAL
Isolux curve diagram WALL- I
Indications Lamp characteristics
132
Page 444
Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 6041 UW/HIT 70 E:1.22 m
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Working plane above floor 0.75 m
500 400 300 200
Working plane above floor 0.85 m Illuminance (lx) Multiplication factor for
25
50
75 100
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5
1-workstation-office Room width m 4.50 Room depth m 5.00 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires WALL- I 2 x 6042 UW/TC 24 E Mounting height m 2.00 Lamps W 2 x TC - L 24 Luminaire DUAL 6013 AS/ TC 55 E Lamps W 3 x TC - L 55 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 397 (desk) lx 821
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
1-workstation-office with conference area
4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
652d Degree of protection
Reference Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-L24/2G11
6042 UW/TC24 E
TC-L
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2042
Lamps/socket W 1xHIT-DE70/RX7s + 1xQT-DE150/R7s
≈kg 6041 UW/HIT70 E 3.2
HIT-DE QT-DE
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2042
DIN 5040: E03
DIN 5040: E03
CIBSE BZ: BZ10
CIBSE BZ: BZ10
NBN L 14-002: BZ10
NBN L 14-002: BZ10
IP 20
≈kg 4.2
Glass cover Made of highly-resistant toughened safety glass, secured against falling down. 06000 GA/TC24 for 6042 UW···.
133
Wall-mounted ambient luminaires WALL-II – indirect or direct/indirect –
Application For decorative general and additional lighting in offices, financial institutions, conference rooms, sales areas, corridors and hotels. Especially recommended in combination with free-standing luminaires of the DIALOG range. Optical system Specular reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium, for generous wall and ceiling illumination thanks to the wide-angle light distribution. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of sheet steel with circular-arcprofiled contour, end caps made of die-cast aluminium, white, solvent-free powdercoated. ···G with slot-perforated luminaire body adding a decorative direct lighting component. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With electronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2043
Isolux curve diagram WALL- II
Isolux curve diagram WALL- II
Indications Lamp characteristics
134
Page 444
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Illuminance (lx)
m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
200 275 350 400
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
→y0.5 1.0 1.5
Entrance hall Room width m 5.50 Room depth m 5.50 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 6 x 6052 UW-G/ TCT 42 E Mounting height m 2.00 Lamps W 2 x TC - TEL 42 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 345 Multiplication factors WALL- II 6052 UW/TCT 42 E 0.87 WALL- II 6052 ···/TCD 18 E 0.35
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Entrance hall with conference area
Illuminance (lx) m →x0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
20
30
50
80
20
652d Degree of protection
Reference
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-DEL18/G24q-2 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4
6052 UW/TCD18 E 6052 UW/TCT42 E
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2043
≈kg
Reference
2.3 2.4
6052 UW-G/TCD18 E 6052 UW-G/TCT42 E
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-DEL18/G24q-2 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4
Data table No. 2043
DIN 5040: E03
DIN 5040: E03
CIBSE BZ: BZ10
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ10
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
IP 20
≈kg 2.2 2.3
Glass cover Made of highly-resistant toughened safety glass, secured against falling down. 06000 GA/TCT42 for 6052 UW···/TCD18 E and 6052 UW···/TCT42 E.
135
Wall-mounted luminaires – indirect –
Application For decorative, predominantly indirect additional lighting in offices, financial institutions, conference rooms, sales areas, lounges, hotels as well as recuperation facilities, homes for the eldery and nursing homes. Also especially recommended for general lighting in corridors and bed areas. Optical system Predominantly indirect. Ceiling-oriented prismatic cover made of translucent polycarbonate, convex, with internal channel prisms, transmission degree 80 %. Internal reflector. Luminaire body with slot-perforation at the lower plane for decorative direct light emission, with internal cover made of opal polycarbonate. Luminaire body Luminaire head made of extruded aluminium profiles with circle-segmented contour. End caps and ballast housing made of die-cast aluminium. Separate fixing profile for easy mounting to wall. ES 502 W/··· solvent-free powder-coated, white, ES 502/··· silver-grey. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ES 502···E with electronic control gear (E), ES 502···ED with dimmable electronic control gear (ED).
Data table no. 2158
Isolux curve diagram
Isolux curve diagram
Indications Lamp characteristics
136
Page 444
Working plane above floor 0.85 m Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx)
100 150
200 250
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Waiting area Room width m 5.50 Room depth m 5.50 Room height m 2.75 Reflectance values Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 6 x ES 502 W/TCT 32 E Mounting height m 2.00 Lamps W 2 x TCT 32 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 177
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Waiting area
25
50
75 100
m 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
652d Degree of protection
Reference
Lamps/socket W ES 502 W/TCT32 E 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 ES 502 W/TCT32 ED 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3
≈kg
Reference
2.6 2.6
ES 502/TCT32 E ES 502/TCT32 ED
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
TC-T
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3
C 0 - C 180
IP 40
≈kg 2.6 2.6
Data table No. 2158 DIN 5040: E03 CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5/1.5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5/2/BZ6
137
Wall-mounted luminaires for decorative lighting
Application For a decorative lighting with cosy flair in corridors, waiting and reception areas, hotels, restaurants, homes for the eldery, nursing homes as well as lounges and dining rooms. Optical system Indirect, room-oriented luminaire cover with radiation openings covered at the inner side for a decorative direct light component. Luminaire body Luminaire body and cover made of sheet steel, silver-grey. Slot-perforated cover, with user-oriented convex front cover. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With electronic control gear (E).
Data table no. 2046
Isolux curve diagram
Isolux curve diagram
Indications Lamp characteristics
138
Page 444
Illuminance (lx)
m →x 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 Illuminance (lx)
200 250 350
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Working plane above floor 0.85 m
150
10 15 25 50 100
150
→y
Foyer with waiting areas Room width m 5.50 Room depth m 5.50 Room height m 2.70 Reflectance values Ceiling/ walls/ floor % 80/ 50/ 30 Luminaires 8 x 4022/ TCT 42 E Mounting height m 1.70 Lamps W 2 x TC-TEL 42 Light loss factor v=0.8 Illuminance (whole room) lx 249 Multiplication factors 4022/ TCT 42 E 1.00 4022/ TCT 32 E 0.75
→y 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Foyer with waiting areas
m →x 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
652d Degree of protection
Reference 4022/TCT32 E 4022/TCT42 E
Easy re-lamping The easily accessible lamp housing of the 4022··· wallmounted luminaires enables rapid and easy re-lamping: just release the screw connection to swing out or remove the luminaire front cover.
TC-T
Lamps/socket W 2xTC-TEL32/GX24q-3 2xTC-TEL42/GX24q-4
C 0 - C 180
IP 20
≈kg 3.1 3.1
Data table No. 2046 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5/1.5/BZ4
139
CENERA, 362···
140
Katalog 2001
When it comes to mounting possibilities, recessed and surface-mounted luminaires, either equipped with louvres (362···) or the double-reflection system (CENERA), are the first true universal luminaires. They cannot only be installed in ceilings with cutout openings as well as in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids – universally suitable for both ceiling modules 600 and 625 mm – but thanks to their exquisite ultra-low design they equally stand out as surface-mounted luminaires.
PST The double-reflection system consists of a primary diffuser made of translucent PLEXIGLAS enveloping a perforated aluminium primary reflector and a concave white secondary diffuser.
RWX An exclusive combination of white cross blades and reflection-intensified parabolic side panels, offering a neoclassical appearance with great performance.
RSX/¥65° Semi-specular materials are becoming increasingly popular in the built environment. TRILUX refines the use of these materials with a reflection-intensified material, offering peak photometric performance with the benefits of diffuse distribution.
RPX/¥65° Superb surface clarity, aided by reflection-intensified aluminium, offers a louvre that is not only fully compliant to the requirements of photometric bodies, but also excels with a working efficiency of up to 80% in direct applications.
Page 142
Page 144
Page 146
Page 148
Katalog 2001
141
Luminaires with double-reflection system PST, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm or compact fluorescent lamps TC-L Application Sales areas, showrooms, conference rooms as well as offices and financial institutions. 3631 PST/14 E: particularly recommended for corridors and entrance areas.
Reference 3631 PST/14 E
Lamps W 1x14
Module D mm 300/312.5 270
D1
E1
≈kg
Reference
174
96
3.0
3631 PST/28 E 3631 PST/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
96 96
5.5 6.7
363··· universal application as surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with cut-out recess openings as well as in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids, modules 625 and 600 mm. 3604··· for concealed or exposed grids in module 625 mm as well as for cut-out ceiling openings. Primary optics Consisting of primary diffuser enveloping a primary reflector. Primary reflector made of reflection-intensified aluminium with special slot perforation allowing about 10 % light transmission. Primary diffuser made of translucent PLEXIGLAS for virtually loss-free forward diffusion of the transmitted share of light. Easy maintenance of the primary optics thanks to front-plane fixings. Secondary diffuser Concave (363···) or double concave (360···) shape, with highly-reflective, solvent-free powder-coating. Luminaire body Sheet steel, white. 363··· refined to a particularly elegant convex design. With flush end caps, inclined by 30° and perfectly adapted to the luminaire profile. The required recess depth is only 18 mm.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2047 DIN 5040: B30 CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ6/0.8/BZ5
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
Indications Fixing accessories Lamp characteristics
142
Page 151 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Primary reflector The primary reflector realises its desired light transmission by means of a special slot-perforation. And the primary diffuser which envelops the primary reflector creates a virtually loss-free forward light diffusion.
Data table No. 2047 DIN 5040: B30 CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ6/0.8/BZ5
Reference
Lamps W 1xTC-L55 2x24
3633 PST/1xTC55 E 3604 PST/2x24 E
Module mm 600/625 625
D
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
480 -
72 -
220 -
196 -
5.3 7.1
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2047 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.2 5.8 7.3 8.8 10 13 16 23 30
4.9 6.5 8.1 9.7 11 14 17 24 31
7.0 9.6 12 15 17 22 26 38 49
8.1 11 13 16 19 24 29 41 52
Calculation parameters
TC-L T5
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2047
TC-L T5
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2047
DIN 5040: B30
DIN 5040: B30
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/0.75/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6/0.8/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3604PST/2x24 E 3631PST/14 E 3631PST/28 E 3631PST/35 E 3633PST/1xTC55 E
1.14 2.75 1.27 1.00 0.89
0.65 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.66
0.65 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.58
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.08
Technical information see page 440.
Uniform appearance The optimised interplay between primary diffuser and secondary optics leads to a pleasantly balanced appearance of the luminaires 3604 PST··· and thus increases the lighting comfort.
3604 PST Version 3604 PST/2x24 E does not only offer comfortable photometrics but is also suited for mounting in almost all common ceiling systems in module 625 as well as for cutout ceiling openings. Rapid-mounting swivel brackets 370/1N for concealed grids, see page 259.
143
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX, for T5 linear fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm and compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL Application For efficient and elegant lighting of offices, sales areas and showrooms. TC-EL 11 W versions particularly recommended for corridors and entrance areas.
Reference 3621 RWX/28 E 3621 RWX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
Reference
56 56
4.4 5.5
3622 RWX/28 E 3622 RWX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
96 96
4.4 5.5
Universal application as surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with cut-out recess openings as well as in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids, modules 625 and 600 mm. Optical system Micro-segmented hybrid parabolic louvre RWX, composed of white aluminium cross blades and highlyspecular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium for increased efficiency. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, refined to a particularly elegant convex design. With flush end caps, inclined by 30° and perfectly adapted to the luminaire profile. The required recess depth is only 18 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2048 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Luminaires ···14, ···28, ···35 can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3622 RWX/28 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
144
Page 151 431 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
RWX louvre RWX louvres stand for photometric efficiency, thanks to a striking combination of white-coated aluminium cross blades and specular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium.
Data table No. 2048 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-SEL11 3x14
3622 RWX/TC11 E 3623 RWX/14 E
Module mm 300/312.5 600/625
D
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
150 480
111 72
– 220
96 137
1.6 4.3
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2048 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.7 6.1 7.4 8.7 12 14 20 27
3.7 5.1 6.4 7.9 9.3 12 15 21 27
5.5 7.9 10 13 15 19 23 35 45
6.2 8.4 11 13 16 20 24 36 46
Calculation parameters
TC-EL
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2048 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2048 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3621RWX/28 E 3621RWX/35 E 3622RWX/28 E 3622RWX/35 E 3622RWX/TC11 E 3623RWX/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 2.72 0.90
0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.53 0.79
0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.53 0.79
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Cost-minimised operation The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362··· luminaires is predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient lighting solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
Universal luminaires Universal application of TRILUX luminaires 362···, 363··· as surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids as well as in ceilings with cut-out recess openings.
145
∑
Application For efficient and elegant lighting of offices, sales areas and showrooms. TC-EL 11 W versions particularly recommended for corridors and entrance areas.
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL Reference 3621 RSX/28 E 3621 RSX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
Reference
56 56
4.4 5.5
3622 RSX/28 E 3622 RSX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
96 96
4.4 5.5
Universal application as surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with cut-out recess openings as well as in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids, modules 625 and 600 mm. Optical system Micro-segmented, semispecular parabolic louvre RSX made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, refined to a particularly elegant convex design. With flush end caps, inclined by 30° and perfectly adapted to the luminaire profile. The required recess depth is only 18 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2049 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Luminaires ···14, ···28, ···35 can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3621 RSX/35 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
146
Page 151 431 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Luminance limitation Parabolic louvres RPX and RSX with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
Data table No. 2049 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-EL11 3x14
3622 RSX/TC11 E 3623 RSX/14 E
Module mm 300/312.5 600/625
D
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
150 480
111 72
– 220
96 137
1.6 4.3
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2049 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.7 6.1 7.4 8.7 12 14 20 27
3.7 5.1 6.4 7.9 9.3 12 15 21 27
5.5 7.9 10 13 15 19 23 35 45
6.2 8.4 11 13 16 20 24 36 46
Calculation parameters
TC-EL
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2049 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2049 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3621RSX/28 E 3621RSX/35 E 3622RSX/28 E 3622RSX/35 E 3622RSX/TC11 E 3623RSX/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 2.72 0.90
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.53 0.83
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.53 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Cost-minimised operation The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362··· luminaires is predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient lighting solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
147
∑
Application For efficient and elegant lighting of offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. TC-EL 11 W versions particularly recommended for corridors and entrance areas.
Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm or compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL Reference 3621 RPX/28 E 3621 RPX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
Reference
56 56
4.4 5.5
3622 RPX/28 E 3622 RPX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35
Module D D1 mm 300/312.5 900 174 300/312.5 1200 174
E1
≈kg
96 96
4.4 5.5
Universal application as surface-mounted and as recessed luminaires in ceilings with cut-out recess openings as well as in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids, modules 625 and 600 mm. Optical system Micro-segmented, highlyspecular parabolic louvre RPX made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, refined to a particularly elegant convex design. With flush end caps, inclined by 30° and perfectly adapted to the luminaire profile. The required recess depth is only 18 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2050 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Luminaires ···14, ···28, ···35 can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3622 RPX/35 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
148
Page 151 431 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Luminance limitation Parabolic louvres RPX and RSX with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
Data table No. 2050 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-EL11 3x14
3622 RPX/TC11 E 3623 RPX/14 E
Module mm 300/312.5 600/625
D
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
150 480
111 72
– 220
96 137
1.6 4.3
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2050 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.1 4.5 5.8 7.0 8.3 11 13 21 26
3.5 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 11 14 21 26
5.2 7.5 9.6 12 14 18 22 33 43
5.9 8.0 10 12 15 19 23 34 44
Calculation parameters
TC-EL
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2050 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2050 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3621RPX/28 E 3621RPX/35 E 3622RPX/28 E 3622RPX/35 E 3622RPX/TC11 E 3623RPX/14 E
1.21 1.00 0.63 0.52 2.62 0.90
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.56 0.83
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.56 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Cost-minimised operation The lamp package 2 x TC-EL 11 W for 362··· luminaires is predestined for areas with lighting requirements up to approx. 200 lx. The reduced power consumption, only 28 W per luminaire, creates the best conditions for efficient lighting solutions in corridors, waiting and entrance areas.
149
CENERA and 362··· Indications and accessories for luminaire mounting
By means of the fixing accessories 03620··· described opposite, CENERA and 362··· luminaires can easily be mounted in all conventional ceiling types: 1. Ceiling systems with concealed grids 2. Ceiling systems with exposed grids 3. Ceilings with cut-out recess openings, e.g. made of wood or gypsum plaster
The illustrations below show examples of commonly used grid and ceiling systems and the flange widths admissible for luminaire mounting. The maximum total height for grids plus ceiling tile is a uniform 56 mm for all kinds of ceilings.
362··· series
Ceilings with exposed grids Maximum height of the grid is 56 mm. Maximum lower flange width is 24 mm.
max. 56 mm
max. 24 mm
Ceilings with concealed grids Maximum height of the grid plus ceiling tile is 56 mm. Maximum lower flange width is 24 mm.
max. 56 mm
max. 24 mm
Ceilings with cut-out recess openings Maximum height of the grid plus ceiling tile is 56 mm. Maximum grid overhang is 12 mm.
max. 56 mm
max. 12 mm
150
363··· series
Fixing accessories 1 set mounting rails for the mounting of luminaires in system ceilings or ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Reference 03620/1 03620/3
for luminaires 3621···, 3622···, 3631··· 3623···, 3633···
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving and comfort-enhancing lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Vacuum plug 03630 S (not illustrated) 1 piece. Recommended for removing secondary reflectors of 363··· series luminaire bodies.
Reference
Reference
362··· series
363··· series
362··· series
363··· series
3621···/28 E 3621···/35 E 3622···/28 E 3622···/35 E 3622···/TC 11 E
3631 PST/14 E 3631 PST/28 E 3631 PST/35 E
3623···/14 E
3633 PST/1 x TC 55 E
Module 600 mm
Module 600 mm
Module 625 mm
Module 625 mm
Module 600 mm
Module 600 mm
Module 625 mm
Module 625 mm
Cut-out openings ... for 3622···/TC 11 E ... for 3631···/14 E ... for 3621···, 3622···, 3631···/28 E ... for 3621···, 3622···, 3631···/35 E
334 x 290 mm 580 x 290 mm 1210 x 290 mm 1510 x 290 mm
Cut-out openings ... for 3623 RPX/14 E ... for 3633 PST/1 x TC 55 E
600 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm
151
Surface-mounted and suspended louvre luminaires
Numerous series within the TRILUX louvre luminaire range can be equipped with innovative T5 fluorescent lamps in efficient version, thus creating the best conditions for extremely economic lighting installations. 526···, 504···, 505··· luminaires can be additionally equipped with lumen-rich T5 lamps. Furthermore, part of the range remain the tried-andtested series for exclusive use of T8 lamps with highquality louvres.
526··· The modular-design principle based on T5 basic luminaires offers possibilities for suspended luminaires with variable direct/indirect light distribution and direct surfacemounted luminaires. The highlight: surface-mounted luminaires providing a decorative ceiling illumination. Page 154
152
504···, 505··· The distinctive style of the luminaire body for T5 lamps characterises the timeless slender cubist design of this series. Five louvre versions as well as photometrically optimised diffusers are available for surface-mounted and suspended luminaires.
598···, 599··· Modern slender design with a luminaire height of a mere 62 mm, high efficiency and state-of-the-art photometrics are some of the architectural and functional merits this series has to offer, partly due to the use of T5 fluorescent lamps.
500··· 500··· series luminaires include versions for both efficient T5 lamps and tried-andtested T8 lamps. A smooth transition to the new lamp technology can therefore be easily planned because both versions feature the same architectural design.
152··· The 152··· system for T8 fluorescent lamps in spherical design is not only predestined for versatile use in offices. The luminaire body dimensions are also architecture-compatible when used in rooms with higher ceilings.
1510··· The 1510··· series for T8 lamps convinces with technical efficiency and a timeless profile design. The luminaire body in combination with the characteristic lateral profiles blends in with the room architecture without prevailing the built environment.
Page 170
Page 184
Page 196
Page 210
Page 222
153
526···
154
The innovative system for architectural lighting effects is based on T5 basic luminaires which can be combined to surface-mounted and suspended luminaires with optional direct/indirect light distribution by means of accessories. Geometrical arrangements by means of nodes are possible as well.
RWV
RWX
RSV
RSX/¥65°
RPX/¥65°
Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet-steel depending on application.
An exclusive combination of white cross blades and reflectionintensified parabolic side panels, offering a neo-classical appearance with great performance.
For high-efficiency illumination in areas with public access and non-DSE offices. Narrow/ wide-angle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concave-profiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
Semi-specular materials are becoming increasingly popular in the built environment. TRILUX refines the use of these materials with a reflection-intensified material, offering peak photometric performance with the benefits of diffuse distribution.
Superb surface clarity offers a louvre that is not only fully compliant to the requirements of photometric bodies, but also excels with a working efficiency of up to 80 % in direct and over 90 % in direct/indirect applications.
Page 158
Page 160
Page 162
Page 164
Page 166
155
Light variations
1
2
3 Lighting effects Versatile lighting tasks call for corresponding lighting solutions. A perfect choice: the new louvre luminaire system 526···. Whether as direct surface-mounted luminaire, as surface-mounted luminaire with a decorative indirect component or as suspended luminaire with an optional indirect component – everything is possible. All solutions are based on the slender 526··· luminaire body with a ceilingoriented opening. Rooms can be perfectly lit with surface-mounted or suspended luminaires in combination with closed or perforated overhead reflectors, thus creating a lighting effect that suits the architecture.
1 Suspended luminaires – Indirect component 45 % A basic luminaire suspended by wires creates an indirect lighting component of 45 %. This solution for contrast-promoting light allows realisation of lighting installations with higher user acceptance.
156
2
3
Suspended luminaires – Indirect component 15 % Also rooms with only moderate ceiling reflectance values benefit from increased lighting comfort due to indirect light. The perforated overhead reflector intensifies the direct component in case of moderate ceiling illumination.
Suspended luminaires – Indirect component 0 % Indirect components cannot create special lighting effects in case of insufficient ceiling reflection. In these cases, suspended luminaires covered with closed overhead reflectors efficiently guide the lamp light directly onto the working plane.
4 Direct surface-mounted luminaires guide their light primarily onto the working plane – recommended for rooms with lower ceilings and lower reflectance values.
4
5
Surface-mounted luminaires – purely direct “Classical” purely direct surface-mounted luminaires are particularly recommended for rooms with lower ceilings and lower ceiling reflectance values. For this purpose, basic luminaires are combined with closed overhead reflectors.
Surface-mounted luminaires – with indirect component Luminaires with perforated overhead reflectors – mounted with distance to the ceiling – offer lighting comfort even in rooms with lower ceilings. This solution shines out thanks to a pleasant effect and the impression that the luminaire seems to float beneath the ceiling.
5 Surface-mounted luminaires with indirect component combine efficient direct light of surface-mounted systems with the comfort-increasing indirect component of suspended luminaires.
Geometrical arrangements Nodes offer extended planning scope for architecture-enhancing environments. Up to four surface-mounted or suspended continuous-line luminaires can be connected at variable angles by means of special adapters.
157
Luminaires with white louvre RWV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Universal application as suspended luminaires and with overhead reflectors and fixing accessories also as surface-mounted luminaires. Optical system Micro-segmented louvre RWV made of aluminium, white, for a uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RWV-L/28/54 E 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RWV-L/28 ED 5261 RWV-L/35 ED 5261 RWV-L/49 ED 5261 RWV-L/54 ED 5261 RWV-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1192 1492 1192 1492 1492 1192 1492
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
– – – – – – –
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for suspended mounting Wire suspension Wire suspension 1m 2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Light distribution Direct/indirect, indirect component approx. 45 %. With perforated overhead reflectors: indirect component approx. 15 %. With closed overhead reflectors: indirect component 0 %. Luminaire body Slender and elegant luminaire profile, upper profile arched towards the ceiling, made of solvent-free powdercoated sheet steel, white. With integrated coupling brackets for non-interrupted continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2051 DIN 5040: C43 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ4
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2051 with perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/··· DIN 5040: B53 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/4/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Overhead reflector Node Surface mounting accessories Prismatic cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
158
Page 168 168 169 169 169 169 169 431 436 444
Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) 4 luminaires 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1 pair of end caps 05261 K 4 perforated overhead reflectors 05261 DG/1500 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN
Photometrically effective cover options The lighting effect of 526··· luminaires can be effectively varied by means of optional overhead reflectors. Overhead reflectors DR turn the luminaires into a purely direct system whereas perforated overhead reflectors DG reduce the indirect component to approx. 15 %. Prismatic covers for improved dust protection are another option.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RWV-L/28/54 E 5261 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RWV-L/28 ED 5261 RWV-L/35 ED 5261 RWV-L/49 ED 5261 RWV-L/54 ED 5261 RWV-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1100 1400 1100 1400 1400 1100 1400
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
92 92 92 92 92 92 92
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for ceiling surface mounting Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector, spacer perforated closed 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2051 1
Data table no. 2052 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.1 5.7 7.3 8.9 10 13 17 24 31
4.6 6.4 8.0 9.6 11 14 17 25 33
6.8 9.5 12 15 17 22 28 40 52
7.7 11 13 16 19 24 29 42 54
Calculation parameters
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2052
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.25/BZ3
Area A in m2
Reference
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RWV-L/···28··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RWV-L/···35··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RWV-L/···49··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RWV-L/···54··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RWV-L/···80··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500
1.27 1.41 1.27 1.00 1.11 1.00 0.77 0.85 0.78 0.74 0.82 0.77 0.54 0.60 0.57
6.6 9.2 12 14 17 22 26 39 51
7.4 10 13 15 18 23 28 40 52
0.84 0.75 0.83 0.84 0.75 0.83 0.84 0.75 0.82 0.84 0.75 0.80 0.84 0.75 0.79
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.44 0.64 0.50 0.44 0.64 0.50 0.44 0.64 0.49 0.44 0.64 0.48 0.44 0.64 0.47
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics M
4.4 6.0 7.6 9.2 11 14 17 24 31
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
3.9 5.5 7.0 8.5 10 13 16 23 30
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
h = Luminaire height above working plane
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A50
En Room height H
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
with closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/···
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.40 0.12 0.33 0.40 0.12 0.33 0.40 0.12 0.33 0.40 0.12 0.32 0.40 0.12 0.31
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RWV-L/···28··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RWV-L/···35··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RWV-L/···49··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RWV-L/···54··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RWV-L/···80··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500
indirect ULOR
1.27 1.27
0.73 0.75
0.73 0.64
0.00 0.12
1.00 1.00
0.73 0.75
0.73 0.64
0.00 0.12
0.78 0.76
0.72 0.75
0.72 0.64
0.00 0.12
0.77 0.74
0.70 0.75
0.70 0.64
0.00 0.12
0.57 0.54
0.69 0.75
0.69 0.64
0.00 0.12
Technical information see page 440.
Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflectors DR Combined with overhead reflectors DR, 526··· luminaires can be conceived as purely direct surface-mounted luminaires. Recommended for rooms with lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflectance values.
Overhead reflectors DG In addition to efficient direct light, perforated overhead reflectors DG provide a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to this special effect the luminaires seem to float beneath the ceiling.
159
Luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Universal application as suspended luminaires and with overhead reflectors and fixing accessories also as surface-mounted luminaires. Optical system Micro-segmented hybrid parabolic louvre RWX, composed of white aluminium cross blades and highlyspecular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium for increased efficiency. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RWX-L/28/54 E 5261 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RWX-L/28 ED 5261 RWX-L/35 ED 5261 RWX-L/49 ED 5261 RWX-L/54 ED 5261 RWX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1192 1492 1192 1492 1492 1192 1492
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
– – – – – – –
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for suspended mounting Wire suspension Wire suspension 1m 2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Light distribution Direct/indirect, indirect component approx. 45 %. With perforated overhead reflectors: indirect component approx. 15 %. With closed overhead reflectors: indirect component 0 %. Luminaire body Slender and elegant luminaire profile, upper profile arched towards the ceiling, made of solvent-free powdercoated sheet steel, white. With integrated coupling brackets for non-interrupted continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Overhead reflector Node Surface mounting accessories Prismatic cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
160
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2053 DIN 5040: C63 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.25/BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
431 436 444
with perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/··· DIN 5040: B63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Page 168 168 169 169 169 169 169
Data table No. 2053
Ordering example: individual suspended luminaire, direct 1 luminaire 5261 RWX-L/49 ED 1 pair of end caps 05261 K 1 closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/1500 2 wire suspensions 05000 SN 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RWX-L/28/54 E 5261 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RWX-L/28 ED 5261 RWX-L/35 ED 5261 RWX-L/49 ED 5261 RWX-L/54 ED 5261 RWX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1100 1400 1100 1400 1400 1100 1400
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
92 92 92 92 92 92 92
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for ceiling surface mounting Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector, spacer perforated closed 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2053 1
Data table no. 2054 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.6 5.0 6.6 8.0 9.5 12 15 22 29
3.9 5.6 7.0 8.5 9.9 13 16 23 30
6.0 8.4 11 13 16 20 25 37 48
6.6 9.4 12 14 16 22 26 38 50
Calculation parameters
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2054
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
Area A in m2
Reference
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RWX-L/···28··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RWX-L/···35··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RWX-L/···49··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RWX-L/···54··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RWX-L/···80··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500
1.27 1.44 1.23 1.00 1.13 0.97 0.77 0.87 0.76 0.74 0.84 0.75 0.54 0.61 0.55
5.7 8.2 10 13 15 19 24 35 46
6.5 8.7 11 14 16 20 24 36 47
0.88 0.78 0.91 0.88 0.78 0.91 0.88 0.78 0.89 0.88 0.78 0.88 0.88 0.78 0.86
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.47 0.66 0.56 0.47 0.66 0.56 0.47 0.66 0.55 0.47 0.66 0.54 0.47 0.66 0.53
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics M
3.9 5.2 6.5 8.2 9.5 12 15 22 28
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
3.4 4.9 6.2 7.5 8.8 12 14 21 27
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
h = Luminaire height above working plane
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/4/BZ3
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A50
En Room height H
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
with closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/···
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.41 0.11 0.35 0.41 0.11 0.35 0.41 0.11 0.34 0.41 0.11 0.33 0.41 0.11 0.33
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RWX-L/···28··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RWX-L/···35··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RWX-L/···49··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RWX-L/···54··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RWX-L/···80··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500
indirect ULOR
1.27 1.38
0.80 0.78
0.80 0.66
0.00 0.11
1.00 1.09
0.80 0.78
0.80 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.78 0.84
0.78 0.78
0.78 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.77 0.81
0.77 0.78
0.77 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.57 0.58
0.75 0.78
0.75 0.66
0.00 0.11
Technical information see page 440.
Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflectors DR Combined with overhead reflectors DR, 526··· luminaires can be conceived as purely direct surface-mounted luminaires. Recommended for rooms with lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflectance values.
Overhead reflectors DG In addition to efficient direct light, perforated overhead reflectors DG provide a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to this special effect the luminaires seem to float beneath the ceiling.
161
Luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, financial institutions. Universal application as suspended luminaires and with overhead reflectors and fixing accessories also as surface-mounted luminaires. Optical system Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RSV-L/28/54 E 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RSV-L/28 ED 5261 RSV-L/35 ED 5261 RSV-L/49 ED 5261 RSV-L/54 ED 5261 RSV-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1192 1492 1192 1492 1492 1192 1492
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
– – – – – – –
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for suspended mounting Wire suspension Wire suspension 1m 2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Light distribution Direct/indirect, indirect component approx. 45 %. With perforated overhead reflectors: indirect component approx. 15 %. With closed overhead reflectors: indirect component 0 %. Luminaire body Slender and elegant luminaire profile, upper profile arched towards the ceiling, made of solvent-free powdercoated sheet steel, white. With integrated coupling brackets for non-interrupted continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Overhead reflector Node Surface mounting accessories Prismatic cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
162
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2055 DIN 5040: C63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ1/4/BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
431 436 444
with perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/··· DIN 5040: B63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ1/4/BZ2
Page 168 168 169 169 169 169 169
Data table No. 2055
Order. example: cont. line (4 suspended luminaires) 4 luminaires 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 1 pair of end caps 05261 K 5 wire suspensions 05000 SN 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR 3 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The innovative T5 series 526··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in MultiLamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RSV-L/28/54 E 5261 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RSV-L/28 ED 5261 RSV-L/35 ED 5261 RSV-L/49 ED 5261 RSV-L/54 ED 5261 RSV-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1100 1400 1100 1400 1400 1100 1400
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
92 92 92 92 92 92 92
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for ceiling surface mounting Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector, spacer perforated closed 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2055 1
Data table no. 2056 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.9 5.5 7.2 8.7 10 13 17 24 32
4.3 6.1 7.6 9.2 11 14 17 25 33
6.5 9.2 12 15 17 22 28 40 53
7.1 10 13 15 18 23 29 41 54
Calculation parameters
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2056
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ2
Area A in m2
Reference
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RSV-L/···28··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RSV-L/···35··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RSV-L/···49··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RSV-L/···54··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RSV-L/···80··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500
1.27 1.49 1.26 1.00 1.17 0.99 0.77 0.90 0.78 0.74 0.87 0.77 0.54 0.63 0.57
6.5 9.3 12 14 17 22 27 40 53
7.3 9.9 13 16 18 23 28 41 54
0.80 0.68 0.81 0.80 0.68 0.81 0.80 0.68 0.79 0.80 0.68 0.77 0.80 0.68 0.76
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.44 0.58 0.49 0.44 0.58 0.49 0.44 0.58 0.48 0.44 0.58 0.48 0.44 0.58 0.46
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics M
4.4 6.0 7.5 9.3 11 14 17 25 33
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
3.9 5.6 7.1 8.6 10 13 16 24 32
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
h = Luminaire height above working plane
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A50
En Room height H
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
with closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/···
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.36 0.10 0.31 0.36 0.10 0.31 0.36 0.10 0.31 0.36 0.10 0.30 0.36 0.10 0.29
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RSV-L/···28··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RSV-L/···35··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RSV-L/···49··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RSV-L/···54··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RSV-L/···80··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500
indirect ULOR
1.27 1.32
0.68 0.68
0.68 0.58
0.00 0.10
1.00 1.04
0.68 0.68
0.68 0.58
0.00 0.10
0.78 0.80
0.67 0.68
0.67 0.58
0.00 0.10
0.77 0.77
0.66 0.68
0.66 0.58
0.00 0.10
0.57 0.56
0.64 0.68
0.64 0.58
0.00 0.10
Technical information see page 440.
Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflectors DR Combined with overhead reflectors DR, 526··· luminaires can be conceived as purely direct surface-mounted luminaires. Recommended for rooms with lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflectance values.
Overhead reflectors DG In addition to efficient direct light, perforated overhead reflectors DG provide a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to this special effect the luminaires seem to float beneath the ceiling.
163
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, financial institutions. Universal application as suspended luminaires and with overhead reflectors and fixing accessories also as surface-mounted luminaires. Optical system Micro-segmented, semispecular parabolic louvre RSX made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity.
Luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RSX-L/28/54 E 5261 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RSX-L/28 ED 5261 RSX-L/35 ED 5261 RSX-L/49 ED 5261 RSX-L/54 ED 5261 RSX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1192 1492 1192 1492 1492 1192 1492
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
– – – – – – –
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for suspended mounting Wire suspension Wire suspension 1m 2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Light distribution Direct/indirect, indirect component approx. 45 %. With perforated overhead reflectors: indirect component approx. 15 %. With closed overhead reflectors: indirect component 0 %. Luminaire body Slender and elegant luminaire profile, upper profile arched towards the ceiling, made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. With integrated coupling brackets for non-interrupted continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2057 DIN 5040: C63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
164
Data table No. 2057
C 0 - C 180
with perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/···
T5
DIN 5040: B63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Overhead reflector Node Surface mounting accessories Prismatic cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
T5
25°
25°
65°
65°
Page 168 168 169 169 169 169 169 431 436 444
Ordering example: individual surface-mounted luminaire with decorative indirect component 1 luminaire 5261 RSX-L/80 ED 1 pair of end caps 05261 K 1 perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/1500 1 pair of ceiling spacers 05261 AB 1 wiring cover 05261 LK
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RSX-L/28/54 E 5261 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RSX-L/28 ED 5261 RSX-L/35 ED 5261 RSX-L/49 ED 5261 RSX-L/54 ED 5261 RSX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1100 1400 1100 1400 1400 1100 1400
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
92 92 92 92 92 92 92
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for ceiling surface mounting Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector, spacer perforated closed 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2057 1
Data table no. 2058 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 5.0 6.5 7.9 9.4 12 15 22 29
3.8 5.5 6.9 8.3 9.7 13 16 23 30
5.9 8.3 11 13 16 20 25 37 48
6.4 9.1 12 14 16 21 26 38 49
Calculation parameters
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2058
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
Area A in m2
Reference
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RSX-L/···28··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RSX-L/···35··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RSX-L/···49··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RSX-L/···54··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RSX-L/···80··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500
1.27 1.45 1.28 1.00 1.14 1.01 0.77 0.88 0.79 0.74 0.85 0.78 0.54 0.61 0.58
5.5 8.0 10 13 15 20 24 35 47
6.2 8.4 11 13 16 20 24 36 48
0.88 0.77 0.87 0.88 0.77 0.87 0.88 0.77 0.85 0.88 0.77 0.84 0.88 0.77 0.82
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.47 0.65 0.54 0.47 0.65 0.54 0.47 0.65 0.53 0.47 0.65 0.52 0.47 0.65 0.51
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics M
3.7 5.1 6.4 8.0 9.4 12 15 22 29
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
3.3 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 12 14 21 28
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
h = Luminaire height above working plane
NBN L 14-002: BZ1
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A60
En Room height H
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
with closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/···
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.40 0.11 0.33 0.40 0.11 0.33 0.40 0.11 0.33 0.40 0.11 0.32 0.40 0.11 0.31
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RSX-L/···28··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RSX-L/···35··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RSX-L/···49··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RSX-L/···54··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RSX-L/···80··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500
indirect ULOR
1.27 1.31
0.76 0.77
0.76 0.65
0.00 0.11
1.00 1.03
0.76 0.77
0.76 0.65
0.00 0.11
0.78 0.79
0.75 0.77
0.75 0.65
0.00 0.11
0.77 0.76
0.73 0.77
0.73 0.65
0.00 0.11
0.57 0.55
0.72 0.77
0.72 0.65
0.00 0.11
Technical information see page 440.
Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflectors DR Combined with overhead reflectors DR, 526··· luminaires can be conceived as purely direct surface-mounted luminaires. Recommended for rooms with lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflectance values.
Overhead reflectors DG In addition to efficient direct light, perforated overhead reflectors DG provide a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to this special effect the luminaires seem to float beneath the ceiling.
165
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, financial institutions. Universal application as suspended luminaires and with overhead reflectors and fixing accessories also as surface-mounted luminaires. Optical system Micro-segmented, highlyspecular parabolic louvre RPX made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity.
Luminaires with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 5261 RPX-L/28 ED 5261 RPX-L/35 ED 5261 RPX-L/49 ED 5261 RPX-L/54 ED 5261 RPX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1192 1492 1192 1492 1492 1192 1492
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
– – – – – – –
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for suspended mounting Wire suspension Wire suspension 1m 2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m 05000 SN 05000 SN/2m
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Light distribution Direct/indirect, indirect component approx. 45 %. With perforated overhead reflectors: indirect component approx. 15 %. With closed overhead reflectors: indirect component 0 %. Luminaire body Slender and elegant luminaire profile, upper profile arched towards the ceiling, made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. With integrated coupling brackets for non-interrupted continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2059 DIN 5040: C63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
166
Data table No. 2059
C 0 - C 180
with perforated overhead reflector 05261 DG/···
T5
DIN 5040: B63 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Overhead reflector Node Surface mounting accessories Prismatic cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
T5
25°
25°
65°
65°
Page 168 168 169 169 169 169 169 431 436 444
Ordering example: continuous line with 3 luminaires, ceiling mounting, direct 3 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 1 pair of end caps 05261 K 3 closed overhead reflectors 05261 DR/1500 3 ceiling fixing rails 05261 DBS/1500 2 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference*
Lamps W
D mm
D1
D2
≈kg
5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80/ E 5261 RPX-L/28 ED 5261 RPX-L/35 ED 5261 RPX-L/49 ED 5261 RPX-L/54 ED 5261 RPX-L/80 ED
1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
1100 1400 1100 1400 1400 1100 1400
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
92 92 92 92 92 92 92
3.0 3.9 3.0 3.9 3.9 3.0 3.9
Accessories for ceiling surface mounting Ceiling Overhead reflector, Overhead reflector, spacer perforated closed 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500 05261 AB 05261 DG/1200 05261 DR/1200 05261 AB 05261 DG/1500 05261 DR/1500
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2059 1
Data table no. 2060 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 5.0 6.5 7.9 9.4 12 15 22 29
3.8 5.5 6.9 8.4 9.8 13 16 23 30
5.9 8.3 11 13 16 20 25 37 48
6.4 9.2 12 14 16 21 26 38 50
Calculation parameters
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2060
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1
Area A in m2
Reference
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RPX-L/···28··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RPX-L/···35··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RPX-L/···49··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500 5261 RPX-L/···54··· + 05261 DG/1200 + 05261 P/1200 5261 RPX-L/···80··· + 05261 DG/1500 + 05261 P/1500
1.27 1.44 1.27 1.00 1.13 1.00 0.77 0.87 0.79 0.74 0.84 0.78 0.54 0.61 0.57
5.5 8.0 10 12 15 19 24 35 46
6.1 8.3 11 13 16 20 24 36 47
0.88 0.77 0.87 0.88 0.77 0.87 0.88 0.77 0.86 0.88 0.77 0.84 0.88 0.77 0.82
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.47 0.66 0.54 0.47 0.66 0.54 0.47 0.66 0.53 0.47 0.66 0.52 0.47 0.66 0.51
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics M
3.7 5.0 6.3 8.0 9.3 12 15 21 28
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
3.3 4.8 6.1 7.4 8.7 12 14 21 28
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
h = Luminaire height above working plane
NBN L 14-002: BZ1
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
DIN 5040: A60
En Room height H
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
with closed overhead reflector 05261 DR/···
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.41 0.11 0.33 0.41 0.11 0.33 0.41 0.11 0.33 0.41 0.11 0.32 0.41 0.11 0.31
‡L direct DLOR
5261 RPX-L/···28··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RPX-L/···35··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RPX-L/···49··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500 5261 RPX-L/···54··· + 05261 DR/1200 + 05261 DG/1200 5261 RPX-L/···80··· + 05261 DR/1500 + 05261 DG/1500
indirect ULOR
1.27 1.32
0.77 0.77
0.77 0.66
0.00 0.11
1.00 1.05
0.77 0.77
0.77 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.78 0.80
0.75 0.77
0.75 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.77 0.78
0.74 0.77
0.74 0.66
0.00 0.11
0.57 0.56
0.72 0.77
0.72 0.66
0.00 0.11
Technical information see page 440.
Technical information see page 440.
Overhead reflectors DR Combined with overhead reflectors DR, 526··· luminaires can be conceived as purely direct surface-mounted luminaires. Recommended for rooms with lower ceilings or lower ceiling reflectance values.
Overhead reflectors DG In addition to efficient direct light, perforated overhead reflectors DG provide a decorative ceiling illumination. Due to this special effect the luminaires seem to float beneath the ceiling.
167
526··· Accessories
3284 mm
90°
1492 mm
Ordering example: Geometrical arrangement according to the draft above with 4 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E and 2 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/28/54 E, wire suspensions, 5-conductor through-wiring set. 4 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 2 luminaires 5261 RPX-L/28/54 E 8 end-cap adapters 05261 KA 6 counter-balance weights 05000 A20 4 nodes with wire suspensions A 03 S 2 wire suspensions 05000 SN 1 ceiling rose 05900 AN 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR/2m 4 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/58 1 through-wiring set 3700/5LV/36
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white.
End-cap adapter 05261 KA 1 piece, die-cast aluminium, white, for the connection of nodes A 03··· with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2.
Closed overhead reflector Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. For purely downward, direct light distribution of surface-mounted and suspended luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means of screw connection. 05261 DR/1200 for ···/28/54. 05261 DR/1500 for ···/35/49/80.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
168
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel wire, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit. Ceiling rose 05900 AN* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable. Counter-balance weight 05000 A20 Required for mounting to node A 03 S.
Perforated overhead reflector Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. To increase the direct component of suspended luminaires or for decorative ceiling illumination with surface-mounted luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means of screw connection. 05261 DG/1200 for ···/28/54. 05261 DG/1500 for ···/35/49/80.
End caps 05261 K 1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. To be attached without using tools.
Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.
Wire suspension 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5261··· luminaires, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m. 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m.
Ceiling spacer 05261 AB 1 pair, plastic material, necessary for direct surface ceiling mounting, distance between upper luminaire edge and ceiling: 18 mm. Wiring cover 05261 LK (not illustrated) 1 piece, plastic material, to cover the mains cable in case of direct ceiling surface mounting.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, 0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary strain relief systems, fixing screws and connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover 1 piece, to be attached without tools. To protect the lamp and the optical system against unnecessarily rapid degradation. Only for suspended mounting. 05261 P/1200 for ···/28/54. 05261 P/1500 for ···/35/49/80.
Feeding tube 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 05000 SN, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. ···3LV··· 3-conductor through-wiring ···5LV··· 5-conductor through-wiring Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/5LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires ···28/54 ···28/54 ···35/49/80 ···35/49/80 ···L···
Length 1450 mm 1450 mm 1750 mm 1750 mm 25 m
Ceiling fixing rails Sheet steel, white. To cover the mains cable for surface mounting. Only necessary for ceiling outlets located at the longitudinal luminaire axis outside the front-plane feeding opening of the luminaires. Additional ceiling spacers 05261 AB are not required. 05261 DBS/1200 for ···/28/54. 05261 DBS/1500 for ···/35/49/80.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
169
“Think cubist, think Braque”
504···, 505···
504···, 505··· series surfacemounted and suspended luminaires are characterised by their timeless slender cubist design. In addition to five different louvre options, the computer-calculated prismatic diffuser with internal reflector systems offers an interesting photometric alternative which also convinces with a decorative indirect component in case of surface mounting.
Translucent diffuser Prismatic diffuser made of PLEXIGLAS with internal highly-efficient reflector for narrow/wide-angle light distribution.
Page 172/178
170
RWV
RWX
RSV
RSX/¥65°
RPX/¥65°
Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet-steel depending on application.
An exclusive combination of white cross blades and reflectionintensified parabolic side panels, offering a neo-classical appearance with great performance.
For high-efficiency illumination in areas with general public access and non-DSE office environments. Narrow/wideangle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concave-profiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
Semi-specular materials are becoming increasingly popular in the built environment. TRILUX refines the use of these materials with a reflection-intensified material, offering peak photometric performance with the benefits of diffuse distribution.
Superb surface clarity offers a louvre that is not only fully compliant to the requirements of photometric bodies, but also excels with a working efficiency of up to 80 % in direct and over 90 % in direct/indirect applications.
Page 172
Page 174
Page 174
Page 176/180
Page 176/180
171
Surface-mounted luminaires with translucent diffuser T or white louvre RWV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Optical system Direct. ···T··· Diffuser in translucent PLEXIGLAS with internal channel prisms and high transmission degree exceeding 80 %. Reflector made of sheet steel, with highlyreflective white coating. ···RWV··· Micro-segmented louvre RWV made of aluminium, white, for a uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Elegant rectangular design with longitudinal 40 mm rim. ···T··· Individual luminaire with premounted end caps. Not suitable for non-interrupted continuous lines. ···RWV-L··· Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines with optically continuous louvres. End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Node Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Trunking Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
172
Page 182 183 183 183 426 431 436 444
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The T5 series 504···/505··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Translucent diffusers PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclusions made of other polymerised methacrylates causes light output ratios that are up to 30 % higher than those of conventional opal diffuser luminaires.
Reference*
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
5041 T/28/54 E 5041 T/35/49/80 E 5041 T/28 ED 5041 T/35 ED 5041 T/49 ED 5041 T/54 ED 5041 T/80 ED
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
– – – – – – –
3.9 4.7 3.9 4.7 4.7 3.9 4.7
* With premounted end caps.
Reference**
Lamps W 5041 RWV-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 5041 RWV-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 5041 RWV-L/28 ED 1x28 5041 RWV-L/35 ED 1x35 5041 RWV-L/49 ED 1x49 5041 RWV-L/54 ED 1x54 5041 RWV-L/80 ED 1x80
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
293 293 293 293 293 293 293
3.2 3.8 3.2 3.8 3.8 3.2 3.8
** End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2061 1
Data table no. 2062 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.4 4.8 6.1 7.4 8.6 11 14 20 26
3.9 5.3 6.6 8.0 9.3 12 14 21 27
5.7 8.0 10 12 14 19 23 33 43
6.5 8.8 11 13 16 20 24 35 45
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2061
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2062
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60
6.8 9.6 12 15 17 23 28 40 53
7.7 10 13 16 19 24 29 42 55
0.87 0.87 0.86 0.83 0.79
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
‡L 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.81 0.77
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
5041 T/···28··· 5041 T/···35··· 5041 T/···49··· 5041 T/···54··· 5041 T/···80···
4.6 6.3 7.9 9.6 11 14 17 25 33
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
4.1 5.8 7.3 8.9 10 14 17 24 32
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
‡L direct DLOR
5041 RWV-L/···28··· 5041 RWV-L/···35··· 5041 RWV-L/···49··· 5041 RWV-L/···54··· 5041 RWV-L/···80···
1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.57
0.70 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.66
0.70 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.66
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Node = Design freedom Additional design scope for lighting planning is realised by nodes with continuously adjustable angles. A maximum of four connections is possible.
173
Surface-mounted luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. RSV also for financial institutions. Optical system Direct. ···RWX··· Micro-segmented hybrid parabolic louvre RWX, composed of white aluminium cross blades and highlyspecular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium for increased efficiency. ···RSV··· Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Elegant rectangular design with longitudinal 40 mm rim. Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines with optically continuous louvres. End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Node Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Trunking Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
174
Page 182 183 183 183 426 431 436 444
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The T5 series 504···/505··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
RWX louvre RWX louvres stand for photometric efficiency, thanks to a striking combination of white-coated aluminium cross blades and specular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium.
Reference*
Lamps W 5041 RWX-L/28/54 E 1x28/54 5041 RWX-L/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 5041 RWX-L/28 ED 1x28 5041 RWX-L/35 ED 1x35 5041 RWX-L/49 ED 1x49 5041 RWX-L/54 ED 1x54 5041 RWX-L/80 ED 1x80
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference*
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
293 293 293 293 293 293 293
3.2 3.8 3.2 3.8 3.8 3.2 3.8
5041 RSV-L/28/54 E 5041 RSV-L/35/49/80 E 5041 RSV-L/28 ED 5041 RSV-L/35 ED 5041 RSV-L/49 ED 5041 RSV-L/54 ED 5041 RSV-L/80 ED
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
293 293 293 293 293 293 293
3.2 3.8 3.2 3.8 3.8 3.2 3.8
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2063 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.8 5.4 6.9 8.4 9.8 13 16 23 30
4.3 5.8 7.3 9.0 11 14 16 24 31
6.4 9.0 12 14 16 22 26 38 51
7.1 9.7 12 15 18 22 27 40 52
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2063 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/4/BZ3
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2063 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5041 RSV-L/···28··· 5041 RSV-L/···35··· 5041 RSV-L/···49··· 5041 RSV-L/···54··· 5041 RSV-L/···80··· 5041 RWX-L/···28··· 5041 RWX-L/···35··· 5041 RWX-L/···49··· 5041 RWX-L/···54··· 5041 RWX-L/···80···
1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.57 1.14 0.90 0.70 0.70 0.51
0.71 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.76 0.75
0.71 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.76 0.75
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
175
∑
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Elegant rectangular design with longitudinal 40 mm rim. Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines with optically continuous louvres. End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages.
25°
25°
65°
65°
ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Node Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Trunking Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
176
Page 182 183 183 183 426 431 436 444
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The T5 series 504···/505··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference* 5041 RSX-L/28/54 E 5041 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 5041 RSX-L/28 ED 5041 RSX-L/35 ED 5041 RSX-L/49 ED 5041 RSX-L/54 ED 5041 RSX-L/80 ED
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference*
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
293 293 293 293 293 293 293
3.2 3.8 3.2 3.8 3.8 3.2 3.8
5041 RPX-L/28/54 E 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 5041 RPX-L/28 ED 5041 RPX-L/35 ED 5041 RPX-L/49 ED 5041 RPX-L/54 ED 5041 RPX-L/80 ED
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 900 1200 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
158 158 158 158 158 158 158
293 293 293 293 293 293 293
3.2 3.8 3.2 3.8 3.8 3.2 3.8
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2064 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.2 4.6 5.9 7.1 8.3 11 14 20 26
3.6 4.9 6.2 7.6 8.9 12 14 20 27
5.4 7.7 9.8 12 14 18 23 33 44
6.0 8.2 10 13 15 19 23 34 45
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2064 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2064 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5041 RPX-L/···28··· 5041 RPX-L/···35··· 5041 RPX-L/···49··· 5041 RPX-L/···54··· 5041 RPX-L/···80··· 5041 RSX-L/···28··· 5041 RSX-L/···35··· 5041 RSX-L/···49··· 5041 RSX-L/···54··· 5041 RSX-L/···80···
1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.58 1.28 1.01 0.79 0.78 0.58
0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.81 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.76
0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.81 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.76
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
Reflection intensification The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an anodising thickness orientated around the half wavelength (∂/2) of the visible light.
177
Suspended luminaires with translucent diffuser T, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Optical system Direct/indirect. Diffuser in translucent PLEXIGLAS with internal channel prisms and high transmission degree exceeding 80 %. With ceiling-oriented PLEXIGLAS cover for improved dust protection. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Elegant rectangular design with longitudinal 40 mm rim. One premounted end cap, one end cap is enclosed loose. Not suitable for non-interrupted continuous lines. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface.
Indications Node Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Trunking Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
178
Page 182 183 183 183 426 431 436 444
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The T5 series 504···/505··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Translucent diffusers PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclusions made of other polymerised methacrylates causes light output ratios that are up to 30 % higher than those of conventional opal diffuser luminaires.
Reference*
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
5051 T/28/54 E 5051 T/35/49/80 E 5051 T/28 ED 5051 T/35 ED 5051 T/49 ED 5051 T/54 ED 5051 T/80 ED
D mm 1193 1493 1193 1493 1493 1193 1493
D1
≈kg
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
3.5 4.4 3.5 4.4 4.4 3.5 4.4
* With premounted end caps.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2065 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.9 5.5 7.1 8.6 10 13 16 23 30
4.5 6.2 7.7 9.3 11 14 17 24 32
6.6 9.2 12 14 17 22 27 39 51
7.4 10 13 16 18 23 28 41 53
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2065 DIN 5040: B42 CIBSE BZ: BZ4/2.5/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5051 T/···28··· 5051 T/···35··· 5051 T/···49··· 5051 T/···54··· 5051 T/···80···
1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.58
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77
0.54 0.54 0.53 0.51 0.50
indirect ULOR
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.28 0.27
Technical information see page 440.
Design-oriented suspension 504···, 505··· series wire suspensions are perfectly adapted to the luminaire design. Luminaire mounting is facilitated by means of the wire surrounding the ceiling canopy for easy transversal alignment.
Decorative louvre and diffuser luminaires The 504···, 505··· series includes both louvre and diffuser luminaires. A multitude of optical systems allows numerous applications going beyond typical office situations.
179
∑
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct/indirect. Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Elegant rectangular design with longitudinal 40 mm rim. Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines with optically continuous louvres. End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages.
25°
65°
ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface. Indications Node PLEXIGLAS cover Suspensions End caps Through-wiring set Trunking Lighting management system Multi-Lamp electronic control gear Lamp characteristics
180
Page 182 182 183 183 183 426 431 436 444
25°
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The T5 series 504···/505··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
65°
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference* 5051 RSX-L/28/54 E 5051 RSX-L/35/49/80 E 5051 RSX-L/28 ED 5051 RSX-L/35 ED 5051 RSX-L/49 ED 5051 RSX-L/54 ED 5051 RSX-L/80 ED
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 1193 1493 1193 1493 1493 1193 1493
D1
≈kg
Reference*
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
3.0 3.6 3.0 3.6 3.6 3.0 3.6
5051 RPX-L/28/54 E 5051 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 5051 RPX-L/28 ED 5051 RPX-L/35 ED 5051 RPX-L/49 ED 5051 RPX-L/54 ED 5051 RPX-L/80 ED
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 1193 1493 1193 1493 1493 1193 1493
D1
≈kg
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
3.0 3.6 3.0 3.6 3.6 3.0 3.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2066 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 4.9 6.3 7.7 9.1 12 15 21 28
3.8 5.4 6.8 8.2 9.5 13 15 22 29
5.8 8.1 11 13 15 20 24 36 46
6.4 9.0 11 14 16 21 25 37 48
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2066 DIN 5040: C53 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.25/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2066 DIN 5040: C53 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5051 RPX-L/···28··· 5051 RPX-L/···35··· 5051 RPX-L/···49··· 5051 RPX-L/···54··· 5051 RPX-L/···80··· 5051 RSX-L/···28··· 5051 RSX-L/···35··· 5051 RSX-L/···49··· 5051 RSX-L/···54··· 5051 RSX-L/···80···
1.27 1.00 0.77 0.74 0.54 1.31 1.04 0.79 0.77 0.56
0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
0.53 0.53 0.53 0.53 0.53 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
indirect ULOR
0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36
Technical information see page 440.
Stable luminaire bodies Suspended luminaires with stability-promoting, ceiling-oriented perforations for wide-angle indirect component convince with increased torsional rigidity and excellent dimensional stability.
PLEXIGLAS cover 505··· suspended louvre luminaires can be easily equipped with PLEXIGLAS covers to be mounted to the luminaire roofs. Lamps and optical system are thus efficiently protected against dust.
181
504···, 505··· Accessories
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white.
End-cap adapter 05041 KA 1 piece, die-cast aluminium, white, for the connection of nodes A 03··· with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2.
PLEXIGLAS cover 1 piece, to be attached without tools. To protect the lamp and the optical system of 505··· suspended louvre luminaires against unnecessarily rapid degradation. 05051 P/1200 for luminaires 5051 R···/28/54. 05051 P/1500 for luminaires 5051 R···/35/49/80.
Distance plate 05000 DD (not illustrated) 1 pair, white plastic material, for distance ceiling mounting of luminaires 504··· in combination with nodes A 03 D. One pair of ceiling distance plates is required per luminaire.
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit. Counter-balance weight 05000 A19 Required for mounting to node A 03 S and trunking 07690···.
Feeding tube 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 05051 S, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with 05051 S/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN. Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated), 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Ceiling rose 05900 AN* 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
182
End caps 05041 K 1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual or continuous-line luminaires. Plastic, white. To be attached without using tools.
Wire suspension 1 piece, for suspended mounting of 5041···, 5051··· luminaires, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05051 S for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m. 05051 S/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. ···3LV··· 3-conductor through-wiring ···5LV··· 5-conductor through-wiring Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/5LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires ···28/54 ···28/54 ···35/49/80 ···35/49/80 ···L···
Length 1450 mm 1450 mm 1750 mm 1750 mm 25 m
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 05051 S, 05051 S/2m, comprising the necessary strain relief systems, fixing screws and connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
2618 mm
90°
6436 mm
Ordering example: Geometrical arrangement according to the draft above containing 8 surface-mounted luminaires 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E and 6 surface-mounted luminaires 5041 RPX-L/28/54 E. 8 luminaires 5041 RPX-L/35/49/80 E 6 luminaires 5041 RPX-L/28/54 E 14 end-cap adapters 05041 KA 6 ceiling nodes A 03 D 4 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/58 3 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/36
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving and comfort-enhancing lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
183
598···, 599···
184
This series excels by its look: luminaire unit height of only 62 mm, characteristic design and slender optics create the best conditions for architecturally appealing lighting installations. The series contains surfacemounted luminaires for exclusive use of T5 lamps and suspended luminaires in versions which support both T5 and T8 lamps.
RSX/¥65°
RPX/¥65°
RWV
RSV
Semi-specular materials are becoming increasingly popular in the built environment. TRILUX refines the use of these materials with a reflection-intensified material, offering peak photometric performance with the benefits of diffuse distribution.
Superb surface clarity offers a louvre that is not only fully compliant to the requirements of photometric bodies, but also excels with a working efficiency of up to 80 % in direct and over 90 % in direct/indirect applications.
Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet steel depending on application.
For high-efficiency illumination in areas with general public access and non-DSE office environments. Narrow/wideangle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concave-profiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
Page 186/188
Page 186/188
Page 190
Page 190
RPR/¥65° Designed for excellent, high-efficiency illumination of all Cat. II DSE installations. Specular side panels and parabolic cross blades ensure good all-round glare limitation.
Page 192
185
∑
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, in a particularly elegant design. The ultra-low profile is enhanced by a striking 20 mm biplanar rim. The structuralised, powder-coated die-cast aluminium end caps offer both stability and an elegant connection between the rounded side panels. The height overall is a mere 62 mm, with additional 10 mm mounting distance to ceiling. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). 25°
25°
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 5981N RSX/2x28 ED.
Indications Page Node 194 Ceiling fixing rail 195 Continuous-line coupling 195 Through-wiring set 195 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
186
65°
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
65°
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 2x28 2x35
5981N RSX/28 E 5981N RSX/35 E 5981N RSX/2x28 E 5981N RSX/2x35 E
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference
165 165 165 165
410 410 410 410
4.4 5.2 4.7 5.5
5981N RPX/28 E 5981N RPX/35 E 5981N RPX/2x28 E 5981N RPX/2x35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 2x28 2x35
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
≈kg
165 165 165 165
410 410 410 410
4.4 5.2 4.7 5.5
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2093 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.1 4.5 5.8 7.0 8.3 11 13 20 26
3.5 4.8 6.1 7.5 8.8 11 14 20 26
5.2 7.5 9.6 12 14 18 22 33 43
5.9 8.0 10 12 15 19 23 34 44
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2093 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2093 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5981N RPX/28 E 5981N RPX/35 E 5981N RPX/2x28 E 5981N RPX/2x35 E 5981N RSX/28 E 5981N RSX/35 E 5981N RSX/2x28 E 5981N RSX/2x35 E
1.26 1.00 0.83 0.66 1.26 1.00 0.83 0.66
0.83 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.83 0.83 0.63 0.63
0.83 0.83 0.63 0.63 0.83 0.83 0.63 0.63
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Reflection intensification The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an anodising thickness orientated around the half wavelength (∂/2) of the visible light.
Continuous-line couplings Elegant junctions between luminaires can be created by continuous-line couplings, perfectly adapted to the design of the 598···, 599··· series. In addition, optically identical adapters realise the connection to nodes.
187
∑
Suspended luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct/indirect. Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, in a particularly elegant design. The ultra-low profile is enhanced by a striking 20 mm biplanar rim. The structuralised, powder-coated die-cast aluminium end caps offer both stability and an elegant connection between the rounded side panels. The height overall is a mere 62 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 5991N RPX/35 ED.
Indications Page Node 194 Overhead reflector 194 Suspensions 195 Continuous-line coupling 195 Through-wiring set 195 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
188
25°
25°
65°
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
65°
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reference
Lamps W 5991N RSX/28 E 1x28 5991N RSX/35 E 1x35 5991N RSX/2x28 E 2x28 5991N RSX/2x35 E 2x35
D mm 1185 1485 1185 1485
D1
D2
D3
≈kg
23 23 23 23
1248 1548 1248 1548
1310 1610 1310 1610
3.7 4.2 4.1 4.6
Reference
Lamps W 5991N RPX/28 E 1x28 5991N RPX/35 E 1x35 5991N RPX/2x28 E 2x28 5991N RPX/2x35 E 2x35
D mm 1185 1485 1185 1485
D1
D2
D3
≈kg
23 23 23 23
1248 1548 1248 1548
1310 1610 1310 1610
3.7 4.2 4.1 4.6
652d Degree of protection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP 20
Data table no. 2067 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.8 5.2 6.8 8.2 9.6 12 15 22 29
4.2 5.8 7.2 8.7 10 13 16 23 30
6.3 8.7 11 14 16 21 26 37 48
6.9 9.7 12 15 17 22 27 38 50
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2067 DIN 5040: D62 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2067 DIN 5040: C53 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Overhead reflectors Perforated overhead reflectors DG provide efficient direct light combined with well-balanced ceiling illumination. Closed overhead reflectors DR convert 599··· suspended luminaires into purely direct systems.
Metallic effect The TRILUX T·200 series with individual luminaires in silvergrey with metallic effect (see page 99) represents an interesting alternative to the white 59··· luminaires. The luminous flux distribution is also variable for this versions thanks to colour-adapted overhead reflectors.
5991N RPX/28 E + 05991 DR/28 + 05991 DG/28 5991N RPX/35 E + 05991 DR/35 + 05991 DG/35 5991N RPX/2x28 E + 05991 DR/28 + 05991 DG/28 5991N RPX/2x35 E + 05991 DR/35 + 05991 DG/35 5991N RSX/28 E + 05991 DR/28 + 05991 DG/28 5991N RSX/35 E + 05991 DR/35 + 05991 DG/35 5991N RSX/2x28 E + 05991 DR/28 + 05991 DG/28 5991N RSX/2x35 E + 05991 DR/35 + 05991 DG/35
1.27 1.20 1.22 1.00 0.95 0.96 0.65 0.62 0.63 0.51 0.48 0.49 1.27 1.20 1.22 1.00 0.95 0.96 0.65 0.62 0.63 0.51 0.48 0.49
0.95 0.76 0.85 0.95 0.76 0.85 0.93 0.73 0.83 0.93 0.73 0.83 0.95 0.76 0.85 0.95 0.76 0.85 0.93 0.73 0.83 0.93 0.73 0.83
0.36 0.76 0.58 0.36 0.76 0.58 0.38 0.73 0.56 0.38 0.73 0.56 0.36 0.76 0.58 0.36 0.76 0.58 0.38 0.73 0.56 0.38 0.73 0.56
indirect ULOR
0.59 0.00 0.27 0.59 0.00 0.27 0.55 0.00 0.27 0.55 0.00 0.27 0.59 0.00 0.27 0.59 0.00 0.27 0.55 0.00 0.27 0.55 0.00 0.27
Technical information see page 440.
189
Suspended luminaires with white louvre RWV or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV Application For the efficient and elegant lighting of offices, sales areas and showrooms. RSV versions also recommended for financial institutions.
Reference 5991N RWV/36 5991N RWV/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 3.5 1608 1670 4.1
Reference 5992N RWV/36 5992N RWV/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 4.0 1608 1670 4.9
Optical system Direct/indirect. ···RWV··· Micro-segmented louvre RWV made of aluminium, white, for a uniform light distribution. ···RSV··· Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, in a particularly elegant design. The ultra-low profile is enhanced by a striking 20 mm biplanar rim. The structuralised, powder-coated die-cast aluminium end caps offer both stability and an elegant connection between the rounded side panels. The height overall is a mere 62 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
T8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C 0 - C 180
190
T8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2068
DIN 5040: C43
DIN 5040: C43
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/3/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/3/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Wire suspension The ceiling-oriented surrounding wire eases the transversal alignment of the luminaires. The decorative ceiling canopy with room for the electrical connection can also be retro-fitted.
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic as well as with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable electronic control gear or ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5991N RWV/58 ED.
Indications Page Node 194 Overhead reflector 194 Suspensions 195 Continuous-line coupling 195 Through-wiring set 195 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
Data table No. 2068
.
Ultra-low-profile design The 598···/599··· series sets new design perspectives with a height of only 62 mm and an unmistakable profile design differing greatly from traditional forms.
Reference 5991N RSV/36 5991N RSV/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 3.5 1608 1670 4.1
Reference 5992N RSV/36 5992N RSV/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 4.0 1608 1670 4.9
652d Degree of protection
.
.
.
.
Data table no. 2068
.
.
IP 20
1 Number of luminaires .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
En Room height H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.8 4.9 5.9 7.0 9.0 11 16 21
3.1 4.2 5.3 6.4 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
4.6 6.3 8.2 9.9 12 15 18 27 35
5.1 7.0 8.8 11 12 16 19 28 36
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2068
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2068
DIN 5040: C53
DIN 5040: C53
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.5/BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5991N RSV/36 5991N RSV/58 5991N RWV/36 5991N RWV/58 5992N RSV/36 5992N RSV/58 5992N RWV/36 5992N RWV/58
1.53 1.00 1.54 1.01 0.78 0.51 0.79 0.52
0.87 0.85 0.86 0.84 0.85 0.83 0.84 0.82
0.38 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.35
indirect ULOR
0.49 0.48 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.48 0.47
Technical information see page 440.
Continuous-line coupling and nodes When it comes to architectural accents or construction principles to be placed or emphasised, continuous-line arrangements are the right solution. Perfectly adapted 5981···/5991··· series continuous-line couplings and node adapters offer the best possibilities to underline prestigious room architectures.
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
191
∑
Suspended luminaires with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct/indirect. Micro-segmented, highlyspecular louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, in a particularly elegant design. The ultra-low profile is enhanced by a striking 20 mm biplanar rim. The structuralised, powder-coated die-cast aluminium end caps offer both stability and an elegant connection between the rounded side panels. The height overall is a mere 62 mm. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic as well as with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable electronic control gear or ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5991N RPR/58 ED.
Indications Page Node 194 Overhead reflector 194 Suspensions 195 Continuous-line coupling 195 Through-wiring set 195 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
192
25°
25°
65°
65°
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPR louvres meet both requirements.
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Reference 5991N RPR/36 5991N RPR/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 3.5 1608 1670 4.1
Reference 5992N RPR/36 5992N RPR/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1245 23 1545 23
D2
D3
≈kg
1308 1370 4.0 1608 1670 4.9
652d Degree of protection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP 20
Data table no. 2069 1 Number of luminaires
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
En Room height H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.1 5.2 6.2 7.3 9.3 11 16 21
3.5 4.6 5.7 6.8 7.9 10 12 17 22
4.9 6.8 8.6 10 12 15 19 27 35
5.8 7.6 9.5 11 13 17 20 29 37
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2069
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2069
DIN 5040: D53
DIN 5040: D53
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5991N RPR/36 5991N RPR/58 5992N RPR/36 5992N RPR/58
1.52 1.00 0.78 0.51
0.88 0.86 0.86 0.84
0.39 0.39 0.39 0.37
indirect ULOR
0.49 0.47 0.47 0.47
Technical information see page 440.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
193
598···, 599··· Accessories
Adapter 05990 AN 1 piece, white, for the connection of luminaires 5981···, 5991··· with nodes A 03···, with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2.
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white.
Closed overhead reflector Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. For purely downward, direct light distribution of suspended luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means of screw connection.
Perforated overhead reflector Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel. To increase the direct component and reduce the indirect component of suspended luminaires. Simple fixing to luminaire body and potential equalisation by means of screw connection.
05991 05991 05991 05991 05992 05992
194
DR/28 DR/35 DR/36 DR/58 DR/36 DR/58
for luminaires 5991···/28, 5991···/2x28. for luminaires 5991···/35, 5991···/2x35. for luminaires 5991···/36. for luminaires 5991···/58. for luminaires 5992···/36. for luminaires 5992···/58.
05991 05991 05991 05991 05992 05992
DG/28 DG/35 DG/36 DG/58 DG/36 DG/58
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit.
for luminaires 5991···/28, 5991···/2x28. for luminaires 5991···/35, 5991···/2x35. for luminaires 5991···/36. for luminaires 5991···/58. for luminaires 5992···/36. for luminaires 5992···/58.
Wire suspension* 1 piece, for suspended mounting of luminaires 5991···, 5992···, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN for suspension lenghts of up to 1.0 m. 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, 0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary strain relief systems, fixing screws and connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover 1 piece, to be attached without tools. To protect the lamp and the optical system against unnecessarily rapid degradation.
Continuous-line coupling 05980 LN 1 piece, aluminium profile, white. For the connection of two surface-mounted luminaires 598···. Continuous-line coupling 05990 LN 1 piece, with integrated wire suspension for the connection of two suspended luminaires 599···, consisting of: 1 continuous-line coupling, aluminium profile, white, 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
05991 P/28 for suspended luminaires 5991···/28, 5991···/2x28.
Feeding tube* 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 05000 SN, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN.
05991 P/35 for suspended luminaires 5991···/35, 5991···/2x35.
Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets.
Ceiling fixing rails Sheet steel, white, 20 mm high. To cover the mains cables for surface mounting. Only necessary for ceiling outlets located at the longitudinal luminaire axis outside the front-plane feeding opening of the luminaires.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylightdependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
05981 DBS/28 for ···/28 E, ···/2x28 E. 05981 DBS/35 for ···/35 E, ···/2x35 E.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/36 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires ···28, ···36 ···35, ···58 ···28, ···36 ···35, ···58 ···28, ···35, ···36, ···58
Ceiling rose 05900 AN* 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
195
500···
The 500··· series includes versions for both modern T5 fluorescent lamps as well as tried-and-tested T8 lamps. A smooth transition to the new lamp technology can be easily planned with 500··· luminaires because both versions share the same architectural design. The equipment scope is adequately completed by compact fluorescent lamps.
RSX/¥65° Semi-specular materials are becoming increasingly popular in the built environment. TRILUX refines the use of these materials with a reflection-intensified material, offering peak photometric performance with the benefits of diffuse distribution. Page 198
196
RPX/¥65° Superb surface clarity, aided by reflection-intensified aluminium, offers a louvre that is not only fully compliant to the requirements of photometric bodies, but also excels with a working efficiency of up to 80 % in direct applications.
RWV
RSV
Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet steel depending on application.
For high-efficiency illumination in areas with general public access and non-DSE office environments. Narrow/wideangle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concave-profiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
RMV Optimised technology ensures efficient glare-reduced illumination for office areas and shop premises with limited DSE usage. Controlled luminance distribution with semispecular parabolic cross blades and side panels made of high-purity anodised aluminium.
RPR/¥65° Designed for excellent, high-efficiency illumination of all Cat. II DSE installations. Specular side panels and parabolic cross blades ensure good all-round glare limitation.
Page 198
Page 200
Page 202
Page 204
Page 206
197
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Surface-mounted luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference*
Lamps W 5001 RSX-L/28 E 1x28 5001 RSX-L/35 E 1x35
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
164 164
292 292
450 600
59 59
3.4 4.0
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Reference*
Lamps W 5002 RSX-L/28 E 2x28 5002 RSX-L/35 E 2x35
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
164 164
292 292
450 600
– –
4.6 5.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, 70 mm height overall. The classic profile (45° on the upper plane and 55° to the lower plane) presents an interesting contrast to the ceiling. Luminaire body with integrated coupling profiles for precisely aligned continuous lines. White convex end caps, surface in characteristic rib design, to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2070 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 5002 RSX/28 ED.
Indications Page End caps 208 Node 208 Suspensions 209 Counter-balance weight 209 Through-wiring set 209 Trunking 426 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
198
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Parabolic louvres RSX and RPX The parabolic louvres RSX and RPX, optimised for T5 lamps, convince with characteristics such as luminance limitation, high working efficiencies and a low construction height.
Data table No. 2070 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
Reference*
Lamps W 5001 RPX-L/28 E 1x28 5001 RPX-L/35 E 1x35
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
164 164
292 292
450 600
59 59
3.4 4.0
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Reference*
Lamps W 5002 RPX-L/28 E 2x28 5002 RPX-L/35 E 2x35
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
164 164
292 292
450 600
– –
4.6 5.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2070 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.3 5.5 6.7 8.0 10 13 19 25
3.3 4.5 5.8 7.1 8.4 11 13 19 25
5.0 7.1 9.2 11 13 17 21 31 41
5.5 7.5 9.7 12 14 18 22 32 42
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2070 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE C 71-121: BZ2/2.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2070 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5001 RPX-L/28 E 5001 RPX-L/35 E 5002 RPX-L/28 E 5002 RPX-L/35 E 5001 RSX-L/28 E 5001 RSX-L/35 E 5002 RSX-L/28 E 5002 RSX-L/35 E
1.22 1.00 0.62 0.51 1.22 1.00 0.62 0.51
0.85 0.85 0.83 0.83 0.85 0.85 0.83 0.83
0.85 0.85 0.83 0.83 0.85 0.85 0.83 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Reflection intensification The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an anodising thickness orientated around the half wavelength (∂/2) of the visible light.
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
199
Surface-mounted luminaires with white louvre RWV
Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 2xTC-L18 230
5002 RWV/TC18
D1
E1
≈kg
42
115
1.9
Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented louvre RWV made of aluminium, white, for uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, 70 mm height overall. The classic profile (45° on the upper plane and 55° to the lower plane) presents an interesting contrast to the ceiling. Luminaire body with integrated coupling profiles for precisely aligned continuous lines. White convex end caps, surface in characteristic rib design, to be ordered separately for ···36, ···58, end caps for ···/TC18 are premounted. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/TC18 with 3-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with non-dimmable electronic control gear, ···36, ···58 luminaires additionally also with dimmable electronic control gear. Reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable and ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5001 RWV/36 ED.
Indications Page End caps 208 Node 208 Suspensions 209 Counter-balance weight 209 Through-wiring set 209 Trunking 426 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
200
TC-L
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2071 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Decorative finish The end caps of the 500··· series luminaires are perfectly adapted to the luminaire body design. The even contours together with the striking rib profile contribute effectively to the sophisticated design of this luminaire series. Made of impactresistant, PVCfree and UVstabilised material.
Exact fixing Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp supports made of stainless steel offer ideal, durable positioning of compact fluorescent lamps with a single-ended socket and a small cross-section.
Reference* 5001 RWV-L/36 5001 RWV-L/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference*
191 192
346 348
450 600
59 59
3.9 5.0
5002 RWV-L/36 5002 RWV-L/58
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
191 192
346 348
450 600
– –
6.0 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2071 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.9 4.1 5.3 6.4 7.5 9.7 12 18 23
3.3 4.5 5.7 6.8 8.0 10 13 18 23
4.9 6.8 8.8 11 13 16 20 29 38
5.5 7.5 9.4 11 13 17 21 30 39
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2071
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2071
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5001 RWV-L/36 5001 RWV-L/58 5002 RWV-L/36 5002 RWV-L/58 5002 RWV/TC18
1.50 1.00 0.78 0.52 2.54
0.63 0.61 0.61 0.59 0.52
0.63 0.61 0.61 0.59 0.52
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
Mounting to trunking 500··· series surface-mounted luminaires can also be suspended from trunkings 07690/···, see page 426. Recommended when ceiling heights exceed normal limits, for uneven ceiling surfaces or in case of ceiling joists. The trunking also serves as cable duct.
201
Surface-mounted luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, financial institutions.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 2xTC-L18 230
5002 RSV/TC18
D1
E1
≈kg
42
115
1.9
Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, 70 mm height overall. The classic profile (45° on the upper plane and 55° to the lower plane) presents an interesting contrast to the ceiling. Luminaire body with integrated coupling profiles for precisely aligned continuous lines. White convex end caps, surface in characteristic rib design, to be ordered separately for ···36, ···58, end caps for ···/TC18 are premounted. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/TC18 with 3-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
TC-L
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2
Luminaires can also be supplied with non-dimmable electronic control gear, ···36, ···58 luminaires additionally also with dimmable electronic control gear. Reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable and ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5001 RSV/36 ED.
Indications Page End caps 208 Node 208 Suspensions 209 Counter-balance weight 209 Through-wiring set 209 Trunking 426 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
202
Data table No. 2072
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Design and technics The harmonious appearance is due to a perfect unity of luminaire body and end caps. Additional interior end caps provide mechanical stability and exceptional rigidity.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
Reference* 5001 RSV-L/36 5001 RSV-L/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference*
191 192
346 348
450 600
59 59
3.9 5.0
5002 RSV-L/36 5002 RSV-L/58
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
191 192
346 348
450 600
– –
6.0 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2072 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.8 4.8 5.9 7.0 9.0 11 16 21
3.0 4.1 5.2 6.3 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
4.4 6.3 8.1 9.8 12 15 18 27 36
5.0 6.8 8.6 10 12 16 19 28 36
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2072
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2072
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5001 RSV-L/36 5001 RSV-L/58 5002 RSV-L/36 5002 RSV-L/58 5002 RSV/TC18
1.50 1.00 0.78 0.52 2.63
0.66 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.52
0.66 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.52
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Geometrical arrangements with the 500··· series Whether discreet integration into the room architecture is required or striking means of adaptive creation – a modern lighting system must be able to offer this duality. 500··· series luminaires combined with nodes are versatile, following given construction ideas or convincing as creatively shaped unique geometrical arrangements.
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
203
Surface-mounted luminaires with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
Application Offices, classrooms, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 2xTC-L18 230
5002 RMV/TC18
D1
E1
≈kg
42
115
1.9
Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented louvre made of semi-specular anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 % for increased visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, 70 mm height overall. The classic profile (45° on the upper plane and 55° to the lower plane) presents an interesting contrast to the ceiling. Luminaire body with integrated coupling profiles for precisely aligned continuous lines. White convex end caps, surface in characteristic rib design, to be ordered separately for ···36, ···58, end caps for ···/TC18 are premounted. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/TC18 with 3-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
TC-L
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Luminaires can also be supplied with non-dimmable electronic control gear, ···36, ···58 luminaires additionally also with dimmable electronic control gear. Reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable and ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5001 RMV/36 ED.
Indications Page End caps 208 Node 208 Suspensions 209 Counter-balance weight 209 Through-wiring set 209 Trunking 426 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
204
Data table No. 2156
Decorative finish The end caps of the 500··· series luminaires are perfectly adapted to the luminaire body design. The even contours together with the striking rib profile contribute effectively to the sophisticated design of this luminaire series. Made of impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised material.
Exact fixing Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp supports made of stainless steel offer ideal, durable positioning of compact fluorescent lamps with a single-ended socket and a small cross-section.
Reference* 5001 RMV-L/36 5001 RMV-L/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference*
191 192
346 348
450 600
59 59
3.9 5.0
5002 RMV-L/36 5002 RMV-L/58
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
191 192
346 348
450 600
– –
6.0 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2156 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.9 5.0 6.1 7.1 9.4 12 17 22
3.0 4.1 5.3 6.5 7.6 9.8 12 17 23
4.6 6.5 8.3 10 12 16 19 28 37
5.1 6.9 8.8 11 13 16 20 29 38
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2156
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2156
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5001 RMV-L/36 5001 RMV-L/58 5002 RMV-L/36 5002 RMV-L/58 5002 RMV/TC18
1.50 1.00 0.78 0.52 2.59
0.63 0.61 0.61 0.59 0.51
0.63 0.61 0.61 0.59 0.51
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Infinite photometrics 500··· continuous-line luminaires in version -L can be arranged as continuous lines up to any length, without the interruption caused by luminaire end caps. Optically continuous louvres create endless luminaire rows.
Geometrical arrangements Universal nodes A 03··· offer extended planning scope for architecture-enhancing lighting solutions, allowing the connection of max. four trunkings at variable angles between 90° and 270°.
205
∑
Surface-mounted luminaires with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPR
Application Offices, classrooms, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 2xTC-L18 230
5002 RPR/TC18
D1
E1
≈kg
42
115
1.9
Optical system Direct. Micro-segmented, highlyspecular louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, 70 mm height overall. The classic profile (45° on the upper plane and 55° to the lower plane) presents an interesting contrast to the ceiling. Luminaire body with integrated coupling profiles for precisely aligned continuous lines. White convex end caps, surface in characteristic rib design, to be ordered separately for ···36, ···58, end caps for ···/TC18 are premounted. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/TC18 with 3-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
TC-L
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Luminaires can also be supplied with non-dimmable electronic control gear, ···36, ···58 luminaires additionally also with dimmable electronic control gear. Reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable and ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5002 RPR/58 ED.
Indications Page End caps 208 Node 208 Suspensions 209 Counter-balance weight 209 Through-wiring set 209 Trunking 426 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
206
Data table No. 2073
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPR louvres meet both requirements.
Exact fixing Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp supports made of stainless steel offer ideal, durable positioning of compact fluorescent lamps with a single-ended socket and a small cross-section.
Reference* 5001 RPR-L/36 5001 RPR-L/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference*
191 192
346 348
450 600
59 59
3.9 5.0
5002 RPR-L/36 5002 RPR-L/58
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
E2
≈kg
191 192
346 348
450 600
– –
6.0 7.6
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2073 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.7 4.8 5.9 6.9 9.0 11 16 21
3.0 4.0 5.1 6.2 7.3 9.4 12 17 22
4.4 6.2 8.0 9.8 12 15 18 27 35
4.9 6.7 8.5 10 12 16 19 28 36
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2073
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2073
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4BZ
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.5/BZ1/4/BZ
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5001 RPR-L/36 5001 RPR-L/58 5002 RPR-L/36 5002 RPR-L/58 5002 RPR/TC18
1.51 1.00 0.78 0.52 2.67
0.66 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.52
0.66 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.52
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Wire suspensions Direct luminaires 500··· can also be suspended by means of easy-to-handle wire suspensions when the ceiling height exceeds normal limits or in case of ceiling joists.
Infinite photometrics The appealing combination of optically continuous louvres together with the elegant side profiles of the luminaire body creates the impression of endless luminaire rows in version -L.
207
500··· Accessories
End-cap adapter 05001 KA 1 piece, white, for the connection of singlelamp luminaires 5001···L··· with nodes A 03···, with 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2. 110
130
≥90°
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white. Distance plate 05000 DD (not illustrated) 1 pair, white plastic material, for distance ceiling mounting of luminaires 5001··· in combination with nodes A 03 D. One pair of ceiling distance plates is required per luminaire.
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit. Required counter-balance weights are described on page 209.
End caps 1 pair, white, for 500··· luminaires 05001 K for 5001···L···. 05002 K for 5002···L···.
Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated), 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Ceiling rose 05900 AN* (not illustrated), 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S. * Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
3244 mm
90°
208
Ordering example: Geometrical arrangement according to the draft opposite with 8 luminaires 5001 RPX-L/35 E, wire suspensions, 5-conductor through-wiring set. 8 luminaires 5001 RPX-L/35 E 8 end-cap adapters 05001 KA 4 nodes with wire suspension A 03 S 4 wire suspensions 05000 SN 1 ceiling rose 05900 AN 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR 4 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/58
Wire suspension 1 piece, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, galvanised steel, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m. 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m.
Feeding tube 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, in combination with 05000 SN, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 SN, 0500 SN/2m, comprising the necessary strain relief systems, fixing screws and connection terminal 4 x 2.5 mm2.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. ···3LV··· 3-conductor through-wiring ···5LV··· 5-conductor through-wiring Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/5LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires ···L/36, ···L/28 ···L/36, ···L/28 ···L/58, ···L/35 ···L/58, ···L/35 ···L···
Length 1450 mm 1450 mm 1750 mm 1750 mm 25 m
Distance plates 05000 DS (not illustrated) 1 pair, for trunking mounting of 500··· surface-mounted luminaires. Counter-balance weights Required for 1-lamp luminaires with low-loss ballasts or 1- and 2-lamp luminaires with electronic control gear, when fixing to node suspensions A 03 S and to suspended trunkings 07690···. Distance plates and eventually additional counter-balance weights are required when mounting to suspended trunking (see table opposite).
7496 mm
Reference 05000 A10 05000 A11 05000 A12 05000 A13 05000 A21
for luminaires 5001···/36 5001···/58 5001··· ED and 5002··· E 5002··· ED 5001··· E
Ordering example: Continuous line (5 lengths) with luminaires 5002 RPX-L/35 E. 5 luminaires 5002 RPX-L/35 E 1 pair of end caps 05002 K 4 through-wiring sets 3700/5LV/58
209
152···
210
The extensive 152··· range with white louvres, semispecular cross-blade louvres as well as highly- and semispecular parabolic louvres is suitable for the most versatile applications. The luminaires, conceived to realise non-interrupted continuous lines, can also be used as individual luminaires thanks to end cap accessories. The series contains direct surface-mounted luminaires and direct/indirect suspended luminaires.
RWV
RSV For high-efficiency illumination in non-DSE office environments. Narrow/wide-angle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concaveprofiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
RMV Optimised technology ensures efficient glare-reduced illumination for office areas and shop premises with limited DSE usage. Controlled luminance distribution with semispecular parabolic cross blades and side panels made of high-purity anodised aluminium.
RPV/¥65°
Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet steel depending on application. Page 212/216
Page 212/216
Page 214/218
Page 214/218
Efficient glare-free illumination for all areas with DSE usage. Controlled luminance distribution with highly-specular parabolic cross blades and side panels made of highpurity anodised aluminium.
211
Surface-mounted luminaires with white louvre RWV or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Optical system Direct. ···RWV··· White aluminium louvre for a uniform light distribution. ···RSV··· Semi-specular louvre for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. With graduated concave-profiled cross blades to reduce the luminance contrasts between luminaire and ceiling. Louvre made of highpurity anodised aluminium.
Reference* 1522/136 RWV-L 1522/158 RWV-L
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
Reference*
134 134
6,8 8,3
1522/236 RWV-L 1522/258 RWV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
134 8.2 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Sheet steel, with semi-circular upper section. With ceiling fixing rail. Solvent-free powder-coated luminaire body, white. Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1522/158 RSV-L E.
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0051
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0051
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Data table no. 0051 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.9 5.0 6.1 7.2 9.3 11 17 22
3.2 4.3 5.4 6.5 7.7 9.8 12 17 22
4.7 6.5 8.4 10 12 15 19 28 36
5.3 7.2 9.0 11 13 16 20 29 37
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Indications Node End caps Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
212
Page 220 221 221 428 444
Time-saving mounting The ceiling trunking of the 152··· series surface-mounted luminaires forms the mechanical and optical junction with the ceiling surface guiding the mains cable easily to the ends, while saving time and installation costs.
1522/136RWV-L 1522/158RWV-L 1522/236RWV-L 1522/258RWV-L
1.51 1.00 0.81 0.55
0.66 0.64 0.61 0.58
0.66 0.64 0.61 0.58
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1522/136 RSV-L 1522/158 RSV-L
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
Reference*
134 134
6.8 8.3
1522/236 RSV-L 1522/258 RSV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
134 8.2 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0052 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.7 4.8 5.9 6.9 8.9 11 16 21
3.1 4.1 5.2 6.2 7.4 9.4 12 16 21
4.5 6.2 8.1 9.6 12 15 18 27 35
5.1 6.9 8.6 11 13 15 19 28 36
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0052
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0052
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1522/136RSV-L 1522/158RSV-L 1522/236RSV-L 1522/258RSV-L
1.52 1.00 0.91 0.62
0.68 0.67 0.57 0.54
0.68 0.67 0.57 0.54
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
Decorative finish The end caps are perfectly adapted to the luminaire body of the 152··· series. The even contours together with the strinking graphical form contribute effectively to the sophisticated design of this luminaire series.
213
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. RPV versions especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Surface-mounted luminaires with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1522/136 RMV-L 1522/158 RMV-L
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
Reference*
134 134
6.8 8.3
1522/236 RMV-L 1522/258 RMV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
134 8.2 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Optical system Direct. ···RMV··· Semi-specular parabolic louvre. Increased visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. For narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. ···RPV··· Highly-specular parabolic louvre. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle above 65°. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Sheet steel, with semi-circular upper section. With ceiling fixing rail. Solvent-free powder-coated luminaire body, white. Luminaire body with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1522/158 RPV-L E.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0053 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ1
Data table no. 0053 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1 Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.9 5.0 6.1 7.3 9.4 12 18 23
3.0 4.1 5.3 6.5 7.6 9.9 12 18 23
4.5 6.5 8.4 10 12 16 19 29 38
5.0 6.9 8.9 11 13 16 20 29 38
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1522/136RMV-L 1522/158RMV-L 1522/236RMV-L 1522/258RMV-L
Indications Node End caps Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
214
Page 220 221 221 428 444
1.51 1.00 0.91 0.62
0.69 0.67 0.57 0.54
0.69 0.67 0.57 0.54
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1522/136 RPV-L 1522/158 RPV-L
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
Reference*
134 134
6.8 8.3
1522/236 RPV-L 1522/258 RPV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 1100 90 1400 90
D2
≈kg
134 8.2 134 10.2
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0054 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.5 3.5 4.6 5.6 6.6 8.5 10 15 20
2.8 3.8 4.8 5.9 6.9 9.0 11 16 21
4.1 5.9 7.6 9.3 11 14 17 26 34
4.6 6.3 8.1 9.8 12 15 18 27 35
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0054
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0054
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1522/136RPV-L 1522/158RPV-L 1522/236RPV-L 1522/258RPV-L
1.53 1.00 0.94 0.63
0.69 0.68 0.56 0.54
0.69 0.68 0.56 0.54
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Different equipment – same design Different visual tasks such as technical drawing and usual office activities call for specially adapted illuminance levels. The 152··· series combines single- and twin-lamp versions in one luminaire body – a perfect solution for different lighting requirements, in the same architectural design.
Luminance limitation Parabolic louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
215
Suspended luminaires with white louvre RWV or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Optical system Direct/indirect. ···RWV··· White aluminium louvre for a uniform light distribution. ···RSV··· Semi-specular louvre for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. With graduated concave-profiled cross blades to reduce the luminance contrasts between luminaire and ceiling. Louvre made of highpurity anodised aluminium.
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1523/136 RWV-L 1523/158 RWV-L
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
Reference*
23 23
6.0 7.4
1523/236 RWV-L 1523/258 RWV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
23 23
7.4 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Sheet steel, with semi-circular upper section. Solventfree powder-coated luminaire body, white, with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1523/158 RSV-L E.
. .
. .
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0056
C 0 - C 180
. .
Data table No. 0056
DIN 5040: C53
DIN 5040: C53
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
. .
Data table no. 0056 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.9 3.9 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.9 11 16 20
3.3 4.3 5.4 6.5 7.6 9.6 11 16 21
4.7 6.5 8.2 9.9 11 15 18 26 34
5.4 7.2 9.0 11 12 16 19 27 35
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
Indications Page Node 220 Suspensions 220 Through-wiring set 221 End caps 221 Secondary reflector 221 Overhead reflector 221 Prismatic cover 221 Counter-balance weight 221 Emergency light 428 Lamp characteristics 444
216
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
The vernier clip of the pendant suspension can be removed or attached without tools, allowing adaptation to reduced suspension lengths on site. Furthermore, the wire suspension ceiling trim cap can be installed after the main assembly has been completed.
1523/136RWV-L 1523/158RWV-L 1523/236RWV-L 1523/258RWV-L
1.52 1.00 0.78 0.52
0.89 0.87 0.87 0.84
0.34 0.33 0.33 0.32
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.55 0.54 0.54 0.52
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1523/136 RSV-L 1523/158 RSV-L
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
Reference*
23 23
6.0 7.4
1523/236 RSV-L 1523/258 RSV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
23 23
7.4 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0057 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
. .
. .
. .
. .
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.8 4.8 5.8 6.7 8.7 10 15 20
3.3 4.2 5.2 6.3 7.3 9.4 11 16 21
4.6 6.3 8.1 9.6 11 14 17 25 33
5.4 7.1 8.8 10.6 12 16 19 27 34
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0057
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0057
DIN 5040: C53
DIN 5040: C63
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.1 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1523/136RSV-L 1523/158RSV-L 1523/236RSV-L 1523/258RSV-L
1.52 1.00 0.78 0.52
0.89 0.87 0.87 0.85
0.34 0.33 0.33 0.32
indirect ULOR
0.55 0.54 0.54 0.53
Technical information see page 440.
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
217
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. RPV versions especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Suspended luminaires with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1523/136 RMV-L 1523/158 RMV-L
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
Reference*
23 23
6.0 7.4
1523/236 RMV-L 1523/258 RMV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
23 23
7.4 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
Optical system Direct/indirect. ···RMV··· Semi-specular parabolic louvre. Increased visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. For narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. ···RPV··· Highly-specular parabolic louvre. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle above 65°. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Sheet steel, with semi-circular upper section. Solventfree powder-coated luminaire body, white, with integrated coupling brackets for precisely aligned continuous lines. End caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
. .
. .
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0058
C 0 - C 180
. .
Data table No. 0058
DIN 5040: D62
DIN 5040: D63
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.25/BZ1/4/BZ
. .
Data table no. 0058 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.5 3.6 4.6 5.4 6.4 8.3 9.9 9.9 20
2.9 3.9 4.9 5.8 6.9 8.8 11 16 20
4.2 5.9 7.5 9.1 11 14 17 25 33
4.8 6.5 8.1 9.8 12 15 18 26 34
Calculation parameters
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1523/158 RPV-L E.
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires
Indications Page Node 220 Suspensions 220 Through-wiring set 221 End caps 221 Secondary reflector 221 Overhead reflector 221 Prismatic cover 221 Counter-balance weight 221 Emergency light 428 Lamp characteristics 444
218
Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Offset secondary reflectors This accessory is designed to achieve “soft” illumination by precisely calculated perforations with a varying size. See accessories.
1523/136RMV-L 1523/158RMV-L 1523/236RMV-L 1523/258RMV-L
1.52 1.00 0.78 0.52
0.90 0.88 0.88 0.86
0.31 0.30 0.30 0.29
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.59 0.58 0.58 0.57
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1523/136 RPV-L 1523/158 RPV-L
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
Reference*
23 23
6.0 7.4
1523/236 RPV-L 1523/258 RPV-L
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D** mm 1234 1534
D1
≈kg
23 23
7.4 9.4
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately. ** Reduced fixing spacing of the wire suspensions 05000 SN for individual luminaires and for the first luminaire of a continuous line: 1222 mm (36 W) or 1522 mm (58 W).
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0059 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
. .
. .
. .
. .
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.8 4.9 5.9 6.9 8.8 11 16 20
3.2 4.2 5.3 6.4 7.5 9.5 11 16 21
4.6 6.4 8.1 9.8 11 15 18 26 34
5.3 7.1 8.9 11 12 16 19 27 35
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0059
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0059
DIN 5040: D62
DIN 5040: D62
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-022: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.50 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.2 h Ymax = 1.3 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1523/136RPV-L 1523/158RPV-L 1523/236RPV-L 1523/258RPV-L
1.52 1.00 0.78 0.52
0.91 0.89 0.89 0.86
0.35 0.34 0.34 0.33
indirect ULOR
0.56 0.55 0.55 0.53
Technical information see page 440.
Luminance limitation Parabolic louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
219
152··· Accessories
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white. Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated), 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. End-cap adapter 1 piece, die-cast aluminium, white, for the connection of continuous-line luminaires 152··· with nodes A 03···, with 5-conductor throughwiring set 1.5 mm2.
05220 KAE End-cap adapter including trunking closure for the integrated ceiling trunking, for surfacemounted luminaires 1522···L. 05230 KA End-cap adapter for suspended luminaires 1523···L.
90°
Feeding tube (not illustrated) 1 piece, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened. 05000 ZR 1 m, in combination with 05000 SN, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m, in combination with 05000 SN/2m or A 03 S with 05900 AN.
Node with pendant suspension A 03 P/500 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel pendant rod, white, ¶ 13 mm, 500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be shortened on site, 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
Ceiling rose 05900 AN* (not illustrated), as 05900 A, but suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
2428 mm
90° 45°
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node as described in A 03 D, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1.5 m, 1 ceiling fixing unit.
7285 mm
Ordering example: Geometrical arrangement according to the draft above with 6 luminaires 1523/158 RPV-L E, wire suspensions and 3-conductor through-wiring set.
6 luminaires 1523/158 RPV-L E 6 end-cap adapters 05230 KA 6 counter-balance weights 05000 A3 4 nodes with wire suspensions A 03 S 3 wire suspensions 05000 SN 1 ceiling rose 05900 AN 1 feeding tube 05000 ZR 5 through-wiring sets 3700/3LV/58
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
220
Ceiling bracket system 05000 B* 1 piece, to mount suspended luminaires with a drop of 150 mm from the ceiling, consisting of: 1 distance bracket, chrome, 1 ceiling fixing bracket, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 ceiling trim cap, white. Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 05000 B and 05000 SN···.
Wire suspension* 1 piece, for suspended luminaires, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, 1 steel wire, ¶ 1.0 mm, 2 luminaire fixing clamps, 1 ceiling trim cap, white. 05000 SN for suspension lengths of up to 1.0 m. 05000 SN/2m for suspension lengths of up to 2.0 m. Feeding tube is described above.
Pendant suspension 05000 P* 1 piece, consisting of: 1 ceiling fixing bracket, 1 steel pendant rod, white, ¶ 13 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 0.5 m, with vernier clip, to be shortened on site, 1 ceiling trim cap, white.
Overhead reflectors 1 piece, sheet steel, white. Easy attachment to suspended luminaires by means of screw connection. DR Closed version. For purely downward, direct light distribution. DG Perforated version. To increase the direct component and reduce the indirect component. 05230 DR/36 for 1523···/36. 05230 DR/58 for 1523···/58. 05230 DG/36 for 1523···36. 05230 DG/58 for 1523···/58.
PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover 1 piece, to be attached without tools. To protect the lamp and the optical system of suspended luminaires against unnecessarily rapid degradation. 05230 P/36 for luminaires 1523···/36. 05230 P/58 for luminaires 1523···/58.
Offset secondary reflectors 1 piece, solvent-free powdercoated sheet steel. Developed in order to stabilise ceiling illuminances. “Soft” illumination is achieved by precisely calculated perforations with a varying size depending on their position. This accessory for individual luminaires 1523··· is designed for use in conjunction with the 05000 SN wire suspensions. 05230 SER/36 for suspended luminaires 1523···/36*. 05230 SER/58 for suspended luminaires 1523···/58*.
End caps 05230 K 1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual luminaires or continuous lines with suspended luminaires 152···, die-cast aluminium, white.
End-cap accessories 05220 KE 1 pair, for front-plane conclusion of individual luminaires or continuous lines with surface-mounted luminaires 1522···, consisting of: 1 pair of end caps, die-cast aluminium, white, 1 pair of trunking closures, plastic, white, to finish the integrated ceiling trunking.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 3 x 1.5 mm2. Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/3LV/58
for luminaires 36 W 58 W
Balanced luminance transition The perforated reflectors allow precise control of the illuminance projected from the upper surface of the luminaire: an intelligent and striking solution for soft-lighting. Fixing by means of 4 fixing clamps approx. 50 mm above the luminaire body on the wire suspension 05000 SN···.
Counter-balance weights 1 piece, necessary for 1-lamp luminaires with conventional ballasts or electronic control gear and 2-lamp luminaires with electronic control gear when fixing to pendant suspensions 05000 P or node suspensions A 03 S and A 03 P/500. Can be fitted without using tools. Reference 05000 A1 05000 A2 05000 A3 05000 A4
for luminaires 1523···/136··· 1523···/158··· 1523···/136··· 1523···/158··· 1523···/236··· 1523···/258···
Safety lighting 1522···, 1523··· series luminaires can be equipped on site with E14 safety lighting sockets which are simply attached to the louvre. Detailed description and photometrics see page 429.
E, E E, E
221
1510···
222
1510··· surface-mounted T8 louvre luminaires, characterised by their timeless profile design, are the perfect lighting solution for modern offices. Computer-calculated louvre and reflector optics, spring-tensioned clips and louvre interchangeability are just a few of the convincing characteristics this series has to offer.
RAV Asymmetrical distribution is one of the most important requirements today. In schools, the RAV system has proven itself to be ideal for board lighting – in shops, the system excels thanks to directed vertical illuminance.
RWV Designed for even illumination of general surfaces and utility areas. Uniform, balanced light distribution with high efficiency. Louvre made of white-coated aluminium or sheet steel depending on application.
RSV For high-efficiency illumination in areas with general public access and non-DSE office environments. Narrow/wideangle light distribution with excellent efficiency due to concave-profiled aluminium cross blades and highly-reflective aluminium side panels.
RMV Optimised technology ensures efficient glare-reduced illumination for office areas and shop premises with limited DSE usage. Controlled luminance distribution with semispecular parabolic cross blades and side panels made of high-purity anodised aluminium.
RPV/¥65° Efficient glare-free illumination for office areas, showrooms, banks, financial institutions and all other areas with DSE usage. Controlled luminance distribution with highly-specular parabolic cross blades and side panels made of highpurity anodised aluminium.
Page 224
Page 225
Page 226
Page 227
Page 228
223
Surface-mounted luminaires with asymmetrical reflector RAV or white louvre RWV Application Schools, offices, entrances and sales areas. RAV versions particularly recommended for blackboard lighting in schools, lighting of shelves on retail premises, showrooms and storage facilities.
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
1510/136 RAV-L 1510/158 RAV-L
D D1 E1 mm 900 174.5 250 1200 174.5 550
E2
≈kg
47 47
4.1 5.3
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
Optical system Direct. ···RAV··· Highly-specular reflector made of high-purity anodised aluminium, for asymmetrical light distribution. ···RWV··· White aluminium louvre for a uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
E1
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1510/158 RAV-L E.
D2 E E1
96 14
Data table No. 0022
C 0 - C 180
D E2
205
E2
E
1249/36W 1549/58W
96
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
D1
D 205
Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. White end caps to be ordered separately.
1225/36W 1525/58W
Data table no. 0022 1 Number of luminaires
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ4
En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ5/1.5/BZ4 Area A in m2
1.1 m
0.3
3.06 m
300
400
2.6 3.6 4.6 5.6 6.5 8.3 10 15 19
3.0 4.0 5.1 6.1 7.1 9.0 11 15 20
4.3 6.1 7.7 9.3 11 14 17 24 32
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
600
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
500 400 300
1.1 m
2.7 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1510/136RAV-L 1510/158RAV-L
Indications Continuous-line accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
224
Page 225 227 428 444
5.0 6.7 8.4 10 12 15 18 26 33
Calculation parameters 500 600
1.6 m
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Planning example: Blackboard lighting with 2 luminaires 1510/158 RAV-L – illuminance distribution (indications in lux) Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm. Light loss factor v = 0.8.
1.53 1.00
0.76 0.77
0.76 0.77
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 2x36 2x58
1510/136 RWV-L 1510/158 RWV-L 1510/236 RWV-L 1510/258 RWV-L
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
174.5 174.5 174.5 174.5
250 550 250 550
47 47 47 47
3.9 5.1 4.7 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d Degree of protection D1
E1 96
1249/36W 1549/58W
D2 E2
E
D
205
205
E2
D
E
14
Data table no. 0023 1 Number of luminaires
E1 96
IP 20
En Room height H
1225/36W 1525/58W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.9 4.1 5.2 6.3 7.5 9.7 11 18 23
3.3 4.5 5.6 6.8 8.0 10 13 18 23
4.9 6.8 8.7 10 13 16 20 29 37
5.5 7.5 9.4 11 14 17 21 30 38
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0023
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0023
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1510/136RWV-L 1510/158RWV-L 1510/236RWV-L 1510/258RWV-L
1.50 1.00 0.81 0.55
0.66 0.64 0.61 0.58
0.66 0.64 0.61 0.58
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Different equipment – same design Different visual tasks such as technical drawing and usual office activities call for specially adapted illuminance levels. The 1510··· series combines single- and twin-lamp versions in one luminaire body – a perfect solution for different lighting requirements, in the same architectural design.
Continuous-line accessories 01510 K End caps for 1510···-L 01510 L Couplings for 1510···-L 01510 LAS Couplings for 1510···RAV-L
225
Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. White end caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
1510/136 RSV-L 1510/158 RSV-L 1510/236 RSV-L 1510/258 RSV-L
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
174.5 174.5 174.5 174.5
250 550 250 550
47 47 47 47
3.9 5.1 4.7 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
D1
D E E1 96
C 0 - C 180
1249/36W 1549/58W
Data table No. 0024
D2 E E1
96 14
C 0 - C 180
D E2
Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 2x36 2x58
205
Optical system Direct. ···RSV··· Semi-specular louvre made of high-purity anodised aluminium. With graduated concave-profiled cross blades to reduce the luminance contrasts between luminaire and ceiling, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. ···RMV··· Semi-specular parabolic louvre. Increased visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. For narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %.
Reference*
E2
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions.
Surface-mounted luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV or semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
205
∑
Data table No. 0024
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
1225/36W 1525/58W
Data table no. 0024 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1510/158 RSV-L E.
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.7 4.8 5.9 6.9 8.9 11 16 21
2.9 4.0 5.1 6.2 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
4.4 6.1 8.0 9.8 12 15 18 27 36
4.9 6.7 8.5 10 13 16 19 27 36
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Indications Continuous-line accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
226
Page 225 227 428 444
Continuous-line versions Continuous-line end caps and couplings allow the arrangement of 1510··· series luminaires as elegant continuous lines. The end caps of this series are perfectly adapted to the luminaire body.
1510/136RSV-L 1510/158RSV-L 1510/236RSV-L 1510/258RSV-L
1.51 1.00 0.91 0.62
0.69 0.67 0.57 0.54
0.69 0.67 0.57 0.54
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 2x36 2x58
1510/136 RMV-L 1510/158 RMV-L 1510/236 RMV-L 1510/258 RMV-L
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
174.5 174.5 174.5 174.5
250 550 250 550
47 47 47 47
3.9 5.1 4.7 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d Degree of protection D1
E1 96
1249/36W 1549/58W
D2 E2
E
D
205
205
E2
D
E
14
Data table no. 2181 1 Number of luminaires
E1 96
IP 20
En Room height H
1225/36W 1525/58W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.4 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.4 8.4 10 15 20
2.7 3.7 4.7 5.8 6.8 8.7 11 16 21
4.0 5.8 7.4 9.1 11 14 17 25 34
4.5 6.1 7.8 9.7 11 15 18 26 34
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2181
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2181
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1510/136RMV-L 1510/158RMV-L 1510/236RMV-L 1510/258RMV-L
1.50 1.00 0.97 0.64
0.69 0.67 0.54 0.53
0.69 0.67 0.54 0.53
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Infinite photometrics 1510···-L continuous-line luminaires can be arranged as continuous lines up to any length, without the interruption caused by luminaire end caps. The appealing combination of optically continuous louvres together with the elegant side profiles of the 1510··· luminaire unit creates the impression of endless luminaire rows.
Through-wiring sets 3-conductor (3LV) or 5-conductor wiring (5LV) 3700/3LV/36 for luminaires ···/36, 1450 mm long. 3700/5LV/36 for luminaires ···/36, 1450 mm long. 3700/3LV/58 for luminaires ···/58, 1790 mm long. 3700/5LV/58 for luminaires ···/58, 1790 mm long. 07690/5LV/25m for luminaires ···36, ···/58, 25 m long.
227
∑
Surface-mounted luminaires with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Optical system Direct. Highly-specular parabolic louvre. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65°. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. White end caps to be ordered separately. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1510/158 RPV-L E.
Indications Continuous-line accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
228
Page 225 227 428 444
Continuous-line accessories 01510 K End caps for 1510···-L 01510 L Couplings for 1510···-L 01510 LAS Couplings for 1510···RAV-L
Safety lighting 1510··· series luminaires can be equipped on site with E14 safety lighting sockets which are simply attached to the louvre. Detailed description and photometrics see page 429.
Reference*
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 2x36 2x58
1510/136 RPV-L 1510/158 RPV-L 1510/236 RPV-L 1510/258 RPV-L
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
174.5 174.5 174.5 174.5
250 550 250 550
47 47 47 47
3.9 5.1 4.7 6.1
* End caps for individual luminaires or for the completion of continuous lines to be ordered separately.
65d Degree of protection D1
E1 96
1249/36W 1549/58W
D2
1 Number of luminaires
E1 96 14
IP 20
Data table no. 0025
E
E2
E
D
205
205
E2
D
En Room height H
1225/36W 1525/58W
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.6 4.7 5.7 6.8 8.7 10 16 21
2.9 4.0 5.0 6.1 7.2 9.3 11 17 21
4.4 6.1 7.9 9.6 11 15 18 26 34
4.9 6.7 8.4 10 13 16 19 27 35
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0025
T8
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 0025
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
25°
25°
1510/136RPV-L 1510/158RPV-L 1510/236RPV-L 1510/258RPV-L
1.53 1.00 0.96 0.63
0.69 0.68 0.55 0.54
0.69 0.68 0.55 0.55
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.54 0.54
Technical information see page 440.
65°
Integrated reflector technology Lateral reflectors of the louvres reach up to the luminaire ceiling. Mounting and demounting costs can be considerably reduced because additional overhead reflectors are not required.
65°
Luminance limitation Luminaires 1510/136 RPV-L and 1510/158 RPV-L convince with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65°.
229
Recessed louvre luminaires
TRILUX recessed louvre luminaires do not only offer excellent photometrics, they are also available in versions suitable for mounting in almost all common ceiling systems. In addition to series for the tried-and-tested T8 fluorescent lamps, innovative systems for efficient T5 lamps are available as well. With slender optics and architecturally appearing luminaire surfaces they offer a wide planning scope for rooms with suspended ceilings.
230
368···, 369··· Slender louvre optics for T5 lamps and luminaire body surfaces in a perforated design are typical characteristics of this series for system ceilings in module 312.5/625 mm or 300/600 mm and cut-out recess openings.
390···, 391··· The T5 series 390···, 391··· convinces with slender louvre optics and abundant recess-mounting options. Space-saving and architecturally attractive lighting solutions can be realised thanks to the markedly slender luminaire bodies.
136···, 236··· The T8 series 136···, 236··· are conceived for system ceilings in module 600 or 625 mm as well as for cutout recess openings. The luminaire range with practiceoriented louvres is successfully completed by luminaire versions with covers.
362··· This T5 series offers flexibility in case of suspended system ceilings in module 300/600 or 312.5/625 mm. Mounting in cut-out openings is possible as well. More information can be found in the section “Universal recessed and surface-mounted luminaires”.
Page 234
Page 244
Page 248
Page 144
Lighting systems for air conditioning The TRILUX luminaire range also includes recessed louvre luminaires for air conditioning. The necessary information on photometrics, air conditioning as well as acoustic data are collected in a corresponding catalogue, available upon request.
231
Overview Recessed louvre luminaires Louvre versions
Ceilings with concealed grids
TRILUX recessed louvre luminaires do not only shine out thanks to excellent photometrics but also offer compatibility with almost all standard modular ceiling systems. Universal assembly is the watchword. TRILUX recessed louvre luminaires offer tried-and-tested solutions to different ceilings.
RPV RWV RWX RSV RMV RSX RPX PST OA ¥65° ¥65°
1361···
Louvre luminaires universally suitable for ceilings in module 300/600 with concealed or exposed grids as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings.
1360···/2360··· 360··· Louvre luminaires universally suitable for ceilings in module 185/312.5/625 with concealed or exposed grids as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Louvre luminaires universally suitable for ceilings in module 312.5/625 with concealed or exposed grids as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings.
369···
Louvre luminaires universally suitable for ceilings in module 300/600 with concealed or exposed grids as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings.
390···, 391··· Louvre luminaires universally suitable for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids (390··· in longitudinal module 625 mm, 391··· in longitudinal module 300/600 mm) as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings.
1
232
Module/mm 185 300
600
312.5
625
Reference
Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page
1361/236···
248
250 252
254
257
|
1361/258···
248
250 252
254
257
|
1361/318···
249
251 253
255
257
|
1361/418···
249
251 253
255
257
|
1360/136···
248
250 252
254
256 256
|
1360/158···
248
250 252
254
256 256
|
2360/236···
248
250 252
254
257 257
|
2360/258···
248
250 252
254
257 257
|
2360/318···
249
251 253
255
257 257
|
2360/418···
249
251 253
255
257 257
|
3604 PST/2x24 E
368···
PA
143
|
3681···/28 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3681···/35 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3682···/28 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3682···/35 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3683···/14 E
235 237 239
241 243
3691···/28 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3691···/35 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3692···/28 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3692···/35 E
234 236 238
240 242
|
3693···/14 E
235 237 239
241 243
|
3694···/14 E
235 237 239
241 243
|
3901···/28, 541
244 245
246 247
3902···/28, 541
244 245
246 247
3911···/28, 542
244 245
246 247
3911···/35, 49, 803
244 245
246 247
3912···/28, 542
244 245
246 247
3912···/35, 49, 803
244 245
246 247
Luminaire length suitable for module 625 mm. 2 Luminaire length suitable for module 600 mm. 3 Luminaire length suitable for module 300 mm.
|
Ceilings with exposed grids
Module/mm 185 300
Ceilings with cut-out recess openings
Ceiling opening/mm 600
312.5
625
|
1180x278
|
1480x278 |
580x580
|
580x580
|
1226x165
|
1526x165 |
1226x291
|
1526x291 |
605x605
|
605x605
|
605x605
|
1230x292
|
1530x292
|
1230x292
|
1530x292 |
605x605
|
1180x280
|
1480x280
|
1180x280
|
1480x280 |
580x580
|
580x580 1226x85 1226x165 1180x85 1480x85 1180x165 1480x165
233
Recessed luminaires with white louvre RWV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms.
Reference
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 368··· for module 312.5/625 mm; 369··· for module 300/600 mm.
3681 D-RWV/28 E 3681 D-RWV/35 E 3691 D-RWV/28 E 3691 D-RWV/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg
Reference
5.1 6.2 4.8 5.8
3682 D-RWV/28 E 3682 D-RWV/35 E 3692 D-RWV/28 E 3692 D-RWV/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35 2x28 2x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg 5.0 6.0 4.7 5.7
Optical system Micro-segmented louvre RWV made of aluminium, white, for a uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Lateral decor cover in perforated design. With front-plane knock-out openings for heatresistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···14 E with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3681 D-RWV/28 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
234
Page 258 258 431 444
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Data table No. 2084 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2084 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Reference 3683 D-RWV/14 E 3693 D-RWV/14 E
Lamps W 3x14 3x14
Module mm 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 5.1 580x580 4.8
Reference 3694 D-RWV/14 E
Lamps W 4x14
Module mm 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 4.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2084 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.0 5.6 7.1 8.7 10 13 16 23 31
4.5 6.1 7.7 9.4 11 14 17 24 32
6.7 9.4 12 14 17 22 27 39 51
7.5 10 13 16 18 23 28 41 53
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2084 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2084 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3681 D-RWV/28 E 3681 D-RWV/35 E 3682 D-RWV/28 E 3682 D-RWV/35 E 3683 D-RWV/14 E 3691 D-RWV/28 E 3691 D-RWV/35 E 3692 D-RWV/28 E 3692 D-RWV/35 E 3693 D-RWV/14 E 3694 D-RWV/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.52 0.90 1.26 1.00 0.65 0.52 0.90 0.68
0.72 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.72 0.72
0.72 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.72 0.72
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
Perforated design 368···/369··· recessed louvre luminaires are equally convincing when it comes to architectural aspects. The visible luminaire body in perforated design allows for perfect adaptation to surrounding ceilings with the common structural and acoustic surfaces.
235
Recessed luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms.
Reference
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 368··· for module 312.5/625 mm; 369··· for module 300/600 mm.
3681 D-RWX/28 E 3681 D-RWX/35 E 3691 D-RWX/28 E 3691 D-RWX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg
Reference
5.1 6.2 4.8 5.8
3682 D-RWX/28 E 3682 D-RWX/35 E 3692 D-RWX/28 E 3692 D-RWX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35 2x28 2x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg 5.0 6.0 4.7 5.7
Optical system Micro-segmented hybrid parabolic louvre RWX, composed of white aluminium cross blades and highlyspecular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium for increased efficiency. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Lateral decor cover in perforated design. With front-plane knock-out openings for heatresistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···14 E with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3681 D-RWX/35 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
236
Page 258 258 431 444
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
RWX louvre RWX louvres stand for photometric efficiency, thanks to a striking combination of white-coated aluminium cross blades and specular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium.
Data table No. 2085 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2085 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Increased efficiency The perfect combination of RWX louvres with optimised photometrics and efficient electronic control gear operation helps to realise economic lighting solutions. Especially in areas where the lighting installations are switched on for longer periods, e.g. in sales areas and showrooms, this allows for benefits in money’s worth.
Reference 3683 D-RWX/14 E 3693 D-RWX/14 E
Lamps W 3x14 3x14
Module mm 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 5.1 580x580 4.8
Reference 3694 D-RWX/14 E
Lamps W 4x14
Module mm 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 4.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2085 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 4.9 6.2 7.6 8.9 12 14 21 28
3.9 5.3 6.6 8.2 9.5 12 15 22 28
5.8 8.2 10 13 15 20 24 35 46
6.5 8.8 11 14 16 20 25 36 47
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2085 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2085 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3681 D-RWX/28 E 3681 D-RWX/35 E 3682 D-RWX/28 E 3682 D-RWX/35 E 3683 D-RWX/14 E 3691 D-RWX/28 E 3691 D-RWX/35 E 3692 D-RWX/28 E 3692 D-RWX/35 E 3693 D-RWX/14 E 3694 D-RWX/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 0.68
0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.79 0.79
0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.77 0.77 0.79 0.79
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Fixing accessories 1 set for recess mounting, see page 258. 03680/1 for 3681···, 3682···, 3691···, 3692···. 03680/3 for 3683···. 03690/3 for 3693···, 3694···.
Universal mounting TRILUX recessed luminaires for T5 fluorescent lamps are designed for universal utilisation. They can either be mounted in ceilings with concealed grids using the corresponding mounting accessories, be laid onto the flanges of exposed grids or screwed with grids to be provided by the client for ceilings with cut-out openings.
237
Recessed luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 368··· for module 312.5/625 mm; 369··· for module 300/600 mm.
Reference 3681 D-RSV/28 E 3681 D-RSV/35 E 3691 D-RSV/28 E 3691 D-RSV/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg
Reference
5.1 6.2 4.8 5.8
3682 D-RSV/28 E 3682 D-RSV/35 E 3692 D-RSV/28 E 3692 D-RSV/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35 2x28 2x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg 5.0 6.0 4.7 5.7
Optical system Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Lateral decor cover in perforated design. With front-plane knock-out openings for heatresistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···14 E with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3682 D-RSV/28 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
238
Page 258 258 431 444
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
Data table No. 2086 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/0.8/BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2086 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/0.8/BZ2
Compact design Innovative T5 fluorescent lamps with a reduced cross-section allow to design compact louvre luminaires. Enter the new TRILUX louvres which are specially adapted to these new light sources.
Reference 3683 D-RSV/14 E 3693 D-RSV/14 E
Lamps W 3x14 3x14
Module mm 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 5.1 580x580 4.8
Reference 3694 D-RSV/14 E
Lamps W 4x14
Module mm 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 4.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2086 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.0 5.7 7.2 8.8 10 14 17 24 32
4.5 6.1 7.7 9.4 11 14 17 25 33
6.7 9.4 12 15 17 23 28 40 53
7.5 10 13 16 18 24 29 42 54
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2086 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/0.8/BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2086 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/0.8/BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3681 D-RSV/28 E 3681 D-RSV/35 E 3682 D-RSV/28 E 3682 D-RSV/35 E 3683 D-RSV/14 E 3691 D-RSV/28 E 3691 D-RSV/35 E 3692 D-RSV/28 E 3692 D-RSV/35 E 3693 D-RSV/14 E 3694 D-RSV/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.52 0.90 1.26 1.00 0.65 0.52 0.90 0.68
0.69 0.69 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.69
0.69 0.69 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.69
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
239
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference 3681 D-RSX/28 E 3681 D-RSX/35 E 3691 D-RSX/28 E 3691 D-RSX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg
Reference
5.1 6.2 4.8 5.8
3682 D-RSX/28 E 3682 D-RSX/35 E 3692 D-RSX/28 E 3692 D-RSX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35 2x28 2x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg 5.0 6.0 4.7 5.7
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 368··· for module 312.5/625 mm; 369··· for module 300/600 mm. Optical system Micro-segmented, semispecular parabolic louvre RSX made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Lateral decor cover in perforated design. With front-plane knock-out openings for heatresistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···14 E with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2087 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2087 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3682 D-RSX/35 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
240
Page 258 258 431 444
RSX louvre Due to their semi-specular surface, the parabolic RSX louvres with a defined luminance limitation above 65° have a distinctive uniform appearance and thus allow to create a particularly pleasant illumination.
Perforated design 368···/369··· recessed louvre luminaires are equally convincing when it comes to architectural aspects. The visible luminaire body in perforated design allows for perfect adaptation to surrounding ceilings with the common structural and acoustic surfaces.
Reference 3683 D-RSX/14 E 3693 D-RSX/14 E
Lamps W 3x14 3x14
Module mm 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 5.1 580x580 4.8
Reference 3694 D-RSX/14 E
Lamps W 4x14
Module mm 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 4.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2087 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.1 4.4 5.7 6.9 8.1 11 13 19 26
3.4 4.7 5.9 7.4 8.6 11 14 20 26
5.1 7.4 9.5 12 14 18 22 32 43
5.7 7.8 9.9 12 14 19 22 33 44
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2087 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2087 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3681 D-RSX/28 E 3681 D-RSX/35 E 3682 D-RSX/28 E 3682 D-RSX/35 E 3683 D-RSX/14 E 3691 D-RSX/28 E 3691 D-RSX/35 E 3692 D-RSX/28 E 3692 D-RSX/35 E 3693 D-RSX/14 E 3694 D-RSX/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 0.68
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
241
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified, highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference 3681 D-RPX/28 E 3681 D-RPX/35 E 3691 D-RPX/28 E 3691 D-RPX/35 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x28 1x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
≈kg
Reference
5.1 6.2 4.8 5.8
3682 D-RPX/28 E 3682 D-RPX/35 E 3692 D-RPX/28 E 3692 D-RPX/35 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x35 2x28 2x35
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1230x292 1530x292 1180x280 1480x280
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 368··· for module 312.5/625 mm; 369··· for module 300/600 mm. Optical system Micro-segmented, highlyspecular parabolic louvre RPX made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Lateral decor cover in perforated design. With front-plane knock-out openings for heatresistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···14 E with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E).
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2088 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3681 D-RPX/35 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
242
Page 258 258 431 444
RPX louvre Highly-specular, reflection-intensified parabolic louvres RPX convince thanks to all-round luminance limitation, high working efficiencies and compact dimensions.
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Data table No. 2088 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
≈kg 5.0 6.0 4.7 5.7
Reference 3683 D-RPX/14 E 3693 D-RPX/14 E
Lamps W 3x14 3x14
Module mm 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 5.1 580x580 4.8
Reference 3694 D-RPX/14 E
Lamps W 4x14
Module mm 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 4.6
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2088 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.1 4.4 5.7 6.9 8.1 11 13 19 26
3.4 4.7 5.9 7.4 8.6 11 14 20 26
5.1 7.4 9.5 12 14 18 22 32 43
5.7 7.8 9.9 12 14 19 22 33 44
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2088 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2088 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/3/BZ1/4/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3681 D-RPX/28 E 3681 D-RPX/35 E 3682 D-RPX/28 E 3682 D-RPX/35 E 3683 D-RPX/14 E 3691 D-RPX/28 E 3691 D-RPX/35 E 3692 D-RPX/28 E 3692 D-RPX/35 E 3693 D-RPX/14 E 3694 D-RPX/14 E
1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 1.26 1.00 0.65 0.51 0.90 0.68
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83
0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.83 0.83
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 60° in the principal longitudinal and transversal planes are effective when lighting rooms with DSE workstations. A corresponding requirement at international level is the compliance to all-round luminance limitation (L ≤ 200 cd/m2 above 65°). RPX and RSX louvres meet both requirements.
Reflection intensification The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an anodising thickness orientated around the half wavelength (∂/2) of the visible light.
243
Recessed luminaires with specular hybrid louvre RWX or semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. RSV also recommended for financial institutions. Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 390··· for 625 mm systems, module = 107 mm (3901) or 187 mm (3902); 391··· for 600 mm systems (···35···, ···49···, ···80··· for 300 mm systems), module = 107 mm (3911) or 187 mm (3912).
Reference 3901 RWX/28 E 3901 RWX/54 E 3911 RWX/28 E 3911 RWX/35 E 3911 RWX/49 E 3911 RWX/54 E 3911 RWX/80 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x54 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Module mm 107 107 107 107 107 107 107
Recess opening/mm 91x1230 91x1230 91x1180 91x1480 91x1480 91x1180 91x1480
≈kg
Reference
3.6 3.6 3.4 4.1 4.1 3.4 4.1
3902 RWX/28 E 3902 RWX/54 E 3912 RWX/28 E 3912 RWX/35 E 3912 RWX/49 E 3912 RWX/54 E 3912 RWX/80 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x54 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54 2x80
Module mm 187 187 187 187 187 187 187
Recess opening/mm 171x1230 171x1230 171x1180 171x1480 171x1480 171x1180 171x1480
Optical system ···RWX··· Micro-segmented hybrid parabolic louvre RWX, composed of white aluminium cross blades and highlyspecular side panels made of reflection-intensified aluminium for increased efficiency. ···RSV··· Micro-segmented louvre RSV made of high-purity anodised aluminium, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, elegant design with markedly slender shape. With front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2226 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3901 RWX/28 ED. Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lamp characteristics
244
Page 259 259 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Translucent luminaire diffuser 390···, 391··· series luminaires are available upon request with diffusers made of translucent PLEXIGLAS with internal channel prisms and high transmission degree.
Data table No. 2226 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
≈kg 5.6 5.6 5.4 6.1 6.1 5.4 6.1
Reference 3901 RSV/28 E 3901 RSV/54 E 3911 RSV/28 E 3911 RSV/35 E 3911 RSV/49 E 3911 RSV/54 E 3911 RSV/80 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x54 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Module mm 107 107 107 107 107 107 107
Recess opening/mm 91x1230 91x1230 91x1180 91x1480 91x1480 91x1180 91x1480
≈kg
Reference
3.6 3.6 3.4 4.1 4.1 3.4 4.1
3902 RSV/28 E 3902 RSV/54 E 3912 RSV/28 E 3912 RSV/35 E 3912 RSV/49 E 3912 RSV/54 E 3912 RSV/80 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x54 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54 2x80
Module mm 187 187 187 187 187 187 187
Recess opening/mm 171x1230 171x1230 171x1180 171x1480 171x1480 171x1180 171x1480
≈kg 5.6 5.6 5.4 6.1 6.1 5.4 6.1
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2226 1
Data table no. 2227 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.7 6.1 7.4 8.7 12 14 20 27
3.7 5.1 6.4 7.9 9.3 12 15 21 27
5.5 7.9 10 13 15 19 23 35 45
6.2 8.4 11 13 16 20 24 36 46
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2227 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/0.8/BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.27 0.77 0.65 0.39 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.58 0.65 0.51 0.40 0.39 0.29
6.4 9.0 12 14 16 22 26 38 51
7.1 9.7 12 15 18 22 27 40 52
0.79 0.76 0.77 0.74 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.77 0.77 0.76 0.74 0.73
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
‡L 0.79 0.76 0.77 0.76 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.77 0.77 0.76 0.74 0.73
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
3901 RWX/28 E 3901 RWX/54 E 3902 RWX/28 E 3902 RWX/54 E 3911 RWX/28 E 3911 RWX/35 E 3911 RWX/49 E 3911 RWX/54 E 3911 RWX/80 E 3912 RWX/28 E 3912 RWX/35 E 3912 RWX/49 E 3912 RWX/54 E 3912 RWX/80 E
4.3 5.8 7.3 9.0 11 14 16 24 31
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
3.8 5.4 6.9 8.4 9.8 13 16 23 30
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
‡L direct DLOR
3901 RSV/28 E 3901 RSV/54 E 3902 RSV/28 E 3902 RSV/54 E 3911 RSV/28 E 3911 RSV/35 E 3911 RSV/49 E 3911 RSV/54 E 3911 RSV/80 E 3912 RSV/28 E 3912 RSV/35 E 3912 RSV/49 E 3912 RSV/54 E 3912 RSV/80 E
1.27 0.77 0.65 0.39 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.57 0.65 0.51 0.40 0.39 0.29
0.71 0.69 0.69 0.67 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.69 0.69 0.68 0.67 0.65
0.71 0.69 0.69 0.67 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.69 0.69 0.68 0.67 0.65
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets Louvre luminaires can be easily and quickly mounted in ceilings with concealed grids by means of the rapidmounting swivel bracket 370/1N.
245
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage. Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 390··· for 625 mm systems, module = 107 mm (3901) or 187 mm (3902); 391··· for 600 mm systems (···35···, ···49···, ···80··· for 300 mm systems), module = 107 mm (3911) or 187 mm (3912).
Recessed luminaires with reflection-intensified, semi-specular parabolic louvre RSX or highly-specular parabolic louvre RPX, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Reference 3901 RSX/28 E 3901 RSX/54 E 3911 RSX/28 E 3911 RSX/35 E 3911 RSX/49 E 3911 RSX/54 E 3911 RSX/80 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x54 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Module mm 107 107 107 107 107 107 107
Recess opening/mm 91x1230 91x1230 91x1180 91x1480 91x1480 91x1180 91x1480
≈kg
Reference
3.6 3.6 3.4 4.1 4.1 3.4 4.1
3902 RSX/28 E 3902 RSX/54 E 3912 RSX/28 E 3912 RSX/35 E 3912 RSX/49 E 3912 RSX/54 E 3912 RSX/80 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x54 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54 2x80
Module mm 187 187 187 187 187 187 187
Recess opening/mm 171x1230 171x1230 171x1180 171x1480 171x1480 171x1180 171x1480
Optical system Micro-segmented, parabolic louvre made of reflectionintensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %. Fully compliant to CIBSE LG 3, Cat. II, i.e. L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60° in the planes C0/C180, C90/C270 and above 65° all-round. ···RSX··· semi-specular, ···RPX··· highly-specular. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, elegant design with markedly slender shape. With front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2229 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Luminaires can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 3901 RPX/54 ED.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Lamp characteristics
246
Page 259 259 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm enable compact dimensions of the optical systems and the luminaire sections.
Reflection intensification The surface of RPX and RSX louvres is characterised by a system of anodised layers, applied to high-purity aluminium, with an anodising thickness orientated around the half wavelength (∂/2) of the visible light.
Data table No. 2229 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
≈kg 5.6 5.6 5.4 6.1 6.1 5.4 6.1
Reference 3901 RPX/28 E 3901 RPX/54 E 3911 RPX/28 E 3911 RPX/35 E 3911 RPX/49 E 3911 RPX/54 E 3911 RPX/80 E
Lamps W 1x28 1x54 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Module mm 107 107 107 107 107 107 107
Recess opening/mm 91x1230 91x1230 91x1180 91x1480 91x1480 91x1180 91x1480
≈kg
Reference
3.6 3.6 3.4 4.1 4.1 3.4 4.1
3902 RPX/28 E 3902 RPX/54 E 3912 RPX/28 E 3912 RPX/35 E 3912 RPX/49 E 3912 RPX/54 E 3912 RPX/80 E
Lamps W 2x28 2x54 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54 2x80
Module mm 187 187 187 187 187 187 187
Recess opening/mm 171x1230 171x1230 171x1180 171x1480 171x1480 171x1180 171x1480
≈kg 5.6 5.6 5.4 6.1 6.1 5.4 6.1
652d Degree of protection
Data table no. 2229 1
Data table no. 2230 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.2 4.6 5.9 7.1 8.3 11 14 20 26
3.6 4.9 6.2 7.6 8.9 12 14 20 27
5.4 7.7 9.8 12 14 18 23 33 44
6.0 8.2 10 13 15 19 23 34 45
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2230 DIN 5040: A60 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ1 NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.27 0.77 0.65 0.39 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.58 0.65 0.51 0.40 0.39 0.29
5.4 7.7 9.8 12 14 18 23 33 44
6.0 8.2 10 13 15 19 23 34 45
0.82 0.79 0.80 0.77 0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.73
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
‡L 0.82 0.79 0.80 0.77 0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.78 0.73
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
3901 RSX/28 E 3901 RSX/54 E 3902 RSX/28 E 3902 RSX/54 E 3911 RSX/28 E 3911 RSX/35 E 3911 RSX/49 E 3911 RSX/54 E 3911 RSX/80 E 3912 RSX/28 E 3912 RSX/35 E 3912 RSX/49 E 3912 RSX/54 E 3912 RSX/80 E
3.6 4.9 6.2 7.6 8.9 12 14 20 27
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
3.2 4.6 5.9 7.1 8.3 11 14 20 26
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
‡L direct DLOR
3901 RPX/28 E 3901 RPX/54 E 3902 RPX/28 E 3902 RPX/54 E 3911 RPX/28 E 3911 RPX/35 E 3911 RPX/49 E 3911 RPX/54 E 3911 RPX/80 E 3912 RPX/28 E 3912 RPX/35 E 3912 RPX/49 E 3912 RPX/54 E 3912 RPX/80 E
1.27 0.77 0.65 0.39 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.77 0.58 0.65 0.51 0.40 0.39 0.29
0.82 0.79 0.80 0.77 0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.73
0.82 0.79 0.80 0.77 0.82 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.78 0.73
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Continuous-line versions 390···, 391··· series luminaires are also available upon request as versions for continuous-line mounting with optically continuous louvres.
247
Recessed luminaires with white louvre RWV
Application Offices, sales areas and showrooms. Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 1360···, 2360··· for module 185/312.5/625 mm. 1361··· for module 300/600 mm.
Reference 1360/136 RWV 1360/158 RWV
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
Module mm 185 185
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x165 5.4 1526x165 6.4
Reference 2360/236 RWV 2360/258 RWV 1361/236 RWV 1361/258 RWV
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1226x291 1526x291 1180x278 1480x278
Optical system White aluminium louvre RWV for a uniform light distribution. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···136···, ···158···, ···236···, ···258···, with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···318···, ···418··· with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1361/236 RWV E.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
248
Page 259 259 429 444
Electronic control gear Modern lighting installations benefit from electronic control gear: higher luminous efficacy, longer lamp service life, reduced energy consumption and improved thermal characteristics.
Data table No. 0012
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0012
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/3/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
≈kg 7.2 9.6 7.2 9.6
Reference 2360/318 RWV 2360/418 RWV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 625 625
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 7.1 605x605 7.4
Reference 1361/318 RWV 1361/418 RWV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 600 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 6.7 580x580 7.0
65d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0012 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.9 4.0 5.1 6.2 7.2 9.4 12 17 22
3.2 4.4 5.5 6.7 7.8 9.9 12 17 23
4.8 6.7 8.5 10 12 16 20 28 37
5.4 7.3 9.2 11 13 17 20 29 38
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0012
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0012
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.25/BZ
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1360/136 RWV 1360/158 RWV 1361/236 RWV 1361/258 RWV 1361/318 RWV 1361/418 RWV 2360/236 RWV 2360/258 RWV 2360/318 RWV 2360/418 RWV
1.51 1.00 0.78 0.53 1.20 0.97 0.78 0.53 1.20 0.97
0.66 0.64 0.63 0.60 0.68 0.63 0.63 0.60 0.68 0.63
0.66 0.64 0.63 0.60 0.68 0.63 0.63 0.60 0.68 0.63
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Emergency light inserts Louvre luminaires can be equipped with special E14 emergency light sockets. Both incandescent lamps and compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear can serve as light source. See page 429.
249
Recessed luminaires with semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions.
Reference 1360/136 RSV 1360/158 RSV
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
Module mm 185 185
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x165 5.4 1526x165 6.4
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 1360···, 2360··· for module 185/312.5/625 mm. 1361··· for module 300/600 mm.
Reference 2360/236 RSV 2360/258 RSV 1361/236 RSV 1361/258 RSV
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1226x291 1526x291 1180x278 1480x278
Optical system Semi-specular louvre RSV for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. With graduated concave-profiled cross blades to reduce the luminance contrasts between luminaire and ceiling. Louvre made of high-purity anodised aluminium. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···136···, ···158···, ···236···, ···258···, with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···318···, ···418··· with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0013
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.25/BZ
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1361/236 RSV E.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
250
Page 259 259 429 444
Data table No. 0013
Ceiling systems TRILUX recessed luminaires 1360···/2360··· and 1361··· are designed for universal utilisation. They can either be mounted in ceilings with concealed grids using the corresponding mounting accessories, laid onto the flanges of exposed grids or screwed with grids to be provided by the client for ceilings with cut-out openings.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
≈kg 7.2 9.6 7.2 9.6
Reference 2360/318 RSV 2360/418 RSV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 625 625
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 7.1 605x605 7.4
Reference 1361/318 RSV 1361/418 RSV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 600 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 6.7 580x580 7.0
65d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0013 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 8.7 11 16 21
2.9 3.9 5.0 6.1 7.1 9.1 11 16 21
4.3 6.1 7.8 9.5 11 15 18 26 34
4.8 6.6 8.3 10 12 15 19 27 35
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0013
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0013
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1360/136 RSV 1360/158 RSV 1361/236 RSV 1361/258 RSV 1361/318 RSV 1361/418 RSV 2360/236 RSV 2360/258 RSV 2360/318 RSV 2360/418 RSV
1.51 1.00 0.76 0.52 1.24 0.98 0.76 0.52 1.24 0.98
0.69 0.67 0.68 0.65 0.69 0.66 0.68 0.65 0.69 0.66
0.69 0.67 0.68 0.65 0.69 0.66 0.68 0.65 0.69 0.66
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
RSV louvre Semi-specular louvres RSV avoid direct glare, thanks to side panels and graduated concave-profiled cross blades with a cross-section composed of short parabolic segments.
251
Recessed luminaires with semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions.
Reference 1360/136 RMV 1360/158 RMV
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
Module mm 185 185
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x165 5.4 1526x165 6.4
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 1360···, 2360··· for module 185/312.5/625 mm. 1361··· for module 300/600 mm.
Reference 2360/236 RMV 2360/258 RMV 1361/236 RMV 1361/258 RMV
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1226x291 1526x291 1180x278 1480x278
Optical system Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV. High visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. For narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···136···, ···158···, ···236···, ···258···, with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···318···, ···418··· with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0014
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.8/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.25/BZ1
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1361/236 RMV E.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
252
Page 259 259 429 444
Parabolic louvre RMV The semi-specular anodised surface of the parabolic louvre RMV creates a nice uniform louvre appearance, thus increasing the visual comfort.
Data table No. 0014
Single battery systems 545/2G7··· for stand-by switching, consisting of one socket 2G7 for compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL 11 W. For detailed information see page 429.
≈kg 7.2 9.6 7.2 9.6
Reference 2360/318 RMV 2360/418 RMV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 625 625
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 7.1 605x605 7.4
Reference 1361/318 RMV 1361/418 RMV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 600 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 6.7 580x580 7.0
65d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0014 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 8.8 11 16 21
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.2 7.2 9.2 11 16 21
4.4 6.2 7.9 9.6 11 15 18 26 35
4.9 6.7 8.4 10 12 15 19 27 36
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0014
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0014
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1360/136 RMV 1360/158 RMV 1361/236 RMV 1361/258 RMV 1361/318 RMV 1361/418 RMV 2360/236 RMV 2360/258 RMV 2360/318 RMV 2360/418 RMV
1.49 1.00 0.78 0.52 1.30 0.93 0.78 0.52 1.30 0.93
0.69 0.66 0.66 0.64 0.68 0.69 0.66 0.64 0.68 0.69
0.69 0.66 0.66 0.64 0.68 0.69 0.66 0.64 0.68 0.69
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets Louvre luminaires can be easily and quickly mounted in ceilings with concealed grids by means of the rapidmounting swivel bracket 370/1N.
253
∑
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms and financial institutions. Especially recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Recessed luminaires with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Reference 1360/136 RPV 1360/158 RPV
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
Module mm 185 185
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x165 5.4 1526x165 6.4
Reference 2360/236 RPV 2360/258 RPV 1361/236 RPV 1361/258 RPV
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess opening/mm 1226x291 1526x291 1180x278 1480x278
≈kg 7.2 9.6 7.2 9.6
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 1360···, 2360··· for module 185/312.5/625 mm. 1361··· for module 300/600 mm. Optical system Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65°, thus corresponding fully to LG 3, Cat. II. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···136···, ···158···, ···236···, ···258···, with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···318···, ···418··· with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0015
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0015
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.25/BZ1
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1361/236 RPV E.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
254
Page 259 259 429 444
Air conditioning 136···/236··· series luminaires are also available in versions for air conditioning. A catalogue with all the necessary information on photometrics, air conditioning as well as acoustic data is available upon request.
Luminance limitation Louvres with luminances limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 65° were found effective when lighting areas with normal DSE usage.
Reference 2360/318 RPV 2360/418 RPV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 625 625
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 605x605 7.1 605x605 7.4
Reference 1361/318 RPV 1361/418 RPV
Lamps W 3x18 4x18
Module mm 600 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 580x580 6.7 580x580 7.0
65d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 0015 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.5 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.4 8.4 10 15 20
2.7 3.7 4.7 5.8 6.8 8.7 11 16 20
4.1 5.8 7.4 9.1 11 14 17 25 33
4.6 6.2 7.9 9.7 11 15 18 26 34
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0015
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0015
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1360/136 RPV 1360/158 RPV 1361/236 RPV 1361/258 RPV 1361/318 RPV 1361/418 RPV 2360/236 RPV 2360/258 RPV 2360/318 RPV 2360/418 RPV
1.54 1.00 0.80 0.52 1.27 1.02 0.80 0.52 1.27 1.02
0.69 0.68 0.67 0.65 0.69 0.65 0.67 0.65 0.69 0.65
0.69 0.68 0.67 0.65 0.69 0.65 0.67 0.65 0.69 0.65
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the louvre is in place, improving the overall appearance.
255
Recessed luminaires with prismatic cover PA or opal cover OA Application Sales areas, showrooms, offices, foyers, corridors and production facilities.
Reference 1360/136 PA 1360/158 PA 1360/136 OA 1360/158 OA
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. 1360···, 2360··· for module 185/312.5/625 mm. 1361··· for module 300/600 mm.
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 1x36 1x58
Module mm 185 185 185 185
Recess opening/mm 1226x165 1526x165 1226x165 1526x165
Optical system Cover made of PMMA, retained by a white-coated steel frame, can be lowered and hung from either side. ···PA with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane. ···OA with opal cover for a very uniform brightness impression of the luminaire. Luminaire body Luminaire body made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···136···, ···158···, ···236···, ···258···, with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant through-wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole, ···318···, ···418··· with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts.
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1361/236 PA E.
Indications Fixing accessories Through-wiring set Emergency light Lamp characteristics
256
Page 259 259 429 444
Data table No. 0017
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The clip cannot be seen when the frame is in place, improving the overall appearance.
Universal luminaires 136···/236··· series luminaires can be mounted in most common ceiling constructions. Detailed mounting indications are featured on page 259.
≈kg 5.7 6.7 5.7 6.7
Reference 2360/236 PA 2360/258 PA 1361/236 PA 1361/258 PA 2360/236 OA 2360/258 OA
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300 312.5 312.5
Recess opening/mm 1226x291 1526x291 1180x278 1480x278 1226x291 1526x291
≈kg
Reference
7.5 9.9 7.5 9.9 7.5 9.9
2360/318 PA 2360/418 PA 1361/318 PA 1361/418 PA 2360/318 OA 2360/418 OA
Lamps W 3x18 4x18 3x18 4x18 3x18 4x18
Module mm 625 625 600 600 625 625
Recess opening/mm 605x605 605x605 580x580 580x580 605x605 605x605
≈kg 7.4 7.7 7.0 7.3 7.4 7.7
65d Degree of protection
IP 40
Data table no. 0017 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 4.8 6.1 7.4 8.6 11 14 20 26
3.9 5.3 6.7 8.1 9.3 12 15 21 27
5.8 8.1 10 12 14 19 23 33 43
6.6 8.8 11 13 16 20 24 35 45
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0017
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0017
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1360/136 OA 1360/136 PA 1360/158 OA 1360/158 PA 1361/236 PA 1361/258 PA 1361/318 PA 1361/418 PA 2360/236 OA 2360/236 PA 2360/258 OA 2360/258 PA 2360/318 OA 2360/318 PA 2360/418 OA 2360/418 PA
2.16 1.47 1.53 1.00 0.72 0.50 1.10 0.88 1.06 0.72 0.72 0.50 1.40 1.10 1.37 0.88
0.40 0.58 0.36 0.55 0.59 0.55 0.64 0.60 0.40 0.59 0.38 0.55 0.51 0.64 0.39 0.60
0.40 0.58 0.36 0.55 0.59 0.55 0.64 0.60 0.40 0.59 0.38 0.55 0.51 0.64 0.39 0.60
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Covers Opal covers create a particularly uniform brightness impression, whereas prismatic covers stand for increased efficiency.
Opal cover The 1361··· series is also available with covers in opal version, upon request.
257
368···, 369··· Indications and accessories for recess mounting
The luminaires are fixed by means of accessories 03680···, 03690···. One set is necessary per luminaire.
Ceilings with concealed grids
The upper flange width of the grids must not exceed 19 mm.
The luminaires are placed on the flanges of the ceiling grids without the requirement of fixing accessories. Minimum dimension between grid flange and concrete ceiling: 300 mm.
Ceilings with exposed grids
In case of lower ceiling voids between 300 mm and 100 mm at minimum, mounting by means of accessories 03680···, 03690··· is possible. Ceilings with cut-out recess openings
In case of individual mounting in ceilings with cut-out openings, the luminaires are screwed to the lateral ceiling grids at the front planes. The necessary mounting accessories are delivered with the luminaires (see upper centre illustration).
Accessories
In case of non-interrupted continuous lines, the luminaires are mounted by means of accessories 03680···, 03690··· fixed to the grids of the ceiling tiles. One set is necessary per luminaire (see upper right illustration).
Fixing accessories 1 set mounting rails for the mounting of luminaires in system ceilings with concealed grids or for continuous-line mounting in ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Reference 03680/1 03680/3 03690/3
258
for luminaires 3681···, 3682···, 3691···, 3692··· 3683··· 3693···, 3694···
Through-wiring sets Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/36 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires
···/28 ···/35 ···/28 ···/35 ···/28, ···/35
136···, 236··· Indications and accessories for recess mounting
Ceilings with concealed grids
The luminaires are optionally fixed by means of rapid-mounting swivel brackets 370/1N or swivel brackets 370/1. One set of these fixing accessories is necessary per luminaire. Maximum distance between lower side of ceiling tile and upper side of grid: 56 mm or 50 mm (···/136···, ···/158···). Minimum grid height: 18 mm.
The luminaires are placed on the flanges of the ceiling grids without the requirement of fixing accessories. Minimum distance between grid flange and concrete ceiling: 330 mm.
Ceilings with exposed grids
In case of lower ceiling voids between 330 mm and 110 mm at minimum, mounting by means of accessories 370/1N or 370/1 is possible. Ceilings with cut-out recess openings
In case of ceilings with cut-out openings, the luminaires are fixed directly to the existing grids of the ceiling tiles by means of screws. The surrounding rim of the luminaire conceals the saw-cut. Alternative mounting solution with fixing accessories 370/1N or 370/1. Maximum distance between lower side of ceiling tile and upper side of grid: 56 mm or 50 mm (···/136···, ···/158···). Minimum grid height: 18 mm.
Accessories
Rapid-mounting swivel brackets 370/1N 1 set (4 pieces) rapid-mounting swivel brackets for fixing of one luminaire.
Swivel brackets 370/1 1 set (4 pieces) swivel brackets for fixing of one luminaire. Can be optionally used instead of 370/1N.
Through-wiring sets Reference 3700/3LV/36 3700/3LV/58 3700/5LV/36 3700/5LV/58 07690/5LV/25m
for luminaires
36 58 36 58 36
W W W W W, 58 W
259
Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires
TRILUX diffuser luminaires allow for extended maintenance intervals thanks to permanent dust protection of photometrically efficient system components and mechanical lamp protection. In addition, TRILUX diffuser luminaires are also the perfect choice as far as longterm investment is concerned: replacement diffusers by way of example are still available 10 years after a luminaire model is discontinued.
333··· The 333··· series embodies IP 50 on the highest technological level. The series is developed for exclusive use of T5 lamps, is equipped as standard with Multi-Lamp electronic control gear and is available with highly-translucent diffusers and specular reflectors. Page 262
260
330···, 331···, 332··· Diffuser luminaires are functional luminaires. This equation is certainly typical, yet these luminaires can meet design-oriented requirements as well. 33··· series luminaires convince thanks to a modern design with a rectangular, square or circular profile frame.
1330 F··· This ultra-slim series features the appealing trapeziumshaped design and the triedand-tested technical advantages of the 33··· series. The luminaire height of only 74 mm assures a harmonious adaptation to the built environment.
740··· 740··· circular luminaires with opal diffusers in matt surface offer architectural planning scope because the luminaires can be equipped with decor rings available in three colours or also with yellow, red, blue and green PLEXIGLAS rings.
654···, 664···, 665···, 717··· These series which are specially designed for mirror lighting also include luminaires with integrated sockets and switches. Wall-mounted luminaires 7171 in IP 54 are recommended for damp or corrosive environments.
CENTA-S 748··· circular luminaires made of impact-resistant polycarbonate are recommended in case of increased requirements as to mechanical safety. The high degree of protection IP 65 is assured for both ceiling and wall mounting.
Page 266
Page 270
Page 276
Page 278
Page 302
261
Luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, lounges, showrooms, classrooms, corridors and stairwells. Surface-mounted luminaires for ceiling and wall mounting – with accessories also as recessed luminaires in cut-out recess openings, suspension by means of wire suspensions, or integration into T·200 is also possible. Versions 14 W and 24 W also for mounting in gypsum ceilings. Optical system Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser, convex, with internal channel prisms. Sheet steel reflector with highly-reflective white coating. Luminaire body Sheet steel, contours adapted to convex diffuser, with integrated wiring channel for mains supply and further wiring. Plastic end caps, colouradapted to luminaire body. ···W··· white-coated, ···M··· silver-grey-coated with metallic effect. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface.
3331··· series luminaires convince as totally conform recessed and surfacemounted luminaires. Due to their convex shape with the contour-conform luminaire side parts, the luminaires blend in perfectly with the surrounding ceiling surfaces. In case of surface mounting the optically surrounding shadow gap provides an appealing appearance.
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 50 suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Page Fixing accessories 273 Suspensions 273 Continuous-line coupling 273 Trunking mounting 273 Lighting management system 431 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear 436 Lamp characteristics 444
262
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The innovative T5 series 333··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in MultiLamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Reference 3331 W/14/24 E 3331 W/28/54 E 3331 W/35/49/80 E 3331 W/14 ED 3331 W/24 ED 3331 W/28 ED 3331 W/35 ED 3331 W/49 ED 3331 W/54 ED 3331 W/80 ED
Lamps W 1x14/24 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x14 1x24 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Recess opening/mm 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 572x190 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 1472x190 1172x190 1472x190
≈kg
Reference
2.4 4.2 4.9 2.4 2.4 4.2 4.9 4.9 4.2 4.9
3331 M/14/24 E 3331 M/28/54 E 3331 M/35/49/80 E 3331 M/14 ED 3331 M/24 ED 3331 M/28 ED 3331 M/35 ED 3331 M/49 ED 3331 M/54 ED 3331 M/80 ED
Lamps W 1x14/24 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x14 1x24 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Recess opening/mm 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 572x190 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 1472x190 1172x190 1472x190
≈kg 2.4 4.2 4.9 2.4 2.4 4.2 4.9 4.9 4.2 4.9
652do Degree of protection
IP 50
Data table no. 2094 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.2 5.7 7.2 8.7 10 13 16 23 30
4.8 6.4 7.9 9.6 11 14 17 24 32
6.9 9.6 12 15 17 22 27 38 50
7.9 11 13 16 19 24 28 41 53
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2094 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2094 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3331 M/···14··· 3331 M/···24··· 3331 M/···28··· 3331 M/···35··· 3331 M/···49··· 3331 M/···54··· 3331 M/···80··· 3331 W/···14··· 3331 W/···24··· 3331 W···/28··· 3331 W/···35··· 3331 W/···49··· 3331 W/···54··· 3331 W/···80···
2.75 1.87 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60 2.75 1.87 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60
0.78 0.74 0.78 0.78 0.77 0.74 0.70 0.78 0.74 0.78 0.78 0.77 0.74 0.70
0.75 0.71 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.67 0.75 0.71 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.67
indirect ULOR
0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
Technical information see page 440.
LIGHTGATE The energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection. Description see page 431.
263
Luminaires with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm
Application Offices, sales areas, lounges, showrooms, classrooms, corridors and stairwells. ···TA for lighting vertical surfaces. Surface-mounted luminaires for ceiling and wall mounting – with accessories also as recessed luminaires in cut-out recess openings, suspension by means of wire suspensions, or integration into T·200 is also possible. Versions 14 W and 24 W also for mounting in gypsum ceilings.
Reference
Lamps W 3331 W-TS/14/24 E 1x14/24 3331 W-TS/28/54 E 1x28/54 3331 W-TS/35/49/80 E 1x35/49/80 3331 W-TS/14 ED 1x14 3331 W-TS/24 ED 1x24 3331 W-TS/28 ED 1x28 3331 W-TS/35 ED 1x35 3331 W-TS/49 ED 1x49 3331 W-TS/54 ED 1x54 3331 W-TS/80 ED 1x80
Recess opening/mm 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 572x190 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 1472x190 1172x190 1472x190
≈kg
Reference
2.0 3.4 4.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 4.0 4.0 3.4 4.0
3331 M-TS/14/24 E 3331 M-TS/28/54 E 3331 M-TS/35/49/80 E 3331 M-TS/14 ED 3331 M-TS/24 ED 3331 M-TS/28 ED 3331 M-TS/35 ED 3331 M-TS/49 ED 3331 M-TS/54 ED 3331 M-TS/80 ED
Lamps W 1x14/24 1x28/54 1x35/49/80 1x14 1x24 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
Recess opening/mm 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 572x190 572x190 1172x190 1472x190 1472x190 1172x190 1472x190
Optical system Translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser, convex, with internal channel prisms, transmission degree > 80 %. Internal highly-specular reflector, reflection-intensified. ···TS··· symmetrical, ···TA··· asymmetrical. Luminaire body Sheet steel, contours adapted to convex diffuser, with integrated wiring channel for mains supply and further wiring. Plastic end caps, colouradapted to luminaire body. ···W··· white-coated, ···M··· silver-grey-coated with metallic effect. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. E With electronic control gear in Multi-Lamp technology for T5 lamps in different wattages. ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2095 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ4/0.75/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 50 suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Indications Page Fixing accessories 273 Suspensions 273 Continuous-line coupling 273 Trunking mounting 273 Lighting management system 431 Multi-Lamp electronic control gear 436 Lamp characteristics 444
264
Multi-Lamp electronic control gear The innovative T5 series 333··· convinces with a striking new feature: the electronic control gear units in MultiLamp technology used in this series allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages.
Tubular track system T·200 Special fixing accessories allow the integration of colour-adapted luminaires 3331 M··· into the tubular track system T·200. A detailed description of the T·200 system is featured on page 74.
Data table No. 2095 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ4/0.75/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
≈kg 2.0 3.4 4.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 4.0 4.0 3.4 4.0
Reference 3331 W-TA/49/80 E 3331 W-TA/49 ED 3331 W-TA/80 ED
Lamps W 1x49/80 1x49 1x80
Recess opening/mm 1472x190 1472x190 1472x190
≈kg
Reference
4.0 4.0 4.0
3331 M-TA/49/80 E 3331 M-TA/49 ED 3331 M-TA/80 ED
Lamps W 1x49/80 1x49 1x80
Recess opening/mm 1472x190 1472x190 1472x190
≈kg 4.0 4.0 4.0
652do Degree of protection
IP 50
Data table no. 2095 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.6 4.9 6.2 7.5 8.7 11 14 20 26
4.1 5.5 6.8 8.2 9.5 12 15 21 27
5.9 8.2 10 13 15 19 23 33 43
6.8 9.1 11 14 16 20 24 35 45
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2095 DIN 5040: A30 CIBSE BZ: BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2095 DIN 5040: A30 CIBSE BZ: BZ5/0.75/BZ4/1/BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3331 M-TS/···14··· 3331 M-TS/···24··· 3331 M-TS/···28··· 3331 M-TS/···35··· 3331 M-TS/···49··· 3331 M-TS/···54··· 3331 M-TS/···80··· 3331 M-TA/···49··· 3331 M-TA/···80··· 3331 W-TS/···14··· 3331 W-TS/···24··· 3331 W-TS/···28··· 3331 W-TS/···35··· 3331 W-TS/···49··· 3331 W-TS/···54··· 3331 W-TS/···80··· 3331 W-TA/···49··· 3331 W-TA/···80···
2.75 1.87 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60 0.85 0.60 2.75 1.87 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60 0.85 0.60
0.90 0.86 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.86 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.90 0.86 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.86 0.82 0.81 0.81
0.87 0.82 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.78 0.79 0.79 0.87 0.82 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.78 0.79 0.79
indirect ULOR
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02
Technical information see page 440.
Asymmetrical light distribution The asymmetrical aluminium reflector in combination with translucent prismatic diffusers allows to realise increased illuminances on vertical surfaces. Luminaires of the 3331··· series in TA version are thus predestined for efficient blackboard and shelf lighting.
Continuous-line coupling The option of external wiring passage on the ceiling of surface-mounted luminaires can be used for wiring of noninterrupted continuous lines. Special couplings assure a defined distance between the luminaire diffusers.
265
Surface-mounted luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, lounges and corridors. Optical system Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser in stylish, fine-grained matt surface. Trapezium-shaped diffuser, made in one piece, particularly stable and torsionally rigid. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of internal spring clips.
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-S11 2xTC-L18
3302/TC11* 3302/TC18
D mm 220 220
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference
110 140
– 10
2.5 2.7
3302/1x36 3302/1x58 3302/36 3302/58
* For versions ···E: E1 = 150 mm, E2 = 25 mm
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
193 192 193 192
391 390 391 390
450 600 450 600
5.0 6.3 5.6 7.7
Luminaire body Trapezium-shaped front and side sections made of sheet steel, joined together by corners made of die-cast zinc, white. Longitudinal version with front-plane knock-out openings for luminaire coupling with heat-resistant through-wiring. 3323 C··· Circular luminaire: Luminaire body made of sheet steel, circular, white, surrounded by a profiled frame. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Longitudinal version with 5-pole, other versions with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 3302/36 E.
TC
C 0 - C 180
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 50, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Suspensions Luminaire coupling Through-wiring set Trunking Emergency light Lamp characteristics
266
Page 274 274 275 426 428 444
Exact fixing Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp supports made of stainless steel offer ideal, durable positioning of compact fluorescent lamps with a single-ended socket and a small cross-section.
Data table No. 2098 (page 274)
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2096
DIN 5040: B30
DIN 5040: B30
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Unaltered appearance Different visual tasks call for corresponding lumen packages. The 330··· series offers this versatility for singleand twin-lamp versions in the same luminaire body width.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 3xTC-S11 396
3323 C/TC11
E1
≈kg
Reference
198
3.5
3313/TC24 3304/18
Lamps W 3xTC-L24 4x18
D mm 300 500
E1
E2
≈kg
107 250
15 250
5.2 7.9
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 50
Data table no. 2096 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.8 5.3 6.6 8.0 9.3 12 15 21 27
4.4 5.9 7.3 8.8 10 13 16 22 29
6.4 8.8 11 13 16 20 24 35 46
7.3 9.8 12 15 17 22 26 37 48
Calculation parameters
TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2096
T8 TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2098 (page 274)
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: B30
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3302/1x36 3302/1x58 3302/36 3302/58 3323 C/TC11
1.48 1.00 0.85 0.58 1.98
0.60 0.57 0.53 0.50 0.56
0.52 0.50 0.46 0.43 0.51
indirect ULOR
0.08 0.08 0.07 0.07 0.04
Technical information see page 440.
Various equipment options The 33··· series in square version is available in three sizes with different equipment options: linear fluorescent lamps as well as compact fluorescent lamps complete the spectrum adequately.
267
Surface-mounted luminaires with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, lounges and corridors. ···PSA recommended for lighting of vertical surfaces.
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-S11 2xTC-L18
3302 P/TC11* 3302 P/TC18
D mm 220 220
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference
110 140
– 10
2.5 2.7
3302 3302 3302 3302 3302
* For versions ···E: E1 = 150 mm, E2 = 25 mm
Optical system Diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane. Trapezium-shaped diffuser made in one piece, particularly stable and torsionally rigid. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of internal spring clips. ···PS With aluminium reflector, symmetrical. ···PSA With aluminium reflector, asymmetrical.
PS/1x36 PS/1x58 PSA/1x58 P/36 P/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 1x58 2x36 2x58
D mm 900 1200 1200 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
193 192 192 193 192
391 390 390 391 390
450 600 600 450 600
5.0 6.3 6.3 5.6 7.7
Luminaire body Trapezium-shaped front and side sections made of sheet steel, joined together by corners made of die-cast zinc, white. Longitudinal version with front-plane knock-out openings for luminaire coupling with heat-resistant through-wiring. 3323 C··· Circular luminaire: Luminaire body made of sheet steel, circular, white, surrounded by a profiled frame. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. Longitudinal version with 5-pole, other versions with 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
TC
C 0 - C 180
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 3302 P/36 E.
Data table No. 2098 (page 274)
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2097
DIN 5040: A30
DIN 5040: A30
CIBSE BZ: BZ/1.25/BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ/1.25/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 50, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Suspensions Luminaire coupling Through-wiring set Trunking Emergency light Lamp characteristics
268
Page 274 274 275 426 428 444
Exact fixing Ageing- and heat-resistant lamp supports made of stainless steel offer ideal, durable positioning of compact fluorescent lamps with a single-ended socket and a small cross-section.
33··· luminaires with prismatic diffusers provide a specific light guiding in preferred directions thanks to precise prismatic facets. Especially single-lamp versions with internal reflector systems shine out thanks to their high working efficiencies and good glare limitation.
Reference
Lamps D W mm 3xTC-S11 396
3323 C-P/TC11
E1
≈kg
Reference
198
3.5
3313 P/TC24 3304 P/18
Lamps W 3xTC-L24 4x18
D mm 300 500
E1
E2
≈kg
107 250
15 250
5.2 7.9
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 50
Data table no. 2097 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.9 4.9 5.9 6.9 8.9 11 16 20
3.2 4.3 5.4 6.5 7.5 9.5 12 16 21
4.7 6.5 8.2 9.8 12 15 18 26 34
5.4 7.2 9.0 11 13 16 19 27 36
Calculation parameters
TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2097
T8 TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2098 (page 274)
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ4/4/BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ4/2/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/3/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3302 P/36 3302 P/58 3302 PS/1x36 3302 PS/1x58 3302 PSA/1x58 3323 C-P/TC11
0.94 0.63 1.49 1.00 1.03 2.11
0.62 0.59 0.78 0.75 0.73 0.68
0.56 0.54 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.64
indirect ULOR
0.06 0.05 0.07 0.07 0.05 0.04
Technical information see page 440.
Luminaire coupling Luminaire couplings in contour-conform design enable wiring passage and distance fixing in accordance with the degree of protection in case of noninterrupted continuous lines.
Various equipment options The 33··· series in square version is available in three sizes with different equipment options: linear fluorescent lamps as well as compact fluorescent lamps complete the spectrum adequately.
269
Surface-mounted luminaires with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, lounges and corridors.
Reference 1330 F/136 O 1330 F/158 O
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 D2 E1 E2 mm 900 192 390 450 20 1200 192 390 600 20
≈kg
Reference
4.3 5.5
1330 F/236 O 1330 F/258 O
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 D2 E1 E2 mm 900 192 390 450 20 1200 192 390 600 20
Optical system PLEXIGLAS trapeziumshaped diffuser made in one piece, particularly stable and torsionally rigid. Safe retention by means of internal spring clips. ···O Opal diffuser in stylish, fine-grained matt surface. ···P Diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, slim profile. End caps made of impact-resistant ABS. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With conventional ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1330 F/236 O E.
T8
Indications Lamp characteristics
270
Page 444
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2173
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2173
DIN 5040: B31
DIN 5040: B31
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Slim profile – sophisticated photometrics Due to an ultra-slim profile with a total height of only 74 mm, the 1330 F··· series allows for a harmonious integration to the built environment. The tried-and-tested photometric qualities of TRILUX diffuser luminaires embodied in a new, appealing design!
One after another! TRILUX diffusers are manufactured in one piece. The result: particularly solid corners, easy maintenance, better appearance and improved longevity.
≈kg 4.9 5.8
Reference 1330 F/136 P 1330 F/158 P
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 D2 E1 E2 mm 900 192 390 450 20 1200 192 390 600 20
≈kg
Reference
4.3 5.5
1330 F/236 P 1330 F/258 P
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 D2 E1 E2 mm 900 192 390 450 20 1200 192 390 600 20
≈kg 4.9 5.8
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2173 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.2 5.3 6.3 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
3.5 4.7 5.8 7.0 8.1 10 12 18 23
5.1 7.0 8.8 11 12 16 19 28 36
5.8 7.8 9.7 12 13 17 21 29 38
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2173 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2173 DIN 5040: B30 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1330F/136 O 1330F/136 P 1330F/158 O 1330F/158 P 1330F/236 O 1330F/236 P 1330F/258 O 1330F/258 P
1.50 1.33 1.00 0.88 0.86 0.76 0.59 0.51
0.75 0.85 0.72 0.82 0.65 0.74 0.61 0.71
0.63 0.74 0.61 0.72 0.55 0.65 0.51 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.11 0.11 0.11 0.10 0.10 0.09 0.10 0.09
Technical information see page 440.
Prismatic perfection TRILUX prismatic diffusers stand for computer-optimised photometrics, with thousands of precise elements controlling the light by refraction. Use of high-grade base materials underlines our devotion to quality and efficiency.
271
333··· Accessories
Universal solution The 333··· series is a true jack-of-all-trades regarding its mounting possibilities: the luminaire bodies can be equally installed to walls or ceilings. The luminaires can be surface-mounted, recessmounted in cut-out openings or suspended as individual or continuous-line luminaires by means of delicate wire suspensions. Versions with a length of almost 600 mm – which can be additionally mounted in mortar ceilings or walls by means of recess frames – offer a practiceoriented lighting solution for staircases or corridors. Integration in the innovative tubular track system T·200 is favourable for prestigious lighting solutions. In this way 333··· luminaires can be easily combined with other lighting systems, e.g. with spotlights for accentuation lighting. Another option is trunking mounting, recommended in case of uneven ceilings or higher rooms.
The illustrations opposite show 333··· luminaires as surface-mounted/recessed luminaires (left photo), as suspended luminaires (photo in the middle) and as light components within the tubular track system T·200 (right photo).
272
Ordering example
Ordering example
Continuous line for ceiling mounting: Continuous line (5 lengths) with luminaires 3331W/35/49/80 E. 5 luminaires 3331 W/35/49/80 E 4 luminaire couplings 03331 W-L
Continuous line suspended by wire suspensions: Continuous line (5 lengths) with luminaires 3331W/35/49/80 E suspended by wire suspensions. 5 luminaires 3331 W/35/49/80 E 1 pair of wire suspensions 03331 SE 4 wire suspensions 03331 W-SL 1 wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN
Luminaire coupling 1 piece, without wiring. For luminaire connection in accordance with the degree of protection and for a defined distance (60 mm) between the luminaires in case of non-interrupted continuous lines. Only for surface mounting 03331 W-L white-coated, for luminaires 3331 W···. 03331 M-L silver-grey-coated with metallic effect, for luminaires 3331 M···.
Fixing accessories 03331 EB 1 set, to mount luminaires 3331··· in ceilings with cut-out openings.
Wire suspension 03331 SE 1 pair, for individual luminaires or for continuous-line ends. Steel wires ¶ 1 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, including suspension brackets and ceiling caps with knock-out opening ¶ 12 mm, for sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2.
Wire suspension 1 piece, for the connection of two luminaires. Steel wires ¶ 1 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, including luminaire connection element, suspension bracket and ceiling cap with knock-out opening ¶ 12 mm, for sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2. 03331 W-SL white-coated, for luminaires 3331 W···. 03331 M-SL silver-grey-coated with metallic effect, for luminaires 3331 M···.
Wiring connection unit 05000 ESBN* 1 set, for mains feeding for 03331 SE, 03331··· SL. * Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
Fixing accessories 03331 ER/600 1 set, to mount luminaires 3331···/14/24 E in mortar surfaces or walls.
Tubular track system fixing 03331 T200 1 set, for integration of luminaires 3331··· into the T·200 tubular track system, including connection cable. Detailed description of the T·200 system see page 72.
Trunking fixing 03331 TRS 1 set, support brackets and counterbalance weight to fix luminaires 3331··· to trunkings 07690···. A luminaire distance of at least 60 mm has to be observed for trunking mounting.
Geometrical arrangements The universal node A 03··· offers extended planning scope for architecture-enhancing geometrical arrangements. It can be easily used in case diffuser luminaires 3331··· are mounted to trunkings 07690···.
Detailed description of the trunkings 07690··· see page 426.
273
330··· Accessories
Data table no. 2098 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.8 6.7 8.4 10 12 15 19 27 35
5.6 7.4 9.3 11 13 16 20 28 37
8.1 11 14 17 20 26 31 45 58
9.3 12 16 19 22 27 33 47 61
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 2.1 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3302/TC11 3302/TC18 3302 P/TC11 3302 P/TC18 3304/18 3304 P/18 3313/TC24 3313 P/TC24
2.43 1.95 1.91 1.59 0.79 0.63 1.00 0.78
0.52 0.48 0.66 0.59 0.55 0.67 0.42 0.53
0.46 0.43 0.61 0.55 0.51 0.64 0.38 0.50
Technical information see page 440.
indirect ULOR
0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.04 0.03
Luminaire coupling 3300 1 piece, without wiring, for individual cables max. 10 x 2.5 mm2. For luminaire connection in accordance with the degree of protection and for a defined distance between the luminaires in case of non-interrupted continuous lines.
Wire suspension 03310 SE 1 pair, complete for an individual luminaire or for the front planes of continuous lines.
Wire suspension 03320 SL 1 piece, for the connection of two luminaires in case of non-interrupted continuous lines.
Steel wires ¶ 1 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, including suspension brackets, luminaire connection elements and ceiling caps with knock-out opening ¶ 12 mm for sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2.
Steel wires ¶ 1 mm, for suspension lengths of up to 1 m, including suspension brackets, luminaire connection elements and ceiling caps with knock-out opening ¶ 12 mm for sheathed cable* up to 5 x 1.5 mm2. * Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
Ordering example: Continuous line (5 lengths) with luminaires 3302 P/58. 5 luminaires 3302 P/58 1 pair of pendant suspensions 03330 PE-N 4 pendant suspensions 03340 PL-N 4 through-wiring sets 3300/5LV/58
274
Pendant suspension 03330 PE-N 1 pair, complete for an individual luminaire or for the front planes of continuous lines.
Pendant suspension 03340 PL-N 1 piece, for the connection of two luminaires in case of non-interrupted continuous lines.
Pendant rod, steel, white, ¶ 13 mm, 500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be shortened on site, including suspension brackets, luminaire connection elements and white ceiling caps.
Pendant rod, steel, white, ¶ 13 mm, 500 mm long, with vernier clip, to be shortened on site, including suspension brackets, luminaire connection elements and white ceiling caps.
Trunkings For ceiling mounting and suspended mounting of surface-mounted luminaires. Also to be used as wiring channel. Trunkings made of sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, equipped as standard with stable couplings, galvanised. See page 426.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2, including luminaire coupling 3300. ···3LV··· 3-conductor through-wiring ···5LV··· 5-conductor through-wiring Reference for luminaires 3300/3LV/36 ···36 3300/5LV/36 ···36 3300/3LV/58 ···58 3300/5LV/58 ···58 07690/5LV/25m*
Length 1400 mm 1400 mm 1700 mm 1700 mm 25 m
* without luminaire coupling
Safety lighting 330··· series luminaires can be equipped on site with screwed E14 sockets. Detailed description and photometrics see page 430.
275
Circular surface-mounted luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Ceiling- and wall-mounted luminaires for entrance areas, corridors, stairwells, lounges, hotels, restaurants and residential areas.
Reference 7401N/TR22 E 7401N/2xTC9 7401N/2xTCD13 7401N/E27
Lamps W 1xTR22 2xTC-S9 2xTC-D13 1x max. 60
D mm 90 90 90 90
E1
E2
≈kg
65 100 100 100
26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5
1.0 1.2 1.5 0.8
Optical system Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser with stylish, fine-grained, matt surface. Circular diffuser in spherical form, particularly stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of a simple bayonet fixing mechanism. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. ···/TC11, ···/TC18 with stainless steel lamp holders for compact fluorescent lamps. Suitable for mounting to ceilings and walls. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole, ···/2xTC9, ···/TC11, ···/2xTCF24, ···/2xTCF36 with 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. Luminaires for compact fluorescent lamps with low-loss ballasts. Luminaires for circular lamps TR are supplied as standard with electronic control gear (E). Luminaires for compact fluorescent lamps can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7401N/2xTC9 E.
TR TC TC-F A
276
Page 428 444
Data table No. 2101 DIN 5040: B31 CIBSE BZ: BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ6
7401N/E27 for incandescent lamp up to 60 W, without ballast.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
C 0 - C 180
PLEXIGLAS coloured decor ring (tool-free installation) 07401 (¶ 340 mm) for 7401···, 07402 (¶ 440 mm) for 7402···, 07403 (¶ 560 mm) for 7403···. Blue Green Red Yellow 07401 RB 07401 RG 07401 RR 07401 RY 07402 RB 07402 RG 07402 RR 07402 RY 07403 RB 07403 RG 07403 RR 07403 RY
Decorative ceiling ring, white Conical ceiling ring made of powder-coated sheet steel, white. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting without tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser. 07401 W ¶ 349 mm, for 7401N···. 07402 W ¶ 450 mm, for 7402N···. 07403 W ¶ 561 mm, for 7403N···.
Reference 7402N/1xTCF36 7402N/1xTR40 E 7402N/TC11* 7402N/TC18* 7402N/E27
Lamps W 1xTC-F36 1xTR40 2xTC-S11 2xTC-L18 1x max. 60
D mm 220 220 220 220 220
E1
E2
≈kg
30 110 110 110 30
– 26.5 – – –
2.2 1.6 2.1 2.2 1.8
Reference
Lamps W 7403N/1xTR22+40 E 1xTR22+1xTR40 7403N/TC11 3xTC-S11 7403N/2xTCF24 2xTC-F24 7403N/2xTCF36 2xTC-F36
D mm 396 396 396 396
E1
E2
≈kg
77 198 198 198
26.5 – – –
2.3 3.3 3.7 3.7
* For versions ···E: E1 = 13 mm, E2 = 62 mm.
652d Degree of protection
IP 40
Data table no. 2101 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.5 3.5 4.4 5.3 6.2 8.0 9.8 14 18
2.9 3.9 4.9 5.9 6.8 8.6 10 15 19
5.1 7.0 8.9 11 12 16 20 28 37
5.8 7.8 9.7 12 14 17 21 30 38
Calculation parameters
TR TC TC-F
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2101 DIN 5040: A30
TR TC TC-F
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2101 DIN 5040: B30
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ5/2.5/BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5/2/BZ6/2.5/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 2.2 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7401N/TR22 E 7401N/2xTC9 7401N/2xTCD13 7402N/1xTCF36 7402N/1xTR40 E 7402N/TC11 7402N/TC18 7403N/2xTCF24 7403N/2xTCF36 7403N/1xTR22+40 E 7403N/TC11
1.21 1.99 1.48 0.93 0.72 1.33 1.00 0.71 0.45 0.51 1.07
0.67 0.62 0.55 0.56 0.68 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.58 0.60 0.51
0.56 0.53 0.47 0.50 0.58 0.54 0.54 0.55 0.52 0.53 0.46
indirect ULOR
0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.10 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.04
Technical information see page 440.
Decorative ceiling ring, anodised Conical ceiling ring made of anodised aluminium. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting without tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser. 07401 C ¶ 349 mm, for 7401N···. 07402 C ¶ 450 mm, for 7402N···. 07403 C ¶ 561 mm, for 7403N···.
Decorative ceiling ring, titanium-coloured Conical ceiling ring made of aluminium, coated in transparent lacquer. Attached to the luminaire body during mounting without tools, unified with the luminaire diffuser. 07401 T ¶ 349 mm, for 7401N···. 07402 T ¶ 450 mm, for 7402N···. 07403 T ¶ 561 mm, for 7403N···.
277
Wall-mounted luminaires with opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Wall-mounted luminaires for sales areas, corridors and waiting areas. Optical system Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser with internal channel prisms, made in one piece.
Reference 6651 C/14 E 6651 C/28 E 6651 C-S/14 E 6651 C-S/28 E
Lamps W 1x14 1x28 1x14 1x28
D mm 500 800 500 800
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference
25 25 25 25
135 – 135 –
27 27 27 27
1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8
6651/14 E 6651/28 E 6651 S/14 E 6651 S/28 E
Lamps W 1x14 1x28 1x14 1x28
D mm 500 800 500 800
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
25 25 25 25
135 – 135 –
27 27 27 27
1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8
Luminaire body Extruded aluminium, solventfree powder-coated, white, with integrated wiring channel at the rear for wiring passage in case of shifted wall outlet. White-coated end caps or in version ···C··· chrome-finished end caps. 6651··· With optimised length for tile and mirror dimensions. With plastic end caps, flat at the front planes. 6641··· With end caps made of die-cast aluminium, subtly inclined at the front planes, ···S··· End cap with integrated rocker switch. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. 6651··· supplied as standard with electronic control gear (E), 6641··· with low-loss ballasts. 6641··· luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 6641/36 E.
Indications Wall-mounted luminaires··· ···with switch ···with sockets Lamp characteristics
278
Page 280 280 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps in efficient version with a diameter reduced to 16 mm extend the equipment scope of the 66··· series wall-mounted luminaires.
Adapted luminaire lengths With a length of 600 mm or 1200 mm, the 6651··· series luminaires are perfectly adapted to the tile module 200 mm. The luminaires harmonise with the wider mirror dimensions as well.
Reference 6641 C/18 6641 C/36 6641 C/58
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
D mm 550 800 1000
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
Reference
25 25 25
– – –
27 27 27
1.8 2.5 3.2
6641/18 6641/36 6641/58
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
D mm 550 800 1000
D1
E1
E2
≈kg
25 25 25
– – –
27 27 27
1.8 2.5 3.2
652d Degree of protection
IP 40
Data table no. 2103 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.8 2.5 3.1 3.7 4.3 5.5 6.6 9.5 12
2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 6.0 7.2 10 13
3.6 4.9 6.2 7.4 8.6 11 13 19 25
4.2 5.6 6.9 8.3 9.5 12 14 20 26
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
6641/18 6641/36 6641/58 6641 C/18 6641 C/36 6641 C/58 6651/14 E 6651/28 E 6651 C/14 E 6651 C/28 E 6651 C-S/14 E 6651 C-S/28 E 6651 S/14 E 6651 S/28 E
2.66 1.00 0.69 2.66 1.00 0.69 2.63 1.18 2.63 1.18 2.63 1.18 2.63 1.18
0.69 0.74 0.70 0.69 0.74 0.70 0.79 0.81 0.79 0.81 0.79 0.81 0.79 0.81
0.49 0.52 0.49 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.56 0.57 0.56 0.57 0.56 0.57 0.56 0.57
indirect ULOR
0.20 0.22 0.21 0.20 0.22 0.21 0.23 0.24 0.23 0.24 0.23 0.24 0.23 0.24
Technical information see page 440.
End caps The appearance of the 665··· series is characterised by its functional design with flat end caps. Aluminium end caps of the 664··· series on the other hand are subtly inclined and can be optionally equipped with sockets.
279
Wall-mounted luminaires with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Wall-mounted luminaires, optionally available with switch and/or socket. 7171···: safety class II.
Reference 6641 C/18 6641 C/TC18
Lamps W 1x18 1xTC-L18
D mm 550 240
Lamps W 1x18 1x18
D mm 550 550
Lamps W 1x18
D mm 550
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
Reference
25 25
– 281
27 27
40 40
1.8 1.5
6641/18 6641/TC18
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
Reference
25 25
– –
27 27
40 20
1.8 1.9
6641 S/18 6641 St-S/18
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
Reference
25
–
27
20
1.9
6641 St/18
Lamps W 1x18 1xTC-L18
D mm 550 240
Lamps W 1x18 1x18
D mm 550 550
Lampen W 1x18
D mm 550
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
25 25
– 281
27 27
40 40
1.8 1.5
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
25 25
– –
27 27
40 20
1.8 1.9
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
25
–
27
20
1.9
Optical system Opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser, made in one piece. 6641··· with internal channel prisms, 6541 P/18 with clear prismatic diffuser. Luminaire body 6641··· Extruded aluminium, solventfree powder-coated, white. White-coated end caps or in version ···C··· chromefinished end caps, made of die-cast aluminium, subtly inclined at the front planes. 6541··· Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. 7171··· Glass-fibre reinforced polyester, grey, with internal reflector made of white polyester, safety class II, protected against the ingression of water. Equipment ···S··· With integrated rocker switch. ···St··· With earthed socket 230 V, 16 A. ···St-S··· With earthed socket 230 V, 16 A and rocker switch. Other international socket types are available on request. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, 6541···, 6641··· with additional earth connection terminal. Versions ···St··· and ···St-S··· with 3-pole connection terminal. 6541···, 6641··· luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 6641 C-St/18 E.
Indications Lamp characteristics
280
Page 444
Reference 6641 C-S/18 6641 C-St-S/18
Reference 6641 C-St/18
Reference 6541/15 6541/18
Lamps W 1x15 1x18
D mm 360 510
D1
E1*
E2
IP
≈kg
71 72
205 255
– –
40 40
1.1 1.5
Reference 6541 P/18
Lamps W 1x18
D mm 510
D1
E1*
E2
IP
≈kg
72
255
–
40
1.5
D1
E1*
E2
IP
≈kg
84
255
–
20
1.7
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
* For version with electronic control gear: ···/15 E1 = 280 mm, ···/18 E1 = 340 mm
Reference 6541 St/18
Lamps W 1x18
D mm 510
D1
E1*
E2
IP
≈kg
84
255
–
20
1.7
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
Reference 6541 St-S/18
Lamps W 1x18
D mm 510
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
65 2d Degree of protection ···SN···, ···St···, ···St-S··· 7171···
Reference 6541 SN/18
Lamps W 1x18
D mm 510
D1
E1*
E2
IP
≈kg
Reference
72
255
–
20
1.5
7171/15 7171/18
* For version with electronic control gear: E1 = 340 mm
Lamps W 1x15 1x18
D mm 310 460
D1
E1
E2
IP
≈kg
94 95
250 230
– –
54 54
1.5 1.9
M
7171···
IP 40 IP 20 IP 54
Short-time operation The use of electronic starters leads to reduced start-up times and to increased lamp service life. It is therefore often recommended to replace glow starters by electronic starters, e.g. in bathing areas or sanitary zones.
281
282
Recessed diffuser luminaires
TRILUX recessed luminaires with PLEXIGLAS diffuser are available for almost all common ceiling systems. Stable diffusers, reliable closure mechanisms and ageing-resistant sealing guarantee permanent protection of lamps and optical systems. 4401··· 4401··· series is specially conceived for integration in strip ceilings in module 100, strip width 84 mm and a gap width of 16 mm. Lateral black profiles made of plastic assure the optical continuation of the shadow gaps in strip ceilings.
3331··· Universal luminaires 3331··· for T5 lamps offer in addition to numerous other mounting possibilities also recess mounting solutions for walls and ceilings. Detailed information can be found in the section “Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires”.
1360/2360 PA/OA Recessed luminaires with prismatic and opal PLEXIGLAS diffusers round off the TRILUX range of recessed diffuser luminaires. Detailed information can be found in the section “Recessed louvre luminaires”.
Page 284
Page 262
Page 256
283
Recessed luminaires for strip ceilings with opal or prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Offices, sales areas, showrooms, locker-rooms, e.g. in sports halls, indoor swimming-pools and covered exterior areas. For strip ceilings in module 100, strip width 84 mm, gap width 16 mm. Optical system PLEXIGLAS diffuser made in one piece, particularly stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of internal spring clips. 4401 F/··· With opal PLEXIGLAS diffuser. 4401 PF/··· With PLEXIGLAS diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, with lateral black plastic profiles for the optical continuation of the shadow gap. ···/36, ···/58 with front-plane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/18 with 3-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 5-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. Sealing and mechanical protection of the mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 4401 PF/36 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
284
Page 428 444
Shadow gap Lateral black plastic profiles assure the optical continuation of the shadow gaps in strip ceilings for a harmonious appearance.
Fixing accessories Angle sections, 1 set (2 pieces), fully galvanised. To mount 4401··· luminaires in strip ceilings. 832 1266 mm long, for luminaires 4401···/18, 4401···/36. 833 1566 mm long, for luminaires 4401···/58.
Reference 4401 F/18 4401 F/36 4401 F/58
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
Strip ceiling Module 1x100 1x100 1x100
Length ≈kg mm 640 2.9 1250 4.0 1550 5.1
Reference 4401 PF/18 4401 PF/36 4401 PF/58
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
Strip ceiling Module 1x100 1x100 1x100
Length ≈kg mm 640 2.9 1250 4.0 1550 5.1
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 54
Data table no. 2106 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
6.0 8.3 10 13 15 19 23 33 43
6.9 9.2 12 14 16 20 25 35 45
10 14 17 21 24 32 38 55 72
12 15 19 23 27 34 41 58 76
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2106
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2106
DIN 5040: A30
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1/BZ4
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
4401 F/18 4401 F/36 4401 F/58 4401 PF/18 4401 PF/36 4401 PF/58
3.94 1.47 1.00 3.24 1.16 0.78
0.34 0.37 0.35 0.41 0.46 0.44
0.31 0.34 0.32 0.39 0.44 0.42
indirect ULOR
0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.02
Technical information see page 440.
Continuous-line mounting The angle brackets for installation of the 44··· luminaires overlap. Thus the precise alignment in case of non-interrupted continuous lines is assured.
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2, with 1 grommet. 6890/3LV/36 1450 mm length. 6890/5LV/36 1450 mm length. 6890/3LV/58 1750 mm length. 6890/5LV/58 1750 mm length.
285
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
TRILUX weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires shine out thanks to high corrosion and ageing resistance. Highly-resistant materials also guarantee efficient and long-term protection against the ingression of dust and humidity. The product segment includes luminaires in IP 54 and IP 65.
ARAGON The solid weather-proof luminaires ARAGON convince thanks to their innovative rapid closure mechanism without individual components. The luminaire body and diffuser also withstand increased mechanical strain.
Page 288
286
713··· High-quality opal or prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffusers characterise the architectural design of the tried-and-tested series. The connection with the flat base luminaire body made of polyester resin is effected by means of internal spring clips.
1715··· The luminaire bodies of the 1715··· series are made of highly-resistant polyester resin, characterised by a very low inflammability. A further advantage is the prismatic diffuser made of ageing-resistant PLEXIGLAS which is easy to clean thanks to its smooth surface.
719··· 719··· battens are recommended for interior and exterior areas which are not working areas with general illumination requirements. The FF versions are also suitable for production sites exposed to fire hazards. Also recommended for simple working rooms when equipped with reflectors.
CENTA-S Weather-proof circular luminaires 748··· guarantee a high IP 65-rating for ceiling as well as for wall mounting. Luminaire body and diffuser are made of impact-resistant polycarbonate. The luminaire design can be varied by means of attractive decorative ceiling rings.
WINLIGHT-Q High lumen packages characterise the 798··· series. They are recommended for higher halls as well as for covered exterior areas. IP 54 is achieved in combination with glass covers. A detailed description can be found in the section “Industrial luminaires”.
Page 294
Page 296
Page 298
Page 302
Page 422
287
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON with polycarbonate diffuser, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Ceiling- and wall-mounted luminaires for damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Recommended for increased requirements as to mechanical stability. Optical system Diffuser made of clear, impact-resistant and UV-stabilised polycarbonate with stylish, fine-grained front planes, smooth exterior finish, with internal channel prisms. Diffuser made in one piece, mechanically stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of inter-lock pairs – closed without tools. Luminaire body Polycarbonate, recyclable, very low inflammability, transparant, for additional indirect light component. With upper- and front-plane perforations for mains supply and further wiring as well as for through-wiring by means of heat-resistant internal wiring. Grommets are enclosed loose. Internal wiring to be ordered separately. Mounting by means of enclosed stainless steel fixing clamps. With stainless steel wire bracket for steel strip suspension or for chain suspension to be provided by the contractor. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 66 suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Internal wiring Suspensions Trunking Lamp characteristics
288
Page 291 293 300 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm – in efficient or lumen-rich version – offer applicationoriented lumen packages in different wattages.
Zip-like fastening principle Diffuser mounting is realised by means of an easy closure mechanism: a multitude of inter-lock pairs on the diffuser and the luminaire body is clipped onto each other for a safe and tight retention. After unlocking the first inter-lock pair, the diffuser can be easily opened in a flash for maintenance purposes thanks to the zip-like fastening principle.
Reference
Lamps W 1x14 1x24 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
ARAGON 114 T E ARAGON 124 T E ARAGON 128 T E ARAGON 135 T E ARAGON 149 T E ARAGON 154 T E ARAGON 180 T E
D mm 390 390 800 1100 1100 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference
– – 235 235 235 235 235
– – 475 475 475 475 475
1.6 1.6 2.4 2.7 2.7 2.4 2.7
ARAGON 214 T E ARAGON 224 T E ARAGON 228 T E ARAGON 235 T E ARAGON 249 T E ARAGON 254 T E
Lamps W 2x14 2x24 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54
D mm 390 390 800 1100 1100 800
D1
D2
≈kg
– – 235 235 235 235
– – 475 475 475 475
2.5 2.5 3.4 3.8 3.8 3.4
652do Degree of protection
IP 66
Data table no. 2194 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.6 6.2 7.8 9.4 11 14 17 24 32
5.4 7.0 8.7 11 12 16 19 26 33
7.6 11 13 16 19 23 28 40 52
8.9 12 15 18 20 26 31 43 55
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2194 DIN 5040: B20 CIBSE BZ: BZ7/4/BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ7/4/BZ6
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2194 DIN 5040: B31 CIBSE BZ: BZ5/1.25/BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ6
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
ARAGON 114T E ARAGON 124T E ARAGON 128T E ARAGON 135T E ARAGON 149T E ARAGON 154T E ARAGON 180T E ARAGON 214T E ARAGON 224T E ARAGON 228T E ARAGON 235T E ARAGON 249T E ARAGON 254T E
2,75 1.99 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60 1.45 1.05 0.67 0.53 0.41 0.41
0.84 0.80 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.80 0.77 0.81 0.77 0.81 0.81 0.79 0.77
0.65 0.62 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.59 0.61 0.58 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.58
indirect ULOR
0.19 0.18 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.19 0.18 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.18
Technical information see page 440.
Multiple connection possibilities A multitude of pre-formed perforations, located at the luminaire front planes or luminaire roof, ensures different feeding possibilities for mains supply and further wiring. Continuous-line arrangement by means of system-conform internal wiring accessories (see page 291).
Rapid mounting and maintenance Gear trays and diffusers can be suspended from the luminaire body during electrical connection and later maintenance. This feature saves time since the components do not have to be placed on the scaffolding or the floor.
289
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON with polycarbonate diffuser, for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm Application Ceiling- and wall-mounted luminaires for damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Recommended for increased requirements as to mechanical stability.
Reference
Lamps W 1x14 1x24 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
ARAGON 114 E ARAGON 124 E ARAGON 128 E ARAGON 135 E ARAGON 149 E ARAGON 154 E ARAGON 180 E
Optical system Diffuser made of clear, impact-resistant and UV-stabilised polycarbonate with stylish, fine-grained front planes, smooth exterior finish, with internal channel prisms. Diffuser made in one piece, mechanically stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of inter-lock pairs – closed without tools.
D mm 390 390 800 1100 1100 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
– – 235 235 235 235 235
– – 475 475 475 475 475
1.7 1.7 2.6 2.9 2.9 2.6 2.9
···S··· With highly-specular reflector, reflection-intensified, for symmetrical light distribution. Luminaire body Polycarbonate, recyclable, very low inflammability, lightgrey. With upper- and frontplane perforations for mains supply and further wiring as well as for through-wiring by means of heat-resistant internal wiring. Grommets are enclosed loose. Internal wiring to be ordered separately. Mounting by means of enclosed stainless steel fixing clamps. With stainless steel wire bracket for steel strip suspension or for chain suspension to be provided by the contractor.
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With electronic control gear (E). Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 66 suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Internal wiring Suspensions Trunking Lamp characteristics
290
Page 291 293 300 444
T5 fluorescent lamps T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter reduced to 16 mm – in efficient or lumen-rich version – offer applicationoriented lumen packages in different wattages.
T5 and electronic control gear Innovative T5 lamps are operated with energy-saving electronic control gear as a matter of principle. T5 lighting systems thus embody a symbiosis of the latest in both lamp and control gear technology.
Data table No. 2912 DIN 5040: B20 CIBSE BZ: BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ7/2/BZ6
Reference
Lamps W 2x14 2x24 2x28 2x35 2x49 2x54
ARAGON 214 E ARAGON 224 E ARAGON 228 E ARAGON 235 E ARAGON 249 E ARAGON 254 E
D mm 390 390 800 1100 1100 800
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference
– – 235 235 235 235
– – 475 475 475 475
2.3 2.3 3.6 4.0 4.0 3.6
ARAGON 128 S E ARAGON 135 S E ARAGON 149 S E ARAGON 154 S E ARAGON 180 S E
Lamps W 1x28 1x35 1x49 1x54 1x80
D mm 800 1100 1100 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
235 235 235 235 235
475 475 475 475 475
3.2 3.5 3.5 3.2 3.5
652do Degree of protection
IP 66
Data table no. 2912 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.0 5.4 6.8 8.1 9.4 12 15 21 27
4.7 6.2 7.6 9.1 10 13 16 22 28
6.7 9.0 11 14 16 20 24 35 45
7.8 10 13 15 17 22 26 37 47
Calculation parameters
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2912 DIN 5040: B30 CIBSE BZ: BZ5/2.5/BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ6
T5
C 0 - C 180
T5
Data table No. 2912 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
ARAGON 114 E ARAGON 124 E ARAGON 128 E ARAGON 135 E ARAGON 149 E ARAGON 154 E ARAGON 180 E ARAGON 128 S E ARAGON 135 S E ARAGON 149 S E ARAGON 154 S E ARAGON 180 S E ARAGON 214 E ARAGON 224 E ARAGON 228 E ARAGON 235 E ARAGON 249 E ARAGON 254 E
2.75 1.99 1.27 1.00 0.78 0.78 0.60 1.19 0.94 0.73 0.73 0.56 1.45 1.05 0.67 0.53 0.41 0.41
0.98 0.93 0.98 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.93 0.88 0.93 0.93 0.91 0.88
0.81 0.77 0.81 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.73 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.79 0.78 0.74 0.78 0.78 0.76 0.74
indirect ULOR
0.17 0.16 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.16 0.15 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.15 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.14
Technical information see page 440.
Production sites exposed to fire hazards ARAGON luminaires equipped with electronic control gear can also be used in areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Luminaires for T5 lamps are equipped as standard with electronic control gear.
Internal wiring Five heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2, with connection terminal for wires up to 5 x 2.5 mm2. ARAGON LV 5x1200 for luminaires ···28 E, ···36, ···54 E. ARAGON LV 5x1500 for luminaires ···35 E,···49 E, ···58, ···80 E.
291
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires ARAGON with polycarbonate diffuser
Application Ceiling- and wall-mounted luminaires for damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Recommended for increased requirements as to mechanical stability.
Reference
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
ARAGON 118 ARAGON 136 ARAGON 158
D mm 390 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
– 235 235
– 475 475
2.2 3.2 3.5
Optical system Diffuser made of clear, impact-resistant and UV-stabilised polycarbonate with stylish, fine-grained front planes, smooth exterior finish, with internal channel prisms. Diffuser made in one piece, mechanically stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of inter-lock pairs – closed without tools. ···S··· With highly-specular reflector, reflection-intensified, for symmetrical light distribution. ···SA··· With highly-specular reflector, reflection-intensified, for asymmetrical light distribution. Luminaire body Polycarbonate, recyclable, very low inflammability, lightgrey. With upper- and frontplane perforations for mains supply and further wiring as well as for through-wiring by means of heat-resistant internal wiring. Grommets are enclosed loose. Internal wiring to be ordered separately. Mounting by means of enclosed stainless steel fixing clamps. With stainless steel wire bracket for steel strip suspension or for chain suspension to be provided by the contractor.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2913 DIN 5040: B20 CIBSE BZ: BZ6 NBN L 14-002: BZ7/2/BZ6
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. ARAGON 158 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 66, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Indications Internal wiring Suspensions Trunking Lamp characteristics
292
Page 291 293 300 444
Mechanical safety Many applications call for particularly solid weather-proof luminaires. ARAGON – equipped as standard with anti-vandalism closure mechanism – is the correct choice because luminaire body and diffuser are made of highly impactresistant polycarbonate.
Zip-like fastening principle Diffuser mounting is realised by means of an easy closure mechanism: a multitude of inter-lock pairs on the diffuser and the luminaire body is clipped onto each other for a safe and tight retention. After unlocking the first inter-lock pair, the diffuser can be easily opened in a flash for maintenance purposes thanks to the zip-like fastening principle.
Reference
Lamps W 2x18 2x36 2x58
ARAGON 218 ARAGON 236 ARAGON 258
D mm 390 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference
– 235 235
– 475 475
2.9 4.8 5.2
ARAGON 136 S ARAGON 158 S ARAGON 136 SA ARAGON 158 SA
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 1x36 1x58
D mm 800 1100 800 1100
D1
D2
≈kg
235 235 235 235
475 475 475 475
4.3 4.6 4.3 4.6
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 66
Data table no. 2913 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.4 4.6 5.8 6.9 8.1 10 12 18 23
4.0 5.3 6.5 7.8 8.9 11 13 19 24
5.7 7.7 9.7 12 13 17 21 30 38
6.6 8.8 11 13 15 19 22 32 41
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2913
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2913
DIN 5040: B30
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/7.5/BZ5/1/BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
ARAGON 118 ARAGON 136 ARAGON 158 ARAGON 136 S ARAGON 136 SA ARAGON 158 S ARAGON 158 SA ARAGON 218 ARAGON 236 ARAGON 258
3.61 1.47 1.00 1.35 1.36 0.92 0.92 2.08 0.84 0.58
0.81 0.81 0.76 0.79 0.74 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.71 0.66
0.64 0.64 0.60 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.66 0.59 0.59 0.55
indirect ULOR
0.17 0.17 0.16 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.11 0.11 0.11
Technical information see page 440.
Ceiling mounting The luminaire fixing is effected by means of the CLICK-system with stainless steel clamps. Longitudinal and transversal clearance ease the alignment and enable a stressfree material-specific heat expansion. Luminaire body perforations and large-scale sealing technology are completely omitted: IP 66 is permanentely assured.
Steel strip suspension ARAGON SB 1 pair, 1 m long, made of stainless steel. Trunking (not illustrated) ARAGON luminaires can be fixed to trunkings 190 and 190 VZ (see page 300).
293
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires with PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Optical system PLEXIGLAS diffuser made in one piece, particularly stable, opal. ···P··· With PLEXIGLAS diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane.
Reference 7131/36 7131/58 7171/15 7171/18
Lamps W 1x36 1x58 1x15 1x18
D mm 900 1200 310 460
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
Reference
195 195 94 95
390 390 – –
400 550 250 230
3.7 5.0 1.5 1.9
7132/18 7132/36 7132/58
Lamps W 2x18 2x36 2x58
D mm 530 900 1200
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
65 195 195
– 390 390
215 400 550
3.3 6.6 8.7
Safe retention of the diffuser by means of internal spring clips. ···S··· With highly-specular, anodised reflector. Luminaire body Glass-fibre reinforced polyester resin, very low inflammability, light-grey. 7171 with internal reflector made of polyester resin, very low inflammability, white. ···/36 and ···/58 with front-plane, self-sealing openings for through-wiring inside the luminaire. Projections and indentations in the front planes ensure precise alignment of the luminaires in the continuous line. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/15, ···/18 with 2-pole, ···/36, ···/58 with 4-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. 7171 in safety class II, without earth connection terminal.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2110
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2110
DIN 5040: B21
DIN 5040: B31
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
Luminaires 713··· can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7131 P/36 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Steel strip suspension 75N 1 pair, 1 m long, stainless steel V2A, with luminaire fixing brackets for 713··· luminaires. Indications Page Wall-mounted luminaires 278 Trunking 300 Lamp characteristics 444
294
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. 7130/3LV/36 for luminaires ···/36, 1450 mm long. 7130/5LV/36 for luminaires ···/36, 1450 mm long. 7130/3LV/58 for luminaires ···/58, 1790 mm long. 7130/5LV/58 for luminaires ···/58, 1790 mm long. 07690/5LV/25m for luminaires ···36, ···/58, 25 m long.
Reference 7131 P/36 7131 P/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 900 195 1200 195
D2
E1
≈kg
Reference
390 390
400 550
3.9 5.2
7132 P/36 7132 P/58 7132 PS/1x58 7132 P/TC11
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 1x58 2xTC-S11
D mm 900 1200 1200 215
D1
D2
E1
≈kg
195 195 195 –
390 390 390 –
400 550 550 25
7.0 9.4 8.3 2.1
652d
(o
Degree of protection 7171···
IP 54 Safety class II
Data table no. 2110 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.0 2.8 3.5 4.3 5.0 6.4 7.7 11 14
2.4 3.2 3.9 4.7 5.4 6.9 8.3 12 15
3.4 4.7 5.9 7.1 8.3 11 13 19 24
3.9 5.3 6.5 7.8 9.1 12 14 20 25
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2110
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2110
DIN 5040: B31
DIN 5040: B41
CIBSE BZ: BZ5/1/BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.25/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ5/1/BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1.5/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7131/36 7131/58 7132/18 7132/36 7132/58 7131 P/36 7131 P/58 7132 P/36 7132 P/58 7132 P/TC11 7132 PS/1x58 7171/15 7171/18
2.38 1.63 3.81 1.45 1.00 2.15 1.46 1.24 0.85 6.10 1.43 8.71 6.13
0.73 0.69 0.57 0.60 0.56 0.81 0.77 0.70 0.66 0.53 0.79 0.71 0.71
0.51 0.48 0.44 0.47 0.44 0.57 0.54 0.56 0.53 0.43 0.65 0.49 0.49
indirect ULOR
0.23 0.21 0.13 0.14 0.13 0.24 0.23 0.14 0.14 0.10 0.13 0.22 0.22
Technical information see page 440.
IP-conform continuous-line mounting Self-sealing, front-plane feeding entries enable the IP-conform installation, also for internal through-wiring by means of heat-resistant individual wires. Additional sealing elements are not required. Front-plane projections and indentations ensure precise alignment of the luminaires in the continuous line.
Equipment variety Version ···/TC11 for compact fluorescent lamps is the practice-oriented complement of the 713··· series. Recommended for areas where smaller versions with a high IP-rating are required.
295
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires with PLEXIGLAS or polycarbonate diffuser
Application Damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. 1715N···PC··· also recommended for areas with increased requirements as to mechanical stability. Optical system Trapezium-shaped PLEXIGLAS diffuser, smooth external finish, with internal prisms, made in one piece, mechanically stable and torsionally rigid. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of rocker fasteners made of glass-fibre reinforced polyamide. ···PC V2A··· Polycarbonate diffuser, impact-resistant, smooth exterior surface, with internal prisms, made in one piece, mechanically stable and torsionally rigid. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of V2A stainless steel rocker fasteners. Luminaire body Glass-fibre reinforced polyester resin, very low inflammability, light-grey. Gear tray can be removed without using tools and hung from the luminaire body for maintenance purposes. Double front-plane feeding possibility for mains supply and further wiring as well as for heat-resistant through-wiring. Additional ceiling-oriented feeding possibilities. 2 grommets are enclosed loose. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1715N/158 PC V2A E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 65, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Trunking Steel strip suspensions Lamp characteristics
296
Page 300 301 444
Mains supply and further wiring Easy mains supply and further wiring is enabled by the double front-plane feeding possibility with grommets in diffuser luminaires.
Continuous-line accessories Weather-proof luminaires can be arranged as continuous lines. Internal through-wiring is realised by means of heatresistant internal wiring accessory 02715N/5LV/··· and between the luminaires by means of a sheathed cable, to be provided by the contractor.
Reference 1715N/118 1715N/136 1715N/136 PC V2A 1715N/158 1715N/158 PC V2A
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x36 1x58 1x58
D mm 310 840 840 1140 1140
D1
D2
≈kg
Reference
178 218 218 218 218
356 436 436 436 436
1.8 2.6 2.6 4.3 4.3
1715N/218 1715N/236 1715N/236 PC V2A 1715N/258 1715N/258 PC V2A
Lamps W 2x18 2x36 2x36 2x58 2x58
D mm 310 840 840 1140 1140
D1
D2
≈kg
178 218 218 218 218
356 436 436 436 436
2.2 3.3 3.3 5.8 5.8
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 65
Data table no. 2178 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.3 4.5 5.6 6.8 7.9 10 12 17 23
3.8 5.1 6.3 7.5 8.7 11 13 19 24
5.5 7.5 9.4 11 13 17 20 29 38
6.4 8.5 11 13 15 18 22 31 40
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2178
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2178
DIN 5040: B20
DIN 5040: B30
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ7/0.8/BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1715N/118 1715N/136 1715N/136 PC 1715N/158 1715N/158 PC 1715N/218 1715N/236 1715N/236 PC 1715N/258 1715N/258 PC
3.77 1.45 1.48 1.00 1.03 1.90 0.77 0.79 0.53 0.56
0.73 0.77 0.75 0.71 0.69 0.72 0.72 0.70 0.67 0.64
0.59 0.62 0.61 0.58 0.56 0.62 0.62 0.59 0.57 0.54
indirect ULOR
0.14 0.14 0.14 0.13 0.13 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.10 0.10
Technical information see page 440.
Internal wiring accessories For continuous lines and central feeding. 5 colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2, with 2 connection terminals. 02715N/5LV/36 for ···36, 02715N/5LV/58 for ···58. Ring eyelet 02715 AR (not illustrated) 1 pair, M5, made of galvanised metal. For luminaire fixing to steel strip 194N (page 301).
Ceiling-oriented feeding Cables can be inserted thanks to knock-out openings in the luminaire roof in case of prepared ceiling openings or in case of mounting to trunking. The cable feeding within the luminaire up to the connection point is realised by means of the accessory 02715N/5LV/36.
297
Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires
Application Damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Versions without reflector preferably for damp and wet environments with general illumination requirements, e.g. boiler-houses and greenhouses. 719··· Safety class II 719···E Safety class I
Reference 7191/18 7191/36 7191/36 FF E 7191/58 7191/58 FF E
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x36 1x58 1x58
D mm 400 800 800 1100 1100
D1
E1
E2
E3
≈kg
Reference
130 233 233 233 233
89 189 189 189 189
200 440 440 590 590
200 360 360 510 510
1.5 2.0 1.6 2.7 2.0
7192/18 7192/36 7192/36 FF E 7192/58 7192/58 FF E
Lamps W 2x18 2x36 2x36 2x58 2x58
D mm 400 800 800 1100 1100
D1
E1
E2
E3
≈kg
130 233 233 233 233
89 189 189 189 189
200 440 440 590 590
200 360 360 510 510
2.0 2.9 1.9 4.1 2.3
Luminaire body Glass-fibre reinforced polyester resin, very low inflammability, light-grey. With front-plane feeding and grommets for mains supply. Further wiring, central feeding or continuous-line arrangements by means of internal wiring accessory 07191/4LV/···. ···FF E For production sites exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Identical with 7191, 7192, but with impact-resistant lamp protection tubes and equipped as standard with electronic control gear (E) because of higher thermal safety requirements. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7191/36 E. Versions ···FF E with electronic control gear and additional earth connection terminal as standard.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2111
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2111
DIN 5040: B21
DIN 5040: A30
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/1.25/BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/1.25/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6/1.5/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6/1.5/BZ5
Reflectors (accessories) 1 piece, solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Universally suitable for single- and twin-lamp versions. 07190 R/18 for 719···/18. 07190 R/36 for 719···/36. 07190 R/58 for 719···/58.
Indications Trunking Lamp characteristics
298
Page 300 444
Manifold feeding possibilities Front-plane knock-out openings enable mains supply and continuous-line arrangement – cables can also be inserted thanks to knock-out openings in the luminaire roof in case of prepared ceiling openings or in case of mounting to trunking.
Internal wirings For continuous lines and in case of central feeding. Colourcoded individual wires 1.5 mm2, with 2 connection terminals. 07191/4LV/36 for luminaires ···/36. 07191/4LV/58 for luminaires ···/58. 07191/5LV/36 for luminaires ···/36 E. 07191/5LV/58 for luminaires ···/58 E.
Reference Luminaire + refl.* 7191/18 + 07190 R/18 7191/36 + 07190 R/36 7191/36 FF E + 07190 R/36 7191/58 + 07190 R/58 7191/58 FF E + 07190 R/58
Lamps W
D mm
D1
E1
E2
E3
≈kg
1x18
400
130 89
200 200
2.0
1x36
800
233 189
440 360
3.1
1x36
800
233 189
440 360
2.7
1x58
1100 233 189
590 510
4.0
1x58
1100 233 189
590 510
3.2
* Reflector to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire + refl.* 7192/18 + 07190 R/18 7192/36 + 07190 R/36 7192/36 FF E + 07190 R/36 7192/58 + 07190 R/58 7192/58 FF E + 07190 R/58
Lamps W
D mm
D1
E1
E2
E3
≈kg
2x18
400
130 89
200 200
2.6
2x36
800
233 189
440 360
4.0
2x36
800
233 189
440 360
3.0
2x58
1100 233 189
590 510
5.4
2x58
1100 233 189
590 510
3.5
* Reflector to be ordered separately.
652dM+o Degree of protection 719···E
IP 65 Safety class I
Data table no. 2111 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.6 8.4 10 15 19
3.2 4.2 5.2 6.3 7.2 9.1 11 16 20
4.6 6.2 7.8 9.4 11 14 17 24 32
5.3 7.0 8.7 10 12 15 18 26 33
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2111
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2111
DIN 5040: B21
DIN 5040: A30
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/1.25/BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ6/1.25/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6/1.5/BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ6/1.5/BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Steel strip suspension 75N 1 pair, 1 m long, stainless steel V2A, with luminaire fixing brackets, complete for 719··· luminaires.
Production sites exposed to fire hazards 719···FF E series luminaires are equipped as standard with electronic control gear (E) and a lamp protection tube made of impact-resistant polycarbonate. Particularly suitable for areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
7191/18 7191/18 + 07190 R/18 7191/36 7191/36 + 07190 R/36 7191/36 FF E 7191/36 FF E + 07190 R/36 7191/58 7191/58 + 07190 R/58 7191/58 FF E 7191/58 FF E + 07190 R/58 7192/18 7192/18 + 07190 R/18 7192/36 7192/36 + 07190 R/36 7192/36 FF E 7192/36 FF E + 07190 R/36 7192/58 7192/58 + 07190 R/58 7192/58 FF E 7192/58 FF E + 07190 R/58
indirect ULOR
3.85 3.45 1.55 1.39 1.94
0.93 0.87 0.93 0.87 0.74
0.57 0.87 0.57 0.87 0.46
0.36 0.00 0.36 0.00 0.28
1.74 1.00 0.92 1.25
0.70 0.93 0.85 0.74
0.70 0.57 0.85 0.46
0.00 0.36 0.00 0.28
1.15 1.97 1.65 0.79 0.71 0.99
0.68 0.91 0.85 0.91 0.85 0.73
0.68 0.57 0.85 0.57 0.85 0.46
0.00 0.34 0.00 0.34 0.00 0.27
0.89 0.51 0.47 0.64
0.68 0.91 0.83 0.73
0.68 0.57 0.83 0.46
0.00 0.34 0.00 0.27
0.59
0.68
0.68
0.00
Technical information see page 440.
299
Trunking 190 VZ for damp or corrosive environments
193N
Trunking 190 VZ for weather-proof surfacemounted luminaires. Made of sheet steel, galvanised, particularly torsionally rigid. Upper side with dovetailed profile for positioning of suspensions at will. For sheathed cable up to ¶ 12 mm, frontplane cable introduction. 190 VZ/II/58 2 lengths, 3148 mm long. 190 VZ/III/58 3 lengths, 4722 mm long.
191 VZ
194N
195 VZ 197 VZ
190 B/58
192 VZ
Ceiling-fixing claw 193N 1 piece, made of stainless steel V2A, spacing between trunking and fixing surface 15 mm.
Steel strip suspension 194N 1 piece, 1 m long, made of stainless steel V2A, including fixing claw.
Luminaire support brackets 195 VZ 1 pair, made of galvanised steel. For safe and sealed luminaire fixing.
Trunking coupling 191 VZ 1 piece, made of galvanised steel, particularly stable, for precisely aligned continuous lines.
Blanking cover 190 B/58 1 piece, plastic profile, light-grey, 1570 mm long, snapped into place without tools, to be shortened on site.
Cable holders 197 VZ 6 pieces, bright galvanised, for sheathed cable ¶ 12 mm. For cable feeding in trunkings 190 VZ/···. End caps 192 VZ 1 pair, plastic, light-grey. One pair of end caps is required for each continuous line.
300
Trunking 190 for hostile atmospheres
193N 193 CL
191
Ceiling-fixing claw 1 piece, spacing between trunking and fixing surface 15 mm. 193N made of stainless steel V2A. 193 CL specially corrosionresistant, suitable for use in chloric and acidic atmospheres. Trunking coupling 191 1 piece, made of stainless steel, particularly stable, for precisely aligned continuous lines.
194N 194 CL
190 B/58
Steel strip suspension 194N 1 piece,1 m long, made of stainless steel V2A, including fixing claw. Blanking cover 190 B/58 1 piece, plastic profile, light-grey, 1570 mm long, snapped into place without tools, to be shortened on site.
195··· 197
192N
Luminaire support brackets 1 pair, for safe and sealed luminaire fixing. 195N made of stainless steel V2A. 195 CL specially corrosionresistant, suitable for use in chloric and acidic atmospheres. Cable holders 197 6 pieces, bright galvanised, for sheathed cable ¶ 12 mm. For cable feeding in trunkings 190/···. End caps 192N 1 pair, plastic, light-grey. One pair of end caps is required for each continuous line.
Polyester trunking 190 for weather-proof surfacemounted luminaires. Made of glass-fibre reinforced polyester resin, very low inflammability, light-grey, particularly torsionally rigid. Chemically resistant against low and medium concentrations of inorganic acids and against almost all organic acids as well as against organic solvents with the exception of acetone and chlorinated hydrocarbons. Upper side with dovetailed profile for positioning of suspensions at will. For sheathed cable up to ¶ 12 mm, frontplane cable introduction. 190/II/58 2 lengths, 3148 mm long. 190/III/58 3 lengths, 4722 mm long.
301
CENTA-S Circular weather-proof surface-mounted luminaires with opal polycarbonate diffuser Application Ceiling- and wall-mounted luminaires for damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Recommended for increased requirements as to mechanical safety.
Reference 7481 PC/TCD13 7481 PC/TCD18
Lamps W 1xTC-D13 1xTC-D18
D D1 mm 110 – 110 –
D2
E1
E2 ≈kg
– –
80 80
28 28
1.0 1.1
Optical system Opal diffuser made of impact-resistant polycarbonate with stylish, fine-grained, matt surface. Circular diffuser in spherical form, particularly stable. Safe retention of the diffuser by means of internal spring clips. Luminaire body Polycarbonate, white. Suitable for mounting to ceiling and walls. With two plug-in nipples for mains supply and further wiring. With integrated ventilation valve at the rear, for safe pressure compensation in case of temperature fluctuations. Versions for compact fluorescent lamps TC-L equipped with lampholders made of stainless steel. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7481 PC/TCD18 E. Luminaires for circular lamps TR as standard with electronic control gear (E).
TC-D(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2112 DIN 5040: B30 CIBSE BZ: BZ5 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 65, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
302
Page 428 444
Increased stability CENTA-S luminaire bodies and diffusers are made of highly impact-resistant polycarbonate, thus particularly recommended for areas with increased requirements as to mechanical stability.
Wall mounting The photometric and electrotechnical characteristics of the CENTA-S series are not restricted in case of wall mounting. The maximum luminous flux of circular lamps is achieved in case the luminaires are mounted in such a way that the lampholders are located below.
Reference
Lamps W 7482 PC/1xTR22 E 1xTR22 7482 PC/TCL18 2xTC-L18
D D1 mm 134 51 134 51
D2
E1
E2 ≈kg
– –
32 32
28 28
0.9 1.7
Reference
Lamps W 7483 PC/1xTR40 E 1xTR40 7483 PC/2xTCL24 2xTC-L24
D D1 mm 169 85 169 85
D2
E1
E2 ≈kg
100 83 28 100 130 28
1.9 3.0
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 65
Data table no. 2112 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 4.8 6.0 7.3 8.5 11 13 19 25
4.0 5.3 6.6 8.0 9.3 12 14 20 26
6.9 9.6 12 15 17 22 27 39 50
7.9 11 13 16 19 24 28 41 53
Calculation parameters
TR TC-L
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2112
TR TC-L
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2112
DIN 5040: A30
DIN 5040: A30
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
CIBSE BZ: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.1 h Ymax = 2.1 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7481 PC/TCD13 7481 PC/TCD18 7482 PC/1xTR22 E 7482 PC/TCL18 7483 PC/1xTR40 E 7483 PC/2xTCL24
2.28 2.00 1.04 1.00 0.64 0.72
0.51 0.44 0.56 0.45 0.55 0.41
0.46 0.39 0.51 0.43 0.50 0.39
indirect ULOR
0.05 0.04 0.05 0.03 0.05 0.03
Technical information see page 440.
Decorative ceiling ring, small Conical ceiling ring with surrounding rim, made of aluminium, titanium-coloured, coated in transparent lacquer. For combined mounting with mounting body. 07481 DD ¶ 310 mm, for 7481···. 07482 DD ¶ 384 mm, for 7482···. 07483 DD ¶ 498 mm, for 7483···.
Decorative ceiling ring, wide Conical ceiling ring, made of aluminium, titanium-coloured, coated in transparent lacquer. For combined mounting with luminaire body. 07491 DD ¶ 410 mm, for 7481···. 07492 DD ¶ 470 mm, for 7482···. 07493 DD ¶ 572 mm, for 7483···.
303
Weather-proof recessed luminaires
TRILUX weather-proof recessed luminaires can be mounted in almost all common ceiling systems. In addition to square and rectangular luminaires the product group also includes circular downlights in IP 54. The covers consist of opal, translucent or prismatic PLEXIGLAS, glass covers retained in bezel rings are used for downlights.
739··· The 739··· series for mounting in ceilings with cut-out recess openings is equipped with prismatic diffusers and optional internal specular reflectors. A remarkable characteristic is the surrounding seal in the luminaire rim for sealing towards the ceiling void.
720···P, 721···P The luminaires with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffusers are universally suitable for mounting in ceilings with concealed or exposed grids as well as in cut-out recess openings. The necessary fixing accessories are integrated in the luminaires as standard. Page 308
Page 306 304
720···T, 721···T The series supports minimised energy consumption because the nearly low-loss forward light diffusion of the diffuser material causes high working efficiencies. The diffuser surfaces with a smooth external finish are easy to clean.
722···, 723··· A clear, chemically-resistant safety glass cover protects the lamps and the optical system of this series. Wideangle specular reflectors or parabolic louvres suitable for DSE usage are optionally available.
2911··· 2911··· series downlights achieve the degree of protection IP 54 when combined with covers in clear or Fresnel version. The closed luminaire body offers protection against the ingression of dust and humidity towards the ceiling void.
4401··· The IP 54 series 4401··· is specially conceived for integration in strip ceilings in module 100, strip width 84 mm and a gap width of 16 mm. Detailed description can be found in the section “Recessed diffuser luminaires”.
Clean-room luminaires The catalogue “Lighting systems for operating theatres and clean-room environments” features luminaires for hospitals and clean-room production sites.
Page 310
Page 312
Page 316
Page 284
Catalogue available upon request.
305
Weather-proof recessed luminaires with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser for cut-out recess openings Application Damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas.
Reference
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
7392 P/36 7392 P/58
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1252x206 7.5 1555x206 10.7
For ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Optical system PLEXIGLAS diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane, particularly stable, diffuser fits flush in the luminaire body and is safely retained by internal spring clips. A tool for simple removal of the diffuser is sent with each luminaire. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. The surrounding rim covers the saw cut. Durable sealing of ceiling void against dust and moisture by surrounding seal in luminaire rim, in ageingresistant foam rubber. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. ···/TC··· with 3-pole, others with 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7392 P/58 E.
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
306
Page 428 444
Data table No. 2114
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/4/BZ4
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
Ceilings with cut-out openings Luminaires are fixed directly to the existing grids of the ceiling tiles by means of screws. The surrounding luminaire rim covers the saw cut. The gasket in the luminaire rim ensures the sealing towards the ceiling void.
Reference
Lamps W 2xTC-S11 2xTC-L18
7392 P/TC11 7392 P/TC18
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 304x304 2.9 304x304 3.0
Reference
Lamps W 3xTC-L24
7393 P/TC24
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 404x404 5.9
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 54
Data table no. 2114 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.6 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.2 5.4 6.6 9.6 13
1.9 2.5 3.2 3.8 4.5 5.7 6.9 10 13
2.7 3.8 4.9 5.9 6.9 9.0 11 16 21
3.1 4.2 5.3 6.4 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
Calculation parameters
TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2114
TC
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2114
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7392 P/TC11 7392 P/TC18 7392 P/36 7392 P/58 7393 P/TC24
6.03 4.39 1.49 1.00 2.15
0.54 0.55 0.58 0.56 0.50
0.54 0.55 0.58 0.56 0.50
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Easy removal of diffuser A tool for easy removal of the diffuser is supplied with each luminaire. Lock at the front plane between diffuser and luminaire body – remove diffuser.
307
Weather-proof recessed luminaires with prismatic PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas.
Reference 7202 PS/1x36 7212 PS/1x36
Lamps W 1x36 1x36
Module mm 312.5 300
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x291 7.0 1176x278 6.5
Reference 7202 P/36 7212 P/36
Lamps W 2x36 2x36
Module mm 312.5 300
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x291 7.3 1176x278 6.8
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Optical system PLEXIGLAS diffuser with photometrically effective prisms to direct the light primarily onto the working plane, particularly stable, diffuser fits flush in the luminaire body and is safely retained by internal spring clips. A tool for simple removal of the diffuser is sent with each luminaire. ···S··· With highly-specular, anodised reflector. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, with 4 swivel brackets for luminaire fixing. Durable sealing of ceiling void against dust and moisture by surrounding seal in luminaire rim, in ageingresistant foam rubber. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7202 P/36 E.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2115
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.25/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.5/BZ4
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
308
Page 428 444
Data table No. 2115
Metal case ceilings Angle sections based on the dimensions of longitudinal luminaires ensure the safe retention of TRILUX luminaires 72··· in those ceilings where the clamping profiles of metal cases are parallel to the luminaire front planes.
Fixing accessories for mounting in metal case ceilings 1 set (2 pieces) angle brackets, fully galvanised. 07200/36 for luminaires 7202···/36, 7202···/1x36, 7212···/36, 7212···/1x36.
Reference
Lamps W 3x18 3x18
7204 P/3x18 7214 P/3x18
Module mm 625 600
Recess opening/mm 603x603 578x578
≈kg 7.0 6.6
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 54
Data table no. 2115 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.5 3.6 4.5 5.5 6.4 8.4 10 15 19
2.9 3.9 4.9 5.9 6.9 8.8 11 16 20
4.2 5.9 7.5 9.1 11 14 17 25 32
4.8 6.5 8.1 9.9 12 15 18 26 34
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2115 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/1.5/BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7202 P/36 7202 PS/1x36 7204 P/3x18 7212 P/36 7212 PS/1x36 7214 P/3x18
1.00 1.54 1.33 0.85 1.56 1.37
0.56 0.73 0.70 0.66 0.72 0.68
0.56 0.73 0.67 0.66 0.72 0.65
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.03
Technical information see page 440.
Universally suitable for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids as well as for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. These characteristics of weather-proof luminaires enable recess mounting of the 72··· series in almost all common ceiling systems. The gasket in the surrounding luminaire rim ensures the sealing towards surrounding ceiling grids or plates.
309
Recessed clean-room luminaires with translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser
Application Damp or corrosive environments, covered exterior areas and clean rooms with increased hygienic requirements.
Reference 7202 T/36 7212 T/36
Lamps W 2x36 2x36
Module mm 312.5 300
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x291 7.3 1176x278 6.8
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Optical system Translucent PLEXIGLAS diffuser, allowing transmission of more than 80 %. Easy-toclean smooth exterior surface, particularly stable. Diffuser fits flush in the luminaire body and is safely retained by internal spring clips. A tool for simple removal of the diffuser is sent with each luminaire. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, with 4 swivel brackets for luminaire fixing. Durable sealing of ceiling void against dust and moisture by surrounding seal in luminaire rim, in ageingresistant foam rubber. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets.
T8
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ4
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7202 T/36 E.
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Recess mounting in metal case ceilings Emergency light Lamp characteristics
310
Page 308 428 444
Data table No. 2116
Translucent diffusers PLEXIGLAS with fine spherical inclusions made of other polymerised methacrylates causes light output ratios that are up to 30 % higher than those of conventional opal diffuser luminaires.
Sealing towards the ceiling void Weather-proof recessed luminaires with flush-fitted diffuser and sealing towards the ceiling void are intended for use in areas with higher air-purity requirements.
Reference
Lamps W 3x18 3xTC-L36 3x18
7204 T/3x18 7204 T/3xTC36 7214 T/3x18
Module mm 625 625 600
Recess opening/mm 603x603 603x603 578x578
≈kg 7.0 7.8 6.6
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 54
Data table no. 2116 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.2 3.0 3.8 4.7 5.4 7.1 8.6 12 16
2.5 3.3 4.2 5.1 5.9 7.5 9.1 13 17
3.6 5.1 6.4 7.8 9.0 12 14 21 27
4.2 5.6 7.0 8.5 9.8 13 15 22 28
Calculation parameters
T8 TC
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2116
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
DIN 5040: A40
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7202 T/36 7204 T/3x18 7204 T/3xTC36 7212 T/36 7214 T/3x18
1.00 1.61 0.85 1.04 1.65
0.68 0.70 0.61 0.65 0.68
0.68 0.70 0.61 0.65 0.68
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
max. 56 mm
Swivel brackets 72··· luminaires include four integrated swivel brackets allowing a rapid mounting in all usual ceiling systems, observing the degree of protection.
Exposed grids 72··· luminaires support on the grids by means of swivel brackets. The luminaires cover the half width of the grids towards the room.
max. 56 mm
Concealed grids The same luminaire fixing as for ceilings with exposed grids. The luminaires and the surrounding ceiling plates cover the grids towards the room.
max. 56 mm
Cut-out recess openings The luminaires support on the grids of the ceiling plates by means of swivel brackets. The surrounding luminaire rim covers the saw cut.
311
Recessed clean-room luminaires with specular reflector SB
Application Damp or corrosive environments and clean rooms with increased hygienic requirements, e.g. operating theatres, zones adjacent to operating theatres and intensivecare units.
Reference 7222 W-SB/36 7222 W-SB/58 7232 W-SB/36 7232 W-SB/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312,5 312,5 300 300
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x291 11.8 1526x291 15.4 1176x278 11.2 1476x278 14.8
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Optical system Luminaire cover made of highly-resistant toughened safety glass with white-coated aluminium frame. Resistant to disinfectants and intensive UV radiation. Internal spring-tensioned contact clips automatically provide earth continuity. ···SB··· With highly-specular, anodised reflectors for wideangle light distribution. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, with 4 swivel brackets for luminaire fixing. Durable sealing of ceiling void against dust and moisture by surrounding seal in luminaire rim, in ageingresistant foam rubber. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2180 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ5/0.75/BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/4/BZ3
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7222 W-SB/36 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 65, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
312
Page 428 444
Safety glass cover An efficient protection of the optical system and the lamps is ensured by the smooth, easy-to-clean cover made of toughened safety glass. This material is highly-resistant to impact and bending stress, intense UV radiation as well as to detergents used in case of wet disinfection.
Plug-in socket 545/E14 For safety lighting with luminaires 722···, 723··· (exception: 7232 RPV···), 724··· in continuous and stand-by switching, consisting of a colour-coded E14 socket for tubular incandescent lamps or compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear.
Reference
Lamps W 3x36 3x58 3x36
7224 W-SB/3x36 7224 W-SB/3x58 7234 W-SB/3x36
Module mm 625 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x603 19.5 1526x603 25.2 1176x578 18.5
652d Degree of protection
IP 65
Data table no. 2180 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.5 2.1 2.6 3.2 3.7 4.8 5.9 8.5 11
1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.0 5.1 6.2 8.9 12
2.5 3.5 4.4 5.3 6.2 8.0 9.8 14 19
2.9 3.8 4.8 5.8 6.7 8.5 10 15 19
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
Data table No. 2180
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
DIN 5040: A50
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7222 W-SB/36 7222 W-SB/58 7224 W-SB/3x36 7224 W-SB/3x58 7232 W-SB/36 7232 W-SB/58 7234 W-SB/3x36
1.46 1.00 0.93 0.63 1.51 1.03 0.95
0.67 0.63 0.71 0.67 0.65 0.61 0.69
0.67 0.63 0.71 0.67 0.65 0.61 0.69
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Metal case ceilings Angle sections based on the dimensions of longitudinal luminaires ensure the safe retention of TRILUX luminaires 72··· in those ceilings where the clamping profiles of metal cases are parallel to the luminaire front planes.
Fixing accessories for mounting in metal case ceilings 1 set (2 pieces) angle brackets. 07200/36 for luminaires 722···36, 723···36, 07200/58 for luminaires 722···58, 723···58.
313
Recessed clean-room luminaires with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Damp or corrosive environments and clean rooms with increased hygienic requirements, e.g. operating theatres, zones adjacent to operating theatres and intensivecare units. Recommended for DSE applications.
Reference 7222 W-RPV/36 7222 W-RPV/58 7232 W-RPV/36 7232 W-RPV/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58 2x36 2x58
Module mm 312.5 312.5 300 300
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 1226x291 12.2 1526x291 15.8 1176x278 11.6 1476x278 15.2
Reference 7224 W-RPV/3x18 7224 W-RPV/3xTC36 7234 W-RPV/3x18
Lamps W 3x18 3xTC-L36 3x18
Module mm 625 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening/mm 603x603 11.5 603x603 12.3 578x578 11.0
Universal luminaire system for ceilings with concealed or exposed grids and for ceilings with cut-out recess openings. Optical system Luminaire cover made of highly-resistant toughened safety glass with white-coated aluminium frame. Resistant to disinfectants and intensive UV radiation. Internal spring-tensioned contact clips automatically provide earth continuity. 4 x 18 W and 4 x 36 W versions are available upon request. Parabolic louvre RPV Internal, highly-specular. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60°. Louvre made of anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, with 4 swivel brackets for luminaire fixing. Durable sealing of ceiling void against dust and moisture by surrounding seal in luminaire rim, in ageingresistant foam rubber.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 3-pole (···/3x18) or 5-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts. Mains supply and further wiring by means of two grommets.
Data table No. 2179
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2179
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2/1.25/BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7222 W-RPV/36 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 65, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Indications Emergency light Lamp characteristics
314
Page 428 444
Luminance limitation Monitors are also used in operating theatres, wake-up zones and intensivecare units. Clean-room luminaires in RPV version offer luminance limitation at L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60°.
Geometrical arrangements Longitudinal clean-room luminaires 72··· can be installed by means of stable recess frames as non-interrupted continuous lines or rectangular and/or square configurations in gypsum plaster ceilings. Detailed description can be found in the clean-room luminaires catalogue, available upon request.
Reference
Lamps W 3x36 3x58 3x36
7224 W-RPV/3x36 7224 W-RPV/3x58 7234 W-RPV/3x36
Module mm 625 625 600
Recess ≈kg opening mm 1226x603 20.1 1526x603 26.0 1176x578 19.1
652d Degree of protection
IP 65
Data table no. 2179 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
1.5 2.2 2.8 3.4 4.0 5.3 6.4 9.4 13
1.7 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.2 5.4 6.6 9.7 13
2.5 3.6 4.6 5.6 6.6 8.8 11 16 21
2.8 3.9 4.9 6.1 7.1 9.1 11 16 21
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2179 DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7222 W-RPV/36 7222 W-RPV/58 7224 W-RPV/3x18 7224 W-RPV/3x36 7224 W-RPV/3x58 7224 W-RPV/3xTC36 7232 W-RPV/36 7232 W-RPV/58 7234 W-RPV/3x18 7234 W-RPV/3x36
1.45 1.00 2.37 0.85 0.58 1.23 1.49 1.04 2.42 0.88
0.58 0.54 0.59 0.66 0.62 0.53 0.56 0.52 0.58 0.64
0.58 0.54 0.59 0.66 0.62 0.53 0.56 0.52 0.58 0.64
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Vacuum plug 40 The vacuum plug facilitates easy removal of the glass cover for 72··· series luminaires.
315
Weather-proof downlights and covers
Application 2911··· downlights in combination with covers 02901···A suitable for use in damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Optical system Highly-specular reflector, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Reflector made of high-purity post-anodised aluminium. With smooth reflector. ···B··· With facetted specular reflector. Luminaire body Die-cast aluminium, with integrated bezel ring. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim. Ceiling recess mounting by means of integrated swivel brackets. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief system for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. Sealing and mechanical protection of the cable by means of grommets. With low-loss ballasts.
Reference Luminaire+covers* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 WA 2911/TCT26 + 02901 WA
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.0
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.0
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire+covers* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 CA 2911/TCT26 + 02901 CA
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.0
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.0
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 2911/TCT26 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54 in combination with covers, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2117
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2117
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Optical accessory 1 piece, transparent float glass, integrated in spherical bezel ring, to be fixed without tools in basic downlights 2911··· to achieve IP 54 all-round. Safe retention by means of spring catches. 02901 CA With chrome decorative bezel ring. 02901 WA With white decorative bezel ring.
Indications Page Downlights IP 20/IP 44 20 Concrete sealed housing 319 Lamp characteristics 444
316
Rapid mounting 2911 downlights are rapidly and easily set into place with swivel brackets. After this, the swivel brackets are swung out and fixed down into place by a screwdriver.
Mounting plate 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, fully galvanised, for recess mounting of downlights in system ceilings or in closed ceilings (wood, gypsum plaster, etc.) with low load-bearing capability or little impression resistance. 02900/625 for 291···, for ceilings in module 625 mm. 02900/600 for 291···, for ceilings in module 600 mm.
Reference Luminaire+covers* 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 WA 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 WA
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.0
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.0
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire+covers* 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 CA 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 CA
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.0
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.0
652d
(o
Degree of protection
* Optical accessories to be ordered separately.
IP 54
Data table no. 2117 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
5.4 7.7 9.9 12 14 19 23 34 44
6.1 8.3 11 13 15 19 24 35 46
11 15 20 24 28 37 46 67 89
12 17 21 26 30 39 47 69 91
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2117
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2117
DIN 5040: A60
DIN 5040: A60
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2911/TCD18 + 02901 CA 2911/TCD18 + 02901 WA 2911/TCT26 + 02901 CA 2911/TCT26 + 02901 WA 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 CA 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 WA 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 CA 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 WA
indirect ULOR
1.00
0.44
0.44
0.00
1.00
0.44
0.44
0.00
0.48
0.62
0.62
0.00
0.48
0.62
0.62
0.00
1.00
0.44
0.44
0.00
1.00
0.44
0.44
0.00
0.48
0.62
0.62
0.00
0.48
0.62
0.62
0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Mounting case 02900/284 1 piece, sheet steel, 1 mm, white, with press-folded sides and integrated angle brackets to be used when mounting downlights 2911··· in strip ceilings in 100 mm module with 16 mm shadow gap. Ceiling recess opening 284 x 284 mm.
317
Weather-proof downlights and Fresnel lenses
Application 2911··· downlights in combination with Fresnel lens 02901···F··· suitable for use in damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. Optical system Highly-specular reflector made of post-anodised high-purity aluminium. With smooth reflector. ···B··· With facetted specular reflector. Luminaire body Die-cast aluminium, with integrated bezel ring. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim. Ceiling recess mounting by means of integrated swivel brackets. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 5-pole plug-in connection terminal and strain relief system for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including earth connection terminal. Sealing and mechanical protection of the cable by means of grommets. With low-loss ballasts.
Reference Luminaire+Fresnel lens* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 W-FT 2911/TCT26 + 02901 W-FT 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 W-FT 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 W-FT
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire+Fresnel lens* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 C-FT 2911/TCT26 + 02901 C-FT 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 C-FT 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 C-FT
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 2911/TCT26 E. Thanks to limited surface temperatures and IP 54 in combination with Fresnel lenses, versions ···E are suitable for production sites subject to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2118
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2118
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1/4/BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ1/4/BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Fresnel lens accessories 1 piece, made of silicate glass, integrated into spherical decorative bezel ring, white (···W···) or chrome (···C···). To be fixed without tools in downlights 2911··· to achieve IP 54 all-round. Safe retention by means of spring catches. 02901···FT transparent, to intensify the narrow-angle distribution effect. 02901···FS frosted, for optical accentuation of the downlight with additional light scattering effect. Indications Downlights IP 20/IP 44 Mounting plates Mounting cases Lamp characteristics
318
Page 20 316 317 444
Fresnel lenses Four versions are available. The transparent versions intensify the narrow-angle effect of the reflector, the frosted versions on the other hand accentuate the 2911 downlights with an additional light scattering effect. The lenses are optionally available in combination with white or chrome decorative bezel rings.
IP 54 all-round The fully closed luminaire body made of corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminium offers protection against the ingression of dust and humidity in the ceiling void. IP 54 all-round is assured thanks to Fresnel lenses or transparent float glass covers (see page 316).
Reference Luminaire+Fresnel lens* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 W-FS 2911/TCT26 + 02901 W-FS 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 W-FS 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 W-FS
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire+Fresnel lens* 2911/TCD18 + 02901 C-FS 2911/TCT26 + 02901 C-FS 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 C-FS 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 C-FS
Lamps/socket W
Recess ≈kg opening/mm
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
1xTC-D18/G24d-2
224
2.5
1xTC-T26/GX24d-3 224
3.6
652d
(o
Degree of protection
* Fresnel lens accessories to be ordered separately.
IP 54
Data table no. 2118 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
100 lx 200 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
6.7 9.4 12 15 17 22 27 40 52
7.6 10 13 16 18 24 29 41 54
13 19 24 29 34 45 54 79 104
15 21 26 32 37 47 57 83 108
Calculation parameters
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2118
TC-D(EL) TC-T(EL)
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2118
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
Sealed housing 02900/150 1 piece, sheet steel, fully galvanised, with two connection openings ¶ 37 mm as well as four fixing brackets, to be fixed on the panel with nails. Total height 150 mm. For recess mounting of downlights 2911···.
Dry environments In case of IP 20/ IP 44 applications, 290··· series TRILUX downlights offer an excellent all-round package and convince with specific characteristics such as versatile decorative accessories and particularly high-quality materials. Description from page 16 on.
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
2911/TCD18 + 02901 ···FS 2911/TCD18 + 02901 ···FT 2911/TCT26 + 02901 ···FS 2911/TCT26 + 02901 ···FT 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 ···FS 2911 B/TCD18 + 02901 ···FT 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 ···FS 2911 B/TCT26 + 02901 ···FT
indirect ULOR
1.00
0.39
0.39
0.00
0.90
0.43
0.43
0.00
0.49
0.53
0.53
0.00
0.45
0.58
0.58
0.00
1.00
0.39
0.39
0.00
0.90
0.43
0.43
0.00
0.49
0.53
0.53
0.00
0.45
0.58
0.58
0.00
Technical information see page 440.
319
Sports hall luminaires
Luminaires for sports halls must be resistant to ball impact. All TRILUX sports hall luminaires are therefore tested using our facilities simulating ball impact. Surface-mounted sports hall luminaires are also available in versions for T5 lamps in 80 W. These lumen-rich systems are especially recommended for sports facilities where increased illuminance values are required in conformance with the new harmonised standard EN 12193.
RWS Stable louvre made of sheet steel with integrated strengthening rods and highly-reflective white coating. A uniform light distribution and high working efficiencies are the photometric characteristics.
Page 322/326
320
RST Post-anodised specular louvre RST with graduated concaveprofiled cross blades for a narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Strengthening rods cause higher mechanical stability and prevent tennis balls from getting stuck in the louvre cells. Page 322/326
PSN Ball-impact-resistant prismatic cover, safely retained in aluminium frame, creates application-oriented, narrow/ wide-angle light distributions, effectively supported by internal, highly-specular reflectors.
Page 324/326
WINLIGHT Q The compact industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q for highpressure lamps embody a lighting alternative to systems for fluorescent lamps. Resistant to ball impact when combined with covers. Description in the section “Industrial luminaires”.
Floodlights The catalogue “Floodlights for sports and working facilities, traffic installations and accentuation lighting” contains clearly arranged product information.
LIGHTGATE Intelligent lighting management reduces energy consumption in sports halls thanks to daylight-dependent regulation and presence detection.
Catalogue available upon request.
Catalogue available upon request.
Page 422
321
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact, with white louvre RWS or specular cross-blade louvre RST Application Ball-impact-resistant luminaires for sports halls, tennis halls and multi-purpose halls.
Reference
Lamps W 5062 RWS/58 2x58 5062 RWS/80 E 2x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 150 349 600 75 13.7 1200 174 150 349 600 75 11.8
Reference
Lamps W 5063 RWS/58 3x58 5063 RWS/80 E 3x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 280 349 600 210 18.2 1200 174 280 349 600 210 15.1
Optical system Direct. ···RWS··· Louvre made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, for a uniform light distribution. ···RST··· Specular louvre with graduated, concave-profiled cross blades, made of post-anodised aluminium, oxide film thickness ≥ 8 µm, no disturbing iridescence phenomena, insensitive to soiling, long-time stable reflection characteristics. Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. With frontplane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. ···/58 with low-loss ballasts, ···/80 E with electronic control gear (E).
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Luminaires ···/58 can also be supplied with non-dimmable or ···/58, ···/80 luminaires also with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E for nondimmable electronic control gear or ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5063 RST/80 ED.
Indications Through-wiring set Trunking Planning suggestions Emergency light Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
322
Page 328 328 329 428 431 444
T5 fluorescent lamps Increased lighting requirements for many sports disciplines have to be met according to the new standard EN 12193. In most of these cases T5 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version are recommended.
Data table No. 2119
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2119
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reference 5062 RST/58 5062 RST/80 E
Lamps W 2x58 2x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 150 349 600 75 12.3 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.4
Reference 5063 RST/58 5063 RST/80 E
Lamps W 3x58 3x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 280 349 600 210 17.0 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.9
652de Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2119 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 5.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 7.0 m
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
14 25 36 48 58 69 80 90 100
15 27 38 49 60 70 82 93 103
23 42 60 79 97 115 133 150 167
25 45 64 82 100 117 137 155 172
Calculation parameters
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2119
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2119
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.00 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 0.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5062 RST/58 5062 RST/80 E 5062 RWS/58 5062 RWS/80 E 5063 RST/58 5063 RST/80 E 5063 RWS/58 5063 RWS/80 E
1.00 0.87 0.91 0.73 0.69 0.57 0.60 0.49
0.61 0.59 0.70 0.70 0.61 0.60 0.70 0.70
0.61 0.59 0.70 0.70 0.61 0.60 0.70 0.70
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Luminaire alignment Very good visual conditions are achieved when sports hall luminaires are turned around their longitudinal axis in the direction of the court. These turning angles can be easily realised by means of angle sections.
323
Surface-mounted luminaires, resistant to ball impact, with prismatic cover PSN
Application Ball-impact-resistant luminaires for sports halls, tennis halls, squash halls and multipurpose halls. Optical system Direct. ···PSN··· PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover with photometrically effective prisms, retained in aluminium frame which can be hung for maintenance purposes. With highly-specular, anodised reflectors for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. With frontplane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. ···/58 with low-loss ballasts, ···/80 E with electronic control gear (E). Luminaires ···/58 can also be supplied with non-dimmable or ···/58, ···/80 also with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable electronic control gear or ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 5063 PSN/58 ED.
Indications Through-wiring set Trunking Planning suggestions Emergency light Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
324
Page 328 328 329 428 431 444
T5 fluorescent lamps Increased lighting requirements for many sports disciplines have to be met according to the new standard EN 12193. In most of these cases T5 fluorescent lamps in lumen-rich version are recommended.
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
Reference 5062 PSN/58 5062 PSN/80 E
Lamps W 2x58 2x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 150 349 600 75 11.9 1200 174 150 349 600 75 10.1
Reference 5063 PSN/58 5063 PSN/80 E
Lamps W 3x58 3x80
D D1 D2 D3 D4 E1 ≈kg mm 1200 174 280 349 600 210 16.5 1200 174 280 349 600 210 13.4
652de Degree of protection
IP 40
Data table no. 2120 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 5.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 7.0 m
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
16 28 39 51 63 74 85 96 107
17 30 42 54 65 76 89 100 111
26 46 66 86 104 124 142 161 179
29 50 70 89 109 127 149 167 186
Calculation parameters
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2120
T5 T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2120
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.00 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 0.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
5062 PSN/58 5062 PSN/80 E 5063 PSN/58 5063 PSN/80 E
1.00 0.81 0.66 0.54
0.61 0.61 0.62 0.61
0.61 0.61 0.62 0.61
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Ball-impact-resistant prismatic covers unite high mechanical safety and application-optimised photometrics. In combination with internal reflector systems they create the conditions for good glare-limitation and high efficiency.
Squash halls Sports hall luminaires with PLEXIGLAS covers have proved suitable for use in squash courts. The prismatic cover with its impact-absorbing mounting reliably withstands all contacts with balls.
325
Recessed luminaires, resistant to ball impact, with white louvre RWS, specular cross-blade louvre RST or with prismatic cover PSN Application Sports halls and multipurpose halls. PSN: also for squash halls
Reference
Lamps W 2x58
3662 RWS/58
Recess opening/mm 1540x291
≈kg 11.5
Reference
Lamps W 2x58
3662 RST/58
Recess opening/mm 1540x291
≈kg 11.4
Optical system ···RWS··· Louvre made of solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white, for a uniform light distribution. ···RST··· Specular louvre with graduated, concave-profiled cross blades, made of post-anodised aluminium, oxide film thickness ≥ 8 µm, no disturbing iridescence phenomena, insensitive to soiling, long-time stable reflection characteristics. Louvre retention by means of springtensioned clips providing earth continuity. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools. ···PSN··· PLEXIGLAS prismatic cover with photometrically effective prisms, retained in aluminium frame which can be hung for maintenance purposes. With highly-specular, anodised reflectors for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. Luminaire body Solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. With frontplane knock-out openings for heat-resistant throughwiring.
T8
C 0 - C 180
Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 4-pole plug-in connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. With low-loss ballasts.
Data table No. 2121
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2121
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2/1.5/BZ3/2/BZ2/2.5
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
Luminaires can also be supplied with non-dimmable or with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E for non-dimmable electronic control gear or ···ED for dimmable electronic control gear, e.g. 3662 RST/58 ED. Recessed sports hall luminaires for T5 lamps 80 W available upon request. Indications Through-wiring set Planning suggestions Emergency light Lighting management system Lamp characteristics
326
Page 328 329 428 431 444
Ball impact resistance High stability is required in sports halls. TRILUX sports hall luminaires are resistant to ball impact and are accordingly labelled.
Spring-tensioned contact clips This tried-and-tested TRILUX security lock minimises mounting and maintenance costs and automatically provides earth continuity. The louvres of luminaires resistant to ball impact are extra secured against falling down by means of pivotable locking latches.
Reference
Lamps W 3x58
3663 RST/58
Recess opening/mm 1540x428
≈kg 16.4
Reference
Lamps W 2x58 3x58
3762 PSN/58 3763 PSN/58
Recess opening/mm 1540x291 1540x428
≈kg 11.4 16.3
652de RWS, RST: Degree of protection PSN: Degree of protection
IP 20 IP 40
Data table no. 2121 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 5.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 7.0 m
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
15 26 38 49 60 72 83 94 104
16 28 40 51 62 73 86 97 108
24 44 63 82 101 120 138 156 174
26 47 66 85 104 122 143 161 180
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2121
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2121
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ1
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.00 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 0.6 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
3662 RST/58 3662 RWS/58 3663 RST/58 3762 PSN/58 3763 PSN/58
1.00 0.87 0.67 0.99 0.66
0.61 0.70 0.61 0.62 0.62
0.61 0.70 0.61 0.62 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Universal plug-in socket 545/E14 The universal plug-in socket 545/E14 for incandescent lamps and compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear also enables retrofitting of individual louvre luminaires into combined emergency luminaires. The system can be attached at the front planes of the lateral reflectors.
Twin-lamp version Ball-impact-resistant twin-lamp luminaires create the best conditions for a uniform light distribution and cost-minimised operation, preferably if illuminances of up to 300 lx are required.
327
Trunking 110N for sports and tennis halls
Trunking mounting In sports or tennis halls it is often not possible or not advisable to install the surface luminaires directly to the ceiling of the hall. This is the case when a continuous mounting surface for continuous lines is not given because of ceiling joists or sky lights or when a luminaire arrangement directed towards the court offers photometric advantages, especially in tennis halls. In these cases, the mounting of the luminaires as noninterrupted or interrupted continuous line to trunkings is recommended. TRILUX sports hall luminaires of the 506··· series are therefore connected to the angle sections 110N. Even with this mounting type they are tested on ball impact resistance.
112
111 110N/155 110N/310 113N
Reference 110N/155 110N/310 111 112 113N
Designation 1 pair of angle sections for one luminaire length 58 W or 80 W 1 pair of angle sections for two luminaire lengths 58 W or 80 W Angle section suspensions, 1 set per luminaire length Link chain G 3.5 x 18, welded and galvanised 1 pair of angle section couplings
L x W x H mm 1550 x 35 x 35 3100 x 35 x 35 – by the metre –
≈ kg 4.0 8.0 0.2 0.2 0.7
Suspension spacings in accordance with the draft opposite are to be observed. Fixing accessories provided on site (dowels, screws) must be capable of supporting five times the weight of the luminaires to be mounted on them, at least 125 kg.
Angle sections 110N/··· 1 pair, perforated, sendzimir-galvanised. 110N/155 one length, 1550 mm long. 110N/310 two lengths, 3100 mm long. Use of two-length trunkings for continuous-line mounting is recommended, one-length trunkings serve as completion. Angle section suspensions 111 1 set, consisting of mounting plate with openable chain link, bottle-screw with locking wire for 40 mm height adjustment, openable chain link, fast-locking chain link, galvanised chain and fixing pieces.
Link chain 112 Supplied by the metre, welded and galvanised. Necessary total length to be ordered by the metre. Angle section coupling 113N 1 pair, including fixing components. Counter-balance weight (not illustrated) 1 piece, necessary for the following luminaires when mounted to trunkings 110N/···. 05063 A/58 for luminaires 5063···/58 with low-loss ballasts. 05081 AE for luminaires 5063···/58 E with electronic control gear.
Number and arrangement of the chain links for inclined suspension Angle for luminaires 5062 RWS/··· 5063 RWS/··· No. of 5062 RST/··· 5063 RST/··· chain 5062 PSN/··· 5063 PSN/··· links
¬ 0° 15° 30°
A 13 12 10
B 13 14 16
A 13 11 9
B 13 15 17
total 27 27 27
Through-wiring sets Heat-resistant, colour-coded individual wires 1.5 mm2. ···3LV··· 3-conductor through-wiring ···5LV··· 5-conductor through-wiring Reference for luminaires 3700/3LV/58 ···58, ···80 3700/5LV/58 ···58, ···80 07690/5LV/25m
328
Length 1750 mm 1750 mm 25 m
Lighting of sports halls
Lighting class I
Selection of lighting classes
Lighting class II
Lighting class III
EN 12193 The European lighting standard EN 12193, published in November 1999, deals with interior and exterior sports facilities and aims at good visual conditions for sportsmen, arbitrators and the public. The standard also describes special requirements for film and television recordings. The requirements specific for the different sports disciplines depend upon the lighting class which considers the competitive level and the observance distance for the public: Lighting class I: High-performance competitions such as international and national matches are generally characterised by a lot of visitors and high visual distances. This class can also include high-performance training.
Competitive level Regional Local Training School/leisure sports Minimum requirements for the lighting of sports halls
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
International/national
• •
•
•
•
•
•
• •
Horizontal illuminances, uniformity and colour rendering
Horizontal illuminances, uniformity and colour rendering
Horizontal illuminances, uniformity and colour rendering
Eav 1)lx
Eav1)lx
Emin/Eav1) Ra
Eav1)lx
Emin/Eav1) Ra
0.7
300
0.7
Emin/Eav1) Ra
Badminton Ice hockey/figure skating 2) Fencing Hockey Squash Table tennis
750
Basketball Indoor soccer (small field) Weight-lifting Handball Judo, kendo, karate Indoor cycle racing Wrestling School sports Volleyball /fist ball
750
Aerobics/dancing Speed ice-scating Climbing Climbing (on a climbing wall) Track-and-field sports Horseback riding Sports gymnastics Roller skating Gymnastics
500
0.7
60
300
0.6
60
200
0.5
20
Tennis 3)
750
0.7
60
500
0.7
60
300
0.5
20
Archery Bowling Shooting
200
0.5
60
200
0.5
60
200
0.5
60
Boccie Boule Pétanque
300
0.7
60
200
0.7
60
200
0.5
20
Bowls (short course)
500
0.8
60
500
0.8
60
300
0.5
20
Boxing: ring training area
2000 300
0.8 –
80 80
1000 300
0.8 –
80 80
500 300
0.5 –
60 60
300 200
0.7 0.7
60 60
300 200
0.7 0.7
60 60
300 200
0.7 0.7
60 60
Curling: house rink
0.7
0.7
60
60
500
500
0.7
60
60
200
0.5
Lighting class II: Competitions on a medium level such as regional or local matches are generally characterised by a medium amount of visitors and medium visual distances. This class can also include high-performance training.
20
Lighting class III: Simple competitions such as local or small associations matches are generally played without public. This class also includes general training, general school and leisure sports.
20
The requirements as to horizontal illuminance, uniformity and colour rendering, described in the table opposite, refer to sports disciplines in indoor sports facilities without film or television recording.
1)
In EN 12193 the medium illuminance is indicated with Eav.
2)
For light point height under 8 m Emin/Emax ≥ 0.5, for class III also ≤ 0.5 is possible.
3)
No luminaires over the pitch and up to 3 m behind the base-line.
329
L
wb11 w ⁄ W B W
b22 11/2 B 2
H
Planning examples for the lighting of sports halls
Planning examples The dimensions of sports halls are widely standardised. For common single sports halls (left table) or triple sports halls (right table) installation examples for the illuminance levels 750 lx, 500 lx and 300 lx are listed in the table below.
Planning parameters The calculations originate from following marginal conditions:
Final intensification If necessary, the lighting uniformity at the front planes of the hall can also be increased by additional luminaires between the continuous lines.
Evaluation zone for the calculations in the tables below is the standardised volleyball field (24 x 15 m) in the single hall or the standardised handball field (40 x 20 m) in the triple hall.
Working plane: 0m Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3 Light loss factor: 0.8 Luminous flux (58 W) 5000 lm Luminous flux (80 W) 6150 lm
Arrangement Sports hall luminaires should preferably be installed in continuous lines, parallel to the longer sides of the hall. In the planning tables below, w1 stands for the distance of the first continuous line to the nearest wall, w2 for the distance dimension of the second continuous line, see draft opposite. In case of an uneven number of continuous lines, one continuous line is installed in the middle of the hall.
Optical systems RWS Solid louvre made of sheet steel with highly-reflective powder-coating. RST Post-anodised aluminium louvre for narrow/wide-angle light distribution, insensitive to soiling. PSN Prismatic cover, resistant to ball impact, also to small balls with higher kinetic energy, e.g. squash balls.
If halls can be split up it can be mostly assumed that single parts of the hall are classified as lighting class III but the total hall on the other hand as lighting class I or II.
Single sports halls L x W x H: 27.0 x 15.0 x 5.5 m Louvre version/ luminaire cover
Planning results
Reference
750 lx
T8
5062 RWS/58 3662 RWS/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 RWS/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 RWS/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 RWS/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5062 RST/58 3662 RST/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 RST/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 RST/58 3663 RST/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 RST/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5062 PSN/58 3762 PSN/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 PSN/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 PSN/58 3763 PSN/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 PSN/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲
330
Lamp type
500 lx
300 lx
3 x 13 = 39 501 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 8 = 24 300 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 11 = 33 508 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 7 = 21 315 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 14 = 42 770 lx w1 = 1.8
3 x 9 = 27 505 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 6 = 18 335 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 11 = 33 751 lx w1 = 1.8
3 x 8 = 24 532 lx w1 = 1.5
3 x 5 = 15 333 lx w1 = 1.5
3 x 15 = 45 517 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 9 = 27 311 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 12 = 36 504 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 8 = 24 329 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 15 = 45 771 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 10 = 30 515 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 6 = 18 310 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 12 = 36 753 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 8 = 24 503 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 5 = 15 313 lx w1 = 2.1
3 x 15 = 45 501 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 10 = 30 326 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 12 = 36 501 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 8 = 24 325 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 15 = 45 751 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 10 = 30 507 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 6 = 18 302 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 12 = 36 739 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 8 = 24 502 lx w1 = 2.2
3 x 5 = 15 307 lx w1 = 2.2
Multiple contact switching Triple-lamp TRILUX sports hall luminaires with low-loss ballasts and electronic control gear can be connected in series. The lighting level e.g. in 750 lx installations can thus be reduced to 500 lx. Twin-lamp luminaires can be connected in series in combination with inductive ballasts. This is not possible for standard twin-lamp luminaires with electronic control gear because twin-lamp electronic control gear is used.
Lighting management Further possibilities for lighting control and regulation arise in combination with the energy-saving lighting management system LIGHTGATE, see page 431. The system version LIGHTGATE LG 31···, which is adjustable to the three set values 750 lx, 500 lx and 300 lx typical for sports halls, saves energy by considering the sensored daylight component.
LIGHTGATE controllers are usually installed in subvisions outside the luminaires. The sensors are also installed outside the luminaires or in the sports hall ceiling in combination with ball impact protection covers. A further requirement are dimmable luminaires. All TRILUX sports hall luminaires are available with dimmable electronic control gear, reference suffix ···ED.
Lamp type
This demand is met by all TRILUX sports hall luminaires mounted in or to solid ceilings or substructures as well as for suspended mounting using the appropriate trunkings 110N, see page 328.
Ball impact resistance test Sports hall luminaires must be resistant to ball impact and are therefore tested using our facilities simulating ball impact. After 36 shots with impact speeds of 54 km/h or around 35 mph the luminaires must not show sign of severe damage or have lost luminaire components. Furthermore, while lamp failure is permissible, lamp fracture is naturally prohibited.
Further saving potential results from presence detection, another function of the LIGHTGATE system.
Triple sports halls L x W x H: 45.0 x 27.0 x 7.0 m Louvre version/ luminaire cover
Ball impact resistance Sports halls do not only require photometric but also mechanical quality. Luminaires for sports halls must be resistant to ball impact.
Planning results
Reference
750 lx
5062 RWS/58 3662 RWS/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 RWS/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 RWS/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 RWS/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5062 RST/58 3662 RST/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 RST/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 RST/58 3663 RST/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 RST/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5062 PSN/58 3762 PSN/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5062 PSN/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T8
5063 PSN/58 3763 PSN/58
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
T5
5063 PSN/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement w1 /w2
▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲
T8
500 lx
300 lx
5 x 24 = 120 542 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
4 x 18 = 72 314 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
5 x 27 = 135 753 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
4 x 24 = 96 524 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
4 x 15 = 60 326 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
5 x 24 = 120 814 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 7.2
4 x 21 = 84 549 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
4 x 12 = 48 314 lx w1 = 1.8 w2 = 9.5
5 x 18 = 90 777 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
4 x 15 = 60 509 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 9 = 36 306 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5 x 24 = 120 510 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
4 x 21 = 84 338 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 27 = 108 524 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 15 = 60 301 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5 x 24 = 120 766 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
4 x 21 = 84 508 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 15 = 60 362 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5 x 21 = 105 806 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
4 x 18 = 72 528 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 12 = 48 352 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5 x 24 = 120 503 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 21 = 84 330 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 27 = 108 523 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 18 = 72 347 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
5 x 24 = 120 757 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 7.9
4 x 21 = 84 504 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 12 = 48 301 lx w1 = 2.6 w2 = 9.5
4 x 27 = 108 785 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 18 = 72 521 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
4 x 12 = 48 347 lx w1 = 2.3 w2 = 9.5
331
Planning examples for the lighting of tennis halls
Standard demands EN 12193 defines the reference area for indoor tennis as an area with the dimensions 36 m x 18 m for each court. For the lighting classes I /II /III, illuminance levels of 750 lx/500 lx/ 300 lx with a uniformity of 0.7 (class I, II) or 0.5 (class III) are required there. Arrangement Luminaires in tennis halls must be arranged as continuous lines, both parallel to the side lines (outside of the court) as well as parallel to the ceiling, for adequate lighting of balls that are served high. The luminaires must be mounted along their main axis, tilted at angle ¬ to the court.
Luminaires for tennis halls Due to the diameter of tennis balls at 63.5 to 66 mm, the spacing between cross blades of louvre luminaires for tennis halls has to be appropriately reduced, this being 60 mm maximum in the case of TRILUX louvre luminaires for sports halls. This means that all TRILUX louvre luminaires for sports halls can be used for tennis halls. Planning examples The planning examples below were developed for halls with two courts. The indicated photometric values can be used as approximate values for tennis halls with other dimensions.
The luminaires are arranged parallel to the ceiling, tilted at angle ¬ = 30° to the court.
three luminaires at a light point height of 5.0 m with a distance of approx. 3.40 m to the base-line.
Planning parameters The calculations are based on the following assumptions: Working plane: 0m Reflect. values: 0.5/0.5/0.3 Light loss factor: 0.8
A uniform light distribution across the playing area is achieved by arranging two or
S
5,0
H1 3,2 8,6
12,4
23,77 4,2
36,6
36,6
12,4
Maßangaben Dimensions in m Dachneigung Ceiling inclination fl = 15° Lichtband-Drehwinkel = 30° Continuous-line angle of tilt ¬
3,2
Tennis halls with 2 courts L x W: 36.6 x 36.6 m 1) Louvre version/ luminaire cover
5062 RST/80 E
T8
5063 RST/58 3663 RST/58
T5
5063 RST/80 E
T8
5062 PSN/58 3762 PSN/58
T5
5062 PSN/80 E
T8
5063 PSN/58 3763 PSN/58
T5
5063 PSN/80 E
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
8 x 9 + 4 x 2 = 80 326 lx H1 = 4.9 m S = 7.7 m 8 x 12 + 4 x 3 = 108 500 lx H1 = 4.55 m S = 1.7 m 8 x 10 + 4 x 2 = 88 517 lx H1 = 4.8 m S = 5.7 m 8 x 12 + 4 x 3 = 108 762 lx H1 = 4.9 m S = 10.7 m 8 x 9 + 4 x 2 = 80 307 lx H1 = 4.9 m S = 7.7 m 8 x 12 + 4 x 4 = 112 508 lx H1 = 4.55 m S = 1.7 m 8 x 10 + 4 x 2 = 88 502 lx H1 = 4.8 m S = 5.7 m
▲▲
T5
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
▲▲
5062 RST/58 3662 RST/58
8 x 11 + 4 x 2 = 96 755 lx H1 = 4.6 m S = 3.7 m
▲▲
T8
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
▲▲
5063 RWS/80 E
8 x 9 + 4 x 2 = 80 528 lx H1 = 4.9 m S = 7.7 m
▲▲
T5
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
▲▲
5063 RWS/58
8 x 11 + 4 x 2 = 96 502 lx H1 = 4.6 m S = 3.7 m
▲▲
T8
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
300 lx 8 x 8 + 4 x 2 = 72 318 lx H1 = 4.9 m S = 10.7 m
▲▲
5062 RWS/80 E
▲▲
T5
No. of luminaires Illuminance Eav Luminaire arrangement H1/S
500 lx
▲▲
5062 RWS/58 3662 RWS/58
750 lx
▲▲
T8
Dimensions single court L x W: 23.77 x 10.97 m
332
Planning results
Reference
▲▲
1)
Lamp type
8 x 12 + 4 x 4 = 112 759 lx H1 = 4.6 m S = 1.7 m
Indoor sports disciplines with special lighting requirements
Due to their extensive diversity, many sports activities are not possible without artificial lighting. Depending on the sports discipline totally different visual tasks and conditions have to be observed, thus resulting in sports-type-specific lighting requirements, e.g. as defined by the recent standard EN 12193. Moreover, various other recommendations might have to be observed, e.g. those of the UEFA, the FIFA and other sports organisations. Also the partly special ambient conditions determine the luminaire selection. In addition to the luminaire systems resistant to ball impact described in the section for sports halls, luminaires from different product groups are recommended for some kinds of sports disciplines as well.
Luminaires for special indoor sports disciplines Sports disciplines
Product group/series
Remarks
Badminton
260
268
396
Bowling Archery Shooting
Batten luminaires for cove lighting. Additional covers might be required for diffuser and louvre luminaires. 152
260
These TRILUX luminaire series are listed in the table opposite with direct reference to the specific sports discipline. They are documented on the indicated pages in this catalogue or in the exterior lighting catalogue 99/12 “Floodlights for sports and working facilities, traffic installations and accentuation lighting”.
420
Boxing (ring)
TRILUX floodlights MAXILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
8 Ice hockey Ice figure skating Speed ice-skating Roller-skating 286
11
15
Gymnastics
Weather-proof luminaires for fluorescent lamps are recommended for halls with ceiling heights of up to approx. 7 m. TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12. Sports hall luminaires resistant to ball impact, see page 320.
152
260
Indoor cycling
TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12.
11
15
Horseback riding
In case of ammonia atmospheres, please contact your local TRILUX support centre. TRILUX floodlights RECTALUX and OPTILUX, see catalogue 99/12. 286
11
15
Schwimming
Increased number of lamps/luminaires might be necessary in the diving area. In case of corrosive atmospheres, please contact your local TRILUX support centre. 286
284
422
Numbers in the illustrations refer to the corresponding pages in the catalogue or in brochures.
333
Continuous-line luminaires, batten luminaires, WINLIGHT Q
TRILUX industrial systems and individual luminaires – characterised by rapid and easy installation – create the best conditions for demandoriented, economic lighting. Depending on the equipment level, these luminaires are suitable for use in different areas such as simple storage facilities, high halls or for precision mounting with sophisticated visual tasks.
DELTA The “rapid-mounting continuous-line system DELTA” for T5 and T8 lamps is based on reflector profiles with integrated trunking function. DELTA is also predestined for architecture-oriented applications thanks to its modern design concept. Page 336
334
E-LINE The modular rapid-mounting continuous-line system consists of individual components suitable for functionand task-oriented combination. Four different reflector types and versatile optical accessories offer an extensive planning scope.
796··· The solid, rapid-mounting continuous-line system 796··· with covers in chemicallyresistant silicate glass is predestined for workplaces with an increased degree of pollution. 3-lamp versions with specular reflectors are available for increased light requirements.
1615···, 6141··· Individual batten luminaires are used in areas with uncomplicated visual tasks. Battens can be arranged as totally conform reflector luminaires by means of optionally available accessories.
WINLIGHT Q High lumen packages characterise 798··· industrial luminaires. Recommended for the lighting of higher halls and covered exterior areas. Symmetrical or asymmetrical optics enable demand-oriented lighting.
Page 368
Page 414
Page 418
Page 422
Floodlights TRILUX offers a comprehensive range of floodlights for sports and working facilities, traffic installations and accentuation lighting. Detailed planning and product information are featured in the corresponding catalogues which are available upon request.
335
The concept for an attractive continuous-line design
Design perspectives DELTA embodies a futuristic construction principle within the sector of rapid-mounting continuous-line systems: cross-section-optimised, extremely stable base units – specially conceived for T5 fluorescent lamps with a diameter of only 16 mm – form a unit taking over the function of conventional trunkings and reflectors. This construction principle creates the conditions for a modern design concept. DELTA differs greatly from the comparatively voluminous rapid-mounting, continuousline systems in conventional shape. Beyond the traditional application ranges for continuous lines, DELTA is predestined for areas where increased demands are placed on the architectural aspect of a lighting installation.
Uniform reflector cross-section All gear trays of the DELTA range are inserted into a uniform base profile. The slender design of the lighting installation is thus always assured, independent of the photometrical demands. For example, if different illuminances are required in various zones and the installation must, in consequence, include single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays.
336
DELTA variety DELTA is available in three basic versions: versions with reflectors for direct light distribution and those with a decorative indirect component cover the whole application range of conventional continuous-line systems. These systems – optionally equipped with louvres – can also be used as continuous lines or geometrical arrangements in architecture-oriented areas. Rooms with increased risk of pollution are however predestined applications for DELTA base units with silicate glass covers.
337
DELTA – a truly rapid-mounting continuous-line system
1st suspension point
Continuous-line length/m 0
Time is money In practical terms, the mounting costs of continuous lines are essentially determined by the number of fixing points required. As far as continuous lines are concerned, dimensional stability is a condition for increased suspension distances and thus offers a successful way to reduce the installation expenditure. The advantageous DELTA construction principle opens new horizons. The crosssection-optimised base profiles – as a unit of trunking and reflector – convince with extreme bending rigidity. The benefit in money’s worth: as opposed to conventional rapid-mounting luminaires, the number of necessary fixing points is considerably reduced thanks to increased suspension distances of up to 4500 mm.
338
1.54
Tool-free attachment DELTA base units are suspended from the ceiling by means of wires or chains. The stainless steel clips of these fixing accessories are attached without using tools. Maximum suspension distances can be achieved by fixing the suspension accessories always directly above the joint of the base units.
Integrated reflectors Reflectors form an integral element of the DELTA base units. No more need to unpack the reflectors, transport them to the site and to connect them to the conventional trunkings. The attachment of junction connectors is reduced to the transitions between the 2- or 3-length base units.
max. 4.50 m 2nd suspension point
3.07
4.60
Plug connections between throughwirings and gear trays Modern connector technology guarantees tool-free rapid electrical connection of gear trays with the through-wiring in the base units. Slide contacts of the male connector on the gear tray allow tool-free selection of the desired phase conductor and therewith the easy allocation of the respective gear tray to the desired switching group.
Plug connections for through-wirings Standard connectors and sockets at the ends of pre-mounted 5- or 7-conductor through-wirings guarantee a time-saving electrical connection of DELTA base units.
A minimum of fixing points ... ... realised with DELTA luminaires with integrated base profile. For example: a 12-length DELTA continuous line with a length of 18.38 m – consisting of four 3-length base units – only needs 5 fixing points. The suspension clamps of the suspension accessories are positioned above the joints of the base units. Easy-to-handle auxiliary suspensions ease the luminaire weight during the mounting work at the joints.
A 7-pole mains cable can equally be connected to the socket of the connector.
339
DELTA equipment variety for optimised lighting planning and flexibility towards future lighting requirements Production hall DELTA for optimised plannings Lighting plannings including continuous-line systems are not routinely solved. From time to time room geometries and illuminance requirements can change considerably. This calls for varied plannings. A lighting system with today’s required deployment can only meet the respective individual case if situationoriented lumen packages are available. DELTA offers this desirable variety in form of singleand twin-lamp gear trays for tried-and-tested T8 lamps as well as for innovative T5 lamps in efficient and lumen-rich versions. The spectrum of corresponding lumen packages ranges in six levels from 3 300 lm up to 12 300 lm.
DELTA – flexible when it comes to future lighting requirements Today, variable use of rooms is not only typical for production sites where certain areas are used varyingly as warehouse, transport zone or production area with the most different visual tasks. The same goes for handicraft enterprises, schools and sales areas. DELTA embodies a flexible lighting system allowing a wide range of utilisation changes since complicated reinstallations are not necessary. The tool-free exchange of gear trays allows illuminance values to be adapted to the current visual tasks without further installation work.
.48
m
47
0m
2.5
.0
10
m
.0
10
m 0m
2.5
Planning data Production hall Reflectance values Height of the working plane Height of the luminaire plane Light loss factor
Length x width x height Ceiling/walls/floor
m % m m v
50 x 25 x 7 50/50/20 0.85 6.00 0.80
lx
300
lx
7601N/80 E 309 0.69
Nominal illuminance
lx
500
Reference Illuminance Uniformity g1
lx
7602N/80 E 568 0.67
Lighting requirements ▲
Normal mounting work Nominal illuminance Lighting installation 3 non-interrupted continuous lines, each with 31 lamp lengths, each equipped with 31 gear trays 1 x 80 W Reference Calculation result Illuminance Uniformity g1
T8 1x 58 W 2 x 58 W
T5 1x 35 W 2 x 35 W
T5 1x 80 W 2 x 80 W
Lamp 1 x 58 W/T8/¶ 26 mm 2 x 58 W/T8/¶ 26 mm 1 x 35 W/T5/¶ 16 mm 2 x 35 W/T5/¶ 16 mm 1 x 80 W/T5/¶ 16 mm 2 x 80 W/T5/¶ 16 mm
340
Luminous flux 5 000 lm 10 000 lm 3 300 lm 6 600 lm 6 150 lm 12 300 lm
Easy conversion for modified production e.g. precision mounting Solution Conversion to gear tray 2 x 80 W Calculation result
▲
One base unit – six lumen packages DELTA base profiles can be optionally equipped with one of six gear trays.
Additional requirements
Sales area
Classroom
3.2 0 8.3
m
7.6
3
0m
3.0
4m
7m
5m
1.1
m .50
5
0 5.5
0m
2.4
m
0m
2.4
0m
5.5
0 5.5
5m
1.1
m 0m
3.0
Planning data
Planning data
Sales area Cash register zone Reflectance values Height of working plane Height of luminaire plane Light loss factor
Length x width x height Length x width x height Ceiling/walls/floor
m m % m m v
40 x 28 x 6 7 x 24 x 6 50/50/20 0.85 4.50 0.80
Classroom Reflectance values Height of working plane Height of luminaire plane Light loss factor
Length x width x height Ceiling/walls/floor
m 8.9 x 7.1 x 3.3 % 70/50/20 m 0.85 m 2.80 v 0.80
Lighting requirements ▲
General lighting requirements ▲
Sales area Nominal illuminance Lighting installation 5 non-interrupted continuous lines, each with 25 lamp lengths, each equipped with 18 gear trays 1 x 58 W Reference 18 lamella louvres RW Reference Calculation result* Illuminance Uniformity g1
lx
300
7601N/58 E 07600 RW/1500 lx 346 0.68
Additional requirements ▲
lx
lx
300
7601N/35 E 07600 RPV/1500 07600 B 1500 7601NA/35 E 07601 SA/1500 lx 339 0.64
500
Additional requirements 7602N/58 E 07600 RW/1500 lx 514 0.89
Easy conversion for use as special study zone Solution Conversion to gear tray 2 x 35 W Calculation result*
* in combination with cashier lighting
▲
Increased illuminance for the cash register zone Nominal illuminance Solution Complemented by 2-lamp gear tray in the cash register zone 5 x 7 gear trays 2 x 58 W Reference 5 x 7 lamella louvres RW Reference Calculation result Illuminance Uniformity g1
Normal class Nominal illuminance Lighting installation 3 interrupted continuous lines, each with 5 lamp lengths, each equipped with 3 gear trays 1 x 35 W Reference 3 parabolic louvres RPV Reference 2 blanking covers Reference plus blackboard lighting with 2 asym. gear trays 1 x 35 W Reference 2 asym. specular reflectors SA Reference Calculation result* Illuminance Uniformity g1
Nominal illuminance
lx
500
Reference Illuminance Uniformity g1
lx
7602N/35 E 581 0.71
* in combination with blackboard lighting
341
Combinations of base units and optical accessories
Base units As a constructional unit, DELTA base units assume the function of both trunking and reflector of conventional rapid-mounting continuousline systems. Three versions are available:
All DELTA base units – see page 344 – can be combined with all available gear trays – see page 348. The high equipment variety thus leads to an economic energy consumption by choosing the right illumination package.
• Direct – for IP 20 • Direct/indirect – for IP 20 • Direct – for IP 50 Base units can be equipped with optical accessories suitable for the relevant application, thus creating optimal conditions for demand-oriented lighting solutions. Base units see page 344
Direct – IP 20 Base units with integrated direct reflectors in IP 20 offer versatility because they can be combined with all optical accessories.
Page 350
Direct/indirect – IP 20 Base units in IP 20 with integrated perforated reflectors provide an indirect component of around 6 %. This enhances the style of the luminaires and creates an appealing room atmosphere.
Page 352
Direct – IP 50 Special base units in IP 50 offer effective protection of the optical systems against soiling, thanks to integrated silicate glass covers.
Page 362
342
Gear trays see page 348
Combination versatility The matrix below shows the compatibility of DELTA base units with different optical accessories.
Standard equipment with electronic control gear Electronic control gear embodies cost-minimised operation efficiency and ecological benefits. In addition to typical comfort advantages, the considerable increase of the lamp life as opposed to operation with inductive ballasts stands out as well.
The pages indicated relate to the following application pages 350 to 363, featuring the characteristics of the respective components, their dimensions and the resulting photometrics as well as product and application illustrations.
DELTA gear trays are equipped as standard with electronic control gear. Versions with dimmable electronic control gear are available as well, reference suffix “ED”.
Optical accessories see pages 350-363
Page 350
Page 354
Page 354
Page 356
Page 356
Page 358
Page 360
Page 352
Page 362
343
DELTA Base units
Base units Integrated trunking and reflector profile, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. For tool-free equipment with gear trays, both for T5 and T8 lamps, in single- and twin-lamp version. Base units for individual luminaires, with 5-pole female connector: 07600 E/1500 Direct, IP 20. 07600 G-E/1500 With defined perforations in the reflector, for a wellbalanced ceiling illumination, IP 20. 07610 E/1500 With transparent silicate glass cover, safely retained in the surrounding frame, to be hung and lowered from the reflector for maintenance purposes, IP 50.
Reference for individual luminaires 07600 E/1500 for continuous lines 07600/II/5LV/1500 07600/II/7LV/1500 07600/III/5LV/1500 07600/III/7LV/1500
Length mm 1531
IP
≈kg
20
2.6
3062 3062 4593 4593
20 20 20 20
5.2 5.4 7.8 8.0
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
Base units for continuous lines, prewired with heatresistant individual conductors 1.5 mm2, with 5- or 7-pole female connectors and integrated mechanical coupling: 07600/···/1500 Direct, IP 20. 07600 G/···/1500 With defined perforations in the reflector, for a wellbalanced ceiling illumination, IP 20. 07610/···/1500 With transparent silicate glass cover, safely retained in the surrounding frame, to be hung and lowered from the reflector for maintenance purposes, IP 50.
End caps and connectors – IP 20 End caps in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised ABS – snapped into place without tools – complete DELTA base units in IP 20, either for individual luminaires or at the ends of continuous lines. Indications Photometric combinations Suspensions Gear trays Emergency lighting Planning Substitute references for computer calculations
344
Page 342 347 348 364 366 443
Components for the connection of DELTA base units assure precise alignment of non-interrupted continuous lines and surely avoid unintentional light leakage at the joints of the reflectors. End caps are to be ordered separately. Connectors are delivered as standard with the 2- and 3-length base units.
Reference for individual luminaires, perforated 07600 G-E/1500 for continuous lines, perforated 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 07600 G/III/7LV/1500
Length mm 1531
IP
≈kg
20
2.5
3062 3062 4593 4593
20 20 20 20
5.0 5.2 7.5 7.7
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference for individual luminaires 07610 E/1500 for continuous lines 07610/II/5LV/1500 07610/III/5LV/1500 07610/II/7LV/1500 07610/III/7LV/1500
Length mm 1538
IP
≈kg
50
5.9
3062 4593 3062 4593
50 50 50 50
11.8 17.7 12.0 17.9
Base units can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, both in single-lamp and twin-lamp version. Gear trays to be ordered separately.
End caps and connectors – IP 50 Safely fixed end caps in impact-resistant, PCV-free and UV-stabilised ABS complete DELTA base units in accordance with the degree of protection (here IP 50), either for individual luminaires or at the ends of continuous lines.
End caps – IP 20 1 piece, for base units 07600···, white plastic material, with 2 knockout openings, snapped into place without tools. One pair of end caps is required per continuous line or individual luminaire. 07600 RK for continuous lines and individual luminaires (not for RPV). 07600 RK-RPV for continuous lines and individual luminaires in combination with parabolic louvre RPV.
End caps – IP 50 07610 RK 1 piece, for base units 07610···, white plastic material, with 2 knockout openings. For IP 50. One pair of end caps is required per continuous line or individual luminaire. For continuous lines and individual luminaires in IP 50.
Blanking cover 07600 B/1500 1 piece, for base units 07600··· and 07610···, sheet steel, white.
Feeding accessory 07600 ESB 1 piece, necessary for the entry of cables at the upper plane of the base units 07600··· and 07610···.
Components for the connection of DELTA base units in accordance with the degree of protection assure precise alignment of non-interrupted continuous lines and surely avoid unintentional light leakage at the joints of the reflectors. End caps are to be ordered separately. Connectors are delivered as standard with the 2- and 3-length base units.
345
Node
90 - 270°
A 03 D 07600 KA/7LV 07600 KA-RPV/7LV 110
75
110
75
3062 3212
110
75
110
75
4593 4743
Node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to 4 connections, angles continuously adjustable between 90° and 270°. Die-cast aluminium, white.
Node adapter 1 piece, for the connection of nodes A 03 D with base units 07600···, consisting of end cap, white plastic material, with integrated node attachment in die-cast aluminium and flange-mounted inner coupling in aluminium, for stable connection with the base unit. Complete with through-wiring 7 x 1.5 mm2 with connection element. Can only be used on one side for individual luminaires. 07600 KA/7LV For continuous lines in IP 20 (not in combination with louvres RPV). 07600 KA-RPV/7LV For continuous lines in combination with parabolic louvres RPV in IP 20.
346
Ordering example Node for star-shaped arrangement of three continuous lines: 1 node A 03 D 3 adapters 07600 KA/7LV
Wire and chain suspensions
07600 MH
Mounting aid 07600 MH 1 pair, suspension aid for mounting of continuous lines. Recommended for mounting of suspensions at the joints of base units. Handling is described on page 367. For safety reasons, fixing accessories must be able to support five times the weight of the luminaires to be mounted on them. In case the maximum fixing spacings are retained this results in loads of 30 kg maximum per suspension point. All suspension accessories in the DELTA range are therefore designed for at least 150 kg weight load. Fixing accessories provided on site such as dowels, ceiling hooks, etc. must meet with these requirements.
E 01
Ceiling fixing plate E 01 1 piece, sheet steel, galvanised, with safety spring hook to attach chains or wires without tools.
A 01 DSD A 01 DSD-IP50
A 01 SD A 01 SD-IP50
A 01 KD A 01 KD-IP50
E 07
E 03 SD E 03 SD-IP50
E 03 KD E 03 KD-IP50
E 06
E 04
E 05N
Decorative wire suspension 1 piece, consisting of steel wire, galvanised, ¶ 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long, and suspension clamp. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. A 01 DSD for IP 20. A 01 DSD-IP50 for IP 50.
Wire suspension 1 piece, consisting of steel wire, galvanised, ¶ 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long, and suspension clamp. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. A 01 SD for IP 20 A 01 SD-IP50 for IP 50.
Chain suspension 1 piece, consisting of link chain, galvanised, 1500 mm long, with turnbuckle and suspension clamp. A 01 KD for IP 20 A 01 KD-IP50 for IP 50.
Wire accessory E 07 to realise wire suspensions on site, with steel wire E 06 and suspension clamps E 03 SD···. Wire accessory consisting of 12 grommets as wire protection in the suspension area, together with 12 pressure clamps to make suspension eyelets with pliers, recess size 10 mm. Steel wire E 06 20 m, ¶ 1.75 mm, galvanised, with quick-acting glue to seal the wire ends from splicing when shortened. Only to be used in combination with accessory E 07.
Suspension clamp 1 piece, for wire suspensions in combination with accessories E 06 and E 07. Stainless steel, to be attached to the base units without tools. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. E 03 SD for IP 20 E 03 SD-IP50 for IP 50. Link chain E 04 20 m, galvanised, to be shortened on site.
Suspension clamp 1 piece, for chain suspensions, stainless steel, to be attached to the base unit without tools. E 03 KD for IP 20 E 03 KD-IP50 for IP 50. Turnbuckle E 05N 1 piece, for height compensation in chain link length as well as a chain-quick-action lock.
347
DELTA Gear trays for T8 fluorescent lamps ¶ 26 mm – direct or asymmetrical – Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the base unit without tools by means of plastic-coated, metal turn-lock fasteners. Production sites exposed to fire hazards Base units in IP 50 in combination with gear trays with switchable or dimmable electronic control gear shine out thanks to limited surface temperatures and are labelled ···D. They are therefore predestined for use in production sites exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Reference Lamps Ballast System ≈kg Gear tray T8 rating 7601N/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7 7602N/58 E 2x58W E 110W 1.8 Base units (see page 344) can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, both in single- and twin-lamp version.
Reference Lamps Ballast System ≈kg Gear tray T8 rating 7601N A/58 E 1x58W E 55W 1.7 For asymmetrical light distribution please combine with asymmetrical specular reflector 07601 SA/1500.
Electrical connection Electrical connection is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the base unit. Lamp circuit connections can be set to each phase conductor without tools. With electronic control gear (E). Gear trays can also be supplied with dimmable electronic control gear (not for 2x80 W), reference suffix ···ED, e.g. 7601/80 ED.
T8
Various equipment options with DELTA Numerous gear trays for the most different equipments, to be mounted into identical base units, facilitate optimised photometric planning. Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Emergency light Planning
348
Page 342 344 347 364 366
Due to the fact that single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps have the same dimensions and an identical position of the male connector, they can be interchanged in the base units.
Tool-free phase connection Female connectors of the through-wiring and complementary male connectors on the gear trays allow for automatic electrical contact when inserting the gear trays into the DELTA base units. Tool-free adjustable slide contacts of the male connector allow the selection of the desired phase conductor and the easy allocation of the individual lamp circuits to the switching groups.
DELTA Gear trays for T5 fluorescent lamps ¶ 16 mm – direct or asymmetrical – Reference Lamps Ballast System ≈kg Gear tray T5 rating 7601N/35 E 1x35W E 39W 1.7 7601N/80 E 1x80W E 88W 1.7 7602N/35 E 2x35W E 78W 1.8 7602N/80 E 2x80W E 176W 1.8 Base units (see page 344) can be equipped with T5 and T8 gear trays, both in single- and twin-lamp version.
Reference Lamps Ballast System ≈kg Gear tray T5 rating 7601N A/35 E 1x35W E 39W 1.7 7601N A/80 E 1x80W E 88W 1.7 For asymmetrical light distribution please combine with asymmetrical specular reflector 07601 SA/1500.
652do Degree of protection T5
IP 20, IP 50
3
Wiring type
3
3
1
3
4 2
3
5 2 5
3
2
5LV
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
3
2 5 5 5 5 2
Safe fastening technology Plastic-coated metal turn-lock fasteners, to be used without tools, assure easy manipulation and permanently safe retention of the gear tray in the base unit. The triangular contour of the base unit facilitates the adjustment of the gear trays during installation.
No. of conductors
Dimming 1-10 V
Mains cable 3 con. Mains cable 5 con.
T5
Emergency syst. EB – single battery UR – switch. relay E 14 – socket
Equipment options for 5-conductor (5LV) and 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
1
6 2
7 2 7
1
6 7LV 2
7 2 7 7
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
Also the sheet steel blanking covers used to realise blank sections within a continuous line are fixed by means of turn-lock fasteners.
349
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct Base unit, direct, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, sales areas and training rooms.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
Base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0622 122
Lamella louvre RW-G Sheet steel, white, with perforated cross blades. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3
140
NBN L 14-002: BZ5/1.25/BZ4
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
350
Page 342 344 347 348 364 366
Ordering example: continuous line (8 lengths) with lamella louvres RW 2 base units 07600/III/5LV/1500 1 base unit 07600/II/5LV/1500 8 gear trays 7601N/58 E 8 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 2 end caps 07600 RK Suspensions see page 347.
Easy mounting DELTA rapid-mounting continuous lines shine out thanks to a very easy and rapid installation. The base units are clipped into the clamps of the wire or chain suspensions without tools. A further system advantage: it is not necessary to mount additional reflectors, since these are already integrated into the base units. This also leads to a reduction of reflector joints which only exist at the transitions between two base units.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lenghts 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 0623
Data table No. 0623 122
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3
140
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3
Data table no. 0622 1
Data table no. 0623 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ4 Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.2 5.6 6.9 8.4 9.7 12 15 21 28
6.8 8.4 9.9 12 13 16 19 26 33
7.0 9.3 12 14 16 21 25 36 46
11 14 16 20 22 27 32 43 55
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.00 0.74 0.52 0.55 0.42 0.29
‡L
0.85 0.76 0.89 0.77 0.67 0.80
Installation is facilitated by means of standard connectors or sockets at the ends of pre-mounted through-wiring sets. These 7-pole components do not only allow for rapid connection of three-phase current mains supply lines but also for connection of two additional conductors, e.g. control lines for dimming. Corresponding mains cables can equally be connected to the socket.
ρ v e lp
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
12 15 17 21 23 29 34 46 59
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
0.85 0.76 0.89 0.77 0.67 0.80
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Rapid connection of the through-wiring DELTA is designed for rapid electrical connection.
7.4 9.8 12 15 17 22 27 39 50
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
7.0 8.7 10 12 14 17 20 28 35
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
4.4 5.9 7.4 9.0 10 13 16 23 30
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
1.00 0.74 0.52 0.57 0.44 0.30
0.77 0.69 0.80 0.68 0.59 0.70
0.77 0.69 0.80 0.68 0.59 0.70
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Perforated lamella louvre RW-G The RW-G louvre version with perforated cross-blades offers an interesting alternative to traditional white lamella louvres and is particularly suitable for the subtle lighting of sales areas.
351
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct/indirect Base unit, direct/indirect, with lamella louvre RW or RW-G Application Workshops, precision assembly, sales areas, supermarkets, training rooms and lounges.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated Accessories 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
Perforated base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector with defined perforations, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0624 122
Lamella louvre RW-G Sheet steel, white, with perforated cross blades. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ5
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
352
Page 342 344 347 348 364 366
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with perforated base unit and lamella louvres RW 1 base unit 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 1 base unit 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 5 gear trays 7601N/35 E 5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 2 end caps 07600 RK Suspensions see page 347.
Base units with indirect component Partial perforations at the lateral surface of base units in “G” version create a very decorative and comfortable lighting atmosphere. Due to their appealing design base units with indirect component are recommended for areas where special demands are placed on the architectural aspect of a lighting installation.
140
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated Accessories 07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 G-E/1500 for indiv. luminaires, perforated 07600 G/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated 07600 G/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths, perforated Accessories 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 0625
Data table No. 0625 122
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ4 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/4/BZ5
140
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/2/BZ4
Data table no. 0624 1
Data table no. 0625 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/4/BZ5 Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
4.4 5.9 7.4 9.0 10 13 16 23 30
7.2 8.9 10 13 14 17 20 28 35
7.4 9.9 12 15 17 22 27 38 50
12 15 17 21 23 29 34 46 59
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.00 0.73 0.52 0.53 0.39 0.27
‡L
0.81 0.74 0.84 0.77 0.68 0.80
0.76 0.69 0.79 0.73 0.64 0.76
Technical information see page 440.
Interior decoration with geometrical arrangements DELTA convinces not only with photometric efficiency but also offers free scope to realise striking continuous-line arrangements, thanks to nodes which allow the combination of up to four continuous lines at variable angles as attractive architectural elements.
8.0 11 14 16 19 24 29 42 55
13 16 19 22 25 31 37 50 64
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
7.6 9.4 11 13 15 19 22 30 39
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
4.8 6.4 8.1 9.8 11 15 18 25 33
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
1.00 0.73 0.51 0.53 0.40 0.27
0.74 0.67 0.77 0.70 0.62 0.73
0.68 0.61 0.71 0.65 0.57 0.68
indirect ULOR
0.06 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.05
Technical information see page 440.
DELTA equipment scope Numerous gear trays for the most different equipments, to be mounted into identical base units, extend the planning scope.
353
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S Base unit, direct, with specular reflector S and lamella louvre RW or RW-G Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, machine workstations and precision assembly.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
Specular reflector S Made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution, for base units 07600···, 07610··· (not suitable for base units 07600 G··· with indirect component). For emergency light versions with gear trays 760···+E14 special specular reflectors 07600 S/1500/E14 are to be ordered separately.
C 0 - C 180
IP 20 IP 20
Data table No. 0626 122
Base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
DIN 5040: A50
Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
CIBSE BZ: BZ5/1.25/BZ4
140
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/0.8/BZ3
Lamella louvre RW-G Sheet steel, white, with perforated cross blades. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
354
Page 342 344 347 348 364 366
Ordering example: continuous line (13 lengths), dimmable, with specular reflectors S and lamella louvres RW 3 base units 07600/III/7LV/1500 2 base units 07600/II/7LV/1500 13 gear trays 7601N/58 ED 13 specular reflectors 07600 S/1500 13 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 2 end caps 07600 RK Suspensions see page 347.
Safety lighting Special gear trays with emergency light sockets, single batteries or switching relays allow for an easy integration of safety lighting in DELTA continuous lines or individual luminaires. The necessary electrical connections are realised by the standard delivered connectors, without tools.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S 07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G 07600 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 0627
Data table No. 0627 122
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3
140
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/0.75/BZ3
Data table no. 0626 1
Data table no. 0627 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ3 Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.6 4.8 6.0 7.4 8.6 11 13 19 25
5.8 7.0 8.1 10 11 14 17 23 29
6.0 8.0 10 12 14 18 22 32 42
9.6 12 14 17 19 24 28 38 49
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.00 0.73 0.52 0.58 0.45 0.30
‡L
0.92 0.83 0.95 0.80 0.68 0.83
0.92 0.83 0.95 0.80 0.68 0.83
Technical information see page 440.
Tool-free mounting DELTA base units can be mounted rapidly by means of chains or wires. To do so, the stainless steel clips of the suspension accessories are simply snapped onto the upper side of the base units. In case fixing accessories are to be positioned at the joint of two base units in order to achieve a maximum suspension distance, the fixing aid 07600 MH eases the luminaire weight.
6.6 8.8 11 14 16 20 24 35 46
10 13 15 18 21 26 30 41 53
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
6.1 7.5 8.8 11 12 15 18 25 32
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
3.9 5.3 6.6 8.1 9.4 12 15 21 28
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
1.00 0.75 0.52 0.58 0.46 0.30
0.84 0.74 0.86 0.72 0.60 0.75
0.84 0.74 0.86 0.72 0.60 0.75
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Stable base units The installation costs of continuous lines depend mainly on the number of fixing points. DELTA creates the conditions for a cost-saving rapid mounting since the base units with a torsionally rigid section allow suspension distances of more than 4500 mm.
355
Applications for asymmetrical DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA Base unit, direct, with specular reflector SA and lamella louvre RW or RW-G Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, sales areas and training rooms.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical 07600 RK End cap Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
Base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20. Specular reflector SA Made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %, for asymmetrical light distribution, for base units 07600···, 07610··· (not suitable for base units 07600 G··· with indirect component). Can only be used in combination with asymmetrical gear tray 7601N A···.
Data table No. 0631
C 0 - C 180
Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners.
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3/0.75/BZ2/1/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Lamella louvre RW-G Sheet steel, white, with perforated cross blades. To be used in base units 07600···. Safe retention and easy manipulation by means of snap fasteners. 550 600 650
1.60 m
700
700 650 600 550
2.70 m
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
356
Page
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with asymmetrical light distribution 1 base unit 07600/III/5LV/1500 1 base unit 07600/II/5LV/1500 5 gear trays 7601N A/58 E 5 specular reflectors, asymmetrical 07601 SA/1500 5 lamella louvres 07600 RW/1500 2 end caps 07600 RK
342 Suspensions see page 347. 344 347 348 364 366
Wall zone lighting with a continuous line (2 lengths) – illuminance distribution (indications in lux) – Luminaire level height: 3.0 m Lower wall zone height: 0.9 m Distance to wall: 1.0 m Gear trays: 7601N A/58 E Specular reflectors: 07601 SA/1500 Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical 07600 RW/1500 Lamella louvre RW 07600 RK End cap Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07601 SA/1500 Specular reflector, asymmetrical 07600 RW-G/1500 Perforated lamella louvre RW-G 07600 RK End cap Gear trays (asymmetrical) to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
652d Degree of protection C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 0632
Data table No. 0632
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Data table no. 0631 1
Data table no. 0632 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.9 5.2 6.5 7.8 9.0 12 14 20 26
6.5 7.9 9.2 11 12 15 18 24 33
6.5 8.6 11 13 15 19 23 33 43
11 13 15 18 21 25 30 40 51
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.00 0.73 0.56
7.0 9.3 12 14 16 21 25 36 47
11 14 16 20 22 27 32 43 55
0.90 0.81 0.86
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
‡L 0.90 0.81 0.86
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 0.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E
6.8 8.3 9.7 12 13 16 19 26 33
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 0.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
4.2 5.6 7.0 9.0 10 13 15 22 28
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E
1.00 0.73 0.57
0.82 0.74 0.77
0.82 0.74 0.77
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
357
∑
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct, with highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Production facilities or workshops with CNC machines, switchgear control rooms, offices and rooms with DSE workstations. Base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20. Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %, luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60°, thus corresponding fully to LG 3, Cat. II, in combination with base units 07600··· (not suitable for base units 07600 G··· with indirect component). Louvre retention by means of spring-tensioned clips. Louvre can be lowered and hung from either side without tools.
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
358
Page 342 344 347 348 364 366
Ordering example: continuous line (7 lengths) with highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV 1 base unit 07600/III/5LV/1500 2 base units 07600/II/5LV/1500 7 gear trays 7601N/80 E 7 highly-specular parabolic louvres 07600 RPV/1500 2 end caps 07600 RK-RPV Suspensions see page 347.
DELTA individual luminaires In addition to modular continuous-line systems the DELTA range is equally suited for the installation of individual luminaires. These are based on single-length base units where electrical connection is realised directly at the 5-pole female connector. DELTA individual luminaires present an alternative to conventional reflector or louvre luminaires. In combination with DELTA continuous lines they are specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations or lighting of small separated room zones.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07600 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07600/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07600/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07600/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 RPV/1500 Parabolic louvre RPV 07600 RK-RPV End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 0628
Data table no. 0628 141
C 0 - C 180
DIN5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2 NBN L 14-002: BZ2
IP 20
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
140
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.5 4.8 6.0 7.4 8.6 11 14 20 26
5.6 6.7 7.8 9.6 11 14 16 22 29
5.8 7.9 10 12 14 19 23 33 43
9.4 11 13 16 18 23 27 37 49
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
1.00 0.84 0.53 0.59 0.51 0.30
0.86 0.68 0.87 0.73 0.55 0.76
0.86 0.68 0.87 0.73 0.55 0.76
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV With DSE units being a part of modern production sites, special lighting solutions are called for. Highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV avoid contrastreducing reflections of the luminaires on inclined screens and are thus specially designed for these tasks.
Mounting and maintenance made easy Numerous DELTA details offer practice-oriented functionality, thus saving time and money. Due to its patented clip system, the highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV can be hung on the reflector from either side, facilitating maintenance and lamp replacement.
359
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit, direct, with specular reflector HRL, extremely narrow-angle light distribution Application High-bay warehouses, high gangways and high halls. Base unit Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for T5 and T8 lamps. IP 20. Specular reflector HRL Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium, for extremely narrow-angle light distribution, suitable for base units 07600··· in IP 20 in combination with single-lamp gear trays.
Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency lighting Planning
360
Page 342 344 347 348 364 366
Reference
Designation
Base unit 07600 E/1500 07600/II/5LV/1500 07600/II/7LV/1500 07600/III/5LV/1500 07600/III/7LV/1500 Accessories 07601 HRL/1500 07600 RK
for degree of protection
for individual luminaires 2 lengths 2 lengths 3 lengths 3 lengths
IP IP IP IP IP
20 20 20 20 20
Specular reflector HRL for single-lamp gear tray 7601N/··· End cap
IP 20 IP 20
Base units in combination with specular reflector HRL can only be equipped with single-lamp T5 and T8 gear trays. Gear tray to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Photometric data for combination 07600··· + 7601N/35 E + 07601 HRL/1500
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ4/0.75/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.25/BZ2
Lighting of high-bay warehouses Due to missing or reduced daylight, high-bay warehouses are mainly artificially lit. Due to the resulting increased operating times, the use of highly-efficient lamps and economical luminaires is recommended.
Diagrams to determine horizontal illuminances
Luminaires: Non-interrupted continuous line with 16 units 07600··· + 7601N/35 E + 07601 HRL/1500
500
DELTA gear trays with electronic control gear for reduced energy consumption and increased lamp life are perfect for these applications.
500 450
400
400 350
L
Multiplication factors for luminaire inserts 7601N/58 E: M = 1.34 7601N/80 E: M = 1.98
h y x B/2 B
e
Average illuminance E in lx
Lamps: T5 lamps 35 W Luminous flux: LP = 3300 Im Light loss factor: v = 0.8
Illustration 3 Illuminance distribution EP across the gangway, y = 12.5 m
Illustration 2 Average illuminance B/2: on the centre line B = ...: on the whole gangway surface
Illustration 1 Installation sketch Gangway in high-bay warehouse
300
300
B/2
Point illuminance EP in lx
Installation data Gangway length: L = 25 m Gangway width: B Light point height: h Transverse coordinate: x Longitudinal coordinate: y Evaluation level: e = 0.2 m
250
B=3m 200 B=6m
200 150
100
h=6m
100
50 20 0 4
8
12
16
20
Light point height h in m
24
28
h = 14 m
DELTA in HRL versions excels with extremely narrow-angle luminous intensity distribution with high light output ratios, allowing efficient realisation of standard-conform illuminances even in case of elevated light point heights.
h = 22 m
50 0 0
1m
2m
h = 30 m 3m
Lat. distance x to gangway centre
361
Applications for DELTA gear trays: Base unit IP 50, direct Base unit IP 50, direct, with specular reflector S Application Workplaces with increased degree of pollution. Also recommended in areas where drilling emulsions are used or oil gases are formed. Base unit – IP 50 Unit composed of trunking and reflector, sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. To be equipped with gear trays and optical accessories, universally suitable for single- and twinlamp gear trays for T5 and T8 lamps. Efficient protection against pollution in accordance with IP 50 by means of a silicate glass cover retained by the continuous frame. Specular reflector S Made of reflection-intensified aluminium with a surface purity of 99.99 %, for narrow/wide-angle light distribution, for base units 07600···, 07610··· (not suitable for base units 07600 G··· with indirect component). For emergency light versions with gear trays 760···+E14 special specular reflectors 07600 S/1500/E14 are to be ordered separately.
Ordering example: continuous line (9 lengths) in IP 50 with specular reflectors S 3 base units 07610/III/5LV/1500 9 gear trays 7601N/35 E 9 specular reflectors 07600 S/1500 2 end caps 07610 RK Indications Photometric combinations Base units and accessories Suspensions Gear trays Emergency light Planning
362
Page Suspensions see page 347. 342 344 347 348 364 366
Production sites exposed to fire hazards Thanks to their standard equipment with electronic control gear DELTA IP 50 base units are specially recommended for areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance. Additional special accessories are not necessary.
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07610 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07610/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07610/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07610/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07610/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07610 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50
Reference
Specification
for degree of protection
Base unit 07610 E/1500 for individual luminaires 07610/II/5LV/1500 2 lengths 07610/II/7LV/1500 2 lengths 07610/III/5LV/1500 3 lengths 07610/III/7LV/1500 3 lengths Accessories 07600 S/1500 Specular reflector S 07610 RK End cap Gear trays to be ordered separately.
IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50
652do Degree of protection Data table No. 0629
Data table No. 0630 135
C 0 - C 180
DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ2/2.5/BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/2/BZ3
DIN 5040: A50 CIBSE BZ: BZ2
140
Data table no. 0629 1
Data table no. 0630 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
NBN L 14-002: BZ3 Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
5.2 6.9 8.7 11 12 16 19 27 36
8.3 10 12 14 16 20 24 32 41
8.6 12 15 18 20 26 32 46 59
14 17 20 24 27 33 39 54 69
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
1.00 0.77 0.52 0.55 0.49 0.28
‡L
0.65 0.56 0.67 0.59 0.44 0.61
0.65 0.56 0.67 0.59 0.44 0.61
Technical information see page 440.
Efficient protection against pollution The covers of the IP 50 base units – safely retained in the continuous frame – consist of chemically resistant silicate glass. Even oil gases or drilling emulsions do not leave irreversible pollution. Maintenance intervals – especially in rooms with an increased degree of pollution – are extended and thus reduce the costs for the lighting installation.
7.8 11 13 16 19 24 30 43 56
12 15 17 22 24 31 36 50 64
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics ‡LB direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
7.1 8.8 11 13 15 18 22 30 39
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
M
4.7 6.4 8.0 9.8 11 15 18 26 34
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Reference
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 50
for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
‡L direct DLOR
1 x 35 W E 1 x 58 W E 1 x 80 W E 2 x 35 W E 2 x 58 W E 2 x 80 W E
1.00 0.76 0.52 0.55 0.46 0.29
0.67 0.58 0.70 0.60 0.48 0.63
0.67 0.58 0.69 0.60 0.48 0.63
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Easy maintenance For easy maintenance and rapid lamp replacement the covers of the IP 50 versions can be hung on the base units without tools. Four frame hinges in stainless steel per lamp length assure a permanently safe retention.
363
DELTA Gear trays for safety lighting
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s, 100 % in 60 s
1h
Single batteries Permanent Em. power generator switching not Specially safenecessary guarded mains
Anti-panic lighting2)
0.5 lx
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s 100 % in 60 s
1h
No information
No information
Workplaces with special risk
min. 0.1Em3) min. 15 lx
max. 0.5 s
Time of risk
Single batteries Specially safeguarded mains
Permanent switching not necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and immediate stand-by power generator.
2)
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into “Safety lighting for escape routes”, “Anti-panic lighting” and “Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks”.
A Eh = 0.25 lx
10 8
6
4
10 8
6
4
0.5 lx
Eh = 0.25 lx C
3
Wiring type
No. of conductors
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst. EB – single battery UR – switch. relay E 14 – socket
Mains cable 3 con. Mains cable 5 con.
Equipment options for 5-conductor and 7-conductor wiring
3
3
1
3
4 2
3
5 2 5
3
2
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
3
2 5 5 5 5 2
364
5LV
1
6 2
7 2 7
1
6 7LV 2
7 2 7 7
Isolux curves Illuminances achieved with DELTA gear trays for safety lighting are documented in the isolux curves opposite. They refer to a level on the floor and a light loss factor of 0.8. Indirect portions are not taken into consideration.
The following luminous fluxes are taken into account: Isolux curves ··· + E14 Equipment: tubular incandescent lamp, 40 W, luminous flux 380 lm. Isolux curves ··· + EB Equipment: T5 fluorescent lamps 35 W. Luminous flux 3300 lm (referred to nominal operation). The diagrams opposite are based on battery operation with correspondingly adjusted luminous flux. Isolux curves ··· + UR Equipment: T5 fluorescent lamps 35 W, luminous flux 3300 lm. In case of different equipments the illuminance values must be multiplied by the given factors. Deviating luminous fluxes have to be considered accordingly.
1 lx 2 0 2 0 1 lx
1 lx 0 2 0 2 1 lx
m
≈kg
1x54 1x36 2x54 2x36
1.9 1.9 2.1 2.0
B 7601N/54 E + E 14 + 07600 G/··· Base unit, perforated
0.5 lx
0.5 lx
Lamps W
A 7601N/54 E + E 14 + 07600/··· Base unit
B Eh = 0.25 lx
C 7601N/54 E + E 14 + 07600/··· Base unit + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre 4
6
8 10
4
6
8 10
0.5 lx
Eh = 0.25 lx D
··· + E14 Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires with electronic control gear and emergency light socket E14, red-marked. (Not suitable in combination with extremely narrowangle specular reflectors 07601 HRL/1500. Special version for narrow/wideangle specular reflectors: 07600 S/1500/E14.) 7601··· for 1 fluorescent lamp 36 W or 54 W. 7602··· for 2 fluorescent lamps 36 W or 54 W. With additional emergency light socket E14 for tubular incandescent lamps up to 40 W, max. lamp length 103 mm, max. diameter 30 mm, as well as for compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear. Max. lamp length 125 mm, max. diameter 42 mm.
m
1 lx
8 10
Escape routes in working facilities
8 10
Single batteries Permanent Em. power generator switching
6
3h
6
max. 15 s
4
1 lx
4
Schools
Permanent switching
2
Single batteries
2
3h
0
max. 1 s
0
1 lx
0
Meeting rooms with max. 20 safety luminaires
0
3h
2
max. 1 s
2
1 lx
Gear trays with emergency light socket E14, for stand-by switching 7601N/54 E + E14 7601N/36 E + E14 7602N/54 E + E14 7602N/36 E + E14
4
Permanent switching
Meeting rooms Business rooms Exhibition rooms
Reference
4
Illumination of escape signs
6
Emergency power source Nominal Admissible operating alternatives1) time
6
Switching period
10 8
Minimum illuminance
10 8
Requirements
C 7601N/54 E + E 14 + 07600 G/··· Base unit, perforated + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre Multiplication factor for other equipments 7601N/···E + E14 M = 1.00 7602N/···E + E14 M = 1.00 Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the base unit by means of a plastic-coated, metal turnlock fastener without using tools. With electronic control gear. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general and safety lighting circuit is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the base unit. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
Reference
Nominal Lamps operating time W
Gear trays with single battery supply for permanent switching 7601N/35 E + EB3 7601N/80 E + EB1 7601N/58 E + EB3 7602N/35 E + EB3 7602N/58 E + EB3
3 1 3 3 3
hours hour hours hours hours
1x35 1x80 1x58 2x35 2x58
≈kg
Reference
2.7 2.5 2.7 3.1 3.0
Gear trays with switching relay for permanent switching 7601N/35 E + UR 7601N/80 E + UR 7601N/58 E + UR 7602N/35 E + UR 7602N/58 E + UR
Lamps W
≈kg
1x35 1x80 1x58 2x35 2x58
1.9 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.0
652do
Eh = 0.25 lx C
0.5 lx
m
Eh = 0.25 lx D
··· + EB Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires equipped with electronic control gear and single battery. 7601··· for 1 fluorescent lamp 35 W, 58 W or 80 W. 7602··· for 2 fluorescent lamps 35 W or 58 W. Fluorescent lamps switched permanently, in the event of mains failure one lamp is operated by a single battery with maintenance-free, gasproof high-temperature nickel-cadmium accumulators. LED indicates the charge state of the battery.
Multiplication factor for other equipments 760···N/58 E + EB··· M = 1.37 7601N/80 E + EB··· M = 3.32 Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the base unit by means of a plastic-coated, metal turnlock fastener without using tools. With electronic control gear. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general and safety lighting circuit is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the base unit. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
8
4
0.5 lx
0 1 lx
Eh = 0.25 lx C
12 16
8
8
4
4
C 7602N/35 E + UR + 07600/··· Base unit
0
0
B 7601N/35 E + UR + 07600/··· Base unit + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
0.5 lx
0 4 1 lx
8
12 16
8
12 16
0.5 lx
m
Eh = 0.25 lx D
··· + UR Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires. Version with electronic control gear and relay to switch over to safety power supply. Fluorescent lamps switched permanently, in the event of mains failure one lamp is operated by the emergency power source on site. 7601··· for 1 fluorescent lamp 35 W, 58 W or 80 W. 7602··· for 2 fluorescent lamps 35 W or 58 W.
m
12
1 lx 0 4
0
16
1 lx 0
0
C 7602N/35 E + EB··· + 07600/··· Base unit + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
4
4
8 10
8
4
6
12
8
4
16
12
8 10
IP 20, IP 50
A 7601N/35 E + UR + 07600/··· Base unit
B Eh = 0.25 lx
12
6
8
0.5 lx
C 7602N/35 E + EB··· + 07600/··· Base unit 4
m
4
4
0
0 0 2
0 2
0 2 1 lx
B 7601N/35 E + EB··· + 07600/··· Base unit + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre
16
6
6
0.5 lx
2 0 1 lx
4
4
4
6
1 lx 0 2
6
10 8
1 lx 2 0
6
4
10 8
6
10 8
10 8
2
0.5 lx 2
0.5 lx
A 7601N/35 E + EB··· + 07600/··· Base unit
16
B Eh = 0.25 lx
8 10
8 10
A Eh = 0.25 lx
12 16
Degree of protection A Eh = 0.25 lx
C 7602N/35 E + UR + 07600/··· Base unit + 07600 RW/1500 White louvre Multiplication factor for other equipments 760···N/58 E + UR M = 1.35 7601N/80 E + UR M = 2.02 Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the base unit by means of a plastic-coated, metal turnlock fastener without using tools. With electronic control gear. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general and safety lighting circuit is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the base unit. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
··· + EB1 Nominal operation time 1 hour. ··· + EB3 Nominal operation time 3 hours.
365
▲
Next fixing point on the joint of the next base unit
▲
Overhang min. 65 mm / max. 1000 mm
▲
▲
Planning
235-1000 65-100 E
E
E
Fixing above the joints Opposite table contains information on the composition of DELTA continuous lines. The required number of base units as well as the minimum number of fixing points for different continuous line lengths is given, assuming that the fixing clamps of the suspensions are directly placed above the joints of the base profiles. All information for single- and twin-lamp gear trays, independent of the kind of optical equipment and the fixing type. Overhang dimensions The overhang dimension at the ends of continuous lines must be min. 65 mm or max. 1000 mm.
Run length m 3.07 4.61 6.14 7.67 9.20 10.73 12.26 13.79 15.32 16.85 18.38 19.92 21.45 22.98 24.51 26.04 27.57 29.10 30.63
Lamp length
Base unit 076···/II/···
Base unit 076···/III/···
Fixing points
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pieces 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1
Pieces – 1 – 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 4 5 6 5 6
No. 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8
Ordering example: Non-interrupted continuous line 35 W (T5 lamp) with ceiling-oriented feeding. 13.79 m long (equals 9 lamp lengths), equipped with single-lamp, dimmable gear trays and parabolic louvres. Decorative wire suspensions. IP 20.
Ordering example: Modular continuous line 58 W (T8 lamp), with blanking cover for each 3rd lamp length and feeding via end caps of the base units. 12.26 m long (equals 8 lamp lengths), equipped with single-lamp gear trays and lamella louvres. Chain suspensions. IP 20.
366
1. Base unit:
Base units, 3 lengths ..............................3 x 07600/III/7LV/1500
2. Base unit and fixing accessory:
Feeding accessory ..............................................1 x 07600 ESB End caps ......................................................2 x 07600 RK-RPV Decorative wire suspensions ..................................4 x A 01 DSD
3. Gear tray:
Gear trays, single-lamp 35 W ..........................9 x 7601N/35 ED
4. Optical equipment:
Parabolic louvres........................................9 x 07600 RPV/1500
1. Base unit:
Base unit, 2 lengths ................................1 x 07600/II/5LV/1500 Base units, 3 lengths ..............................2 x 07600/III/5LV/1500
2. Base unit and fixing accessory:
End caps ..............................................................2 x 07600 RK Blanking covers ............................................2 x 07600 B/1500 Chain suspensions....................................................4 x A 01 KD
3. Gear tray:
Gear trays, single-lamp 58 W ............................6 x 7601N/58 E
4. Optical equipment:
Lamella louvres ..........................................6 x 07600 RW/1500
Mounting
Suspension of base units directly above the joints by using the two auxiliary suspensions of accessory 07600 MH. 1. While the first profile is held by the suspension at the beginning and, temporarily, by one auxiliary suspension at the joint, the second auxiliary suspension is temporarily used at the end of the second base profile.
1000 – 40 mm 40 – 1000 mm
2. Following the mechanical connection of the base units by means of solid interior couplings, spacer brackets are positioned at each joint. 3. Reflector connectors avoid light leakage between the base profiles.
Fixing next to the joints If DELTA continuous lines cannot be fixed directly above the joints of the base units to the shell ceiling by means of wire or chain suspension, they have to be suspended at the left and right side of the joint according to the illustration above.
4. The suspension clamp of the wire or chain suspension is positioned directly above the joint without using tools.
5. Wires or chains are removed from the auxiliary suspension and fixed to the suspension clamp above the joint.
6. The auxiliary suspension of the first base unit can be removed without using tools.
7. End caps form a stylish conclusion of the DELTA base units at the ends of the continuous line.
367
E-LINE system components Example with trunking, gear tray (IP 20), reflector and lamella louvre
The rapid-mounting continuous-line system E-LINE is a universal system for individual solutions consisting of practical single components which can be adapted to individual requirements such as visual-task-associated photometrics, increased efficiency and compatibility with various architectural environments. Snap fasteners Fastening components in stainless steel, for use without tools, assure rapid mounting and permanent, safe retention of gear trays and reflectors. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fixing accessories Trunking Trunking end cap Male connector Snap fastener Gear tray Reflector Reflector end cap Louvre
368
Reflectors T Trapezium-shaped reflectors T are universally suitable for both single-lamp and twinlamp gear trays. They can also be combined with white lamella louvres.
Reflectors R Radial reflectors and an extensive range of accessories such as louvres, specular reflectors and diffusers do not only provide good lighting but also shine out thanks to their attractive design.
Reflectors RH With their elevated form, high radial reflectors are designed primarily to house specular louvres or DSE-suitable parabolic louvres, but can equally be equipped with white louvres or diffusers.
Industrial self-suspended reflectors F Industrial self-suspended reflectors can directly be attached to the gear tray, without additional coverings, thus providing a demandoriented, cost-optimised solution within the E-LINE range.
Page 382
Page 386
Page 400
Page 406
369
E-LINE wiring options offering increased planning scope
Increased planning scope E-LINE consists of three trunking systems: • single-length prewired trunking for individual luminaires, • twin-length, triple-length prewired trunking for non-interrupted continuous lines or continuous lines with blanking covers in lamp length, • twin-length, triple-length unwired trunking. This must be equipped by the client with through- wiring sets such as wiring sets with integrated connector sockets in modular spacing or flatband cables which can be equipped at any place with connector sockets.
Trunking Individual luminaires, prewired trunking Gear trays, reflectors and optical accessories can be combined to versatile individual luminaires. Modular system, prewired trunkings Continuous lines with modular luminaire spacing are rapidly installed, saving both time and money!
Modular system, unwired trunking Trunking wired on site allows continuousline installation with modular luminaire spacing.
Variable system, unwired trunking Trunking wired on site allows continuousline installation with variable luminaire spacing.
370
Accessories for unwired trunking
Gear trays IP 20, IP 50, IP 50
D
Single-length trunking – prewired – for individual luminaires Trunking – prewired – for modular system
Trunking – unwired – for modular system for through-wiring sets with integrated connector sockets in modular spacing or for variable system for flatband cables and connector sockets to be located at will.
The E-LINE trunking is available for both 5-conductor and 7-conductor wiring sets. These are particularly recommended for three-phase current connection and simultaneous operation of gear trays equipped with dimming or other lighting management systems, or emergency light inserts.
Examples for individual luminaires and continuous-line arrangements Individual luminaire with gear tray 58 W and single-length trunking 07690/I/58 -7 LV/E
Continuous line with gear trays 36 W or 58 W in modular spacing. Trunking prewired.
Continuous line with gear trays 36 W or 58 W in modular spacing. Trunking wired on site. Continuous line with gear trays 58 W in 510 mm spacing. Trunking wired on site.
Continuous line 36 W or 58 W with spacings to be chosen at will. Trunking wired on site.
371
E-LINE Combinations of reflectors and optical accessories Optical accessories Lamella louvre Lamella louvre T-RW RW
07690 T-RW/36 07690 T-RW/58
Combination versatility Self-suspended E-LINE reflectors contain a lightcontrolling optical system, thus additional optical accessories are not required. Trapezium-shaped and radial reflectors can be combined in manifold ways with optical accessories, allowing perfect adaptation of E-LINE continuous lines to projectspecific photometrical and architectural demands. The matrix opposite shows the compatibility of reflectors with different optical accessories. The pages indicated relate to the subsequent application pages featuring the characteristics of the respective components, their dimensions and the resulting photometrics as well as product and application illustrations. The indication “Option” means that a combination is technically possible, but not described on the following application pages. Rough photometrical plannings for these versions can be realised using the photometric data tables of comparable combinations. A variety of different TRILUX software systems is available for more detailed plannings, please contact your local TRILUX support centre.
Trapeziumshaped reflector T
07690 T/36 07690 T/58
Page 382
07691 07691 07692 07692
R/36 R/58 R/36 R/58
Page 386
Page 386
07691 G/58 07692 G/58
Page 398
Page 399
07691 RH/58 07692 RH/58
Option
Option
07691 GH/58 07692 GH/58
Option
Option
07690 STF/58 07690 SAF/58
Page 406
07691 HRF/58
Page 408
Page 384
Radial reflector R
Perforated radial reflector G
High reflector RH
Perforated high reflector GH
Self-suspended reflector STF – narrow/wide-angle Self-suspended reflector SAF – asymmetrical Self-suspended reflector HRF – extremely narrow-angle
372
07691 RW/36, ···58 07692 RW/36, ···58
Page 407
Specular reflectors SA – asymmetrical SB – wide-angle
ST – narrow-angle
Prismatic diffuser P
07691 SB/58 07692 SB/58
07691 SA/58 07692 SA/58
07691 ST/58 07692 ST/58
07691 P/58 07692 P/58
Page 390
Page 392
Page 394
Page 396
Cross-blade louvre Parabolic louvre RSV RMV – semi-spec.
RPV – highly-spec.
07691 RSV/58 07692 RSV/58
07691 RMV/58 07692 RMV/58
07691 RPV/58 07692 RPV/58
Option
Page 400
Page 401
Page 402
Option
Page 404
Option
Page 405
Option
Reflector accessories in ABS, white, impact-resistant, PVC-free, UV-stabilised. To be inserted into the reflectors without tools. Illustrations see pages 382 and 383. Reflector end caps are to be ordered for front-plane conclusion at continuous-line ends or at adjacent blanking covers. Reflector connectors are necessary for precise connection of reflectors.
Reference
Designation
07690 RKT 07690 RVT*
Reflector end cap, 1 piece Reflector connector, 1 set
Accessories for radial reflectors R, G
07691 07692 07691 07692
RK RK RV* RV*
Reflector end cap, 1 piece Reflector end cap, 1 piece Reflector connector, 1 set Reflector connector, 1 set
Accessories for radial reflectors RH, GH
07691 07692 07691 07692
RKH RKH RVH* RVH*
Reflector end cap, 1 piece Reflector end cap, 1 piece Reflector connector, 1 set Reflector connector, 1 set
Accessories for trapeziumshaped reflectors T
* 1 set for each joint
373
E-LINE basis: Universal trunking for IP 20 and IP 50
Trunking versions The E-LINE rapid-mounting system is based on a dimensionally stable trunking which can house gear trays in both IP 20 or IP 50. IP 50 can be achieved by special trunking end caps and gasket accessories for the joints.
Reference Trunking for individual luminaires 07690/I/58 -7LV/E
Length mm 1530
≈ kg 1.8
The twin-and triple-length trunking – equipped as standard with stable couplings – is the basis of E-LINE continuous lines. The single-length version is primarily designed for combination as individual luminaires, but can also be used for a subsequent prolongation of E-LINE continuous lines.
Reference Trunking 5 conductors 07690/II/36-5LV 07690/III/36-5LV 07690/II/58-5LV 07690/II/58-5LV 2.5 mm2 07690/III/58-5LV 07690/III/58-5LV 2.5 mm2 Trunking 7 conductors 07690/II/36-7LV 07690/III/36-7LV 07690/II/58-7LV 07690/III/58-7LV
Length mm 2460 3690 3060 3060 4590 4590
Connector spacings/mm 1230 1230 1530 1530 1530 1530
2460 3690 3060 4590
1230 1230 1530 1530
≈ kg 2.7 4.0 3.3 3.3 5.0 5.0 2.8 4.2 3.5 5.2
Trunking 07690/I/58-7LV/E Sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, completely prewired with heat-resistant individual conductors 7 x 1.5 mm2 and a 7-pole female connector.
Trunking 07690/···/5LV···, 07690/···/7LV Sheet steel, galvanised, white, completely prewired with heat-resistant individual conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2 or 5 x 2.5 mm2 (···5LV) or 7 x 1.5 mm2 (···7LV), each with a 7-pole female connector per lamp length.
Trunking 07690/I/58-7LV/E is the basis for individual luminaires. It is equipped as standard with a 7-pole female connector and a 7-conductor through-wiring set. Sockets and connectors protect the cable ends and allow for electrical connection as well as rapid connection with through-wiring sets of existing E-LINE continuous lines in case these are prolongated.
Trunking 07690/···/5LV···, 07690/···/7LV for non-interrupted continuous lines or continuous lines with blanking covers in lamp length is prewired and equipped with a female connector per lamp length for tool-free electrical connection with the gear tray.
3
Wiring type
No. of conductors
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst. ▼ EB – single battery UR – switch. relay E 14 – socket
Mains cable 3 cond. Mains cable 5 cond.
Equipment options for 5-conductor (5LV) and 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
3
3
1
3
4 2
3
5 2 5
3
2
5
5
5
3
2
3
2
3
2 5 5 5 5 2
374
5LV
1
6 2
7 2 7
1
6 7LV 2
7 2 7 7
All E-LINE gear trays and reflectors as well as corresponding optical accessories can be used for individual luminaires. E-LINE individual luminaires are specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations or lighting of small separated room zones.
5-conductor through-wiring sets and 7-conductor throughwiring sets are optionally available for extended electrical continuous-line equipment, see the table opposite.
Reference Trunking unwired 07690/II/36-U 07690/III/36-U 07690/II/58-U 07690/III/58-U Additional modules 07690/510/U 07690/1020/U
Length mm 2460 3690 3060 4590
≈ kg
510 1020
0.5 1.0
2.4 3.6 3.0 4.5
IP 20 IP 50 IP 50
Trunking 07690/···-U Sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, unwired. Trunking can easily be wired on site.
Trunking 07690/···-U is the basis for the variable system for continuous lines with longitudinal luminaire spacings to be chosen at will. Connector sockets are connected on site with auto-connect flatband cables. Continuous lines can also be wired on site by means of 5-conductor or 7-conductor through-wiring sets which are equipped with connector sockets in a modular spacing of 510 mm, 1230 mm or 1530 mm, allowing to realise rapidly corresponding modular blanking spacings or multiple spacings. In case of wirings in 510 mm module additional trunking sections may be necessary, see page 413. Through-wiring sets and wiring accessories see page 377.
D
End caps – IP 20 1 piece, for trunking 07690···. Plastic material, white, with 2 knock-out openings. To be snapped into place without tools. For IP 20. One pair of end caps is required per continuous line. 07690 E-T for continuous lines with trapezium-shaped reflectors, 07690 E-R for continuous lines with radial reflectors.
End cap – IP 50 07680 E-R 1 piece, for trunking 07690··· in combination with radial reflectors. Plastic material, white, with 2 knock-out openings and 2 grommets Pg11. End caps to be snapped into place, without tools. For IP 50. One pair of end caps is required per continuous line.
Blanking cover – IP 20 1 piece, for trunking 07690···. Plastic extrusion, white, to be easily shortened on site. For IP 20. 07690 B/510 mm 510 mm long, 07690 B/1020 mm 1020 mm long, 07690 B/36 1230 mm long, 07690 B/58 1530 mm long.
Blanking cover – IP 50 07680 B/58 1 piece, for continuous lines in IP 50 with trunking 07690.... Plastic extrusion, white, 1530 mm long.
Cable holders – IP 20 and IP 50 07690 LHA 1 piece, for trunking 07690···. Stainless steel, for max. 4 sheathed cables 5 x 2.5 mm2, to be snapped onto trunking without tools.
Trunking connection gasket – IP 50 07680 KD 1 set, for continuous lines in IP 50. Interior, not visible from the outside. Necessary for a durable and safe sealing of trunking joints. One set is required per joint.
375
Through-wiring sets and accessories for unwired E-LINE trunking units Modular system with female connector spacings 510 mm (1⁄3 lamp length)
Modular system with female connector spacings 1230 mm or 1530 mm (1 lamp length) E-LINE trunking units can be wired on site easily with the following four options: • Modular system with female connector spacings 1230 or 1530 mm (lamp length) • Modular system with female connector spacings 510 mm (1⁄3 lamp length in 58 W) • Variable system with flatband cable • Variable system with individual conductors The advantages of rapid mounting are especially valid for the modular system where the female connectors of the through-wiring accessories are positioned by means of defined stops in the trunking units and fixed without using tools. An easy insertion of the gear trays is thus guaranteed. The modular system with female connectors mounted at 510 mm spacings allows easy realisation of blanking distances equaling a third of or multiples of a lamp length based on the deployment of 58 W luminaire units. The variable wiring systems offer maximum freedom when positioning the gear trays within the continuous line. Here, the upper parts of the female connector contact with the wiring at any position: in case of the flatband cable by means of contact cutting edges (female connectors are secured by flat nose pliers) and in case of individual conductor throughwiring by means of customary plug-connection. Through-wiring sets 2.5 mm2 are available on request (not as flatband cable).
376
Reference 07690/5LV-36/37m 07690/5LV-58/46m 07690/7LV-58/46m
Number of conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2 5 x 1.5 mm2 7 x 1.5 mm2
Through-wiring sets To wire unwired trunking on site in case gear trays are mounted at modular spacings in lamp length. For gear trays 36 W and 58 W. With 1 female connector per lamp length. Consisting of colour-coded individual conductors 1.5 mm2, cable holders and premounted female connectors.
Connector spacings/mm 1230 1530 1530
Length m 37 46 46
07690 / 5LV-36/37m 5 conductors, 37 m long, for 30 lamp lengths 36 W. Female connectors in modular spacing of 1230 mm. 07690 / 5LV-58/46m 5 conductors, 46 m long, for 30 lamp lengths 58 W. Female connectors in modular spacing of 1530 mm. 07690 / 7LV-58/46m 7 conductors, 46 m long, for 30 lamp lengths 58 W. Female connectors in modular spacing of 1530 mm.
Obligatory accessories
Reference 07690/5LV-510/46m 07690/7LV-510/46m
Number of conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2 7 x 1.5 mm2
Through-wiring sets To wire unwired trunking on site in case gear trays are mounted at modular spacings 510 mm. For gear trays 58 W. With 3 female connectors per lamp length. Consisting of colour-coded individual conductors 1.5 mm2, cable holders and premounted female connectors.
Connector spacings/mm 510 510
Length m 46 46
07690 / 5LV-510mm/46m 5 conductors, 46 m long, for gear trays 58 W. Female connectors in modular distance of 510 mm. 07690 / 7LV-510mm/46m 7 conductors, 46 m long, for gear trays 58 W. Female connectors in modular distance of 510 mm.
Obligatory accessories Wiring connector 07690 VV 7-pole jack connection for secure electrical completion of through-wiring sets. Jack suitable for mains connection. Also necessary for interconnection of throughwiring sets or for mains connection within the throughwiring.
Wiring connector 07690 VV 7-pole jack connection for secure electrical completion of through-wiring sets. Jack suitable for mains connection. Also necessary for interconnection of throughwiring sets or for mains connection within the throughwiring.
Variable system with flatband cable
Through-wiring sets To wire unwired trunking on site in case gear trays are mounted at variable spacings. For gear trays 58 W. Consisting of five colourcoded individual conductors 1.5 mm2.
Length m 25
07690/5LV/25m 5 colour-coded, intertwined heat-resistant individual conductors, 25 m long, female connector spacings to be chosen at will. Cable holders for fixing to the trunking to be ordered separately.
Equipment options for 5-conductor (5LV) and 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
3
3
3
1
3
4 2
3 2
07690 SK Female connector 7-pole, for electrical connection of flatband cables 07690/5LV/46m or 07690/7LV/46m.
Wiring connector 07690 VV 7-pole jack connection for secure electrical completion of through-wiring sets. Jack suitable for mains connection. Also necessary for interconnection of throughwiring sets or for mains connection within the throughwiring.
07690 TO Female connector 5-pole, for electrical connection of individual conductors.
Cable holders 07690 LHI (not illustrated) 10 pieces, for approx. 4.5 m trunking length, plastic material, for max. 25 individual conductors 2.5 mm2, to be snapped onto trunking.
5LV
5
5
Obligatory accessories
5 2 5
3
Obligatory accessories
Wiring type
07690/7LV/46m 7 conductors, 46 m long, female connnector spacings to be chosen at will.
07690/5LV/25m
Number of conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2
No. of conductors
Consisting of flatband cable 1.5 mm2 with colour-coded earthed wire, including cable holders for fixing to the trunking.
07690/5LV/46m 5 conductors, 46 m long, female connnector spacings to be chosen at will.
Reference
Dimming 1-10 V
Through-wiring sets To wire unwired trunking on site in case gear trays are mounted at variable spacings. For gear trays 58 W.
Length m 46 46
Emergency syst. EB – single battery UR – switch. relay E 14 – socket
07690/5LV/46m 07690/7LV/46m
Number of conductors 5 x 1.5 mm2 7 x 1.5 mm2
Earthed feeding All through-wiring sets must be electrically secured at their conclusion by means of the wiring connector 07690 VV. Mains connection is also effected with this component. It is fixed to a metal contact stud at the beginning of the trunking and thus includes the complete trunking in the earthing process, without using tools.
Mains cable 3 con. Mains cable 5 con.
Reference
Variable system with individual conductors
5
3
2
3
2
3
2 5 5 5 5 2
1
6 2
7 2 7
1
6 7LV 2
7 2 7 7
Wiring connector 07690 VV Jack connection for mains supply and tool-free earthing of the trunking.
377
Nodes
07690 KA/7LV
> 60º
< 300º
A 03 S ∅110
180
A 03 P 1530
A 03 D 180
∅110
1538/58W 2000
0
50 x. 2
ma
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to 4 connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°, die-cast aluminium, white, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, galvanised, 1500 mm long, length continuously adjustable without tools, 1 ceiling fixing unit, nickeled.
0
50 x. 1
ma
Ceiling rose 05900 AN* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of nodes with wire suspension.
Node with pendant suspension A 03 P 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to 4 connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°, die-cast aluminium, white, 1 steel pendant rod, ¶ 13 mm, with vernier clip for height compensation up to 20 mm, 1500 mm long, to be adapted to reduced suspension lengths on site – thanks to the tool-free adjustable vernier clip threading is not necessary. 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
Feeding tube 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with A 03 S.
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
378
Node A 03 D 1 piece for up to 4 connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°. Die-cast aluminium, white. Ordering example: X-shaped node with 4 connections: 1 node A 03 D, 4 adapters 07690 KA/7LV.
Node adapter 07690 KA/7LV 1 piece, for the connection of nodes A 03··· with trunkings 07690···, for continuous lines in IP 20, consisting of 1 adapter profile, white sheet steel, with integrated adapter element in die-cast aluminium, white, 1 stable inner coupling, sheet steel, galvanised, 1 blanking cover, plastic extrusion, white, 1 through-wiring set 7 x 1.5 mm2, 1 connection element for electrical connection with through-wiring set in the continuous line, premounted or mounted on site.
Suspension accessories for wire, chain or pendant suspensions
The fixing accessories shown are universally suitable for trunking 07690··· in combination with all E-LINE gear trays and corresponding optical components and, in addition, when using trunking units as trunking rails for TRILUX surface-mounted luminaires. Maximum fixing spacing between the fixing accessories shown: 2500 mm. Reduced spacings in case of node arrangements, see page 378. A 01 DSX
A 01 SX
A 01 KX
A 01 PX
E 07
E 03 SX
E 03 KX
D 01 X
E 06
E 04
E 05 N
E 01
Chain suspension A 01 KX Consisting of link chain, galvanised, 1500 mm long, with turnbuckle and suspension clamp E 03 KX.
Pendant suspension A 01 PX Consisting of pendant rod, steel, white, ¶ 13 mm, with vernier clip, stainless steel, for tool-free height compensation of up to 20 mm, 1500 mm long, to be shortened on site, as well as suspension clamp, stainless steel, to be attached to the trunking without tools. Plastic ceiling cap, white.
Decorative wire suspension A 01 DSX Consisting of steel wire, galvanised ¶ 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long and suspension clamp. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. Wire accessory E 07 To realise wire suspensions on site, with steel wire E 06 and suspension clamps E 03 SX. Wire accessory consisting of 12 grommets as wire protection in the suspension area, together with 12 pressure clamps to make suspension eyelets with pliers (e.g. Klauke K 39 or Cimco BH), recess size 10 mm. Steel wire E 06 ¶ 1.75 mm, galvanised, 20 m long, with quick-acting glue to seal the wire ends from splicing when shortened. Only to be used in combination with accessory E 07.
Wire suspension A 01 SX Consisting of steel wire, galvanised ¶ 1.75 mm, 1500 mm long and suspension clamp E 03 SX. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. Suspension clamp E 03 SX For wire suspensions in combination with accessories E 06 and E 07. Stainless steel, to be attached to the trunking without tools. Wire length fully adjustable without tools. Link chain E 04 Galvanised, 20 m long, to be shortened on site.
Suspension clamp E 03 KX For chain suspensions, stainless steel, to be attached to the trunking without tools. Turnbuckle E 05 N For height compensation in chain link length as well as a chain quick-action lock.
Fixing clamp D 01 X Stainless steel, with slotted plate for direct ceiling mounting, to snap the trunking into place without tools. Distance between trunking and fixing surface 9 mm. Ceiling fixing plate E 01 Sheet steel, galvanised, with safety spring hook to attach chains, wires or pendant rods without tools.
For safety reasons, fixing accessories must be able to support five times the weight of the luminaires to be mounted on them. In case the maximum fixing spacings are retained this results in loads of 20 kg maximum per suspension point. All suspension accessories in the E-LINE range are therefore designed for at least 100 kg weight load. Fixing accessories provided on site such as dowels, ceiling hooks, etc. should meet with these requirements.
Vernier clip for increased flexibility The vernier clip of the pendant suspensions in stainless steel can be removed or attached to the pendant without tools. Thus, pendant rods can easily be adapted to reduced suspension lengths on site.
379
E-LINE Gear trays – IP 20
Application For non-specific, passive or tertiary building areas with general illumination requirements, e.g. storage rooms, technical rooms or ancillary rooms without continuously occupied workplaces.
Reference Gear tray 7691/36 EU 7691/36 E 7691/36 ED 7691/58 EU 7691/58 E 7691/58 ED
Lamps 1x36W 1x36W 1x36W 1x58W 1x58W 1x58W
IP rating IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Ballast KVG E ED KVG E ED
System rating 45W 36W 36W 70W 55W 55W
≈kg 1.3 1.1 1.3 2.0 1.4 1.6
Reference Gear tray 7692/36 EU 7692/36 E 7692/36 ED 7692/58 EU 7692/58 E 7692/58 ED
Lamps 2x36W 2x36W 2x36W 2x58W 2x58W 2x58W
IP rating IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Ballast KVG E ED KVG E ED
System rating 90W 72W 72W 140W 110W 110W
≈kg 2.0 1.4 1.4 3.0 1.6 1.6
Gear trays Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the trunking by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. With low-loss ballasts. ···EU With conventional ballast. ···E With electronic control gear. ···ED With dimmable electronic control gear with 1-10 V interface.
Electrical connection Electrical connection is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the trunking. Lamp circuit connections can be set to each phase conductor without tools.
Data table No. 2131 for gear tray 768···, 769··· DIN 5040 B - ƒu = 0.71 2 - ƒsu = 0.39 1 - ƒso = 0.29
Battens in IP 20 E-LINE battens in IP 20 consist of trunking rails and gear trays which can be combined with conventional ballasts, electronic control gear and dimmable electronic control gear. Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Lamp characteristics 444
380
All further optical accessories as described on the following pages 382 to 409 are based on the battens.
63
92
C 0 - C 180
87
769··· To observe IP 20. 768··· With dust-protection joints to observe IP 50. 768···D/··· For production sites exposed to fire hazards. IP 50 version with impact-resistant lamp protection tubes and electronic control gear (E) meeting increased thermal safety requirements.
101
Tool-free phase selection Female connectors on the through-wiring and additional male connectors on the gear tray allow for automatic electrical contact when inserting the gear tray into the trunking. Tool-free adjustable slide contacts of the male connector allow the selection of the desired phase conductor and the easy allocation of the individual lamp circuits to the switching groups. In case of dimmable control gear, the 7-pole connector socket also assures the connection to the 1-10 V electronic control gear interface.
E-LINE Gear trays – IP 50
Reference Gear tray 7681/58 7681/58 E 7681 D/58 E
Lamps 1x58W 1x58W 1x58W
IP rating IP 50 IP 50 IP 50
Ballast VVG E E
System rating 66W 55W 55W
≈kg 2.0 1.4 1.7
Reference Gear tray 7682/58 7682/58 E 7682 D/58 E
Lamps 2x58W 2x58W 2x58W
IP rating IP 50 IP 50 IP 50
Ballast VVG E E
System rating 132W 110W 110W
≈kg 3.0 1.6 2.4
652d ]o Degree of protect. Data table No. 2131 for gear tray 768···/58, 769···
105
Data table no. 2131 105
C 0 - C 180
IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
DIN 5040 B - ƒu = 0.71 2 - ƒsu = 0.39 1 - ƒso = 0.29 63
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
116
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.0 5.0 5.9 6.9 8.6 10 15 19
4.8 6.2 7.4 8.5 9.6 12 14 18 23
5.0 6.6 8.3 9.8 11 14 17 24 31
7.9 10 12 14 16 20 23 31 39
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray
Battens in IP 50 Special E-LINE gear trays in IP 50 offer a safe and permanent protection against the ingression of dust. They can be combined with all radial reflectors and the respective optical accessories, in accordance with their IP rating and application suitability. IP 50 is respected in combination with all available E-LINE trunking units. When ordering simply add special trunking end caps 07680 E-R and trunking connection gaskets 07680 KD for the mechanical trunking couplings.
Version D E-LINE gear trays in version ···D, equipped as standard with lamp protection tubes in polycarbonate, offer efficient protection in case of increased mechanical stress.
1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E 1 x 58 W ”D“ 2 x 58 W ”D“
characteristics ‡LB 1.55 1.00 0.84 0.54 1.63 1.04 0.88 0.56 1.33 0.72
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.96 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.96 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.75 0.69
0.68 0.68 0.60 0.60 0.68 0.68 0.60 0.60 0.54 0.44
indirect ULOR
0.27 0.27 0.34 0.34 0.27 0.27 0.34 0.34 0.21 0.25
Technical information see page 440.
Equipped as standard with electronic control gear and rated IP 50, these versions are predestined for use in production sites exposed to fire hazards.
381
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Trapezium-shaped reflector T
Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls and storage rooms. Reflector T Universally suitable for single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays in IP 20. Trapeziumshaped reflector made of sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Due to increased operating times of the lighting installation, printing works require economic lighting systems. Trapezium-shaped E-LINE reflectors with increased luminous efficiency and gear trays equipped with efficient electronic control gear create the conditions for minimised energy consumption.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
382
Ordering example: continuous line (5 lengths) with reflectors T 5 gear trays 7691/58 E 5 reflectors 07690 T/58 4 sets of reflector connectors 07690 RVT 2 reflector end caps 07690 RKT Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Reflector end caps Tool-free adjustable reflector end caps in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised ABS form a decorative conclusion of trapezium-shaped reflectors T at continuousline ends or at transitions to blanking covers.
Reflector connectors Reflector connectors in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised ABS assure precise alignment and connection of trapeziumshaped E-LINE reflectors T at joints of non-interrupted continuous lines.
Reflector end caps to be ordered separately.
Reflector connectors to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x36W 1x58W
07690 T/36 Reflector T 07690 T/58 Reflector T Reflector accessories 07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RVT Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
07690 T/36 Reflector T 07690 T/58 Reflector T Reflector accessories 07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RVT Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x36W 2x58W
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2132 for combination 769··· +07690T/··· DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.56 0 - ƒso = 0.00
146
Data table no. 2132 146
C 0 - C 180
IP 20
209
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
209
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11 15 20
4.9 6.2 7.3 8.4 9.6 12 14 19 24
5.0 6.6 8.3 10 12 15 18 26 33
8.1 10 12 14 16 20 23 32 40
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E
Universal reflectors Trapezium-shaped reflectors T are designed as universal reflectors, to be used for both single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays in IP 20. In addition, the reflector accessories such as reflector connectors, reflector end caps and lamella louvres are suitable both for single-lamp and twin-lamp versions.
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.82 0.54 1.59 1.04 0.85 0.56
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.75 0.74 0.70 0.69 0.75 0.74 0.70 0.69
0.75 0.74 0.70 0.69 0.75 0.74 0.70 0.69
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
E-LINE continuous lines with reflectors T thus present a uniform design, independent from the gear tray equipment.
383
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Trapezium-shaped reflector T and lamella louvre T-RW Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, sales areas, supermarkets and training rooms. Reflector T Universally suitable for single-lamp and twin-lamp gear trays in IP 20. Trapeziumshaped reflector made of sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. Lamella louvre T-RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 07690 T···. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Detailed visual tasks such as sorting jobs require glare-free lighting. Reflectors with lamella louvres within the E-LINE range are predestined to correspond to these demanding visual tasks.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
384
Ordering example: continuous line (8 lengths) with reflectors T and lamella louvres T-RW 8 gear trays 7691/36 E 8 reflectors 07690 T/36 8 lamella louvres 07690 T-RW/36 7 sets of reflector connectors 07690 RVT 2 reflector end caps 07690 RKT Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Rapid mounting thanks to stainless steel snap fasteners Stainless steel snap fasteners, to be connected without tools, allow for rapid mounting of all gear trays and reflectors of the E-LINE range. Removal of the reflectors is equally facilitated: the integrated self-locking device prevents inadvertent loosening of the gear trays when handling the fasteners.
Mounting and maintenance made easy Numerous E-LINE details offer practiceoriented functionality, thus saving time and money. Lamella louvres, specular louvres and parabolic louvres can be hung on the reflectors from either side, facilitating maintenance and rapid lamp replacement.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x36W 1x58W 1x36W 1x58W
07690 T/36 Reflector T 07690 T/58 Reflector T 07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW Reflector accessories 07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RVT Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
07690 T/36 Reflector T 07690 T/58 Reflector T 07690 T-RW/36 Lamella louvre T-RW 07690 T-RW/58 Lamella louvre T-RW Reflector accessories 07690 RKT Reflector end cap 07690 RVT Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x36W 2x58W 2x36W 2x58W
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2133 for combination 769··· +07690T/··· +07690RW/··· DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.56 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Data table no. 2133
209
146
146
C 0 - C 180
IP 20
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
209
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.2 4.3 5.4 6.5 7.6 9.7 12 17 22
5.2 6.6 7.9 9.0 10 13 15 21 26
5.3 7.1 8.9 11 13 16 20 28 36
8.6 11 13 15 17 21 25 34 43
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.0 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E
Continuous lines in module 510 mm The new E-LINE wiring with female connectors premounted at a regular 510 mm spacing supports continuous lines with a modular spacing of luminaire inserts of 510 mm or a corresponding multiple dimension. Installation is rapid and easy: Perforations in the trunking units facilitate insertion of female connectors on site, defining the mounting site and fixing the connectors.
Continuous lines with variable spacings between the gear trays Variable continuous lines allow variable lengths of blanking covers to be inserted between the luminaire inserts. Through-wiring on site can be effected by means of 5-pole or 7-pole flatband cables.
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.81 0.54 1.59 1.04 0.85 0.56
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.68 0.67 0.64 0.62 0.68 0.67 0.64 0.62
0.68 0.67 0.64 0.62 0.68 0.67 0.64 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
During mounting the self-cutting connector sockets are fixed to the flatband cable by flat nose pliers and then snapped onto the trunking. An alternative wiring of variable systems can also be realised by means of a 5-conductor throughwiring set and conventional connectors. See page 377.
385
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R
Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls and sales areas. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
A lighting conception for high halls could be realised by means of spotlights providing the basic illumination and additional task-oriented continuous lines. E-LINE presents a multitude of photometrical variants offering lighting solutions which are specifically adapted to the respective visual tasks.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
386
Ordering example: continuous line (4 lengths) in IP 50 with reflectors R 4 gear trays 7681/58 E 4 reflectors 07691 R/58 3 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RV 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK
Reflector end caps Tool-free adjustable reflector end caps in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UVstabilised ABS form a decorative conclusion of radial reflectors at continuous-line ends or at transitions to blanking covers.
Reflector connectors Reflector connectors in impact-resistant, PVC-free and UV-stabilised ABS assure precise alignment and connection of radial E-LINE reflectors R at joints of non-interrupted continuous lines.
Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Reflector end caps to be ordered separately.
Reflector connectors can subsequently be attached to premounted reflectors. Reflector connectors to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x36W 1x58W
07691 R/36 Reflector R 07691 R/58 Reflector R Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/36 Reflector R 07692 R/58 Reflector R Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x36W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
652do Degree of protect. Data table No. 2134 for combination 768···, 769··· +0769···R/··· DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.52 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Data table no. 2134 129
115
C 0 - C 180
IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
175
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6 8.3 10 14 18
4.5 5.8 7.0 8.1 9.1 11 13 18 22
4.7 6.3 7.8 9.4 11 14 17 24 31
7.5 9.7 12 13 15 19 22 30 37
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray
Stainless steel snap fasteners Snap fasteners assure the mechanical connection of the E-LINE trunking, gear trays and reflectors. They can be operated without tools and are completely integrated into the gear tray, avoiding time-consuming positioning of fastening elements in case of the variable system.
1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E 1 x 58 W ”D“ 2 x 58 W ”D“
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.79 0.52 1.59 1.04 0.83 0.54 1.33 0.69
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.84 0.82 0.81 0.79 0.84 0.82 0.81 0.79 0.64 0.62
0.84 0.82 0.81 0.79 0.84 0.82 0.81 0.79 0.64 0.62
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
All fastening components are made of stainless steel, rust-proof and ageing-resistant.
387
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R and lamella louvre RW
Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, sales areas and training rooms. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R, 0769··· G, 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
A lighting level adapted to specific visual tasks in production facilities can often be realised by means of interrupted continuous lines. E-LINE prewired trunking units allow the realisation of blanking covers in lamp length, whereas trunking units to be wired on site also permit spacings at any length between the gear trays.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
388
Ordering example: continuous line (10 lengths) with reflectors R and lamella louvres RW 10 gear trays 7691/36 E 10 reflectors 07691 R/36 10 lamella louvres 07691 RW/36 9 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RV 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Tool-free mounting The E-LINE trunking can be mounted rapidly, either directly to the ceiling or suspended by means of chains, wires or pendant rods. To do so, the stainless steel clips of suspension or ceiling fixing accessories are simply snapped onto the upper plane of the trunking, without tools. Cable holders can be mounted in the same way, allowing the guidance of up to four sheathed cables at the upper plane of the trunking, in addition to the continuous-line wiring.
Decorative wire suspensions The E-LINE accessory range includes ceiling fixing systems as well as chain, pendant and wire suspensions assuring a permanently secure retention of the continuous lines, thanks to superior materials and design. These accessories equally include decorative wire suspensions, extending the E-LINE application range to demanding architectural environments.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x36W 1x58W 1x36W 1x58W
07691 R/36 Reflector R 07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/36 Reflector R 07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 RW/36 Lamella louvre RW 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x36W 2x58W 2x36W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
652do Degree of protect. Data table No. 2135 for combination 768···, 769··· +0769···R/··· +0769···RW/··· DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.54 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Data table no. 2135
175
147
133
C 0 - C 180
IP 20, IP 50, IP 50 D
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.1 5.1 6.1 7.1 9.0 11 16 20
4.7 6.1 7.4 8.5 9.7 12 14 19 24
5.1 6.8 8.4 10 12 15 18 26 34
7.9 10 12 14 16 20 23 32 40
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray
Rapid connection of the through-wiring E-LINE is designed for rapid electrical connection. Installation is facilitated by means of standard connectors or sockets at the ends of pre-mounted through-wiring sets. These 7-pole components do not only allow for rapid connection of three-phase current mains supply lines but also for connection of two additional conductors, e.g. control lines for dimming. The corresponding mains cables can equally be connected to the socket.
Mains connection Mains cables can be connected to the sockets of the through-wiring set by means of knock-out openings in the end caps of the trunkings.
1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E 1 x 58 W ”D“ 2 x 58 W ”D“
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.76 0.51 1.59 1.04 0.80 0.53 1.33 0.68
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.75 0.74 0.75 0.73 0.75 0.74 0.75 0.73 0.58 0.57
0.75 0.74 0.75 0.73 0.75 0.74 0.75 0.73 0.58 0.57
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
The mains cable can be alternatively connected to the socket of a wiring connector in the continuous line: ceilingoriented knock-out openings at the beginning of the trunking enable cable entry at all couplings.
Cable holders are also available as accessories for installation of through-wiring sets on site.
389
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R and specular reflector SB, wide-angle light distribution Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, machine workstations and precision assembly. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 SB/58 Specular reflector SB Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 SB/58 Specular reflector SB Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Specular reflectors SB Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium for wide-angle light distribution. To be inserted into the reflector 0769··· R without tools. Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Data table No. 2136 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···SB/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.52 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
390
Ordering example: individual luminaire with reflector R, specular reflector SB and lamella louvre RW 1 gear tray 7691/58 E 1 reflector 07691 R/58 1 set of specular reflectors 07691 SB/58 1 lamella louvre 07691 RW/58 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
175
129
115
C 0 - C 180
258
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R, specular reflector SB, wide-angle light distribution, and lamella louvre RW Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2x58W
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 SB/58 Specular reflector SB 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection IP 20* *IP 50 possible – please consider dust risk. Data table No. 2137 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···SB/58 +0769···RW/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.56 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Data table no. 2136
175
147
133
C 0 - C 180
1
Data table no. 2137 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.7 4.6 5.5 6.4 8.1 9.8 14 18
4.5 5.7 6.8 7.8 8.9 11 13 18 22
4.6 6.1 7.6 9.1 11 13 16 23 30
7.5 9.6 11 13 15 18 21 29 36
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric ‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
Technical information see page 440.
LIGHTGATE LIGHTGATE stands for an energy-saving lighting management system – preferably used with TRILUX luminaires equipped with dimmable electronic control gear. LIGHTGATE embodies an individual, manually operated lighting control and a daylight-dependent regulation with integrated presence detection, see page 431.
7.7 10 12 14 16 19 22 31 39
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.52 1.04 0.54
4.9 6.5 8.1 9.7 11 15 18 26 32
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
4.6 6.0 7.1 8.2 9.3 11 13 18 23
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
2.9 3.9 4.9 5.8 6.8 8.7 11 15 19
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.51 1.04 0.53
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.75 0.73 0.75 0.73
0.75 0.73 0.75 0.73
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Mounting and maintenance made easy Numerous E-LINE details offer practice-oriented functionality, thus saving time and money. Lamella louvres, specular louvres and parabolic louvres can be hung on the reflectors from either side, facilitating maintenance and rapid lamp replacement.
391
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R and specular reflector SA, asymmetrical light distribution Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls as well as wall, blackboard and shelf lighting. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 SA/58 Specular reflector SA Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 SA/58 Specular reflector SA Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
Specular reflector SA Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium for asymmetrical light distribution. To be inserted into the reflector 0769··· R without tools. Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Data table No. 2138 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···SA/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.52 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
392
Ordering example: continuous line (2 lengths) with reflectors R, specular reflectors SA and lamella louvres RW 2 gear trays 7691/58 E 2 reflectors 07691 R/58 2 specular reflectors 07691 SA/58 2 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58 1 set of reflector connectors 07691 RV 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
175
129
115
C 0 - C 180
258
Asymmetrical luminous intensity distribution Asymmetrical specular reflectors guide the luminous flux in the pronounced directions, for increased illuminances on vertical surfaces. They can be inserted in the radial reflectors of the E-LINE system and can also be combined with white lamella louvres in case luminance limitation is required.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R, specular reflector SA, asymmetrical light distribution, and lamella louvre RW Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Tunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2x58W
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 SA/58 Specular reflector SA 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection IP 20* *IP 50 possible – please consider dust risk. Data table No. 2139 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···SA/58 +0769···RW/58
Data table no. 2138
DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.55 0 - ƒso = 0.00
175
147
133
C 0 - C 180
1
Data table no. 2139 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.8 3.7 4.6 5.5 6.4 8.1 9.8 14 18
4.4 5.7 6.8 7.8 8.9 11 13 18 22
4.6 6.1 7.6 9.1 11 13 16 23 30
7.3 9.5 11 13 15 18 21 29 36
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
500 600 700
400
300
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
1.60 m
600 500
2.70 m
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
4.9 6.5 8.1 9.8 11 15 18 26 33
7.7 9.9 12 14 16 19 22 31 39
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.52 1.04 0.54
4.6 6.0 7.1 8.2 9.4 11 13 18 23
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
for no. of luminaires
2.9 3.9 4.9 5.9 6.9 8.7 11 16 20
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
700
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric 800
En Room height H
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.51 1.04 0.53
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.75 0.73 0.75 0.73
0.75 0.73 0.75 0.73
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Example: Wall zone lighting with a continuous line (2 lengths) – illuminance distribution (indications in lux) Room height: 3.00 m Distance to wall: 1.10 m Gear tray: 7692/58 E Reflectors: 07692 R/58 Specular reflectors: 07692 SA/58 Lamp luminous flux: 5200 lm
393
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R and specular reflector ST, narrow-angle light distribution Application Workshops, assembly halls, supermarkets, exhibition halls, machine workstations and precision assembly. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 ST/58 Specular reflector ST Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 ST/58 Specular reflector ST Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Specular reflectors ST Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium for narrow-angle light distribution. To be inserted into the reflector 0769··· R without tools. Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Data table No. 2140 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···ST/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.59 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
394
Ordering example: continuous line (14 lengths) with reflectors R, specular reflectors ST and lamella louvres RW 14 gear trays 7691/58 E 14 reflectors 07691 R/58 14 sets of specular reflectors 07691 ST/58 14 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58 13 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RV 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
175
129
115
C 0 - C 180
258
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R, specular reflector ST, narrow-angle light distribution, and lamella louvre RW Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W 1x58W
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2x58W
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 ST/58 Specular reflector ST 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection IP 20* *IP 50 possible – please consider dust risk. Data table No. 2141 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···ST/58 +0769···RW/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.60 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Data table no. 2140
175
147
133
C 0 - C 180
1
Data table no. 2141 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.4 4.3 5.2 6.1 7.8 9.4 14 18
3.8 5.0 6.1 7.2 8.2 10 12 17 21
4.3 5.7 7.2 8.7 10 13 16 23 29
6.3 8.4 10 12 14 17 20 27 34
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
6.8 9.1 11 13 15 18 22 30 38
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.83 0.81 0.83 0.81
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.5 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.51 1.04 0.53
4.7 6.3 7.9 9.5 11 14 17 25 32
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
4.1 5.4 6.7 7.8 8.9 11 13 18 23
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
2.8 3.8 4.7 5.7 6.7 8.5 10 15 19
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.51 1.04 0.53
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.75 0.74 0.75 0.74
0.75 0.74 0.75 0.74
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Electronic control gear Electronic control gear used in TRILUX luminaires offers increased lighting comfort and technical advantages thanks to the following characteristics: energy-saving operation, lamppreserving rapid lamp start, flicker-free light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life (15 000 hours in case of linear fluorescent lamps) also for applications with increased switching frequency allows for benefits in money’s worth, thanks to a significant reduction of costs for lamps, lamp disposal and lamp replacement. All gear trays in IP 20 and IP 50 of the E-LINE range are available with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E.
395
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Radial reflector R and prismatic diffuser P
Application Sales areas, showrooms, lounges, offices, precision assembly, production facilities, workshops and training rooms. Reflector R Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. Prismatic diffuser P Convex-shaped diffuser made of PLEXIGLAS, with computer-calculated longitudinal prisms. Safe retention by means of stainless steel clips. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R, 0769··· G, 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
396
Ordering example: individual luminaire with reflector R and prismatic diffuser P 1 gear tray 7691/58 E 1 reflector 07691 R/58 1 prismatic diffuser 07691 P/58 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
E-LINE individual luminaires In addition to variable and modular continuous-line systems the E-LINE range is equally suited to the installation of individual luminaires. These are based on a single-length trunking pre-equipped with integrated 7-conductor wiring and 7-pole female connector. Individual luminaires can therefore also be combined with gear trays equipped with dimmable control gear or emergency light inserts, without having to insert additional cables as well as connection terminals into the trunking on site. E-LINE individual luminaires present an alternative to conventional reflector, diffuser or louvre luminaires. In combination with E-LINE continuous lines they are specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations or lighting of separated room zones. Subsequent changes of the area designation can be transferred to the E-LINE unit with additional accessories.
Reference
Designation
07691 R/58 Reflector R 07691 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflecor end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W 1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 R/58 Reflector R 07692 P/58 Prismatic diffuser P Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection IP 20* *IP 50 possible – please consider dust risk. C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2142 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···R/58 +0769···P/58
Data table no. 2142 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 0.98 4 - ƒsu = 0.55 0 - ƒso = 0.53
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.0 5.1 6.1 7.1 9.1 11 16 21
4.6 6.0 7.2 8.4 9.5 12 14 19 24
5.0 6.7 8.4 10 12 15 19 27 34
7.6 10 12 14 16 20 23 32 40
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.53 1.04 0.55
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.71 0.68 0.71 0.68
0.71 0.68 0.71 0.68
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
E-LINE prismatic diffusers The convex-shaped E-LINE diffusers in high-quality, non-yellowing PLEXIGLAS are perfectly adapted to the radial reflectors. Thanks to computer-calculated longitudinal prisms the photometric characteristics are equally convincing. The increased ageing resistance of PLEXIGLAS and the long-standing TRILUX experience in plastics processing assure a maximum service life of E-LINE diffusers.
Combination with specular reflectors or perforated reflectors G Distinctive luminous intensity distributions and above-average glare limitation can be realised by combining prismatic diffusers with additional specular reflectors. Specular reflectors are available in versions for wide-angle, narrow-angle or asymmetrical light distribution. In combination with perforated reflectors offering an indirect component of approx. 10 % prismatic diffusers promote a particularly well-balanced brightness distribution within the room.
397
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Perforated radial reflector G
Application Workshops, precision assembly, sales areas, supermarkets and training rooms. Reflector G Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. With defined perforation for balanced uplighting. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W
07691 G/58 Perforated reflector G Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
07692 G/58 Perforated reflector G Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x58W 2-lamp 2-lamp
Lamella louvre RW Sheet steel, white. To be used in reflectors 0769··· R, 0769··· G, 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Data table No. 2143 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···G/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 0.90 3 - ƒsu = 0.49 0 - ƒso = 0.37
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
398
Ordering example: continuous line (7 lengths) with perforated reflectors G and lamella louvres RW 7 gear trays 7691/58 E 7 reflectors 07691 G/58 7 lamella louvres 07691 RW/58 6 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RV 2 reflector end caps 07691 RK Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
175
129
115
C 0 - C 180
258
Perforated reflectors for balanced ceiling lighting Perforated reflectors in version G or GH convince thanks to a well-balanced indirect component. They create a balanced brightness distribution within the room which is specially recommended for visual tasks requiring a frequent change of views between horizontal and vertical surfaces. These applications include sales areas and training rooms.
Combination with prismatic diffusers P PLEXIGLAS prismatic diffusers are perfectly adapted to the perforated radial reflectors G and GH and thus emphasise the harmonious impression of such a combination.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Perforated radial reflector G and lamella louvre RW Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W 1x58W
07691 G/58 Perforated reflector G 07691 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07691 RK Reflector end cap 07691 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 2x58W 2x58W
07692 G/58 Perforated reflector G 07692 RW/58 Lamella louvre RW Reflector accessories 07692 RK Reflector end cap 07692 RV Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection IP 20* *IP 50 possible – please consider dust risk. Data table No. 2144 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···G/58 +0769···RW/58 DIN 5040 B - ƒu = 0.86 4 - ƒsu = 0.52 1 - ƒso = 0.39
Data table no. 2143
175
147
133
C 0 - C 180
1
Data table no. 2144 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.2 4.2 5.3 6.3 7.3 9.3 11 16 20
5.0 6.5 7.8 9.0 10 12 15 20 25
5.3 7.0 8.8 11 12 15 19 27 34
8.4 11 13 15 17 21 24 33 42
Calculation parameters
Nice surroundings Thanks to their indirect component, perforated reflectors create a well-balanced brightness distribution within the room. The friendly visual ambience and the attractive design make this E-LINE version the perfect choice for sales-promoting illumination of shop premises.
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
8.8 11 14 16 18 22 26 36 45
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.77 0.79 0.77 0.79
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.70 0.69 0.70 0.69
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.49 1.04 0.51
5.6 7.5 9.4 11 13 17 20 29 37
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
5.3 6.9 8.2 9.5 11 13 16 22 27
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
3.4 4.5 5.6 6.8 7.9 10 12 17 22
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
indirect ULOR
0.07 0.10 0.07 0.10
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.49 1.04 0.51
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.71 0.73 0.71 0.73
0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61
indirect ULOR
0.10 0.12 0.10 0.12
Technical information see page 440.
399
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: High reflector RH and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV Application Precision assembly, precision mechanics, training rooms, schools, offices, laboratories, showrooms and sales areas. Reflector RH For gear trays in IP 20. Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. High form, especially recommended for combination with louvres RSV, RMV, RPV. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 1x36W High reflector RH 1x58W Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x36W
07691 RH/36 07691 RH/58 07691 RSV/36 Reflector accessories 07691 RSV/58 Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x58W Reflector accessories 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 1-lamp 07691 RVH Reflector connector 1-lamp Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 2x36W High reflector RH 2x58W Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x36W Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x58W
07692 RH/36 07692 RH/58 07692 RSV/36 07692 RSV/58 Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 07692 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV For narrow/wide-angle light distribution, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, made of anodised aluminium. To be used in reflectors 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
400
Data table No. 2145 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···RH/58 +0769···RSV/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 5 - ƒsu = 0.68 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Ordering example: continuous line (10 lengths) with high reflectors RH and semi-specular cross-blade louvres RSV 10 gear trays 7691/58 E 10 reflectors 07691 RH/58 10 semi-specular cross-blade louvres 07691 RSV/58 9 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RVH 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
176
142
C 0 - C 180
143
Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV Made of semi-specular anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. High visual comfort due to a uniform louvre appearance with reduced brightness contrasts. To be used in reflectors 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
258
Emergency lighting Special gear trays with emergency light sockets, single batteries or switching relays allow for an easy integration of emergency lighting in E-LINE continuous lines or individual luminaires. Installation is facilitated thanks to 7-conductor through-wiring sets, either pre-installed or installed on site. In addition to the three-phase current mains supply, the units can also include the wiring of the safety circuit or the charging circuit. Tool-free connection of gear trays and through-wiring sets within the trunking is effected by means of 7-pole connectors.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: High reflector RH and semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 1x36W High reflector RH 1x58W Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 1x36W Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 1x58W
07691 RH/36 07691 RH/58 07691 RMV/36 07691 RMV/58 Reflector accessories 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 07691 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 2x36W High reflector RH 2x58W Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 2x36W Semi-specular parabolic louvre RMV 2x58W
07692 RH/36 07692 RH/58 07692 RMV/36 07692 RMV/58 Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 07692 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2146 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···RH/58 +0769···RMV/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 5 - ƒsu = 0.70 0 - ƒso = 0.00
142
Data table no. 2145 143
C 0 - C 180
176
1
Data table no. 2146 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.1 5.2 6.3 7.5 9.6 12 17 22
4.4 5.9 7.1 8.3 9.6 12 14 20 25
5.0 6.9 8.7 11 12 16 20 29 37
7.4 9.8 12 14 16 20 23 33 42
Calculation parameters
Glare-free lighting with semi-specular crossblade louvres RSV Visual details, low contrasts or frequent change of views require increased illuminances and freedom from glare, e.g. in case of precision mechanics, electronic production or testing of goods. RSV louvres have been designed for these visual tasks: The concave-profiled cross blades reproduce a parabolic contour, section by section, which allows for a particularly effective light direction. Lighting installations with RSV louvres can be set to more than 1000 lx, with complete glare limitation.
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
4.8 6.6 8.4 10 12 16 19 28 37
7.2 8.9 11 13 15 19 22 31 41
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.64 0.63
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.52 1.00 0.76 0.50 1.58 1.04 0.79 0.52
4.3 5.3 6.3 7.9 9.0 11 14 19 25
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.8 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E
2.9 4.0 5.1 6.2 7.3 9.4 11 17 22
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.75 0.49 1.58 1.04 0.78 0.51
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.64 0.63 0.65 0.64 0.64 0.63 0.65 0.64
0.64 0.63 0.65 0.64 0.64 0.63 0.65 0.64
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
401
∑
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: High reflector RH and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV
Application Production facilities or workshops with CNC machines, switchgear control rooms, offices and rooms with DSE workstations. Reflector RH For gear trays in IP 20. Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. High form, especially recommended for combination with louvres RSV, RMV, RPV. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60°, thus corresponding fully to LG 3, Cat. II. To be used in reflectors 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
402
Ordering example: individual luminaire with high reflector RH and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1 gear tray 7691/58 E 1 reflector 07691 RH/58 1 highly-specular parabolic louvre 07691 RPV/58 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
E-LINE individual luminaires In addition to variable and modular continuous-line systems the E-LINE range is equally suited to the installation of individual luminaires. These are based on a single-length trunking pre-equipped with integrated 7-conductor wiring and 7-pole female connector. Individual luminaires can therefore also be combined with gear trays equipped with dimmable control gear or emergency light inserts, without having to insert additional cables as well as connection terminals into the trunking on site. E-LINE individual luminaires present an alternative to conventional reflector, diffuser or louvre luminaires. In combination with E-LINE continuous lines they are specially recommended for applications such as individual lighting of workstations or lighting of separated room zones. Subsequent changes of the area designation can be transferred to the E-LINE unit with additional accessories.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 1x36W High reflector RH 1x58W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x36W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x58W
07691 RH/36 07691 RH/58 07691 RPV/36 07691 RPV/58 Reflector accessories 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 07691 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray High reflector RH 2x36W High reflector RH 2x58W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x36W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x58W
07692 RH/36 07692 RH/58 07692 RPV/36 07692 RPV/58 Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 07692 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2147 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···RH/58 +0769···RPV/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 5 - ƒsu = 0.68 0 - ƒso = 0.00
142
Data table no. 2147 143
C 0 - C 180
IP 20
176
1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.1 5.2 6.3 7.4 9.5 12 17 22
4.5 5.9 7.1 8.3 9.5 12 14 20 25
5.0 6.8 8.6 10 12 16 19 28 36
7.4 9.8 12 14 16 20 23 32 41
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.9 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 36 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 36 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 36 W E 1 x 58 W E 2 x 36 W E 2 x 58 W E
Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV With DSE units being a part of modern production sites, artificial lighting for these areas must meet with demanding visual requirements and avoid contrastreducing reflections of the luminaires on the monitors.
characteristics ‡LB 1.52 1.00 0.75 0.49 1.58 1.04 0.78 0.51
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.65 0.64 0.66 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.66 0.65
0.65 0.64 0.66 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.66 0.65
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV are specially designed for LG3, CAT I / II applications to guarantee an optimum luminance limitation in conjunction with complex lighting challenges.
403
Reflector GH For gear trays in IP 20. Radial sheet steel reflector, galvanised, with white polyester coating. With defined perforation for balanced uplighting. High form, especially recommended for combination with louvres RSV, RMV, RPV. Fixed to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners without tools. Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV For narrow/wide-angle light distribution, with graduated concave-profiled cross blades, made of anodised aluminium. To be used in reflectors 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance. Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium with a surface purity of 99.98 %. Luminance limited to L ≤ 200 cd/m2 at reference angle ¥ ≥ 60°, thus corresponding fully to LG 3, Cat. II. To be used in reflectors 0769··· RH, 0769··· GH. Can be hung on the reflector for easy maintenance.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
404
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray Perforated high reflector GH 1x58W Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 1x58W
07691 GH/58 07691 RSV/58 Reflector accessories 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 07691 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
C 0 - C 180
1-lamp 1-lamp
Data table No. 2148 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···GH/58 +0769···RSV/58 DIN 5040 B - ƒu = 0.86 5 - ƒsu = 0.67 1 - ƒso = 0.46
Ordering example: continuous line (3 lengths) with high perforated reflectors GH and semi-specular cross-blade louvres RSV 3 gear trays 7691/58 E 3 reflectors 07691 GH/58 3 semi-specular cross-blade louvres 07691 RSV/58 2 sets of reflector connectors 07691 RVH 2 reflector end caps 07691 RKH Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Reference
176
Designation
···for gear tray Perforated high reflector GH 2x58W Semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV 2x58W
07692 GH/58 07692 RSV/58 Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 07692 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
142
Application Precision assembly, precision mechanics, training rooms, schools and offices. RPV: Recommended for areas with normal DSE usage.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Perforated high reflector GH and semi-specular cross-blade louvre RSV
143
∑
258
Perforated reflectors with louvres RSV or RPV Perforated reflectors with semi-specular cross-blade louvres RSV provide economic lighting and also shine out thanks to a decorative bright appearance. Perforated reflectors in combination with highly-specular parabolic louvres RPV are specially recommended for illumination of DSE environments.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Perforated high reflector GH and highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV Reference
Designation
···for gear tray Perforated high reflector GH 1x58W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 1x58W
07691 GH/58 07691 RPV/58 Reflector accessories 07691 RKH Reflector end cap 07691 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
1-lamp 1-lamp
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray Perforated high reflector GH 2x58W Highly-specular parabolic louvre RPV 2x58W
07692 GH/58 07692 RPV/58 Reflector accessories 07692 RKH Reflector end cap 07692 RVH Reflector connector Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
2-lamp 2-lamp
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2149 for combination 769···/58··· +0769···GH/58 +0769···RPV/58 DIN 5040 B - ƒu = 0.88 5 - ƒsu = 0.69 2 - ƒso = 0.53
142
Data table no. 2148 143
C 0 - C 180
176
1
Data table no. 2149 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
258
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.7 5.0 6.3 7.7 9.0 12 14 21 27
5.5 6.9 8.2 10 11 14 17 24 30
6.1 8.3 11 13 15 19 23 34 45
9.2 12 14 17 19 24 28 39 51
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
6.3 8.6 11 13 16 20 25 36 47
9.3 12 14 17 20 25 29 41 53
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.61 0.65 0.61 0.65
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.58 0.57 0.58 0.57
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 1.6 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.50 1.04 0.52
5.6 7.0 8.3 10 12 15 18 25 32
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
3.8 5.2 6.6 8.1 9.4 12 15 22 28
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
indirect ULOR
0.03 0.08 0.03 0.08
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.45 1.04 0.47
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.62 0.60 0.62 0.60
0.59 0.52 0.59 0.52
indirect ULOR
0.03 0.08 0.03 0.08
Technical information see page 440.
Combination with parabolic louvres RMV Perforated reflectors GH in high form can also be equipped with semi-specular parabolic louvres RMV. The satin-finish anodised surface creates a uniform louvre appearance which harmonises perfectly with the elegantly brightened outer surface of the perforated reflector GH, making this reflector-louvre combination an excellent choice for architectural applications.
405
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Self-suspended specular reflector STF, narrow/wide-angle light distribution Application Production facilities, workshops and assembly halls. SAF: Recommended for wall and shelf lighting.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W
07690 STF/58 Specular reflector STF Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
07690 STF/58 Specular reflector STF Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
···for gear tray 2x58W
Self-suspended specular reflector STF Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium for narrow/wide-angle light distribution. To be fixed directly to gear trays in IP 20.
Data table No. 2150 for combination 769···/58··· +07690STF/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.60 0 - ƒso = 0.00
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
406
138
C 0 - C 180
138
Self-suspended specular reflector SAF Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium for asymmetrical light distribution. To be fixed directly to gear trays in IP 20.
184
184
Ordering example: continuous line (20 lengths) with self-suspended reflectors STF 20 gear trays 7691/58 E 20 reflectors 07691 STF/58
Self-suspended reflectors Demand-oriented, self-suspended reflectors are available in versions for narrow/wide-angle, extremely narrow-angle or asymmetrical light distribution. They are fixed directly to the gear tray by means of stainless steel snap fasteners.
Trunking see page 374, suspensions see page 379.
Additional reflector accessories such as end caps and connectors are not necessary. A uniform transition to adjacent self-suspended reflectors is assured thanks to the enclosed connection components which can be snapped onto the lower reflector edge without tools.
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Self-suspended specular reflector SAF, asymmetrical light distribution Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 1x58W
07690 SAF/58 Specular reflector SAF Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
Reference
Designation
···for gear tray 2x58W
07690 SAF/58 Specular reflector SAF Trunking and gear trays to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection Data table No. 2151 for combination 769···/58··· +07690SAF/58 DIN 5040 A - ƒu = 1.00 4 - ƒsu = 0.55 0 - ƒso = 0.00
138
Data table no. 2150 138
C 0 - C 180
1
215
Data table no. 2151 1 Number of luminaires
Number of luminaires En Room height H
215
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.6 4.5 5.4 6.3 8.0 9.7 14 18
4.5 5.5 6.3 7.4 8.3 10 12 17 21
4.4 5.9 7.5 8.9 10 13 16 24 31
7.5 9.1 11 12 14 17 20 28 35
Calculation parameters Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
En Room height H
Area A in m2
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
6.7 8.9 11 13 15 20 24 34 44
11 14 16 19 21 26 30 41 52
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.79 0.74 0.79 0.74
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
0.79 0.74 0.79 0.74
Technical information see page 440.
Xmax = 2.4 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric
characteristics
1.00 0.53 1.04 0.56
6.8 8.3 9.7 11 13 16 18 25 31
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Xmax = 2.2 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
4.0 5.3 6.7 8.0 9.2 12 14 20 27
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
In combination with gear tray
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
Calculation parameters ρ v e lp
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire –
for no. of luminaires
IP 20
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
for no. of luminaires In combination with gear tray 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 1 x 58 W E 2 x 58 W E
characteristics ‡LB 1.00 0.55 1.04 0.57
‡L direct DLOR
M 0.85 0.77 0.85 0.77
0.85 0.77 0.85 0.77
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Easy height compensation E-LINE continuous lines convince thanks to easy height compensation when mounting the trunking, without tools. All wire suspensions are equipped with integrated regulation devices for continuous height compensation. The vernier clips of the pendant suspensions further allow the user to shorten pendant rods on site. Chain suspensions are equipped as standard with turnbuckles in chain link length, for rapid height compensation.
407
Applications for E-LINE gear trays: Self-suspended specular reflector HRF, extremely narrow-angle light distribution Application High-bay warehouses, high gangways and high halls. Self-suspended reflector HRF Made of highly-specular anodised aluminium, for extremely narrow-angle light distribution. To be fixed directly to gear trays in IP 20.
Indications Page Trunking / accessories 374 Suspensions 379 Gear trays 380 Emergency light inserts 410 Planning 412 Lighting management system 431 Substitute references for computer calculations 443 Lamp characteristics 444
408
Reference
Designation
07691 HRF/58
Extremely narrow-angle reflector HRF
for gear trays 1 x 58 W
652d Degree of protection
138
Photometric data for combination 7691/58 + 07691 HRF/58
C 0 - C 180
Classification DIN 5040: A - ƒu = 1.00 A - ƒsu = 0.67 A - ƒso = 0.00
223
Lighting of high-bay warehouses Due to missing or reduced daylight, high-bay warehouses are mainly artificially lit. Due to the resulting increased operating times, the use of highly-efficient lamps and economical luminaires is recommended.
Diagrams to determine horizontal illuminances
Luminaires: Non-interrupted continuous line with 16 units 7691/58 + 7691 HRF/58
500
Gear trays with electronic control gear for reduced energy consumption and increased lamp life are perfect for these applications.
500 450 B/2
400
400 350
L
h y x B/2 B
e
Average illuminance E in lx
Lamps: Triphosphor lamps 58 W Luminous flux: LP = 5200 Im Light loss factor: v = 0.8
Illustration 3 Illuminance distribution EP across the gangway, y = 12.5 m
Illustration 2 Average illuminance B/2: on the centre line B = ...: on the whole gangway surface
Illustration 1 Installation sketch Gangway in high-bay warehouse
B=6m 300
300
Point illuminance EP in lx
Installation data Gangway length: L = 25 m Gangway width: B Light point height: h Transverse coordinate: x Longitudinal coordinate: y Evaluation level: e = 0.2 m
250
B=6m 200
200 h=6m
150
100
h = 14 m
100
50 20 0 4
8
12
16
20
Light point height h in m
24
28
IP 20
E-LINE in HRF versions excels with extremely narrow-angle luminous intensity distribution with high light output ratios, allowing efficient realisation of standard-conform illuminances even in case of elevated light point heights.
h = 22 m h = 30 m
50 0 0
1m
2m
3m
Lat. distance x to gangway centre
409
E-LINE Gear trays for emergency lighting
Minimum illuminance
Switching period
Emergency power source Nominal Admissible operating alternatives1) time
Illumination of escape signs
Reference
Meeting rooms Business rooms Exhibition rooms
1 lx
max. 1 s
3h
Permanent switching
7691/58 + E14 7692/58 + E14
Meeting rooms with max. 20 safety luminaires
1 lx
max. 1 s
3h
Single batteries
Schools
1 lx
max. 15 s
3h
Single batteries Permanent Em. power generator switching
Escape routes in working facilities
1 lx
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s, 100 % in 60 s
1h
Single batteries Permanent Em. power generator switching not Specially safenecessary guarded mains
Anti-paniclighting2)
0.5 lx
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s 100 % in 60 s
1h
No information
No information
Workplaces with special risk
min. 0.1Em3) max. 0.5 s min. 15 lx
Time of risk
Single batteries Specially safeguarded mains
Permanent switching not necessary
6
6
4
5 lx
4
Eh = 0.5 lx
≈kg
1 x 36 W 2 x 58 W
IP 20 IP 20
1.8 3.7
Eh = 0.5 lx
Illustration B: 7691/58 + E 14 in combination with reflector R
1 lx 4
2
0
5 lx 0 2
10 8
6
4
2 0 5 lx
0 2 5 lx
0
6
4
6
8 10
4
6
8 10
m
2
2
1 lx
10 8
1 lx
Illustration A: 7691/58 + E 14 batten
B
8 10
8 10
A
0
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into “Safety lighting for escape routes”, “Anti-panic lighting” and “Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks”.
0
Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
0
... in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised.
3)
2
2)
2
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and immediate stand-by power generator.
IP rating
Permanent switching
4
1)
Lamps
Gear trays with emergency light socket E 14, for stand-by switching
4
Requirements
Illustration C: 7692/58 + E 14 batten Illustration D: 7692/58 + E 14 in combination with reflector R
3
Wiring type
No. of conductors
Dimming 1-10 V
Emergency syst. ▼ EB – single battery UR – switch. relay E 14 – socket
Mains cable 3 cond. Mains cable 5 cond.
Equipment options for 5-conductor (5LV) and 7-conductor (7LV) wiring
3
3
1
3
4 2
3
5 2 5
3
2
5
5 2
3
2
3
2 5
1
6 2
7 2 7
1
5 5 5 2
Indications Emergency light
6 7LV 2
The following luminous fluxes are taken into account: Isolux curves ··· + E14 Equipment: tubular incandescent lamp, 40 W, luminous flux 380 lm. Isolux curves ··· + EB Equipment: triphosphor fluorescent lamps 58 W. Luminous flux 5200 lm (referred to nominal operation). The diagrams opposite are based on battery operation with 25% luminous flux. Isolux curves ··· + UR Equipment: triphosphor fluorescent lamps 58 W, luminous flux 5200 lm.
5
3
410
5LV
Isolux curves Illuminances achieved with E-LINE gear trays for safety lighting are documented in the isolux curves opposite. They refer to a level on the floor and a light loss factor of 0.8. Indirect portions are not taken into consideration.
7 2 7 7
Page 428
In case of deviating luminous fluxes the illuminance values must be corrected accordingly.
6 10 8
Eh = 0.5 lx C
10 8
6
1 lx
Eh = 0.5 lx
m
··· + E14 Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires with emergency light socket E14, red-marked, IP 20. 7691··· for 1 fluorescent lamp 36 W with additional emergency light socket E14 for tubular incandescent lamps up to 40 W as well as for compact fluorescent lamps with integrated ballast. Max. lamp length 126 mm, max. diameter 42 mm. 7692··· for 2 fluorescent lamps 58 W with additional emergency light socket E14 for tubular incandescent lamps up to 40 W e.g. OSRAM T30/73 (40 W). Max. lamp length 73 mm, max. diameter 42 mm.
D
Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the trunking by means of stainless steel snap fasteners, without tools. With low-loss ballasts and plug-in terminal for series capacitors to operate the general lighting. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general and safety lighting circuit is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the trunking. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
Reference Gear trays with single battery supply for permanent switching 7691/58 7691/58 7692/58 7692/58
E E E E
+ + + +
EB EB EB EB
(1 h) (3 h) (1 h) (3 h)
Nominal Lamps operating time
IP rating
≈kg
1 hour 3 hours 1 hour 3 hours
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
2.6 3.2 2.8 3.4
1 x 58 W 1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W 2 x 58 W
Reference
Lamps
IP rating
≈kg
1 x 58 W 2 x 58 W
IP 20 IP 20
1.4 1.6
Gear trays with switching relay for permanent switching 7691/58 E + UR 7692/58 E + UR
652d
8
4
Eh = 0.5 lx
m
··· + EB Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires equipped with single battery, IP 20. Fluorescent lamps switched permanently, in the event of mains failure one lamp is operated by a single battery with maintenance-free, gasproof high-temperature nickelcadmium accumulators. LED indicates the charge state of the battery. ··· + EB (1h) Nominal operating time 1 hour. ··· + EB (3h) Nominal operating time 3 hours (not in combination with continuous-line wirings in module 510 mm).
D
Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the trunking by means of stainless steel snap fasteners, without tools. With electronic control gear (E) to operate the general lighting. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general lighting circuit and charging circuit is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the trunking. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
1 lx
0 5 lx
12 16
12 16
8
4 0
0
5 lx 0 4 0 4 5 lx
8
12 16
8
12 16
C
Illustration C: 7692/58 E + UR batten Illustration D: 7692/58 E + UR in combination with reflector R
1 lx Eh = 0.5 lx
m
12
Illustration D: 7692/58 E + EB··· in combination with reflector R
1 lx
4
16
5 lx 0
0
4
0
8
4
8 10
12
4
6
16
8
4
Illustration C: 7692/58 E + EB··· batten
8
8 10
Illustration B: 7691/58 E + UR in combination with reflector R
12
6
12
0 2
0
0 2
4
IP 20
Illustration A: 7691/58 E + UR batten
B Eh = 0.5 lx
1 lx
1 lx
16
Eh = 0.5 lx C
0 2 5 lx
Eh = 0.5 lx
Illustration B: 7691/58 E + EB··· in combination with reflector R
1 lx 5 lx 0 2
A
16
5 lx
4
0
4
2
6
0
6
6 4 1 lx
2
10 8
10 8
1 lx 6 4
10 8
10 8
0
5 lx
Illustration A: 7691/58 E + EB··· batten
B Eh = 0.5 lx
m
6
6
4
4
2
2
Eh = 0.5 lx
8 10
8 10
A
8
Degree of protection
Eh = 0.5 lx
m
··· + UR Gear trays for continuous lines and individual luminaires. Version with electronic control gear (E) and relay to switch over to safety power supply. Fluorescent lamps switched permanently, in the event of mains failure, one lamp is operated by the emergency power source on site.
D
Suspension length 3 m Suspension length 5 m
Gear tray Sheet steel, white. Fixed to the trunking by means of stainless steel snap fasteners, without tools. With electronic control gear (E) to operate the general lighting. Electrical connection The electrical connection with general and safety lighting circuits is made automatically when the gear tray is attached to the trunking. Lamp circuit connections can be set to the phase conductor without tools.
411
E-LINE Planning, ordering and installation Overhang min. 50 mm/max. 500 mm
E-LINE allows for suspension spacings of up to 2500 mm. Spacings might have to be reduced in case of node suspensions, see page 378. At continuous-line ends a minimum overhang dimension of 50 mm or a maximum overhang dimension of 500 mm has to be observed. All indications apply to singlelamp and twin-lamp gear trays, independent of ballast type, optical equipment and fixing type. The tables opposite provide a quick overview regarding the composition of E-LINE continuous lines. In case of different continuous-line lengths • the required number of trunking units as well as • the minimum number of fixing points (based on a maximum fixing spacing of 2500 mm) is given. As to trunking units in module 510 mm to be wired on site, please check the tables on page 413 with information on additional trunking sections which might be necessary.
Planning suggestions for continuous lines with gear trays 36 W Run length
m 2.47 3.70 4.93 6.16 7.39 8.62 9.85 11.08 12.31 13.54 14.77 16.00 17.23 18.46 19.69 20.92 22.15 23.38 24.61
Lamp length
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Trunking 07690/II/36 U 07690/II/36-5 LV 07690/II/36-7 LV Pieces 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1
07690/III/36 U 07690/III/36-5 LV 07690/III/36-7 LV Pieces – 1 – 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 4 5 6 5 6
Ordering example: Non-interrupted continuous line 36 W with prewired trunking (7-conductor wiring). 12.31 m long (equals 10 lamp lengths), equipped with single-lamp dimmable gear trays, trapezium-shaped reflectors and lamella louvres. Direct ceiling mounting. IP 20.
Ordering example: Variable continuous line 58 W with trunking to be wired on site (5-conductor wiring) and uniform spacings of 612 mm between the gear trays.
Planning suggestions for continuous lines with gear trays 58 W Fixing points
No. 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11
m 3.07 4.60 6.13 7.66 9.19 10.72 12.25 13.78 15.31 16.84 18.37 19.90 21.43 22.96 24.49 26.02 27.55 29.08 30.61
Lamp length
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Trunking 07690/II/58 U 07690/II/58-5 LV 07690/II/58-7 LV Pieces 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1 – 2 1
07690/III/58 U 07690/III/58-5 LV 07690/III/58-7 LV Pieces – 1 – 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 4 5 6 5 6
Fixing points
No. 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13
1. Trunking
Trunking units, 2 lengths ............................2 x 07690/II/36-7LV Trunking units, 3 lengths ............................2 x 07690/III/36-7LV
2. Trunking and fixing accessory
Trunking end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 E-T Ceiling fixing clamps ..................................................6 x D 01 X
3. Gear tray
Gear trays, single-lamp ....................................10 x 7691/36 ED
4. Reflector + accessory
Reflectors, trapezium-shaped............................10 x 07690 T/36 Reflector connectors ..........................................9 x 07690 RVT Reflector end caps ..............................................2 x 07690 RKT
5. Optical equipment
Lamella louvres ........................................10 x 07690 T-RW/36
1. Trunking
Trunking, 2 lengths..........................................1 x 07690/II/58-U Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................2 x 07690/III/58-U
2. Trunking and fixing accessory
Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-R Blanking covers ................................................3 x 07690 B/58 Flatband cable ............................................1 x 07690/5LV/46m Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV Female connectors................................................6 x 07690 SK Chain suspensions ....................................................6 x A 01 KX
3. Gear tray
Gear trays, twin-lamp ..............................................6 x 7692/58
4. Reflector + accessory
Radial reflectors ..............................................6 x 07692 R/58 Reflector end caps ..............................................12 x 07692 RK
5. Optical equipment
Prismatic diffusers ............................................6 x 07692 P/58
12.25 m long (equals 8 lamp lengths), equipped with twin-lamp gear trays, radial reflectors and prismatic diffusers. Chain suspension. IP 20.
412
Run length
Spacing between fixings max. 2500 mm
Further spacings between fixings max. 2500 mm
Planning suggestions for modular system with 510 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W Run length
m 3.58 5.62 7.66 9.70 11.74 13.78 15.82 17.86 19.90 21.94 23.98 26.02 28.06 30.10 32.14 34.18 36.22 38.26 40.30
Planning suggestions for modular system with 1020 mm spacing between the gear trays 58 W
Lamp length
Trunking 07690/··· ···/II/58 U
07690/··· ···/III/58 U
Additional trunking section 07690/··· 07690/··· ···/510/U ···/1020/U
Fixing points
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pieces 1 – 1 – 2 – 2 1 2 1 – 1 – 2 – 2 1 2 1
Pieces – 1 1 2 1 3 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 5 7 6 7 7 8
Pieces 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1
No. 3 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 17
Ordering example: Modular continuous line 58 W with trunking to be wired on site and uniform blanking cover spacings of 510 mm between the gear trays 9.70 m long (equals 5 lamp lengths and 4 blanking covers 510 mm), equipped with twin-lamp gear trays with electronic control gear (E), radial reflectors and parabolic louvres. Decorative wire suspension. IP 20.
Ordering example: Modular continuous line 58 W with trunking to be wired on site and uniform blanking cover spacings of 1020 mm between the gear trays 14.29 m long (equals 6 lamp lengths and 5 blanking covers 1020 mm), equipped with single-lamp gear trays and industrial selfsuspended reflectors, asymmetrical light distribution. Wire suspension. IP 20.
Pieces – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – –
Run length
m 4.09 6.64 9.19 11.74 14.29 16.84 19.39 21.94 24.49 27.04 29.59 32.14 34.69 37.24 39.79 42.34 44.89 47.44 49.99
Lamp length
Trunking 07690··· ···/II/58 U
07690··· ···/III/58 U
Additional trunking section 07690··· 07690··· ···/510/U ···/1020/U
Fixing points
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pieces 1 2 – 2 – 1 – 1 2 1 2 – 2 – 1 – 1 2 1
Pieces – – 2 1 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 7 6 8 8 9 9 9 10
Pieces – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – –
No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1. Trunking
Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................2 x 07690/III/58-U Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U
2. Trunking and fixing accessory
Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-R Blanking covers ..............................................4 x 07690 B/510 Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV Decorative wire suspensions ..................................5 x A 01 DSX
3. Gear tray
Gear trays, twin-lamp ..........................................5 x 7692/58 E
4. Reflector + accessory
Radial reflectors ..............................................5 x 07692 RH/58 Reflector end caps ............................................10 x 07692 RKH
5. Optical equipment
Highly-specular parabolic louvres ....................5 x 07692 RPV/58
1. Trunking
Trunking units, 3 lengths ................................3 x 07690/III/58-U Additional trunking............................................1 x 07690/510/U
2. Trunking and fixing accessory
Trunking end caps ................................................2 x 07690 E-T Blanking covers ............................................5 x 07690 B/1020 Through-wiring set ................................1 x 07690/5LV-510/46m Wiring connector ..................................................1 x 07690 VV Wire suspensions......................................................7 x A 01 SX
3. Gear tray
Gear trays, single-lamp............................................6 x 7691/58
4. Reflectors
Industrial self-suspended reflectors, asymm.....6 x 07690 SAF/58
Pieces 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1
IP 50 Special gear trays for 58 W fluorescent lamps are available for continuous lines or individual luminaires in IP 50 – reference 7681/58 or 7682/58. This allows to realise non-interrupted continuous lines or continuous lines with IP 50 blanking covers for module 1530 mm. In addition, special trunking end caps 07680 E-R and gasket accessories 07680 KD for the joints are neccessary in order to observe IP 50. Only radial reflectors and corresponding optical accessories are used – trapeziumshaped or industrial selfsuspended reflectors are not available for IP 50.
413
Rapid-mounting continuous-line luminaires with silicate glass cover
Application Workplaces with an increased degree of pollution. Also recommended in areas where drilling emulsions are used or oil gases are formed.
Reference
Lamps W 1x58 2x58 3x58
7961 S/I/58 7961 S/II/58 7961 S/III/58
LxWxH ≈kg mm 1555x228x135 12.4 3103x228x135 24.8 4651x228x135 37.2
Optical system Highly-specular, anodised reflectors for narrow/wideangle light distribution. Luminaire body With integrated trunking, sheet steel, white, stoveenamelled. Gear tray can be removed and hung in the luminaire body without using tools. Protection against soiling by means of silicate glass cover, clear, safely retained in a continuous frame, easily lowered and removed for maintenance. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, each lamp length with 4-pole connection terminal and additional earth connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, connected with individual wires 5 x 1.5 mm2. Electrical connection with gear tray by means of 4-pole female connector, quick-release button to rearrange the lamp circuit connection to L1, L2 or L3. With two grommets at each front plane for mains supply and further wiring. With low-loss ballasts. T8
Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 7961 S/I/58 E. Versions equipped with electronic control gear are suitable for use in production sites exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Indications Fixing accessories Planning suggestions Through-wiring set Lamp characteristics
414
Page 416 416 417 444
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2152 DIN 5040: A40 CIBSE BZ: BZ3 NBN L 14-002: BZ4/1/BZ3
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
Production sites exposed to fire hazards Continuous-line luminaires 796··· equipped with electronic control gear can also be used in areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
Reference
Lamps W 2x58 4x58 6x58
7962 S/I/58 7962 S/II/58 7962 S/III/58
LxWxH ≈kg mm 1555x228x135 13.4 3103x228x135 26.8 4651x228x135 40.2
Reference
Lamps W 3x58 6x58 9x58
7963 S/I/58 7963 S/II/58 7963 S/III/58
LxWxH ≈kg mm 1555x372x187 21.2 3103x372x187 42.2 4651x372x187 63.6
652d
(o
Degree of protection
IP 50
Data table no. 2152 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 3.0 m 5.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.1 7.1 9.0 11 16 21
4.7 5.7 6.7 8.3 9.3 12 14 19 24
5.0 6.7 8.4 10 12 15 18 26 34
7.8 9.5 11 14 16 19 23 31 40
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2152
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2152
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ5/0.8/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.7 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7961 S/58 7962 S/58 7963 S/58
1.00 0.60 0.36
0.73 0.61 0.68
0.73 0.61 0.68
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Protection against soiling The covers in chemically resistant silicate glass are safely retained in the continuous frame. Even oil gases or drilling emulsions do not leave irreversible pollution on the panes.
Reduced maintenance intervals The internal optical systems are efficiently protected by silicate glass covers. Maintenance intervals – especially in rooms with an increased degree of pollution – are extended and thus reduce the costs of the lighting installation.
415
796··· Accessories and fixing spacings Overhang 50 -780 mm
Spacing between fixings max. 1440 (796···/I/58); max. 2330 (796···/II/58)
Overhang 50 -780 mm
Spacing between fixings max. 2330 mm
Fixing spacings: Direct ceiling mounting
Spacing between fixings max. 2330 mm
Suspended mounting
Fixing spacings of up to 2330 mm (approx. 11⁄2 lamp lengths) can be realised when suspending continuous-line luminaires with integrated trunking. At continuous-line ends a maximum overhang dimension of 780 mm (approx. 1⁄2 lamp length) or a minimum overhang dimension of 50 mm has to be observed. Continuous-line couplings are not required in case of direct ceiling mounting. Each continuous-line luminaire is separately fixed to the ceiling. The electrical connection in conformance with the degree of protection is made by means of a through-wiring set with connection tube, reference 07771/5LV.
Planning suggestions Component combination Run length m 1.56 3.11 4.66 6.21 7.76 9.31 10.86 12.41 13.96 15.52 17.06 18.61 20.17 21.72 23.26 24.82 26.37 27.92
Lamp lengths 58 W No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
796··· continuous-line lumin. ···/I/58 ···/II/58 ···/III/58 Pieces Pieces Pieces 1 – – – 1 – – – 1 – 2 – – 1 1 – – 2 – 2 1 – 1 2 – – 3 – 2 2 – 1 3 – – 4 – 2 3 – 1 4 – – 5 – 2 4 – 1 5 – – 6
Ceiling fixing clamp D 01N with mounting plate, sheet steel, white. Spacing between trunking and fixing surface 86 mm. Not suitable for fixing to walls. Ceiling fixing plate E 01 sheet steel, galvanised, with safety spring hook to attach chains and wires without tools.
416
796··· continuous lines Direct ceiling mounting
796··· continuous lines Suspended mounting
Through-wiring sets 07771/5LV Pieces – – – 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
Couplings 07770/5LV Pieces – – – 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
Fixing points No. 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Link chain E 04 galvanised, 20 m long, to be shortened on site. Suspension clamp B 03 sheet steel, galvanised.
Susp. points No. 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 11 11 12 13
Overhang approx. mm 50 390 50 780 390 50 780 390 50 780 390 50 780 390 50 780 390 50
Chain suspension A 02 K-SP consisting of link chain, galvanised, 1500 mm long, suspension clamp B 03, safety spring hook and turnbuckle with 40 mm height compensation. Wire suspension A 02 S/2.5 consisting of steel wire, galvanised, ¶ 2.5 mm, 1500 mm long, suspension clamp B 03 and safety spring hook. Wire length fully adjustable without tools – also after continuous-line mounting.
Spacing between fixings max. 2280 (796···/III/58)
For safety reasons, fixing accessories must be able to support five times the weight of the luminaires to be mounted on them. In case the maximum fixing spacings are retained this results in loads of 30 kg maximum per suspension point. All suspension accessories are therefore designed for at least 150 kg weight load. Fixing accessories provided on site such as dowels, ceiling hooks, etc. should meet with these requirements.
Spacing between fixings max. 2330 mm
Ordering example for direct ceiling mounting
Ordering example for suspended mounting
Continuous line (5 lengths) with continuous-line luminaires 7961 S/···/58 (total length 7.76 m)
Continuous line (5 lengths) with continuous-line luminaires 7961 S/···/58 (total length 7.76 m)
1. Luminaire Continuous-line luminaire (2 lenghts) ........ 1 x 7961 S/II/58 Continuous-line luminaire (3 lengths) ....... 1 x 7961 S/III/58
1. Luminaire Continuous-line luminaire (2 lenghts) ........ 1 x 7961 S/II/58 Continuous-line luminaire (3 lengths) ....... 1 x 7961 S/III/58
2. Mounting accessory Through-wiring set ............. 1 x 07771/5LV
2. Mounting accessory Continuous-line coupling with through-wiring set ...... 1 x 07770/5LV
3. Fixing accessory Ceiling fixing clamp .................. 5 x D 01N
5 lamp lengths and fixing spacings of max. 2330 mm (2-length trunking) or 2280 mm (3-length trunking) result in 5 fixing points according to the table above.
The possible maximum fixing spacing is based on the information in the table.
3. Fixing accessory Ceiling fixing plate ...................... 4 x E 01 Chain suspension ............... 4 x A 02 K-SP
5 lamp lengths and max. 2330 mm suspension spacing result in 4 suspension points according to the table above.
07770/5LV Continuous-line coupling with through-wiring set (Only for suspended mounting.) Stable exterior coupling, sheet steel, galvanised, with wiring accessory 07771/5LV.
Supporting clips for T-beam E 02/70, E 02/80, E 02/100 with flange widths 70 mm, 80 mm or 100 mm, sheet steel, galvanised. With safety spring hook to attach chains and wires without tools. Inclined suspension B 05* for inclined luminaire mounting up to 30° around the longitudinal axis. Steel, white, with safety spring hook to attach chains and wires without tools.
The table opposite provides a quick overview regarding the component combination of 796··· continuous lines. The necessary accessories for the different kinds of mounting are described.
D 02* Inclined fixing Steel, white, for direct ceiling or wall mounting.
07771/5LV Through-wiring set IP 50 (Only for direct ceiling mounting.) 5-conductor through-wiring set 1.5 mm2, 700 mm long, and plastic connection tube for max. 8 individual conductors 1.5 mm2.
* Inclined mounting with fixing accessories D 02 or B 05 results in deviating fixing dimensions: 7961···, 7962··· maximum fixing spacing 1550 mm, maximum overhang dimension 775 mm (approx. 1⁄2 lamp length). 7963··· not suitable for inclined mounting.
417
Batten luminaires
Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls and storage facilities. Versions without reflector preferably for non-specific, passive or tertiary building areas with general illumination requirements, e.g. storage rooms, technical rooms or ancillary rooms without continuously occupied workplaces.
Reference
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
1615/118 1615/136 1615/158
D mm 500 900 1100
D1
E1
≈kg
Reference
60 165 215
250 450 550
1.4 2.1 2.9
1615/218 1615/236 1615/258
Lamps W 2x18 2x36 2x58
D mm 500 900 1100
D1
E1
≈kg
60 165 215
250 450 550
1.5 4.3 5.3
Luminaire body Sheet steel, with white polyester coating, end caps made of white polystyrene plastic. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection. With 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 and additional earth connection terminal. With inductive ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 1615/158 E. Reflectors (accessories) 1 piece, solvent-free powder-coated sheet steel, white. Universally suitable for single- and twin-lamp versions: 01615 R/36 for 36 W, 01615 R/58 for 58 W.
T8
Indications Lamp characteristics
418
Page 444
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2157
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2157
DIN 5040: B21
DIN 5040: B32
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
Electronic control gear TRILUX luminaires equipped with electronic control gear shine out thanks to the following characteristics: energysaving operation, lamp-preserving rapid lamp start, flickerfree light and avoidance of electrode flicker and disturbing noises. The increased lamp service life allows for benefits in money’s worth.
Reference Luminaire + reflector* 1615/36 + 01615 R/36 1615/58 + 01615 R/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 900 165 1100 215
E1
≈kg
450 550
3.7 4.9
* Accessories, to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire + reflector* 1615/236 + 01615 R/36 1615/258 + 01615 R/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 900 165 1100 215
E1
≈kg
450 550
5.9 7.3
* Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2157 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.6 3.6 4.5 5.4 6.3 8.0 9.7 14 18
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 6.9 8.7 11 15 19
4.4 6.0 7.5 9.0 10 13 16 23 30
5.0 6.7 8.3 10 12 15 17 25 32
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2157
T8
C 0 - C 180
Datenblock Nr. 2157
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/4/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: B4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
1615/118 1615/136 + 01615R/36 1615/158 + 01615R/58 1615/218 1615/236 + 01615R/36 1615/258 + 01615R/58
3.85 1.55 31.4 1.00 0.97 1.97 0.79 0.79 0.51 0.51
0.96 0.96 0.87 0.96 0.85 0.94 0.94 0.82 0.94 0.80
0.64 0.64 0.87 0.64 0.85 0.59 0.59 0.82 0.59 0.80
indirect ULOR
0.32 0.32 0.00 0.32 0.00 0.35 0.35 0.00 0.35 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Tested safety Standard TRILUX luminaires are marked with the ENEC, EMV as well as the fire protection label, thus documenting that the luminaires were tested by a neutral certification institute and that the current production is being supervised.
419
Individual battens
Application Production facilities, workshops, assembly halls and storage facilities. Versions without reflector preferably for non-specific, passive or tertiary building areas with general illumination requirements, e.g. storage rooms, technical rooms or ancillary rooms without continuously occupied workplaces.
Reference
Lamps W 1x18 1x36 1x58
6141/18 6141/36 6141/58
D mm 470 920 1100
D1
E1
≈kg
Reference
76 156 216
470 – –
1.4 1.9 2.7
6142/36 6142/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 920 156 1100 216
E1
≈kg
– –
2.7 4.0
Luminaire body Sheet steel, white, galvanised. End caps made of plastic ABS, white. Easy mounting by means of separate mounting profile. Ceiling-oriented integrated channel duct for external mains supply and further wiring. Luminaires are fixed to the mounting profile by means of plastic-coated metal turn-lock fasteners without using tools. Electrical connection Plug-type connection for wires up to 2.5 mm2 to 3-pole (including earth connection terminal) female connector located at the mounting profile. Luminaire connection is made automatically when placing the luminaire on the mounting profile. With low-loss ballasts. Luminaires can also be supplied with electronic control gear, reference suffix ···E, e.g. 6141/58 E. Reflectors (accessories) 1 piece, sheet steel, white, to be fixed without using tools. With reflector end caps, ABS, white. Universally suitable for single- and twin-lamp versions: 06140 R/36 for 614···/36, 06140 R/58 for 614···/58.
Indications Lamp characteristics
420
Page 444
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2153
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2153
DIN 5040: B21
DIN 5040: B32
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
CIBSE BZ: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
NBN L 14-002: BZ6
Female connector technology Modern female connector technology creates the conditions for tool-free, rapid electrical connection of individual luminaires 614··· with the connection unit on the mounting profile.
Reference Luminaire + reflector* 6141/36 + 06140 R/36 6141/58 + 06140 R/58
Lamps W 1x36 1x58
D D1 mm 920 156 1100 216
E1
≈kg
– –
3.6 4.8
* Accessories, to be ordered separately.
Reference Luminaire + reflector* 6142/36 + 06140 R/36 6142/58 + 06140 R/58
Lamps W 2x36 2x58
D D1 mm 920 156 1100 216
E1
≈kg
– –
4.4 6.1
* Accessories, to be ordered separately.
652d Degree of protection
IP 20
Data table no. 2153 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 2.5 m 3.0 m 2.5 m 3.0 m
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
2.7 3.7 4.7 5.6 6.5 8.3 10 15 19
3.1 4.2 5.2 6.2 7.2 9.1 11 15 20
4.5 6.2 7.8 9.3 11 14 17 24 31
5.2 7.0 8.7 10 12 15 18 26 33
Calculation parameters
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2153
T8
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2153
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ3/4/BZ4
CIBSE BZ: BZ4
NBN L 14-002: B4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 3.3 h Ymax = 1.5 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
69N Chain suspension, 1 pair, knotted-link chain 0.9 m long, bright galvanised, complete with ring screw, hanger and ceiling trim cap.
6141/18 6141/36 6141/36 + 06140 R/36 + 07690 T-RW/36 6141/58 6141/58 + 06140 R/58 + 07690 T-RW/58 6142/36 6142/36 + 06140 R/36 + 07690 T-RW/36 6142/58 6142/58 + 06140 R/58 + 07690 T-RW/58
73N (not illustrated) Chain suspension as 69N, but without hanger and ceiling trim cap.
indirect ULOR
3.85 1.56
0.96 0.96
0.64 0.64
0.32 0.32
1.61 1.75 1.00
0.74 0.68 0.96
0.74 0.68 0.64
0.00 0.00 0.32
1.03 1.14 0.80
0.74 0.67 0.94
0.74 0.67 0.59
0.00 0.00 0.35
0.85 0.92 0.51
0.69 0.64 0.94
0.69 0.64 0.69
0.00 0.00 0.35
0.55 0.60
0.69 0.63
0.69 0.63
0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
Lamella louvre Sheet steel, white – for use in reflectors 06140 R/···, can be hung from the reflector for easy maintenance. 07690 T-RW/36 for 06140 R/36. 07690 T-RW/58 for 06140 R/58.
421
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q – symmetrical –
Application High rooms, halls, storage facilities and production sites, trade fair and exhibition halls. In combination with cover suitable for use in high sports halls, damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. ···HST-HIT··· Hybrid version can be optionally equipped with tubular high-pressure sodium vapour lamps or tubular metal halide lamps. Optical system Narrow/wide-angle optical system for symmetrical light distribution. Reflector made of anodised aluminium. ···SD··· textured, specular, ···SH··· smooth, highly-specular. Luminaire body Powder-coated sheet steel, white, separate ballast housing and lamp housing. Gear tray with all operating components can be swung out. Plug-type luminaire fixing on enclosed galvanised mounting plate. Cable entry by means of two grommets Pg 16 for mains supply and further wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with 5-pole connection terminal for wires up to 4 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With inductive ballasts, ···HST-HIT··· with integrated thermal fuse.
Indications Cover Lamella louvre Emergency light Lamp characteristics
422
Page 424 425 428 444
TRILUX industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q are equipped with specular reflectors made of anodised aluminium. Adapted to tubular HST/HIT lamps or ellipsoid HME lamps, equipmentoptimised reflectors with a textured or smooth surface are used.
Lamella louvres and covers Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q can be equipped with aluminium louvres and/or glass covers. In combination with covers made of thermally hardened safety glass, WINLIGHT luminaires are resistant to ball impact and protected against moisture and the ingression of dust in accordance with IP 54. Accessories are described on page 424/425.
Reference
Lamps W 7981 SD/HST150 1xHST150 7981 SD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 7983 SD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400
D mm 400 400 400
D1
D2
≈kg
204 252 10.0 204 252 11.1 204 252 14.9
Reference 7983 SH/1xHME250 7983 SH/1xHME400
Lamps W 1xHME250 1xHME400
D D1 D2 ≈kg mm 400 204 252 13.4 400 204 252 14.7
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover ···GA, only use lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d O
?*e
Degree of protection With covers ···GA
IP 20 IP 54
Data table no. 2154 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 7.0 m 10.0 m 7.0 m 10.0 m
100 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
4.1 7.1 12 17 22 27 32 36 41
6.6 8.7 15 20 25 30 35 39 44
6.8 12 21 28 36 45 53 60 69
11 14 25 33 42 50 58 65 74
Calculation parameters
HST HIT
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2154
HME
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2154
DIN 5040: A50
DIN 5040: A50
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
CIBSE BZ: BZ2
NBN L 14-002: BZ3/1.5/BZ2/4/BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ3
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 1.3 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
Chain suspension A 01 WQ 1 set, for stable 4-point suspension of 798··· luminaires. Consisting of four link chains, bright galvanised, 1000 mm long, four safety spring hooks, four ring screws. Not resistant to ball impact. Emergency light The E27 screwed socket 684/1 for halogen incandescent lamps QT 32 also enables retrofitting of individual luminaires into combined emergency luminaires.
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
7981 SD/HIT250 7981 SD/HIT250 + GA 7981 SD/HIT250 + RS 7981 SD/HIT250 + GA + RS 7981 SD/HST150 7981 SD/HST150 + GA 7981 SD/HST150 + RS 7981 SD/HST150 + GA + RS 7981 SD/HST250 7981 SD/HST250 + GA 7981 SD/HST250 + RS 7981 SD/HST250 + GA + RS 7983 SD/1xHIT400 7983 SD/1xHIT400 + GA 7983 SD/1xHIT400 + RS 7983 SD/1xHIT400 + GA + RS 7983 SD/1xHST400 7983 SD/1xHST400 + GA 7983 SD/1xHST400 + RS 7983 SD/1xHST400 + GA + RS 7983 SH/1xHME250 7983 SH/1xHME250 + GA 7983 SH/1xHME250 + RS 7983 SH/1xHME250 + GA + RS 7983 SH/1xHME400 7983 SH/1xHME400 + GA 7983 SH/1xHME400 + RS 7983 SH/1xHME400 + GA + RS
1.00 1.15 1.21 1.33 1.14 1.31 1.38 1.52 0.61 0.70 0.73 0.81 0.63 0.72 0.75 0.84 0.36 0.41 0.43 0.48 1.70 1.84 1.95 2.15 1.00 1.08 1.21 1.46
0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.84 0.76 0.71 0.65 0.84 0.76 0.71 0.65 0.77 0.71 0.67 0.61 0.77 0.71 0.64 0.58
0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.85 0.74 0.71 0.64 0.84 0.76 0.71 0.65 0.84 0.76 0.71 0.65 0.77 0.71 0.67 0.61 0.77 0.71 0.64 0.58
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
423
Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q – asymmetrical –
Application High rooms, halls, storage facilities and production sites, trade fair and exhibition halls. In combination with cover suitable for use in high sports halls, damp or corrosive environments and covered exterior areas. ···HST-HIT··· Hybrid version can be optionally equipped with tubular high-pressure sodium vapour lamps or tubular metal halide lamps. Optical system With asymmetrical light distribution. Reflector made of anodised aluminium, ···AD··· textured, specular, ···AH··· smooth, highly-specular. Luminaire body Powder-coated sheet steel, white, separate ballast housing and lamp housing. Gear tray with all operating components can be swung out. Plug-type luminaire fixing on enclosed galvanised mounting plate. Cable entry by means of two grommets Pg 16 for mains supply and further wiring. Electrical connection Luminaires supplied ready for connection, with 5-pole connection terminal for wires up to 4 mm2, including earth connection terminal. With inductive ballasts, ···HST-HIT··· with integrated thermal fuse.
Indications Suspensions Emergency light Lamp characteristics
424
Page 423 428 444
Covers 1 piece, made of 5 mm thermally hardened safety glass, with integrated continuous silicon sealing. Easy-to-handle safety turn-fasteners. Required for ball impact resistance or IP 54. 07981 GA for luminaires 7981···. 07983 GA for luminaires 7983···.
Ball impact resistance In combination with covers 0798···GA, industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q are resistant to ball impact. Versions with lumen packages exceeding 30 000 lm offer practice-oriented alternatives to luminaires equipped with fluorescent lamps, especially for the lighting of higher sports halls.
Reference
Lamps W 7981 AD/HST150 1xHST150 7981 AD/HST-HIT250* 1xHST/HIT250 7983 AD/1xHST-HIT400*1xHST/HIT400
D mm 400 400 400
D1
D2
≈kg
204 252 10.0 204 252 11.1 204 252 14.9
Reference 7983 AH/1xHME250 7983 AH/1xHME400
Lamps W 1xHME250 1xHME400
D D1 D2 ≈kg mm 400 204 252 13.4 400 204 252 14.7
* In case luminaires are utilised without cover ···GA, only use lamps suitable for operation in open luminaires (self-shielded lamps).
652d O
?*e
Degree of protection With covers ···GA
IP 20 IP 54
Data table no. 2155 1 Number of luminaires En Room height H
Area A in m2
300 lx 500 lx 7.0 m 10.0 m 7.0 m 10.0 m
100 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
5.6 8.8 14 20 25 30 35 40 46
9.2 12 18 24 30 35 40 45 51
9.4 15 24 33 41 51 59 67 76
15 20 31 40 49 58 67 75 85
Calculation parameters
HST HIT
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2155
HME
C 0 - C 180
Data table No. 2155
DIN 5040: A40
DIN 5040: A40
CIBSE BZ: BZ4/1.5/BZ3
CIBSE BZ: BZ3
NBN L 14-002: BZ4/0.8/BZ3/1.0/BZ4
NBN L 14-002: BZ4
Reflectance values Light loss factor Height of the working plane Suspension length
ρ v e lp
0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2 0.8 0.85 m 0.00 m
spacings for 2 Max. luminaire – g1 = Emin : E ≥ 1 : 1.5
Transverse spacing centre / centre Longitudinal spacing centre / centre
Xmax = 1.3 h Ymax = 1.3 h
h = Luminaire height above working plane
3 Multiplication factor M 4 Photometric for no. of luminaires Reference
characteristics M
‡LB
‡L direct DLOR
Easy mounting Industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q can be easily and efficiently fixed by means of the enclosed mounting plate: once this plate is mounted, the industrial luminaires are fixed onto it without using tools. Special chain accessories A 01 WQ turn WINLIGHT Q into a suspended luminaire.
Aluminium louvre Semi-specular lamella louvre made of aluminium, for increased glare limitation for industrial luminaires WINLIGHT Q. To be lowered and hung from one side for easy maintenance. Can also be combined with covers ···GA. 07981 RS for luminaires 7981···. 07983 RS for luminaires 7983···.
7981 AD/HIT250 7981 AD/HIT250 + GA 7981 AD/HIT250 + RS 7981 AD/HIT250 + GA + RS 7981 AD/HST150 7981 AD/HST150 + GA 7981 AD/HST150 + RS 7981 AD/HST150 + GA + RS 7981 AD/HST250 7981 AD/HST250 + GA 7981 AD/HST250 + RS 7981 AD/HST250 + GA + RS 7983 AD/1xHIT400 7983 AD/1xHIT400 + GA 7983 AD/1xHIT400 + RS 7983 AD/1xHIT400 + GA + RS 7983 AD/1xHST400 7983 AD/1xHST400 + GA 7983 AD/1xHST400 + RS 7983 AD/1xHST400 + GA + RS 7983 AH/1xHME250 7983 AH/1xHME250 + GA 7983 AH/1xHME250 + RS 7983 AH/1xHME250 + GA + RS 7983 AH/1xHME400 7983 AH/1xHME400 + GA 7983 AH/1xHME400 + RS 7983 AH/1xHME400 + GA + RS
1.00 1.15 1.24 1.37 1.14 1.31 1.42 1.56 0.61 0.70 0.75 0.84 0.46 0.53 0.71 0.59 0.35 0.40 0.41 0.45 1.60 1.83 1.98 2.22 0.99 1.14 1.27 1.40
0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.84 0.73 0.72 0.65 0.84 0.73 0.72 0.65 0.79 0.69 0.64 0.57 0.75 0.65 0.59 0.53
0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.82 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.84 0.73 0.72 0.65 0.84 0.73 0.72 0.65 0.79 0.69 0.64 0.57 0.75 0.65 0.59 0.53
indirect ULOR
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Technical information see page 440.
425
Trunking for ceiling mounting and suspended mounting of surface-mounted luminaires
Reference
Length mm 2460 3690 3060 4590
07690/II/36-U 07690/III/36-U 07690/II/58-U 07690/III/58-U
max. 775
62
2.4 3.6 3.0 4.5
max. 2325
max. 150 41
Trunking For ceiling mounting and for suspended mounting of surface-mounted luminaires. Can also be used as wiring channel. Trunking made of sheet steel, galvanised, with white polyester coating, as standard with stable couplings, galvanised. ···/II/··· twin-length version, ···/III/··· triple-length version. Wiring feeding – at the ceiling by means of unilateral knock-out openings at a distance of 220 mm and 385 mm from the trunking beginning, – at the front planes by means of knock-out openings in the end caps 07690 E-T. Wiring arrangement – within the trunking for max. 2 sheathed cables 5 x 2.5 mm2 or approx. 25 individual conductors. Cable holders 07690 LHI to be ordered separately for this purpose. – wiring arrangement on the trunking upper plane with cable holders 07690 LHA to be ordered separately (see page 375).
≈ kg
∅110
180
180
1530
∅110
1538/58W 2000
07690 TL
07690 VK
07690 LHI
07690 E-T
07690 B/···
07690/5LV/25m
Counter-balance weights for luminaires to suspended trunkings Counter-balSeries lance weight 1510/136 05000 A1 1510/136 E 05000 A4 1510/158 05000 A1 1510/158 E 05000 A4 1510/236 2x 05000 A4 1510/236 E 05000 A4 1510/258 2x 05000 A1 1510/258 E 05000 A1 333··· 03331 TRS* 5001···/36 05000 A10** 5001···/58 05000 A11** 5001···/···E 05000 A12** 5002···/···E 05000 A12** 5041··· 05000 A19 * Trunking fixing including counter-balance weight, see page 273. ** Additional distance plates 05000 DS are necessary for fixing the luminaires, see page 209.
426
Luminaire fixing device 07690 TL 1 pair, sheet steel, galvanised, for mounting of luminaires, to be positioned within the trunking at will. Not for 333··· (see page 273).
End cap 07690 E-T 1 piece, plastic, white, with two knock-out openings, to be snapped into the trunking front planes. 2 pieces of end caps are required per continuous line.
Connection terminal 07690 VK 4-pole, with earth connection terminal for mains supply and further wiring for wires up to 2.5 mm2. Earth connection of the trunking is effected automatically. Blanking cover 07690 B/36, 07690 B/58 Plastic extrusion 1230 mm or 1530 mm long, white, can be easily shortened on site.
Internal cable holder 07690 LHI 10 pieces, for approx. 4.5 m trunking length, plastic, for max. 25 individual wires 2.5 mm2, to be snapped into the trunking without tools. Through-wiring set 07690/5LV/25m 5 colour-coded, intertwined, heat-resistant individual wires 1.5 mm2, 25 m long.
≥ 60º
≤ 300º
Node with wire suspension A 03 S 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°, die-cast aluminium, white, 1 steel wire, ¶ 2.0 mm, galvanised, 1500 mm long, length continuously adjustable without using tools, 1 ceiling fixing unit, with threaded cap.
Node with pendant suspension A 03 P 1 piece, consisting of: 1 node for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°, die-cast aluminium, white, 1 steel pendant rod, ¶ 13 mm, with vernier clip for height compensation of up to 20 mm, 1500 mm long, to be shortened on site – threading not required. 1 plastic ceiling trim cap, white.
Ceiling node A 03 D 1 piece, for up to four connections, angles continuously adjustable between 60° and 300°. Die-cast aluminium, white. Ordering example: X-shaped node with 4 connections: 1 ceiling node A 03 D, 4 adapters 07690 KA/7LV.
Node adapter 07690 KA/7LV 1 piece, for the connection of nodes A 03··· with trunkings 07690···, consisting of: 1 adapter profile, white sheet steel, with integrated adapter element made of die-cast aluminium, white, 1 stable inner coupling, sheet steel, galvanised, 1 blanking cover, plastic extrusion, white, 1 through-wiring set 7 x 1.5 mm2.
Trunking units with nodes The combinations of trunking units and nodes offer additional scope for planning and realisation of lighting installations. Continuously adjustable angles and cross points with up to four connections create the conditions for optimally adjusted geometries. Stylish geometrical arrangements offer interior design perspectives.
0
50 x. 1
ma
0
50 x. 2
ma
Vernier clip for more flexibility The stainless steel vernier clip of the pendant suspension can be removed or re-attached without tools, allowing easy adaptation to reduced suspension lengths.
Ceiling rose 05900 A* (not illustrated) 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Ceiling rose 05900 AN* 1 piece, for the connection of the mains cable in case of ceiling outlets. Suitable to receive the ceiling fixing unit of A 03 S.
When mounting more than two node adapters, the spacing between fixings is reduced to max. 1500 mm. Feeding tube* 1 piece, plastic, white, ¶ 10 mm, to be shortened on site. To guide and cover the mains cable. 05000 ZR 1 m long, 05000 ZR/2m 2 m long, in combination with A 03 S.
Spacings between fixings for suspended mounting with nodes The maximum suspension spacings according to the drafts above are to be observed for nodes with wire or pendant suspensions. The maximum spacing between fixings for nodes with one or two connections is max. 2500 mm.
Suspension accessories Continuous grooves in the inclined upper planes of the trunkings enable the tool-free attachment of stainless steel clamps of suspension or ceiling fixing accessories at will (suspension accessories see page 379).
* Incoming cables are not supplied. They must be provided by the contractor.
427
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting takes over in the event of mains failure of the general artificial lighting. It has to ensure that activities can be ended without risk and working facilities can be left safely. Emergency lighting is divided into stand-by lighting and safety lighting. The safety lighting is further divided into “Safety lighting for escape routes”, “Anti-panic lighting” and “Safety lighting for workplaces with special risks”.
Safety lighting in accordance with EN 1838
Stand-by lighting
Safety lighting for escape routes
to continue the vital activities
EN 1838 requires a minimum safety lighting illuminance of 1 lx along the centre axis on the floor. The centre line of the escape route (not less than half the route width) has to be illuminated with at least 50 % of this value. The relation of the highest to the lowest illuminance on the centre line of the escape route may not exceed 40 : 1. TRILUX emergency light inserts in luminaires for working facilities surely observe the required limits of the physiological glare.
Anti-panic lighting
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risk
Anti-panic lighting is required to avoid disturbance in case of the failure of artificial lighting, thus assuring a safe arrival of the escape routes. Apart from 0.5 m wide marginal zones, the minimum horizontal illuminance of 0.5 lx on the free floor surface is required. In all other aspects the same requirements as to horizontal escape routes apply.
Safety lighting for workplaces with special risk must be provided to enable necessary tasks to be completed without hazards, thus observing the safety of the present persons and the service personnel. In order to limit the physiological glare, maximum luminous intensities depending on the light point height h are required, e.g. 3200 cd for 2.5 m ≤ h < 3.0 m.
Stand-by lighting takes over the tasks of the general artificial lighting as a substitute for the essentially unaltered continuation of the vital activities. If stand-by lighting is arranged for organisational reasons instead of safety reasons (e.g. to prevent lost production) the minimum general illuminance must be observed. If stand-by lighting would take over tasks of the emergency lighting, the requirements described in EN 1838 must be met.
General requirements as to the safety power supply installation Fundamental requirements as to the safety power supply installation of the safety lighting are described in the table opposite.
Requirements
Minimum illuminance
Switching period
Emergency power source Nominal op- Admissible erating time alternatives1)
Illumination of escape signs
Meeting rooms Business rooms Exhibition rooms
1 lx
max. 1 s
3h
Permanent switching
Meeting rooms with max. 20 safety luminaires
1 lx
max. 1 s
3h
Single batteries
Permanent switching
The information is based on EN 1838 and DIN VDE 0108 part 1.
Schools
1 lx
max. 15 s
3h
Single batteries Emergency power generator
Permanent switching
Escape routes in working facilities
1 lx
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s, 100 % in 60 s
1h
Single batteries Emergency power generator Specially safeguarded mains
Permanent switching not necessary
Anti-paniclighting2)
0.5 lx
50 % of required illuminance in 5 s, 100 % in 60 s
1h
No information
No information
Workplaces with special risk
min. 0.1 Em3) min. 15 lx
max. 0.5 s
Time of risk
Single batteries Specially safeguarded mains
Permanent switching not necessary
1)
Central battery, group battery with or without inventor, rapid stand-by and immediate stand-by power generator. 2) ...in order to reach a point where an escape route can be clearly recognised. 3) Em = Maintenance value of illuminance.
Emergency light units Each TRILUX emergency unit is adjusted to its field of application in accordance with DIN VDE 0108 and EN 1838.
Emergency light units for
Louvre luminaires
Reference
Plug-in socket 545/E14
Description
Page 429
Page 429
Page 430
Page 364, 410 Page 365, 411 Page 365, 411 Page 423
Emergency light gear trays for DELTA and/or E-LINE are described on pages 364 and 410, emergency light inserts for WINLIGHT Q on page 423. Emergency light units for recess mounting in louvre and diffuser luminaires are explained on the following pages.
Switching type
Stand-by or permanent switching
Stand-by switching
Stand-by or permanent switching
Stand-by or permanent switching
Single-battery Emmergency system light inserts 545/2G7 EB··· 67···, 68···
Rapid-mounting, WINLIGHT Q continuous-line systems DELTA and E-LINE Gear tray ···E14
Gear tray ···EB
Permanent switching
Gear tray ···UR
Permanent switching
E27 Screwed socket 684/1 Stand-by or permanent switching
Escape routes
*
*
Anti-panic lighting
*
*
Workplaces with special risk
Stand-by lighting
*Uniformity of illuminances has to be observed.
428
Diffuser luminaires
Emergency components for louvre luminaires Plug-in sockets for tubular lamps E14/25 W
Single battery systems for compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL 11 W
Plug-in socket 545/E14 for permanent and stand-by switching, consisting of a socket E14, characterised by a green dot, for tubular incandescent lamps or compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear. Lamp rating max. 25 W, lamp diameter max. 30 mm. Including stainless steel clamps for attachment to louvre lateral reflectors, 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 on self-adhesive clamp support and connection wiring with plug-in coupling.
Single battery systems 545/2G7··· for stand-by switching, consisting of one socket 2G7 for compact fluorescent lamps TC-EL 11 W. Including stainless steel clamps for attachment to louvre lateral reflectors, single supply unit with sealed high-temperature nickel-cadmium accumulators and connection wiring with plug-in coupling. Nominal operation time 3 hours. Transit time < 0.5 s. Integrated LED in socket as indication for charging.
With 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2 for the connection of the charging circuit. ···EB1 with gear tray for recess mounting in surface-mounted or suspended louvre luminaires according to selection table. ···EB2 with housing to be installed outside, for recessed louvre luminaires according to selection table. Photometric data are documented in the Isolux curve diagram 3.
Photometric data are documented in the Isolux curve diagrams 1 and 2. Recessed louvre luminaires
Surface-mounted and suspended louvre luminaires
Luminaire number
Insert E14
Insert EB
1361···R··· 2360···R··· 3662 R··· 3663 RST
545/E14 545/E14 545/E14 545/E14
545/2G7 545/2G7 545/2G7 545/2G7
722.SB 723.SB
545/E14 545/E14
545/2G7 EB2 545/2G7 EB2
EB2 EB2 EB2 EB2
Isolux curve diagram 1 545/E14 Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Isolux curve diagram 2 545/E14 Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m
Light point height 5.5 m 7.0 m
5
5
4
4
3
3 Eh = 0.5 lx
2 1 lx
1
Insert E14
Insert EB
1522 1523
545/E14 545/E14
545/2G7 EB1 545/2G7 EB1
1510
545/E14
545/2G7 EB1
5062 R··· 5063 R···
545/E14 545/E14
545/2G7 EB1 545/2G7 EB1
Isolux curve diagram 3 545/2G7... Compact fluorescent lamp TC-EL 11 W, 120 lm Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m 5 4
Eh = 0.5 lx
Explanation of Isolux curve diagrams Illuminances for safety lighting are documented in the Isolux curves opposite. They refer to a level on the floor and a light loss factor of 0.8. Indirect portions are not taken into consideration.
3
2 1 lx
2
1
1
Eh = 0.5 lx 1 lx
1 m
Luminaire number
Selection table Emergency light inserts for louvre luminaires
2
3
4
5 m
1
2
3
4
5 m
1
2
3
4
5
429
Emergency components for diffuser luminaires
Emergency light inserts 67···, 68··· Many TRILUX diffuser luminaires for dry and wet environments can be equipped with special E14 emergency light sockets. Both incandescent lamps and compact fluorescent lamps with integrated electronic control gear can serve as light source. Easy installation and retrofitting on site of emergency light inserts in diffuser luminaires is possible by means of screw connection.
Selection table Emergency light inserts for diffuser luminaires The arrangement of the emergency light inserts to the diffuser luminaires is documented in the selection table opposite. The corresponding illlumances are featured in the Isolux curve diagrams below.
Emergency light inserts 67···, 68··· for permanent and stand-by switching, consisting of socket E14, characterised by a green dot, for tubular incandescent lamps, lamp rating max. 25 W, lamp diameter max. 30 mm. With 2-pole connection terminal for wires up to 2.5 mm2, including fixing material and accessories for cable feeding in conformance with the degree of protection (not required for 677/1 and 682/1), version in safety class II. The complete references of the emergency light inserts, depending on the respective luminaire, are featured in the selection table opposite. Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires
676/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
682/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
677/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
683/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
678/1, 678/2 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
688/1, 688/2 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
679/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
545/E14 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W, (see page 429).
680/1 Emergency light socket E14, for tubular lamp 25 W.
Surface-mounted diffuser luminaires
Recessed diffuser luminaires
Luminaire number
Insert E14
Isolux curve diagram
Luminaire number
Insert E14
Isolux curve Luminaire diagram number
Insert E14
Isolux curve diagram
3302/1x··· 3302 PS/1x···1) 3302 PS/1x···2) 3302 PSA/1x58 3302 PSA/1x···2) 33023) 3302 P3) 3304 3304 P 3313 3313 P 3323 C 3323 C-P
678/1 678/1 678/2 678/1 678/2 676/1 676/1 676/1 676/1 676/1 676/1 676/1 676/1
5 7 7 7 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 7
7402N4) 7403N/2x··· 7403N/TC11
682/1 682/1 676/1
5 5 5
4401 F 4401 PF
676/1 676/1
6 8
7481···/TCD13 ind. 7481···/TCD18 ind. 7482···/TCL18 ind. 7483···/2xTCL24 ind. 7483···/2xTCL24 E 7483···/1xTR40 E
683/1 683/1 683/1 683/1 683/1 683/1
5 5 5 5 5 5
7202 7202 PS/1x36 7204 7212 7212 PS/1x36 7214 7302 P
676/1 545/E14 676/1 676/1 545/E14 676/1 676/1
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
7392 P3) 7392 PS/1x···
680/1 679/1
7 7
1)
For T8 lamps. For T5 lamps. Not for TC 11 W or TC 18 W. 4) Not for TR lamps. 2) 3)
Isolux curve diagram 5
Isolux curve diagram 6
Isolux curve diagram 7
Isolux curve diagram 8
Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Tubular lamp 25 W, 165 lm
Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m
Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m
Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m
Light point height 2.5 m 3.0 m
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
Eh = 0.5 lx 1 lx
1
3 Eh = 0.5 lx
Eh = 0.5 lx
2 1
2 1 lx
2
1
1 1 lx
Eh = 0.5 lx
1 lx m
430
1
2
3
4
5 m
1
2
3
4
5 m
1
2
3
4
5
m
1
2
3
4
5
Explanation of Isolux curve diagrams The horizontal illumanances refer to a level on the floor and a light loss factor of 0.8. Indirect portions are not taken into consideration.
LIGHTGATE Intelligent lighting management
Energy saving and comfort The TRILUX lighting management system LIGHTGATE offers equally comfortable manual light control by means of push-buttons to be installed on site or radio remote control, perfectly adapted to individual lighting requirements. It also provides energy-saving automatic light regulation with adjustable set values. These functions are realised by: – a controller that, as an option, can be pre-mounted in many TRILUX luminaires or alternatively remotemounted, e.g. in a junction box – a sensor unit for light measurement, presence detection and reception of radio control commands. In addition to integration in many TRILUX louvre luminaires, this unit can be recessed or surfacemounted using the corresponding fixing accessories.
LIGHTGATE consists of three components: – Controller and sensor – Radio remote control (optional) – Ceiling recess or ceiling surface mounting accessories for sensor (only necessary when not integrated into the louvre). Additional mounting accessories may be necessary, depending on the mounting type (e.g. data cable for remotely mounted sensor unit, feeding accessories for suspended luminaires etc.). LIGHTGATE 1
LIGHTGATE 2
LIGHTGATE 3
System solution for manual light control LIGHTGATE 1 is available as a version without sensor unit, exclusively for brightness control by means of customary push-buttons for dimming, activating up to two light levels and switching the lighting installation on and of.
System solution for daylightdependent light regulation and manual dimming functions LIGHTGATE 2 offers automatic light regulation with optional switch-off function in case of sufficient daylight and optional reignition function in case the lighting falls short of the set illuminance.
System solution for daylightdependent light regulation and manual light level control LIGHTGATE 3 offers the same regulation function as LIGHTGATE 2, however, for three set value levels, to be chosen individually.
In combination with sensor, LIGHTGATE 1 also allows to control dimmable lighting installations by means of radio remote control (accessories). A presence detection (which can be switched off) is also integrated.
The manual, daylight-independent brightness control can be realised by means of customary push-buttons or by means of a radio remote control (accessories). The system automatically turns from manual mode to regulation mode after one hour.
Instead of allowing continuous dimming in manual mode, LIGHTGATE 3 offers the possibility to activate, by means of customary push-buttons or radio remote control (accessories), three daylight-independent light levels, to be chosen individually. The return to regulation mode is effected automatically.
The brochure “LIGHTGATE – Intelligent Light Management” offers more detailed information as to function and planning, available upon request.
431
LIGHTGATE
Three systems for intelligent lighting management
Wiring scheme LIGHTGATE has been conceived for use in lighting installations equipped with dimmable electronic control gear.
Controller Mains voltage supply 230 V/50 Hz
Data line 4-conductor, RJ11 connectors at both ends. Included in mounting accessories 0RM and 0SM.
The functions: • manual light control, • automatic daylightdependent control, • presence-dependent switching of the lighting installation. The LIGHTGATE controller transforms the pilot signals from the connected control keys and sensors into switching and dimming signals for the lighting installations. Each push button is connected according to the selected function.
LIGHTGATE systems The various LIGHTGATE versions offer practiceoriented solutions for the most differing applications. LIGHTGATE 1 is intended solely as a manual control unit for lighting installations and can be additionally equipped with a presence detector and a receiver for radio remote control. LIGHTGATE 2 and 3 offer the automatic functions of a daylight-dependent light control and a presence detection. LIGHTGATE 2 and 3 differ in manual mode possibilities by means of the wall push-button. Parallel controlling by means of an additional radio remote control is optionally available.
Mains switch
Switching output L’ Switched phase of connected luminaires. Switching capacity max. 1000 VA. Control output +/– 1-10 V interface to control dimmable HF gear (ED). Current carrying capacity max. 50 mA, for mains-voltage-stable line.
LIGHTGATE systems
Push-button entries 1...5 for the connection of up to five standard push-buttons. Line length max. 50 m. Protective low voltage (SELV).
Reference Included components
LIGHTGATE 1 Manual light control
Sensor functions
LG 11/000 • Controller – without sensor unit –
Push-button functions
5
LG 11/RP0* • Controller • Sensor unit with receiver element and presence detector LIGHTGATE 2 Daylight-dependent light control + Manual dimming functions
LG 21/RPL* • Controller • Sensor unit with light sensor, receiver element and presence detector
LIGHTGATE 3 Daylight-dependent light control + Manual light level control
LG 31/RPL* • Controller • Sensor unit with light sensor, receiver element and presence detector
5
5
5
T1 - Light level 1 T2 - Light level 2 T3 - Dim up T4 - Dim down T5 - OFF T1 - Light level 1 T2 - Light level 2 T3 - Dim up T4 - Dim down T5 - OFF
T1 - ON/OFF T2 - Dim up T3 - Dim down T4 - AUTO /MAN T5 - OFF
T1 - Light level 1 T2 - Light level 2 T3 - Light level 3 T4 - AUTO / MAN T5 - OFF
* Surface-mounting accessory OSM or recess-mounting accessory ORM to be ordered separately.
Integration in TRILUX luminaires The luminaire series featured in the table opposite are available with pre-installed controllers or controllers and sensor units. When placing an order, please indicate the corresponding suffixes. For other series please consult your local TRILUX support centre.
Pre-installation of LIGHTGATE components in TRILUX luminaires with dimmable electronic control gear (ED) Luminaire series
Reference suffix for pre-installation of controller: controller + sensor: + LG 21/RPL* + LG 21/RPL+0LM Restrictions
T·200 362··· 368···/369··· 500··· 504···
• • • •
505··· 526··· + 05261 DBS···
•
526··· + 05000 SN 598···/599··· 333···
• •
Ordering example
•
Only for louvre luminaires 5931···, 5941···54, 5941···80
5931···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
• • • •1) • • • •
Not for 3622···/TC11
3621···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM 3681···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
Not for 5002···/TC18
5001···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
1)
Not for versions ···T
5041···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM
Not for versions ···TS
5051···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM 5261···ED+LG21/RPL
Only non-interrupted continuous line
5261···ED+LG21/RPL+0LM 5981···ED+LG21/RPL
Not for ···/14 E, ···/24 E
3331···ED+LG21/RPL
* Sensor unit is separately enclosed for mounting outside the luminaire. Surface-mounted accessory 0SM or recess-mounting accessory 0RM to be ordered separately.
432
Installation example: Continuous-line surfacemounted luminaires with LG 21/RPL, sensor remote from the luminaire
Installation example: Individual suspended luminaires with LG 21/RPL+0LM, sensor integrated in master luminaire Sensor unit
Sensor 5
5
6
5
6 Push-buttons T1 up to T5
6 Mains supply cable 230 V/50 Hz
Wiring scheme of master luminaire Further luminaires H05VV-U3G1.5 5
Mains supply cable 230 V/50 Hz H05VV-U3G1.5
Push-buttons T1 up to T5
Mains supply cable 230 V/50 Hz
Wiring scheme of master luminaire Line to push-buttons e.g. J-Y(St)Y3x2x0.6
Mains supply cable 230 V/50 Hz H05VV-U3G1.5
6
Line to push-buttons e.g. J-Y(St)Y3x2x0.6 6
Data line 0L··· to sensor
6 x H05V2-U1.5
1 Presence detector 2 Radio receiver aerial 3 Light sensor
Further 5 luminaires
1
2
3 Dimmable HF gear (ED)
Function description – Two adjustable light levels – Manual dimming – – – –
5 Further luminaires
Two adjustable light levels Manual dimming Prepared for radio remote control Presence-dependent switching
– AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode – Daylight-dependent light control in AUTOMATIC mode – Dimming in MANUAL mode – Prepared for radio remote control – Presence-dependent switching
Controller
Sensor
Dimmable HF gear (ED)
Controller
Sensor
Ordering example: 6 suspended luminaires with LG 21/RPL+OLM – sensor integrated in master luminaire
Ordering example: 6 surface-mounted luminaires with LG 21/RPL – sensor remote from the luminaire
1. Luminaires ..........................5 x 5991N RPX/35 ED 2. Master luminaire with controller and integrated sensor..........1 x 5991N RPX/35 ED + LG 21/RPL+OLM 3. Wire suspensions ...........................11 x 05000 SN 4. Wire suspension with feeding tube ¶ 13 mm ..................1 x 05000 S-LG 5. Feeding tubes ¶ 10 mm ...................6 x 05000 ZR 6. Feeding accessories ....................7 x 05000 ESBN
1. Luminaires ...........................5 x 3331 W-TS/35 ED 2. Master luminaire with controller .............................1 x 3331 W-TS/35 ED + LG 21/RPL 3. Ceiling surface-mounting box with data line 5 m ............................................1 x 0SM 4. Luminaire couplings.........................4 x 03331 W-L
Cables according to the layout wiring diagram are to be provided by the contractor.
3331··· luminaires are through-wired by means of cables to be provided by the contractor (e.g. HO5VV-U3G1.5).
– AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode – Daylight-dependent light control in AUTOMATIC mode – 3 light level set values (AUTOMATIC) – 3 light level constant values (MANUAL) – Prepared for radio remote control – Presence-dependent switching Mounting references for special applications Sports hall luminaires Controllers are preferably mounted in distribution boxes, remote from the luminaires, sensors in combination with accessories 0SM or 0RM and protection device 0BS are mounted to the ceiling. The LG 31/RPL system is recommended for use in sports halls.
Accessories for LIGHTGATE lighting management Ceiling recess-mounting set 0RM For remote mounting of sensor unit, plastic, white, ¶ 120 mm, with 3 sheet steel springs for safe retention in recess opening (¶ 100 mm), plate thickness up to 25 mm, recess depth 44 mm; and data line 5 m to connect the sensor unit to the controller.
DELTA, E-LINE Controllers are preferably mounted in distribution boxes, remote from the luminaires, sensors in combination with accessories 0SM or 0RM and protection device 0BS are mounted to the ceiling.
Surface-mounting set 0SM As 0RM, but with additional ceiling surface-mounting box, plastic, white, with fixing holes and cable entries.
Radio remote control RC 200-02 For operation and control of LIGHTGATE systems (except for LG11/000). With addressing for interference-free parallel operation. Transmitter frequency: approx. 433 MHz, effective radius up to 20 m. Data line (not illustrated) 4-conductor line with irreversible RJ11 connectors. For the connection of controller and sensor unit. OL 10 – 10 m long, OL 20 – 20 m long.
Protection device 0BS For mechanical protection of sensor unit, e.g. in sports halls. Wire suspension (not illustrated) For suspended luminaires with LIGHTGATE controllers. Ceiling canopy, white plastic material. Feeding tube with increased crosssection, ¶ 13 mm, to receive the mains supply and further wiring. 05000 S-LG – 1000 mm, 05000 S-LG/2m – 2000 mm.
433
Lighting controller LR 803
Lighting controller LR 803 The lighting controller LR 803 helps to reduce the energy costs in rooms with windows or light domes considerably. Depending on the daylight, up to three luminaire groups can be switched on and off. The LR 803 system consists of a lighting controller and a light-measuring sensor.
Reference LR 803
Designation Electronic lighting controller including light-measuring sensor
The lighting controller is a high-quality compact device. It has three independent separate outputs, which enables three groups of luminaires to be switched on and off automatically depending on the daylight. The maximum rated current is 10 A per output, the corresponding number of tubular fluorescent lamps can be found in the table. The number of fluorescent lamps can be correspondingly increased by using controller outputs to operate contractors.
The delay on the switching commands for the luminaire circuits can be set to meet the particular requirements (approx. 15 s ...10 min.). It is set to 5 minutes at the factory, a time long enough to prevent short-duration changes in the daylight level from initiating unnecessary switching operations.
434
Light-measuring sensor The light-measuring sensor comprises a light sensor with terminal block and a box with grommet. It is mounted so that only daylight – insofar as it effects the lighting levels in the room – reaches the sensor and measures daylight illuminances between 100 and 10 000 lx. The wiring between the sensor and the controller is by commercialquality cable. The high level of interference suppression of the device makes it possible to use cable lengths up to 100 m between controller and sensor.
Application example Three luminaire groups A, B and C are installed in a room (see adjacent sketch). The controller is switched out in switch position “manual”, and the groups of luminaires can be switched on and off in the usual way by the switches S1, S2, S3 in the room. After closing switches S1, S2 and S3, and switching the controller to “automatic operation”, the luminaire groups are switched on and off automatically, according to the daylight. Luminaire group
Daylight-exposed surface
Lighting controller The control points for the luminaire groups A, B and C can be adjusted on potentiometers. To facilitate setting the control points, a LED is assigned to each of the three potentiometers which shows the switching state that the device has initiated, ignoring the time delay.
A B C
Technical information
d label All luminaires documented in this catalogue are marked with the d label which guarantees that during abnormal operation (constant preheating of the lamp electrodes) a temperature of 130°C at the fixing area or in case of defect ballasts (shorted coil) a temperature of 180°C at the fixing area is not exceeded. The TRILUX luminaires featured in this catalogue are suitable for mounting on constructional materials which retain their shape and remain stable at temperatures up to 180°C (normal and very low inflammability according to DIN 4102-1). Please contact your local TRILUX support centre if TRILUX luminaires should be sheathed with heat-insulating materials. Operating conditions All TRILUX interior luminaires are supplied ready for connection for a mains voltage of 230 V + 6 % /-10 % (for lowloss ballasts) or 230 V ± 10 % (for electronic control gear) with a nominal frequency of 50 Hz. They are intended – if not indicated differently – for ceiling mounting (in case of surface-mounted luminaires with total installation to even fixing surfaces). The luminaires are – if not indicated differently – planned for the exclusive use in interiors with rated ambient temperatures of + 25°C. Appropriate mounting in accordance with the mounting instructions is required in order to observe the assured characteristics.
Special operating conditions In case of deviating operating conditions, please contact your local TRILUX support centre. Especially in the case of other voltage networks or instability in supply, we can offer a variety of solutions.
6 label All luminaires documented in this catalogue in inductive or parallel-compensated versions as well as luminaires equipped with electronic control gear are marked with the VDE or the ENEC-VDE label.
This also applies in case of less favourable operating conditions such as special chemical or physical influences, e.g. humidity, salt mist, alkaline solutions, acids, softeners, gases, maritime or tropical climates, UV radiation, constant or short vibrations, cleaning methods, etc.
Ball impact resistance of sports hall luminaires is tested and these luminaires are correspondingly marked with the e symbol. TRILUX luminaires are tested by the VDE test board as neutral institute according to EN 60598 (VDE 0711) and carry the VDE or ENEC label. In addition, the production is supervised by VDE inspectors who take samples at random for further examination.
4 label All luminaires documented in this catalogue are tested according to EN 55015 and carry the EMV label for radio interference suppression from the VDE test board. Multi-lamp luminaires equipped with inductive ballasts are subject to radio interference suppression for single-phase connection. When dividing the lamp circuits for series switching, an additional radio interference suppression capacitor must be installed on site for each further circuit. Radio interference suppression capacitors are to be connected between conductor and neutral conductor.
o label dd label The design of D or FF marked luminaires is such that the temperature limits must not be exceeded on either the horizontal or vertical surfaces of the luminaire. In addition, they prevent the lamps against mechanical damage and are always equipped with electronic control gear due to the higher thermal safety requirements. D or FF labelled TRILUX luminaires are predestined for use in areas exposed to fire hazards caused by dust and fibrous substance.
435
Multi-lamp electronic control gear Added value in T5 systems
First ignition of the luminaire Start of identification routine
1st identification step Lamp ignition: recognition of the electrode impedance
2nd identification step Lamp operation: recognition of the lamp voltage
3rd identification step Definition of the lamp type and corresponding operating parameter by comparison with stored data
Multi-Lamp technology Electronic control gear units in Multi-Lamp technology represent a new era in the further development of electronic control gear for fluorescent lamps. Independent recognition, optimal start and standard-conform operation of different lamps are the characteristics of the system-immanent intelligence of these devices. During the start phase of the fluorescent lamps, the microprocessor-controlled electronic control gear system takes various measurements of the lamp operating parameters and compares these with the internationally standardised lamp data stored within the micro controller. This way, preheating currents, electrode voltage and electrode impedance as well as operating current and lamp voltage are measured. Once the identification process is over, the operating data of the electronic control gear are adapted to the type and the wattage class of the used fluorescent lamps and they remain stored (see also flow chart opposite). Only a quick test measurement is conducted during the next start phases. The system recognises the use of a lamp with differing performance data which leads to a renewed lamp identification process.
Standard high technology Luminaires for T5 fluorescent lamps with a reduced diameter of only 16 mm stand for particular user advantages: Highly-efficient or lumen-rich T5 lamps can be exchanged thanks to the use of electronic control gear in MultiLamp technology.
5261···
504···/505···
The innovative louvre and diffuser luminaires of the series 5261···, 504···/505··· and 3331 are equipped as standard with Multi-Lamp electronic control gear. These series essentially consist of only two luminaire bodies in module 1200 mm and 1500 mm. Multi-Lamp technology allows the operation of T5 fluorescent lamps in wattages of 28W/54W or 35W/49W/80W.
Tangible advantages – Electronic control gear units allow operation of T5 lamps in different wattages – Illuminances are variable in case of changing light requirements without exchanging the lamps – Simplified logistics – Warm start of all lamps
View more...
Comments
